JP2021115422A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing interest in a game.SOLUTION: When a big win type "time-shortening B" is won in a "normal game state A" and a big win or a small win is won in a second special pattern in a "time-shortening state A" to be imparted after completion of the big win, a game state after the big win can be shifted to a "time-shortening state B". When a big win or a small win is won in the second special pattern again in the "time-shortening state B", a game state after the big win can be shifted to the "time-shortening state B" again.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 16

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308

For such gaming machines, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's willingness to play, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and the ball entering means. When a game ball enters, an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the predetermined information stored in the storage means are determined. The dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means by using the determination means to be performed and the determination result by the determination means. When a predetermined derivation result is derived in the above, the storage means is provided with an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player, and the storage means can store a predetermined number of the predetermined information. In the configured gaming machine, the gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state which is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the second gaming state. By using the storage number determination means for determining the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means and the determination result of the storage number determination means, the game ball is launched by the launching means and the ball entry means. It is equipped with a launch promotion means that encourages the player to enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game ball entering the ball entering means. In this case, an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a determination means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means. By using the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means and the predetermined derivation result in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means can be obtained. When derived, the storage means is provided with an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player, and the storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the predetermined information. A gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state from the first gaming state to a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the storage means in the second gaming state. By using the storage number determination means for determining the number of stored predetermined information and the determination result of the storage number determination means, the game ball is launched by the launching means to enter the ball entry means. It is equipped with a launch promotion means that encourages the player. This has the effect of improving the enjoyment of the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine, and is mainly a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a main control device. It is a figure which showed typically the structure of each counter, each holding ball storage area, and holding ball execution area. (A) is a diagram showing a special figure 1 jackpot random number table, and (b) is a diagram showing a special figure 2 jackpot random number table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 jackpot type table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 jackpot type table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 1 small hit type table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a special figure 2 small hit type table. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the winning opening opening pattern table. It is a figure which showed the example of the jackpot open table schematically. It is a figure which showed the example of the small hit open table schematically. The drive pattern of the small winning opening solenoid and the specific area solenoid, the detection mode of the small winning opening switch and the specific area switch, and the setting mode of the big hit flag when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol are shown. It is a timing chart. The drive pattern of the small winning opening solenoid and the specific area solenoid, the detection mode of the small winning opening switch and the specific area switch, and the setting mode of the big hit flag when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol are shown. It is a timing chart. It is a figure which showed the example of the time saving end condition table schematically. It is a figure which showed the firing mode in each game state, and the transition destination of the game state based on the winning jackpot type and the like. Transition opportunity in each game state, jackpot probability of special symbol, hit probability of normal symbol, recommended launch mode, main winning destination, fluctuation time of dynamic display of 1st special symbol, dynamic display of 2nd special symbol It is a figure which showed the fluctuation time of, the notification mode, and the like. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a reserved number table for special figure 1, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a reserved number table for special figure 2. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the A table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the B table of the stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the C table of the stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the D table of the stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an E table of a stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an F table of a stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a G table of a stop pattern table, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of an H table of a stop pattern table. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for special figure 1 loss / small hit, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for special figure 1 big hit. Is. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for special figure 2 loss, and (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for special figure 2 big hit / small hit. Is. (A) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table per normal figure, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal figure fluctuation table, and (c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a normal electric power. It is a figure which showed the example of the role opening table schematically. It is a block diagram which mainly shows the electrical structure of an audio lamp control device. It is a figure which shows typically the structure of the 1st hold information storage area and 1st execution information storage area, and 2nd hold information storage area and 2nd execution information storage area. It is a flowchart which shows the start-up process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the gate passing processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation stop processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the time saving counting process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the hit process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit opening / closing control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the specific area apparatus open / close control process executed by MPU in the main control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a small winning opening which is executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the small hit end processing executed by the MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot open / close control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during opening of a big winning opening which is executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary figure variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the ordinary electric service control process which is executed by MPU in a main control device. It is a flowchart which shows the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 1 is a flowchart showing a command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a special figure 2 command process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hold confirmation process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the 7-series effect command setting process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. FIG. 2 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command setting process for display, which is executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a figure which schematically shows the transition between the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol in "timer effect" in the 3rd symbol display device of "time shortening state A", and the time-dependent change of the "timer effect". (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is "1" immediately after the "timer effect" is started, and (b) is a state of (a). It is the figure which showed the state which only the time has passed from, and (c) showed the state which the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol became "2" while time has passed from the state of (a). It is a figure, (d) is a figure which showed the state which only time has passed from the state of (c). It is a figure which schematically shows the transition between the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol in "timer effect" in the 3rd symbol display device of "time shortening state A", and the time-dependent change of the "timer effect". (A) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has become "3" while time has passed from the state of FIG. 59 (c), and FIG. It is a figure which showed the state which only time has passed from the state of (a), and (c) shows the state which the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol became "4" while time has passed from the state of (a). It is a figure shown. It is a figure which showed the transition of "triple acquisition challenge production" in the 3rd symbol display device of "time shortening state A", and (a) is the state when a small hit was won in "triple acquisition challenge production". (B) is a diagram showing the state when the big hit and the small hit are not won in the "triple acquisition challenge production", and (c) is a diagram showing the state when the big hit and the small hit are not won, and (c) is from the state of (a). It is a figure which showed the success production in the "triple acquisition challenge production", and (d) is a big hit or a small hit by the dynamic display of all the second special symbols reserved from the "triple acquisition challenge production". It is a figure which showed the success production of "7 consecutive acquisition production" based on the winning. It is the figure which showed the transition of the "special button effect" in the 3rd symbol display device schematically, (a) is the figure which showed the "normal state" of "special button effect", (b) is the figure which showed. It is a figure which showed the state which changed from the "normal state" of (a) to "the first change state", and (c) changed from "the first change state" of (b) to "the second change state". It is a figure which showed the state which was done. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the variation effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which showed the time saving A variation effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device in 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which showed typically an example of the time saving end condition table in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transition of "V emission judgment effect" at the time of the final consecutive villa of "triple confirmation mode" in the 3rd symbol display device of 3rd Embodiment, and (a) is a figure which showed "triple confirmation". It is a figure which showed the state which "reach display" appeared in the dynamic display of the 2nd special symbol in the state which the hold look-ahead effect was not suggested at the time of the last consecutive villa of "mode", and (b) is (a). ) Is a state in which a small hit is won and a right-handed game is suggested as to whether or not to win a ball in a specific area. It is a figure which showed the state which suggests the right-handed game whether or not a ball is won in a specific area by winning a small hit in the state of being in, and (d) is right from the state of (b). It is a figure which showed that although the ball was not won a prize in a specific area without performing a hitting game, the "time reduction state" continued without satisfying the time reduction end condition based on the number of small hits. It is a figure which schematically shows the transition of "V emission judgment effect" at the time of the final consecutive villa of "triple confirmation mode" in the 3rd symbol display device of 3rd Embodiment, and is right from the state of FIG. 67 (b). It is a figure which showed that the time saving end condition based on the number of small hits was satisfied, and the "time shortening state" was finished by not letting a ball win a prize in a specific area without performing a hitting game. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the time saving end condition table stored in the ROM of the 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows typically the transition of "V emission judgment effect" at the time of the last consecutive villa (when the time saving limit is reached) of "triple confirmation mode" in the 3rd symbol display device of 5th Embodiment, (a). "Reach display" appears in the dynamic display of the 2nd special symbol that is being executed in the situation where the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is accumulated at the time of the final consecutive villa in the "triple confirmation mode". It is a figure which showed the state, and (b) shows the state which the "launch standby instruction effect" is executed so that a small hit is won from the state of (a), and a ball is not won in a specific area. FIG. 3C is a dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed in a situation where four reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated at the time of the final consecutive villa in the “triple confirmation mode”. It is a figure showing the state in which the "reach display" appears in the above, and (d) is a "right-handed instruction effect" so as to win a small hit from the state of (c) and win a ball in a specific area. It is a figure which showed the state which is being executed. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, a first embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to **. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 3) having a large number of nails and winning openings (ball entry openings) 63, 64, 65, 71, 73, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached. The details of the game board 13 will be described later in FIG.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player when, for example, the stage of the effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, is changed. Further, the frame button 22 allows the player to select the effect content in the notice display executed in the variation display of the third symbol (hereinafter, the variation display of the third symbol may be referred to as "variation effect"). It is also used as an operation button for. Further, it is also used as an operation button for starting the progress of the effect in the press suggestion effect (for example, "** effect") executed in the third symbol display device 81.

Further, the variable effect is an effect displayed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, and as described later, a ball fired in the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning opening (see FIG. 3). For example, it is executed when a prize is won in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 (see FIG. 3) described later, and the symbol (third symbol described later) is changed for a predetermined time and then stopped and displayed. It is a production that presents the result of the lottery (either big hit, small hit, or loss) to the player by the combination of the symbols.

Further, the stage is a production mode in which various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3), which will be described later, are unified. In the pachinko machine 10, the “city stage” and “sky” are used. There are three stages, "Stage" and "Island Stage". The above-mentioned variable effects and various effects such as "reach display" executed during the variable effects are designed to be performed according to the theme given to each stage.

Further, the "reach display" is a step of the "big hit display" indicating that a big hit occurs in the variation effect corresponding to the first special symbol executed in the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later. The display in front or the display one step before the "big hit / small hit display" indicating that a big hit or a small hit occurs in the fluctuation corresponding to the second special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81. Say that. Specifically, the third symbol of the left symbol row Z1 and the right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, stops at the same symbol, and the middle symbol row Z2 (see FIG. 4) does not stop yet and continues to fluctuate. It refers to the state before the success mode or the failure mode appears in the "** production" described later.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the "reach display" is roughly divided into one unit element constituting the "normal reach" effect (hereinafter, one unit element constituting the effect is referred to as a "variable element"). It is executed by developing from the variable element of the "normal reach", and is executed by developing from the variable element of "super reach" which has a higher expectation of big hit than the variable element of the "normal reach" and the variable element of the same "normal reach". A variable element of "special reach", which has a higher expectation of a big hit than a variable element of "super reach", and a variable element of "special variation" in which a predetermined fixed effect is set are prepared.

The change of the stage is performed during the period when the fluctuation effect is not performed (that is, during the demonstration display), or during the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" in which the third symbol is changed at high speed invisible to the player in the fluctuation effect. This is performed when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player. Then, each time the frame button 22 is operated, the change is repeated in the order of "city stage"-> "sky stage"-> "island stage"-> "city stage"->. Immediately after the power is turned on, the "city stage" is set as the initial stage.

Further, when the variable element of "normal reach" is started in the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 3) described later, the variable element of "normal reach" is changed to the variable element of "super reach". When developing into a variable element of "special reach", a selection screen of a variable element of "super reach" or a variable element of "special reach" is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 among the variable elements of "normal reach". It may be configured as follows.

Specifically, on the selection screen, a plurality of candidates that can be selected as the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" are displayed, and while the selection screen is displayed, the frame button 22 is displayed. It is configured so that the selected candidate is changed when the player presses it. Then, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is determined based on the production candidate selected when developing into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". As for the variable element of "super reach", the variable element of "special reach" is executed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the determination.

In the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed, but instead of the frame button 22, the player directs the pachinko machine 10 in a predetermined direction (for example, with respect to the pachinko machine 10). It may be configured by an operation lever that can be tilted forward, backward, right and left). Then, even if the production stage is selected and changed based on the direction in which the operation lever is tilted, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach" is determined, or the progress of the production is started. good.

Further, although the frame button 22 is configured to be arranged on the front side side view of the upper plate 17, the arrangement position of the frame button 22 can be any arrangement position as long as it can be pressed by the player. It may be arranged, for example, on the upper surface side of the upper plate 17, or may be arranged in the vicinity (upper surface or side surface) of the lower plate 50 described later.

Further, in the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured to be protruding from the housing of the front frame 14, and the frame button 22 is pressed, although it is configured to have a function of only pressing by the player. A function of projecting at the timing of causing may be provided. Further, at the timing when the frame button 22 is pressed, the entire frame button 22 may be lit, or a warning function may be added to change the lighting color according to the jackpot expectation degree or the like.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined "reach display", and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. On the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c, lighting portions 29 to 33 having a built-in light emitting means such as a light emitting diode (Light Emitting Diode; hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") are provided. ..

In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and at the time of jackpot or "reach display", the built-in LEDs are lit or blinked to cause the illumination units 29 to 33. Lights up or flashes to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the "reach display" just before the jackpot is in progress. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 in the front view, a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

A small window 35 is formed on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized. ) Is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, acrylonitrile butadiene styrene (Acrylonitrile Butadiene Style) in which the area around the illuminated portions 29 to 33 is chrome-plated in order to bring out more glitter, hereinafter abbreviated as “ABS”. .) A resin plating member 36 is attached.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit, not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5). The touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the operation handle 51, the push-button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 by the change of the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) to detect.

When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a jump amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

Next, as shown in FIG. 2, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board has a micro-processing unit (Micro-Processing Unit, hereinafter abbreviated as "MPU") as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, and various lottery. A random number generator used for the above, a clock pulse generation circuit used for time counting and synchronization, etc. are installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 503. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 503 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, a specific configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. First, as shown in FIG. 3, in the game board 13, a large number of nails, windmills, rails 61, 62, and balls for ball guidance are awarded to a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view. A general winning opening 63 that can obtain a predetermined prize ball, a variable winning device 65 that is opened when a big hit of the third symbol occurs, and a first special that is one of the third symbols (so-called special symbols). The first starting port 64, which triggers the lottery of symbols, the second starting port 71, which triggers the lottery of the second special symbol, which is one of the third symbols, and the through, which triggers the lottery of the second symbol (so-called normal symbol). The gate 67 is opened when a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the ordinary electric service 72, the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which allows the ball to enter the second starting port 71 by being opened. The small winning opening unit 73, the third symbol display device 81, the variable display device unit 80 having the second symbol display device 83, etc. are assembled and configured, and the peripheral edge portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12.

The general winning opening 63, the first starting opening 64, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting opening 71, the ordinary electric service 72, the small winning opening unit 73, and the variable display device unit 80 are formed by router processing to form a base plate 60. It is arranged in the through hole formed in the above, and is fixed by a wood screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a winning opening or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 3) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 3) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center (hereinafter, the act of firing a ball with the force of hitting the return rubber 69 and passing the ball through the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as a "right-handed game". On the other hand, the act of passing the fired ball through the left side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80 is referred to as a "left-handed game").

In the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the ball can enter the first starting port 64 and the general winning opening 63 arranged in the left side area or the central area of the game area, while being arranged in the right side area of the game area. The variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting port 71, and the small winning opening unit 73 are configured so that the ball is difficult to enter. Further, in a right-handed game, a ball can enter the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, the second starting port 71, and the small winning opening unit 73 arranged in the right area of the game area, while the left side of the game area. It is configured so that it is difficult for a ball to enter the first starting opening 64 and the general winning opening 63 arranged in the region or the central region.

Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In the upper right side of the front view (upper right side of FIG. 3) of the game area, a special symbol provided with a state LED group 37a composed of a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means, a special LED group 37b, and a right-handed notification lamp 37c. A display device 37 is arranged. The special symbol display device 37 displays the variation of the first special symbol and the second special symbol according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later (hereinafter, the variation display of both special symbols is referred to as “variation display of both special symbols”. "Dynamic display") is displayed, and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed.

The state LED group 37a determines the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation display has not been executed, among the balls that have won (winned) in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, which will be described later. It is indicated by the lighting state. Further, the number of jackpot rounds (hereinafter, the round may be simply referred to as "R") and the error display are also indicated by the lighting state of the state LED group 37a corresponding to the state. The state LED group 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors suggests various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. be able to.

The "round" in the jackpot means from the opening to the closing of the jackpot opening / closing plate 65a that opens and closes the variable winning device 65 described later in order to divide the number of winning balls in the jackpot. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, "30 seconds" has passed since the opening opening / closing plate 65a of the large winning opening was started, or 10 balls are won while the opening / closing plate 65a of the large winning opening is open. It is configured to perform one "round".

The special LED group 37b is composed of a total of 12 LEDs, that is, an upper LED group 37b1 composed of 6 LEDs and a lower LED group 37b2 also composed of 6 LEDs. In the upper LED group 37b1, a first special symbol indicating a determination result of the first lottery game executed based on the ball entering the first starting port 64 is dynamically displayed. Further, in the lower LED group 37b2, a second special symbol indicating a determination result of the second lottery game executed based on the ball entering the second starting port 71 is dynamically displayed.

Specifically, the upper LED group 37b1 is dynamically operated until a variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning a prize in the first starting port 64 provided in the center of the board surface of the game board 13 elapses. After the display (in the first embodiment, the lower LEDs are lit one by one from the uppermost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), a symbol showing the determination result (first embodiment). Then, the stop display is performed with any of a total of 64 types of stop symbols) depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the six LEDs.

Further, the lower LED group 37b2 is dynamically displayed until a variation time (dynamic display time) determined based on winning a prize in the second starting port 71 provided on the right side side of the game board 13 elapses (dynamic display time). In the first embodiment, the lower LEDs are lit one by one in order from the uppermost LED of the lower LED group 37b2, and the lighting pattern is repeatedly displayed), and then a symbol showing the determination result (in the first embodiment, the first embodiment). Depending on the combination of each lighting pattern of the six LEDs, the stop display is performed with one of a total of 64 types of stop symbols).

In any of the LED groups 37b1 and 37b2, when the judgment result is lost, only the leftmost LED is lit and displayed, and when the judgment result is a big hit, it corresponds to the type (type) of the big hit. When each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern and the determination result is a small hit, each LED group is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type of the small hit. The details of the stop pattern of each LED group will be described later.

In the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball enters the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is determined to be a big hit (big hit lottery), and if each hit or fail judgment is determined to be a big hit, The jackpot type is also determined according to the winning openings 64 and 71, and the variable winning device 65 is opened and closed according to the jackpot type. Further, when a small hit is determined in the hit / fail determination in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the small winning opening unit 73 and the specific area solenoid 73e described later are opened and closed. Then, when a sphere is detected by the specific area switch 73f described later with the opening of the specific area solenoid 73e provided in the small winning opening unit 73, the first special symbol or the second special symbol is dynamically displayed. The variable winning device 65 is opened and closed according to each small hit type in the above.

As the jackpot type determined in the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 opens three times based on the winning of the first starting port 64, "3 round time saving first jackpot (hereinafter referred to as" time saving A "). (In some cases) ", the variable winning device 65 opens three times," the third round second time saving jackpot (hereinafter, may be referred to as "time saving B") ", and the variable winning device 65 also opens three times. "Three-round time-saving third big hit (hereinafter, may be referred to as" time-saving C ")" is prepared (see FIG. 8 (a)). Further, based on the winning of the second starting port 71, the variable winning device 65 opens three times, "3 round time saving 4th big hit (hereinafter, may be referred to as" time saving D ")", and the variable winning device 65 "9 round time reduction 5th jackpot (hereinafter, may be referred to as" time reduction E ")" that opens 9 times, "3 round time reduction 6th jackpot" that the variable winning device 65 opens 3 times (hereinafter, "time reduction F") (Sometimes referred to as) ”and“ 9 round time saving 7th jackpot (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “time saving G”) ”that the variable winning device 65 opens 9 times are prepared (see FIG. 8 (b)). ).

Further, as the small hit type determined in the first embodiment, the small winning opening unit 73 opens once based on the winning of the first starting port 64, "1 round time reduction no small hit (hereinafter," small ". (Sometimes referred to as "win A") ", the small winning opening unit 73 opens once, and the variable winning device 65 opens three times. ) ”, And the small winning opening unit 73 opens once and the variable winning device 65 opens three times. (See FIG. 9 (a)). In addition, based on the winning of the second starting port 71, the small winning opening unit 73 opens once, "one round time reduction no small hit (hereinafter, may be referred to as" small hit B ")", small winning opening. The unit 73 opens once and the variable winning device 65 opens three times, "4th round 3rd time saving big hit (hereinafter, may be referred to as" time saving J ")", the small winning opening unit 73 once and The variable winning device 65 opens 9 times, "10 round 1st time saving big hit (hereinafter, may be referred to as" time saving K ")", the small winning opening unit 73 opens once, and the variable winning device 65 opens 3 times. "4th round 3rd time-saving jackpot (hereinafter, may be referred to as" time-saving L ")", "10th round 2nd time-saving jackpot" in which the small winning opening unit 73 opens once and the variable winning device 65 opens 9 times. (Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "time saving M") "(see FIG. 9B).

Here, the "normal game state" refers to a "time shortened state", a game state that is not a big hit state or a small hit state, and a big hit probability of each special symbol (50 / 1000 to 60 / in the first embodiment). 10000) and small hit probability (in the first embodiment, the first special symbol is 2/10000 and the second special symbol is 2715/10000) are constant probabilities, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is in a normal state (10000). That is, it is a low-probability state. In the first embodiment, it means a state in which 1/100) and the opening of the ordinary electric service 72 is short. That is, in the "normal game state", the jackpot probability and the small hit probability are the same as in the "time shortened state", while the hit probability of the normal symbol is lower than in the "time shortened state", and the normal electric service 72 The opening time is also short.

Details will be described later, but in the case of the "normal game state", a game state in which the ball is likely to win the second starting port 71 when a so-called right-handed game is played (hereinafter, a state in which the ball is easily won in the second starting port 71). This is not the "winning assistance state"), but the most unfavorable game state for the player. In the "normal game state", when the launch of the ball is detected by the right-handed game (for example, the detection of the passage of the ball through the through gate 67), it means that the unencourageed game is being executed. In order to suggest to the person and the person concerned with the hall, a predetermined warning sound (for example, a message voice of "Please return to the left-handed game") may be output as a voice, or a predetermined warning display (for example, a predetermined warning display on the third symbol display device 81) ( For example, it is configured to display a telop such as "Please return to the left-handed game". With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress the continuous execution of the non-encouragement right-handed game in the "normal game state" and to realize the game playability according to the game specifications.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the "normal game state", the right-handed game is prohibited, the left-handed game is encouraged, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be mainly executed. "State A" and "normal game state B" in which the right-handed game is not prohibited and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol after the end of the "time reduction state" remains. It is configured to be possible (see FIG. 16).

The "normal game state A" is set when the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol does not remain at the end of the "time shortened state" after the initialization by clearing the RAM, or after the end of the "normal game state B". It is a game state to be shifted, and as described above, the right-handed game is prohibited, and the left-handed game can be used to win a ball into the first starting port 64 (see FIG. 16). ..

"Normal game state B" (hereinafter, "normal game state A" and "normal game state B" may be collectively referred to as "normal game state") has an end condition of "time reduction state". It is a gaming state in which the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol remains after the establishment, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol held in the "time reduction state" is the first special. It is executed with priority over the dynamic display of the symbol (so-called special figure 2 priority variation), and continues until the lottery result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol appears for all the reserved balls. Further, in this "normal game state B", as described above, the right-handed game is not prohibited, and even when the ball is detected by the through gate 67 by the right-handed game, the above-mentioned alarm sound and alarm It is configured so that the display is not executed. Then, in this "normal game state B", if a big hit or a small hit is not won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, it is configured to shift to the "normal game state A".

Next, in the "time shortened state", the jackpot probability of each special symbol is a constant probability as in the "normal game state", but the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased (99/100 in the first embodiment). At the same time, the so-called "time saving function" in which the time for variable display of the normal symbol (hereinafter, the variable display of the normal symbol is referred to as "variable display") is shortened ("4 seconds" → "0.1 seconds" in the first embodiment). Is given, and the open state of the ordinary electric service 72 based on the winning of the ordinary symbol is long (in the first embodiment, "0.1 seconds" × 1 time → “3 seconds” × “3 times”). To say. In this "time shortened state", the ordinary electric service 72 provided on the right side of the front view of the second starting port 71 is likely to be opened, and as a result, the winning assist function is activated and the ball is sent to the second starting port 71. It will be easy to enter the ball. Even if the launch of the ball in the right-handed game is detected in this "time shortened state", the warning sound and the warning display as in the "normal game state" are not output.

That is, in the "time shortened state", the jackpot probability of the special symbol is equivalent to that of the "normal game state", but the hit by the normal symbol is more likely to be derived in a shorter time than in the "normal game state", and the normal electric service 72 Is a state in which the open state of is prolonged. Therefore, in the "time shortened state", the ball launched by the right-handed game can be easily won in the second starting port 71, so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be continuously executed. 2 It is possible to obtain a prize ball (for example, 1 piece / prize) based on a prize in the starting port 71 and play a game while suppressing a decrease in the number of balls held.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "time reduction state" is a plurality of states (in the first embodiment) in which the end conditions of the "time reduction state" (described later in the time reduction end condition table 202n of FIG. 15) are different. , "Time reduction state A" and "Time reduction state B") can be generated. Then, until any of the time saving end conditions is satisfied, the hit probability of the normal symbol becomes a high probability state. When the above-mentioned time reduction end condition is satisfied, the state is configured to shift from the "time reduction state" to the above-mentioned "normal game state".

The "time reduction state A" is a game state that occurs after the end of the big hit when the big hit type or the small hit type to which the "time saving function" is given is won, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is mainly 1. Until it is executed once, the "time saving function" is added. Then, on condition that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once, the state shifts to the "normal game state B". In addition, the "time reduction state A" is the first when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed seven times, and when the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed seven times in total. The end condition of "time reduction state A" is satisfied when one wins a small hit five times in the dynamic display of one special symbol or when one wins a small hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is judged that the game shifts to the "normal game state".

The "time reduction state B" (hereinafter, "time reduction state A" and "time reduction state B" may be collectively referred to as "time reduction state") is a state in which the "time reduction function" is added. It is a game state that occurs after the end of the big hit when the big hit or the small hit is won, and the "time saving function" is mainly given until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times. It becomes. Then, on condition that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times, the state shifts to the "normal game state B". In addition, the "time reduction state B" is the first when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times, and when the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed 100 times in total. The end condition of "time reduction state B" is satisfied when one wins a small hit five times in the dynamic display of one special symbol or when one wins a small hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is judged that the game shifts to the "normal game state".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the "time shortened state" after the jackpot based on winning the jackpot in the "normal gaming state", it returns to the "normal gaming state" (excluding the jackpot state). In order to prevent the "time reduction state" from being continuously granted without shifting, the number of times the "time reduction state" can be continuously granted is limited to a predetermined number of times (three times in the first embodiment). (Hereinafter, a function for preventing the "time reduction state" from being continuously given may be referred to as a "time reduction limit function").

Here, the details of the time saving limit function will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the initialization by clearing the RAM of the pachinko machine 10, the number of consecutive winnings of the jackpot type of the special symbol to which the "time saving function" is given is a predetermined number of times (3 in the first embodiment). Times. Hereinafter, each time the number of times reaches the "time reduction limit number of times"), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot at the time when the predetermined number of times is reached is always the gaming state in which the "time saving function" is not given (the time saving function). That is, it is configured to shift to the "normal gaming state") and prohibit the transition to the high probability state of the normal symbol.

That is, after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by clearing the RAM, a jackpot to which the "time saving function" is given (hereinafter, after the initialization by clearing the RAM, or after the time saving limit function is activated, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is low. After winning the jackpot that occurs after becoming a jackpot (except during the jackpot state), it never shifts to the "normal gaming state" (so-called "renso"). State ”. Hereinafter, the continuous winning of special symbols may be referred to as“ consecutive villas ”), and every time the consecutive winning of the jackpot type of special symbols to which the“ time saving function ”is given reaches three times. (Hereinafter, when the "time saving function" reaches the time saving limit number of times accompanying the jackpot of the special symbol, it may be referred to as "when the time saving limit is reached"), the special symbol of the third consecutive villa is won. Occasionally, only the jackpot type to which the "time saving function" is not given, that is, the jackpot type in which the "normal game state" occurs is selected.

On the other hand, when the number of consecutive wins of the jackpot type to which the "time saving function" is given has not reached the time saving limit number, that is, the number of jackpots to which the "time saving function" is given is up to once or twice (hereinafter, "" When the number of jackpots to which the "time saving function" is given is one or two times, it may be referred to as "before reaching the time saving limit"), when the jackpot of the special symbol is won, the "time saving function" is applied after the jackpot ends. It is configured to be granted.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the above-mentioned "time saving state B" is entered, the "time saving function" is provided mainly until the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times. Furthermore, if a big hit or a small hit is won while the "time saving function" is enabled, it is configured to shift to the "time saving state B" again. Therefore, if the time saving limit function is not provided, "Time reduction state B" may occur continuously.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is equipped with a time saving limit function, and every time a jackpot to which the "time saving function" is given occurs a predetermined number of times, the normal symbol can always be in a low probability state, and the normal symbol can be set to a low probability state. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of an excessive winning assistance state for the player due to the continuation of the high probability state of. As a result, the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 (the number of payout balls (the number of safe balls, the number of return balls) divided by the number of out balls, so-called. , Machine discount. Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "ball output rate".) It is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result far from the appearance appears, and the game value given to the player does not become too high. Can be configured as Further, in order to make the ball ejection rate of the pachinko machine 10 equal to the ball ejection rate of a normal pachinko machine that does not have the time saving limit function, the ball ejection rate is lowered due to the limitation of the number of consecutive occurrences of the "time saving function". It is possible to make up for the minutes by making it easier to generate big hits of special symbols, and to make up for the continuation rate of the high probability state of special symbols with high continuation, which is done with ordinary pachinko machines that do not have a time saving limit function. It is possible to realize a variety of playability that cannot be achieved.

As described above, the "renso" means that an advantageous state is generated again from a state that is clearly advantageous to the player, and in the first embodiment, the "time" in which the right-handed game is allowed. When the big hit is won again in the shortened state A, the time shortened state B, or the normal game state B, or when the ball passes through the specific area switch 73f due to winning the small hit. To say. Therefore, if a big hit or a small hit is won while the right-handed game can be continuously performed, it corresponds to "ream villa", and "time reduction state A", "time reduction state B" or "normal game". If one of the jackpots is won after the transition to the "normal game state A" after the end of the "state B", that is, during the left-handed game, it does not correspond to the so-called "renso".

In addition to the game specifications (for example, jackpot probability, jackpot type selection ratio, small hit probability, small hit type selection ratio, variable winning device 65 opening count, "probability fluctuation", the time reduction limit number is set to "3 times". It can be set arbitrarily according to the continuation rate of "state", the number of time reductions, etc.). For example, the time reduction limit number of times may be set to "10 times" according to the game specifications, or the time reduction limit number of times may be set to "1 time" according to the game specifications.

Next, the jackpot type will be described. The jackpot type of "time saving A" that can be selected in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds that can be selected before reaching the time saving limit is 3 rounds, from the 1st round to the 3rd round. The large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened. Further, in "time saving A", the small winning opening unit 73 is not opened, the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5) described later is not driven, and the ball cannot be detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5). Is. Therefore, after the jackpot of the "time saving A" is completed, the "time saving function" is not provided. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot of this "time saving A" can be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and after the jackpot of the "time saving A" is completed, "normally". It is configured to shift to the "game state A". In the first embodiment, even if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot type of "time saving A" cannot be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

Next, the jackpot type of "time saving B" is the jackpot of 3 rounds in which the maximum number of rounds that can be selected before reaching the time saving limit is 3 rounds, as in "time saving A", and the variable winning device from the 1st round to the 3rd round. The 65 grand prize opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened. Further, in "time saving B", the small winning opening unit 73 is not opened, the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5) described later is not driven, and the ball cannot be detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5). Is. On the other hand, after the jackpot of the "time saving B" is completed, unlike the "time saving A", the "time saving function" is provided. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot of this "time saving B" can be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the "time" after the jackpot of the "time saving B" ends. It is configured to shift to the "shortened state A". In the first embodiment, even if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot type of "time saving B" cannot be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

Next, the jackpot type of "time saving C" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds that can be selected instead of "time saving A" or "time saving B" when the time saving limit is reached is 3 rounds, and the 1st to 3rd rounds. The large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened up to. Further, in the "time saving C", the small winning opening unit 73 is not opened, the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5) described later is not driven, and the ball cannot be detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5). Is. Then, after the jackpot of the "time saving C" is completed, the time saving limit function is activated, so that the "time saving function" is not provided. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times is reached, the jackpot of this "time saving C" can be selected without exception in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and after the jackpot of the "time saving C" is completed, the "normal game" It is configured to transition to "state A". In the first embodiment, even if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot type of "time saving C" cannot be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. In addition, in the state before the time reduction limit function is activated, right-handed game is recommended because it is at least a "time reduction state", and "time reduction" that can be selected when a big hit is made in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. The jackpot type of "C" is configured so that it is practically difficult to appear.

Next, the jackpot type of "time saving D" is a jackpot of 3 rounds in which the maximum number of rounds that can be selected before reaching the time saving limit is 3 rounds, and variable winning is made from the 1st round to the 3rd round. The large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the device 65 is opened. Further, in the "time saving D", the small winning opening unit 73 is not opened, the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5) described later is not driven, and the ball cannot be detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5). Is. On the other hand, after the jackpot of the "time saving D" is completed, unlike the "time saving A", the "time saving function" is provided. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot of this "time saving D" can be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the "time" after the jackpot of the "time saving D" ends. It is configured to shift to the "shortened state A" or the "time shortened state B". In the first embodiment, even if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot type of "time saving D" cannot be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

Next, the jackpot type of "time saving E" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds that can be selected before reaching the time saving limit of 9 rounds, and the jackpot opening / closing plate of the variable winning device 65 from the 1st round to the 9th round. 65a is released. Further, in the "time saving E", the small winning opening unit 73 is not opened, the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5) described later is not driven, and the ball cannot be detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5). Is. On the other hand, after the jackpot of the "time saving E" is completed, unlike the "time saving A" and the like, the "time saving function" is provided. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot of this "time saving E" can be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the "time" after the jackpot of the "time saving E" ends. It is configured to shift to the "shortened state A" or the "time shortened state B". In the first embodiment, even if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot type of "time saving E" cannot be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

Next, the jackpot type of "time saving F" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds that can be selected instead of "time saving D" when the time saving limit is reached is 3 rounds, and the variable winning device 65 from the 1st round to the 3rd round. The large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened. Further, in the "time saving F", the small winning opening unit 73 is not opened, the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5) described later is not driven, and the ball cannot be detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5). Is. Then, after the jackpot of the "time saving F" is completed, the time saving limit function is activated, so that the "time saving function" is not provided. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times is reached, the jackpot of this "time saving F" can be selected instead of the "time saving D" in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the "time saving F" can be selected. After the jackpot ends, if the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol exists, go to "normal game state B", and if the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol does not exist, the "normal game state" It is configured to shift to "A". In the first embodiment, even if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot type of "time saving F" cannot be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

Next, the jackpot type of "time saving G" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds that can be selected instead of "time saving E" when the time saving limit is reached is 9 rounds, and the variable winning device 65 from the 1st round to the 9th round. The large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened. Further, in the "time saving G", the small winning opening unit 73 is not opened, the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5) described later is not driven, and the ball cannot be detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5). Is. Then, after the jackpot of the "time saving G" is completed, the time saving limit function is activated, so that the "time saving function" is not provided. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times is reached, the jackpot of this "time saving G" can be selected instead of the "time saving E" in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the "time saving G" can be selected. After the jackpot ends, if the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol exists, go to "normal game state B", and if the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol does not exist, the "normal game state" It is configured to shift to "A". In the first embodiment, even if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot type of "time saving G" cannot be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol.

Next, the small hit type will be described. The small hit type of "time saving H" that can be selected in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is that the maximum total number of rounds that can be selected before reaching the time saving limit is 4 rounds of small hits and big hits, and the first round. The small winning opening unit 73 is opened during the small hit game, and the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is driven as the small winning opening unit 73 of the first round is opened. A specific area is released. Then, when the ball is detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5) provided in the specific area, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is used as a big hit game from the second round to the fourth round. Be released. After the end of the small hit and the big hit of this "time saving H", the "time saving function" is configured to be given. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the small hit and the big hit of this "time saving H" can be selected in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the big hit of the "time saving H" ends. It is configured to later transition to a "time saving state". In the first embodiment, even if the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the jackpot type of "time saving H" cannot be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

On the other hand, even if the small hit of this "time saving H" is won, if the ball is not detected by the specific area switch 73f during the small hit game of the first round, the second to fourth rounds are variable. The winning device 65 is not opened and the big hit game is not given (hereinafter, this phenomenon may be referred to as "small hit A"). Then, after the end of the "small hit A", since the big hit game is not executed, the "time saving function" is not given and the game is configured to shift to the "normal game state".

Next, the small hit type of "time saving I" is a small hit and a big hit in which the maximum total number of rounds that can be selected instead of "time saving H" when the time saving limit is reached is 4 rounds, and the small hit game of the first round. The small winning opening unit 73 is opened inside, and the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is driven as the small winning opening unit 73 of the first round is opened, and the specific area is opened. Will be done. Then, when the ball is detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5) provided in the specific area, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is used as a big hit game from the second round to the fourth round. Be released. After the end of the small hit and the big hit of this "time saving I", the time saving limit function is activated, so that the "time saving function" is not given. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times is reached, the small hit and the big hit of this "time saving I" can be selected instead of the "time saving H" in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the "time saving H" can be selected. After the jackpot of "I" is completed, if the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol exists, go to "normal game state B", and if the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol does not exist, " It is configured to shift to the "normal game state A".

Next, the small hit type of "time saving J" is a small hit and a big hit in which the maximum total number of rounds that can be selected before reaching the time saving limit is 4 rounds, and the small winning opening unit during the small hit game of the first round. As the small winning opening unit 73 of the first round is opened, the specific region solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is driven to open the specific region. Then, when the ball is detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5) provided in the specific area, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is used as a big hit game from the second round to the fourth round. Be released. After the end of the small hit and the big hit of this "time saving J", the "time saving function" is configured to be given. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the small hit and the big hit of the "time saving J" can be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the big hit of the "time saving J" ends. It is configured to later transition to a "time saving state".

On the other hand, even if the small hit of this "time saving J" is won, if the ball is not detected by the specific area switch 73f during the small hit game of the first round, the second to fourth rounds are variable. The winning device 65 is not opened and the big hit game is not given (hereinafter, this phenomenon may be referred to as "small hit B"). Then, after the end of the "small hit B", since the big hit game is not executed, the "time saving function" is not given and the game is configured to shift to the "normal game state".

Next, the small hit type of "time saving K" is a small hit and a big hit in which the maximum total number of rounds that can be selected before reaching the time saving limit is 10 rounds, and the small winning opening unit during the small hit game of the first round. As the small winning opening unit 73 of the first round is opened, the specific region solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is driven to open the specific region. Then, when the ball is detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5) provided in the specific area, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is used as a big hit game from the second round to the tenth round. Be released. After the small hit and the big hit of the "time saving K" are completed, the "time saving function" is provided. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times has not been reached, the small hit and the big hit of the "time saving J" can be selected in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the big hit of the "time saving K" ends. It is configured to later transition to a "time saving state".

On the other hand, even if the small hit of this "time saving K" is won, if the ball is not detected by the specific area switch 73f during the small hit game of the first round, it is variable from the second round to the tenth round. The winning device 65 is not opened, and like the "time saving J", the big hit game is not given (that is, the "small hit B"). Then, after the end of the "small hit B", since the big hit game is not executed, the "time saving function" is not given and the game is configured to shift to the "normal game state".

Next, the small hit type of "time saving L" is a small hit and a big hit in which the maximum total number of rounds that can be selected instead of "time saving J" when the time saving limit is reached is 4 rounds, and the small hit game of the first round. The small winning opening unit 73 is opened inside, and the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is driven as the small winning opening unit 73 of the first round is opened, and the specific area is opened. Will be done. Then, when the ball is detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5) provided in the specific area, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is used as a big hit game from the second round to the fourth round. Be released. After the end of the small hit and the big hit of the "time saving L", the time saving limit function is activated, so that the "time saving function" is not given. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times is reached, the small hit and the big hit of this "time saving L" can be selected instead of the "time saving J" in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the "time saving J" can be selected. After the jackpot of "J" ends, if the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol exists, go to "normal game state B", and if the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol does not exist, " It is configured to shift to the "normal game state A".

On the other hand, even if the small hit of this "time saving L" is won, if the ball is not detected by the specific area switch 73f during the small hit game of the first round, the second to fourth rounds are variable. The winning device 65 is not opened and the big hit game is not given (that is, "small hit B"). Then, after the end of the "small hit B", since the big hit game is not executed, the "time saving function" is not given and the game is configured to shift to the "normal game state".

Next, the small hit type of "time saving M" is a small hit and a big hit in which the maximum total number of rounds that can be selected instead of "time saving K" when the time saving limit is reached is 10 rounds, and the small hit game of the first round. The small winning opening unit 73 is opened inside, and the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is driven as the small winning opening unit 73 of the first round is opened, and the specific area is opened. Will be done. Then, when the ball is detected by the specific area switch 73f (see FIG. 5) provided in the specific area, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65 is used as a big hit game from the second round to the tenth round. Be released. After the end of the small hit and the big hit of this "time saving M", the time saving limit function is activated, so that the "time saving function" is not given. In the first embodiment, when the time saving limit number of times is reached, the small hit and the big hit of this "time saving M" can be selected instead of the "time saving K" in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the "time saving K" can be selected. After the jackpot of "K" is completed, if the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol exists, go to "normal game state B", and if the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol does not exist, " It is configured to shift to the "normal game state A".

With this configuration, if the ball passes through a specific area based on the big hit or the small hit while the "time saving function" is given, the small hit can be substantially won. It is possible to shift to the "time reduction state B" in which the number of time reductions corresponding to the number of fluctuations is given.

Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state A", the jackpot type "time reduction B" is won, and in the "time reduction state A" given after the end of the jackpot, the jackpot or the small hit is made in the second special symbol. By winning, the game state after the big hit can be shifted to the "time reduction state B". Then, in the "time reduction state B", by winning the big hit or the small hit in the second special symbol again, the game state after the big hit can be shifted to the "time reduction state B" again.

Therefore, if the ball passes through a specific area based on the big hit or the small hit while the "time saving function" is granted, it is based on the small hit winning until the time saving limit function is activated. It is possible to generate a big hit. Therefore, by winning a big hit or a small hit while the "time saving function" is given, it is possible to create a state in which the game value is substantially guaranteed by continuous big hits. It is possible to create playability and improve the interest of the game.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to be able to constantly detect the passage of a sphere by the specific area switch 73f, but is configured to set the effective timing and the invalid timing of the specific area switch 73f. May be good. Specifically, for example, only during the small hit game or only during the period when the specific area solenoid 73e is turned on, from the time when the small winning opening solenoid 73b is turned on until the elapse of a predetermined period, the passage of the ball is detected by the specific area switch 73f. Is set to enable, and the ball passage detection by the specific area switch 73f is set to be invalid except for the timing illustrated above, to prevent the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state based on the passage of the ball to a specific area other than the timing illustrated above. It may be configured to do so. In this case, when the ball passes through the specific area switch 73f at a timing other than the above-exemplified timing, that is, when the specific area switch 73f is disabled, the ball passes through the specific area due to the occurrence of some abnormality (for example, cheating). Therefore, it may be configured to execute an abnormality detection process such as error notification.

Here, the display mode of the special LED group 37b of each big hit type and each small hit type will be described. As the stop display (lighting display) of the upper LED group 37b1 for the first special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, 12 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving A", and the jackpot type "time saving B". There are 12 types of display patterns corresponding to, 12 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving C", 13 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving H", and display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving I". There are 13 types of display patterns and one type of display pattern corresponding to the small hit type "small hit A", for a total of 64 types of display patterns. Then, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the upper LED group 37b1, the loss and the stop display of the small hit can be recognized, while the big hit types "time reduction A", "time reduction B", "time reduction C", It is difficult to identify whether the stop display is "time saving H" or "time saving I".

In addition, as the stop display (lighting display) of the lower LED group 37b2 for the second special symbol, there is one type of display pattern corresponding to the loss, nine types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time reduction D", and the jackpot type "time reduction". There are 9 types of display patterns corresponding to "E", 9 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Time saving F", 9 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "Time saving G", and corresponding to the jackpot type "Time saving J". There are 9 types of display patterns, 9 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving K", 8 types of display patterns corresponding to the jackpot type "time saving L", and display patterns corresponding to the small hit type "small hit B". A total of 64 types of display patterns, one type, are provided. Then, like the upper LED group 37b1, each display pattern does not have a specific regularity for each jackpot type, and a random display pattern is associated in advance. Therefore, when the player sees the display pattern of the lower LED group 37b2, the loss and the stop display of the small hit can be recognized, while the big hit types "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction F", It is difficult to identify which of "time saving G", "time saving J", "time saving K", and "time saving L" is the stop display.

With this configuration, even if each jackpot type is displayed in the stop display of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, if all the jackpot types corresponding to each stop display are not grasped, It becomes difficult for the player to recognize the winning jackpot type. For this reason, it is difficult to identify whether or not the specific area switch 73f, which will be described later, is the jackpot type, and the player is made to guess which game state the player is in. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

The right-handed notification lamp 37c of the special symbol display device 37 is a lamp for suggesting a game state in which the firing of a ball in a right-handed game is encouraged. The right-handed notification lamp 37c is not lit in the above-mentioned "normal game state A" or "normal game state B" in which the left-handed game is encouraged and the right-handed game is not encouraged, while the right-handed game is The above-mentioned "time reduction state A" or "time reduction state B", which is encouraged, or the lighting state during the big hit game or the small hit game. By confirming the right-handed game suggestion display on the right-handed notification lamp 37c and the third symbol display device 81, the player can recognize whether or not the right-handed game should be performed. In the "normal game state B", although the right-handed notification lamp 37c is not lit, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol acquired in the right-handed game is waited for to be consumed. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 or the like is configured so that the right-handed prohibition notification or the like is not performed.

A ball wins a prize in the game area of the game board 13 (the left side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81, the left side of the front view of the first starting port 64, the lower side of the front view of the through gate 67 described later, etc.). A plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 15 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls.

Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 "starts" the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the ball entering the second starting port 71 (hereinafter, the ball entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71). A liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply "display") that performs a variable effect of the third symbol while synchronizing with the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the special symbol display device 37, triggered by a "winning prize"). A third symbol display device 81 (hereinafter abbreviated as "device") and a second symbol display device 83 (hereinafter, referred to as "device") composed of an LED capable of executing variable display of a normal symbol triggered by the passage of a ball of a through gate 67. Regarding the second symbol display device 83, for convenience of explanation, it may be referred to as "ordinary symbol display device 83"). Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 17-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 5) described later, for example, left, middle, and right. Three symbol columns Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) are displayed.

Each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row Z1 to Z3 to display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It is designed to be displayed variably. The third symbol display device 81 of the first embodiment is commonly used in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol, and is used for controlling the main control device 110. While the accompanying game state is displayed on the special symbol display device 37, the decorative display corresponding to the display of the special symbol display device 37 is performed using the third symbol of the third symbol display device 81. It is a thing. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when both the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are suspended, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed ( So-called special figure 2 priority change) is possible. That is, during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol based on the start winning prize to the first starting port 64, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is suspended based on the starting winning prize to the first starting port 64. In this state, when the second starting port 71 is further started and won a prize, the dynamic display of the second special symbol that has been won later is executed before the dynamic display of the first special symbol that has been won earlier. It is configured to get.

Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 4B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which odd numbers ("1", "3", "5", "7", The main design with "9") has a large number added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main symbols with even numbers ("0", "2", "4", "6", "8") are the characters such as the kimono, the furoshiki, and the helmet that almost fill the front of the wooden box. An attached symbol that imitates is added, and an even number is added so that an even number is small in green on the lower right side of the attached symbol and is displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery result of any of the special symbols by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) described later is a big hit, a variable effect in which the same main symbols are aligned is produced. It is configured so that a jackpot will occur after the variable production is finished. For example, when the jackpot type of "time saving A" is won, a variable effect is mainly performed in which the main symbols with the numbers "4" are aligned. In addition, when the jackpot type of "time saving B" is won, a variable effect is mainly performed in which the main symbols with the numbers "7" are aligned.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when each jackpot type of "time saving B" or "time saving C" is won, all the main symbols can appear. Specifically, for example, even when "Time saving B" or "Time saving C" is won, a variable effect in which the same main symbols with the numbers "2" and "8" are aligned may be performed. be. By configuring in this way, for example, at the time when the variable effect is stopped, the content of the game value that can be given cannot be determined, and the promotion effect during the jackpot is performed to provide a wide variety of games. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into three in the vertical direction, and the lower two-thirds are reserved with the main display area Dm that fluctuates the third symbol. It is composed of a cockpit display area Db that displays the number of balls and the like, and the other upper 1/3 is a sub-display area Ds that displays a notice effect, a character, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right. The left symbol column Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the middle symbol column Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. The right symbol column Z3 is displayed in the display area Dm3.

In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending order (or descending order) of the numbers in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the variation effect is performed by scrolling from top to bottom with periodicity for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. In each symbol sequence Z1 to Z3, the arrangement of numbers may be different from each other. For example, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols may be arranged so as to appear in descending order, while in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols may appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each symbol row Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and when the variation effect corresponding to the special symbol is performed, the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 is placed on the effective line L1 in this order. 3 symbols are stopped and displayed. If the combination of jackpot symbols (combination of the same main symbol) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, the jackpot moving image is displayed as a jackpot of the special symbol.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying a character and a preview effect image, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of expectation that will be a big hit as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm.

In the cockpit display area Db, the variation display (variation effect) is not executed among the balls entered in the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 corresponding to the special symbol set for each game state. This area displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of reserved balls. It should be noted that the number of reserved balls may be displayed for each of the reserved special symbols.

In the small area Ds3 to the right of the sub-display area Ds, the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 that can be changed in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls, and the movement of the second special symbol The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 which can be changed in synchronization with the target display and the number of reserved balls is configured to be displayable.

The fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 is a number display 87a for special figure 1 that displays the number of pending dynamic display of the first special symbol numerically, and a dynamic display of the first special symbol (variation effect). It is composed of a variable region 87b for special figure 1 that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The hold number display 87a for the special figure 1 is configured so that the hold number of the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be displayed as a numerical symbol in the range of "0" to "4". Specifically, when the reserved number display 87a for special figure 1 displays "0", it indicates that the number of reserved numbers in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 0, and the reserved number for special figure 1 is reserved. When the number display 87a displays "1", it indicates that the number of holds for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 1, and the hold number display 87a for the special figure 1 displays "2". If, it indicates that the number of holds for the dynamic display of the first special symbol is two, and if the number display 87a for the special figure 1 displays "3", the number of the first special symbol is displayed. If it indicates that the number of holds for dynamic display is 3, and the number of holds for special figure 1 display 87a is "4", the number of holds for dynamic display of the first special symbol is 4. It shows that there is.

That is, the reserved number display 87a for the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol display area 87 for the special figure 1 is the content of the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the first special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. In the "normal game state" in which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm, it matches the content of the number of reserved balls in the reserved symbol display area Db1 described later. Is displayed.

The variable region 87b for the special figure 1 is a display area for displaying the execution and result of the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the display color of the square symbol is configured to be changeable. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the variable region 87b for special diagram 1 is white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → It changes at high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, it is configured to repeat the change again during the execution of the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the order of white → red → .... Then, when the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the variable region 87b for the special diagram 1 is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square symbol of the variable region 87b for special figure 1 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was lost, and the square symbol of the variable region 87b for special figure 1 is lost. When stopped in red, it means that the dynamic display of the first special symbol was a big hit, and when the square symbol in the variable region 87b for special figure 1 stopped in blue, the dynamic display of the first special symbol was dynamic. It is configured to indicate that the display was a small hit. That is, the square symbol of the variable region 87b for special figure 1 is displayed so as to correspond to the display content of the upper LED group 37b1 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is mainly displayed. In the "normal game state" displayed in the area Dm, it is configured to synchronize with the display content of the main display area Dm.

The fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 is a number display 88a for special figure 2 that displays the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol numerically, and a dynamic display of the second special symbol (variation effect). It is composed of a variable region 88b for special figure 2 that can be changed in synchronization with the execution of.

The hold number display 88a for the special figure 2 is configured so that the number of hold numbers for the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be displayed in the range of “0” to “4”. Specifically, when the hold number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "0", it indicates that the number of holds for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 0, and the hold for special figure 2 is held. When the number display 88a displays "1", it indicates that the number of holds for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 1, and the hold number display 88a for special figure 2 displays "2". If, it indicates that the number of pending numbers of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 2, and if the number of reserved numbers displayed 88a for special figure 2 displays "3", the number of the second special symbol is displayed. If it indicates that the number of holds for dynamic display is 3, and the number of holds for special figure 2 display 88a is "4", the number of holds for dynamic display of the second special symbol is 4. It shows that there is.

That is, the reserved number display 88a for the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol display area 88 for the special figure 2 is the content of the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol of the state LED group 37a of the special symbol display device 37 described above. The content of the number of reserved balls in the reserved symbol display area Db1 to be described later in the "small hit frequent occurrence probability fluctuation state" in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed in the main display area Dm. Is displayed to match.

The variable area 88b for special figure 2 is a display area for executing the dynamic display of the second special symbol and showing the result, and like the variable area 87b for special figure 1, the display color of the square symbol can be changed. Has been done. Specifically, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the display color of the square symbol in the variable region 88b for special diagram 2 is white → red → orange → yellow → green → light blue → blue → It changes at high speed in the order of purple, and after purple, it is configured to repeat the change again during the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol such as white → red → .... Then, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped, the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special diagram 2 is displayed in the display color corresponding to the lottery result of the dynamic display.

More specifically, when the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special figure 2 stops in white, it indicates that the dynamic display of the second special symbol was lost, and the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special figure 2 is lost. When stopped in red, it means that the dynamic display of the second special symbol was a big hit, and when the square symbol in the variable region 88b for special figure 2 stopped in blue, the dynamic display of the second special symbol was dynamic. It is configured to indicate that the display was a small hit. That is, the square symbol of the variable region 88b for special figure 2 is displayed so as to correspond to the display content of the lower LED group 37b2 of the special symbol display device 37 described above, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is mainly displayed. In the "time reduction state" displayed in the area Dm, it is configured to synchronize with the display content of the main display area Dm.

On the actual display screen of the third symbol display device 81, for example, in the "normal game state", a total of three main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm, as shown in FIG. 4 (b). .. In the sub-display area Ds, the moving image is displayed in the small area Ds1 on the left and the small area Ds3 on the right, suggesting to the player that the state is such that the transition to the jackpot is easier than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, sometimes performing a special action different from the predetermined action, or usually a black boy. The color of the hair and the color of the normally white headband will change, and another character will appear to give a notice.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, while the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) is performing the variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol. When the ball enters the first starting port 64, or the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37) performs a variation effect (dynamic display) of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol. If a ball enters the second starting port 71 while it is being played, the number of times the ball enters (the number of reserved balls) is held up to a maximum of four times. The number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, and the reserved number display 87a for the special figure 1 of the fourth symbol display area 87 for the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 of the fourth symbol display area 88 for the special figure 2 is used. It is also displayed in the hold number display 88a, and further, the variation effect of the special symbol corresponding to the game state is also shown in the first to fourth hold symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d of the hold symbol display area Db1 in the cockpit display area Db. Is done.

In the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, one reserved ball (one reserved ball) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the game state. Each symbol (“○” symbol (white circle symbol) in the normal display mode) is displayed, and according to the number of reserved symbols displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, depending on the game state. The number of reserved balls for the variable effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol that is set to be displayed (priority display) is displayed.

That is, in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, when one reserved symbol is displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a, the first special symbol is set to be displayed according to the gaming state. Alternatively, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one and two reserved symbols are displayed in the first and second reserved symbol display areas Db1a and Db1b, a total of two reserved symbols are displayed, the game state. Indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, which is set to be displayed according to the above, is two times, and one in each of the first to third reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1c, for a total of three. When the reserved symbol is displayed, it indicates that the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game state is three times, and the first to fourth reserved symbols are displayed. When a total of four reserved symbols are displayed in each of the areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the game state is four times. Show that. When the reserved symbols are not displayed in the first to fourth reserved symbol display areas Db1a to Db1d, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set to be displayed according to the gaming state is 0. Indicates that there is no variable effect that is held at times.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, only one of the first lottery game of the first special symbol and the second lottery game of the second special symbol can be executed, and the second special symbol can be executed. Although the lottery game is configured to be preferentially executed, the lottery game of a special symbol may be executed according to the order in which the prizes are won (so-called variation in the order of winning). The first lottery game of the first special symbol and the lottery game of the second special symbol may be configured to be executable at the same time. Further, the variation effect of the first special symbol and the variation effect of the second special symbol may be configured to be simultaneously displayable on the third symbol display device 81.

In the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, an execution symbol display area Db0 for displaying an execution symbol indicating that the variation effect is executed in the main display area Dm is provided. The execution symbol display area Db0 is provided in the central portion of the cockpit display area Db, that is, on the right side of the first reserved symbol display area Db1a. It is configured to be displayed. Further, in the execution symbol display area Db0, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a is moved (shifted) and displayed as an execution symbol.

The execution symbol displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 is deleted when the variation effect executed in the main display area Dm is completed, and the displayed reserved symbol is reserved on the lower side as the execution symbol is deleted. It is moved and displayed as a pattern. Specifically, for example, in a situation where four reserved symbols of the first special symbol exist in the "normal game state", they are displayed in the execution symbol display area Db0 with the end of the variation effect of the first special symbol. When the execution symbol is deleted, the reserved symbol displayed in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a is moved (shifted) and displayed as the execution symbol in the execution symbol display area Db0. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the first reserved symbol display area Db1a. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the third reserved symbol display area Db1c is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the second reserved symbol display area Db1b. Further, the reserved symbol displayed in the fourth reserved symbol display area Db1d is moved (shifted) and displayed as the reserved symbol in the third reserved symbol display area Db1c.

In the first embodiment, the number of reserved balls for the variable effect based on the entry into the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is configured to be reserved up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is set. The number of balls is not limited to four, and may be set to three or less, or five or more (for example, eight), respectively. Further, instead of displaying the reserved symbols in the cockpit display area Db, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls ( For example, it may be displayed in a color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, it is not necessary to display the number of reserved balls on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 is provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls, which are equal to the maximum number of hold lamps of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and hold balls are provided according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state. It may display a number.

Returning to FIG. 3, the description will be continued. A through gate 67 is provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 80 when viewed from the front. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) for the ball to pass through in the vertical direction. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on, and the main control device 110 performs a winning lottery for the normal symbol due to the turning on. It should be noted that the through gate 67 only serves as a lottery opportunity for the variable display of the normal symbol, and is configured so that the prize balls and the like are not paid out even when the balls pass.

A small winning opening unit 73 is arranged below the front view of the through gate 67 (general winning opening 63 on the right side of the front view). The small winning opening unit 73 includes a small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a configured to be able to appear and disappear from the surface of the game board 13, and a small winning opening solenoid 73b capable of opening / closing the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a (see FIG. 5). A small winning opening switch 73c provided in the small winning opening unit 73, and a specific area opening / closing plate 73d arranged on the upper side of the front view of the specific area so as to be able to appear and disappear from the surface of the game board 13. A specific area solenoid 73e capable of opening and closing the specific area opening / closing plate 73d, a specific area switch 73f capable of detecting a ball passing through the specific area, and a discharge port 73g for discharging the ball flowing into the small winning opening unit 73. And are provided.

The small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and can change between a protruding state and an immersive state, so that the flow direction of the ball can be changed. That is, the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a maintains a state of protruding from the surface of the game board 13 (that is, a closed state) in a normal state, and is viewed from the upstream side of the small winning opening unit 73 (front view of the small winning opening unit 73). The ball flowing down from the left side) is rolled on the upper surface of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a to the downstream side of the small winning opening unit 73 (the right side of the small winning opening unit 73 when viewed from the front, that is, the side of the ordinary electric service 72 described later). It is configured to prevent the ball from flowing into the small winning opening unit 73 by flowing down to. Then, when a small hit is won in the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is immersed in the game board 13 board surface by the small winning opening solenoid 73b (see FIG. 5) for a predetermined time. It is driven so that the ball can flow into the small winning opening unit 73.

The ball that has flowed into the small winning opening unit 73 is detected by the small winning opening switch 73c provided in the small winning opening unit 73, and then moves to the specific area side also provided in the small winning opening unit 73. Flow down. When a ball is detected by the small prize opening switch 73c, one ball is paid out as a prize ball.

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the opening mode of the small winning opening unit 73 differs depending on the type of special symbol won in the small hit. Specifically, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the number of times the small winning opening unit 73 is opened in one round is set to two, and the opening time is "0.1 seconds". , And the interval time (that is, the closing time) from the closing of the small winning opening unit 73 to the next opening is set to "1.2 seconds" (see FIGS. 12 and 13 described later). .. That is, the total opening time of the small winning opening unit 73 due to the small hit of the first special symbol is set to "0.2 seconds". On the other hand, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the number of times the small winning opening unit 73 is opened in one round is set to 9, and the same as the small hit of the first special symbol is opened. The time is set to "0.1 seconds", and the interval time from the closing of the small winning opening unit 73 to the next opening is set to "1.2 seconds" (see FIGS. 12 and 14 described later). ). That is, the total opening time of the small winning opening unit 73 due to the small hit of the second special symbol is set to "0.9 seconds". In the case of any small hit, the maximum number of winnings to the small winning opening unit 73 in one round is set to "10" (see FIG. 12).

A specific area opening / closing plate 73d is arranged in the small winning opening unit 73 on the downstream side of the small winning opening switch 73c. The specific region opening / closing plate 73d is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and can change between a protruding state and an immersed state, so that the flow direction of the sphere can be changed. That is, in the normal state, the specific area opening / closing plate 73d maintains a state of protruding from the surface of the game board 13 (that is, a closed state) and flows down from the upstream side of the specific area (right side of the specific area opening / closing plate 73d in front view). By rolling the upper surface of the specific area opening / closing plate 73d and flowing it down to the discharge port 73g side (the left side of the specific area opening / closing plate 73d in front view) in the small winning opening unit 73, the inside of the small winning opening unit 73 It is configured to prevent the inflow of spheres into a specific area. Then, it is specified based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (in the first embodiment, 4 seconds after the opening of the first small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a based on the small hit winning in the first special symbol or the second special symbol). The area opening / closing plate 73d is immersively driven into the surface of the game board 13 by the specific area solenoid 73e (see FIG. 5), so that the ball can flow into the specific area (specific area switch 73f side).

That is, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the timing at which the specific area opening / closing plate 73d is opened is "2.6 seconds" after the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is finally closed. It is the timing when the ball that has flowed into the small winning opening unit 73 due to the opening of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a has finished flowing down to the discharge port 73g, and the ball that has flowed into the small winning opening unit 73. The specific area remains closed until the second is guided to the discharge port 73g. On the other hand, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the timing at which the specific area opening / closing plate 73d is opened is a state in which the number of times the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is opened remains, and is small. The specific area is open while the ball can flow into the winning opening unit 73. Therefore, if a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the ball launched in the right-handed game becomes difficult or impossible to flow into the specific area, while in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. If a small hit is won, the ball launched in the right-handed game can flow into a specific area.

The sphere that has flowed into the specific area is detected by the specific area switch 73f provided in the specific area, and then flows down to the discharge port (not shown) side provided on the downstream side. The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that when a ball is detected by the specific area switch 73f, the jackpot game is started in the same manner as when the jackpot is hit by the first special symbol or the second special symbol. (So-called 1-kind 2-kind mixer). The content of the jackpot generated when the ball is detected by the specific area switch 73f is determined according to the value of the small hit type counter CK (see FIG. 6) described later. It should be noted that the prize ball is not paid out by the specific area switch 73f.

With this configuration, in the small hit based on the dynamic display of the first special symbol, it is possible to prevent or prevent the big hit due to passing through the specific area after the end of the small hit game. 2 In the small hit based on the dynamic display of the special symbol, it is possible to make a big hit by passing through a specific area after the end of the small hit game.

An ordinary electric service 72 is arranged on the lower side of the small winning opening unit 73 when viewed from the front. The ordinary electric service 72 is mainly composed of an infestation plate 72a and an ordinary electric service solenoid (not shown) that drives the infestation plate 72a in and out.

The main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) of the first embodiment normally keeps the infestation plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 in a protruding state and covers the upper side of the second starting port 71 in front view. The inflow of balls into the second starting port 71 is prevented. Then, when the winner is won by the variable display of the ordinary symbol, the ordinary electric function solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 protrudes from the appearance plate 72a for a predetermined time. It is driven from the state to the immersive state immersive in the game board 13 to allow the ball to flow into the second starting port 71, and is played right-handed to flow down the right side of the front view of the variable display device unit 80. The ball is configured to be in a state in which it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 71, that is, in a winning assisting state.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured so that the probability of winning in the variable display of the normal symbol changes according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a low probability state (for example, 1/100), and in the variable display of the normal symbol, it is more difficult to win than in the "time shortened state". , The appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 is made difficult to be in the immersive state (open state), and it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 71 from the "time shortened state". On the other hand, in the "time shortened state", the winning probability of the normal symbol is set to a high probability state (for example, 99/100), and the variable display of the normal symbol makes it easier to win than the "normal game state". The appearance plate 72a of the combination 72 is easily put into an immersive state (open state), and the second starting port 71 is configured so that a prize can be easily won.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the variable display derives a hit with a high probability (that is, 99%), so that in the "time reduction state" in which the normal symbol is in the high probability state. , The ball fired in the right-handed game is configured so that it can almost win the second starting port 71, while in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the variable display derives a hit with a low probability (that is, 1%). Therefore, the ball launched in the right-handed game is configured so as to be difficult to win in the second starting port 71. As a result, in the "time shortened state", the game can be performed while the ball launched in the right-handed game is awarded to the second starting port 71, which is based on the winning of the second starting port 71. By paying out the prize balls, the player can play the game while suppressing the decrease in the number of balls held by the player from the "normal game state".

In addition, instead of changing the hit probability of the normal symbol from the "normal game state" as in the "time shortened state", the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric service 72 is immersed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 ( It is also possible to change the time (opened) and the number of times the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 is immersed (opened) at one time. Specifically, in the "time shortened state", the time for the infestation plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 to immerse is longer than in the "normal game state", or the infestation plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 can be used once. The number of times of immersion may be made larger than that in the "normal game state". Further, in the "time shortened state", the hit probability of the normal symbol is increased, the immersion time of the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 is lengthened, and the number of times of immersion of the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 is increased. At least two of and may be performed at the same time.

In the "normal game state", the variable display of the normal symbol is configured so that the winner is not won (that is, the winning probability is 0%), while in the "time reduction state", the variable display of the normal symbol is always won. (That is, the probability of winning may be 100%). With this configuration, during the "normal game state" or the jackpot game state, which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, the ball wins the winning with the variable display of the normal symbol and the ball wins the second starting port 71. It is possible to surely prevent it from being stored, and it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the second special symbol from being executed at an unintended timing as the game specification.

Further, as a winning form of the second starting port 71 accompanying the driving of the ordinary electric service 72, if the driving state of the ordinary electric service 72 is not at least a predetermined period (for example, "1 second" or more), the second starting port 71 is reached. Ordinary electric service 72 may be configured so that the ball cannot win a prize. With this configuration, even if the normal symbol is won in the non-drive extension state (that is, in the "normal game state" or during the big hit game) with the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal electric service 72 It is possible to surely prevent the ball from winning the second starting port 71 with driving, and it is possible to prevent the dynamic display of the second special symbol from being executed at an unintended timing as a game specification. Can be prevented.

The ordinary symbol display device 83 performs variable display in which a symbol of "○" and a symbol of "x" as display symbols (ordinary symbols) are alternately lit each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67. The pachinko machine 10 is a normal electric service 72 provided above the front view of the second starting port 71 when the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the first embodiment). Is in the operating state for a predetermined time, and when it is stopped at a symbol other than the predetermined symbol (the symbol of "x" in the first embodiment), the normal electric service 72 is in the non-operating state (the closed state is maintained). Has been done.

The number of reserved balls of the through gate 67 is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is the above-mentioned second symbol holding lamp 84 (hereinafter, regarding the second symbol holding lamp 84, for convenience of explanation, "ordinary symbol holding lamp 84". It may be referred to as), but it is also lit and displayed. Four ordinary symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81. Then, the number of holds is displayed according to the number of lights of the normal symbol hold lamp 84.

The variable display of the normal symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the normal symbol display device 83 as in the first embodiment, as well as the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device. It may be done by using a part of 81. Similarly, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, and the passage of the through gate 67 may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol holding lamp 84 may not be used for lighting display.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first starting port 64 through which a ball can enter is arranged. Game nails and the like are planted around the first starting port 64 so that about 6 balls (so-called S1 = 6) fired in the left-handed game can win a prize per minute. When the ball enters the first starting port 64, the first starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the first starting port switch. (See FIG. 5), a lottery for the jackpot of the first special symbol is made. Then, the dynamic display according to the lottery result is shown by the upper LED group 37b1 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the first special symbol is displayed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. Based on the variation effect is executed. The first starting port 64 is also one of the winning openings in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

On the right side side of the variable display device unit 80 in front view, a second starting port 71 is provided so that a ball can enter only when the normal electric service 72 is in the open state (driving state). When the ordinary electric service 72 is open to the second starting port 71 and the small winning opening unit 73 arranged on the upstream side of the ordinary electric service 72 is closed. , Game nails are planted around the ball so that about 30 to 40 balls fired in the right-handed game can win a prize per minute. When the ball enters the second starting port 71, the second starting port switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main controller 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second starting port switch. (See FIG. 5), a lottery for the jackpot of the second special symbol is made. Then, the display according to the lottery result is shown by the lower LED group 37b2 of the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, and the third symbol display device 81 changes based on the second special symbol according to the game state. The production is executed. The second starting port 71 is also one of the winning openings in which one ball is paid out as a prize ball when a ball enters.

A horizontally long rectangular large winning opening is provided in a substantially central portion of the variable winning device 65 on the downstream side of the ordinary electric service 72 and on the lower right side of the front view of the game board 13. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the main control device 110 (see FIG. 5) becomes a big hit, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, The special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed so as to be a stop symbol of the jackpot, and the third symbol display device 81 is provided with a stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot (for example, three sets of the same symbol ("777"). "Etc.)) is displayed to indicate the occurrence of a jackpot game. In addition, a small hit was won by a lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the ball passed through a specific area in the small winning opening unit 73 while the small winning opening unit 73 based on the small hit was opened. In this case, the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 is lit and displayed, and the third symbol display device 81 is displayed to indicate that the specific area has been passed (for example, "V acquisition" or the like). Occurrence is shown. After that, according to the big hit type (in the case of a big hit based on a small hit, the small hit type), the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a provided in the variable winning device 65 is opened, and the ball can easily win a prize in the big winning opening. The game state transitions to the special game state (big hit game). As this special game state, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a, which is normally closed, is opened until a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, until "30 seconds" elapses or 10 balls are won). ..

When the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is closed when a predetermined time elapses from the opening or when a predetermined number of winnings are detected, and after the closing, the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is opened again. NS. The opening / closing operation of the large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a is configured to be repeatable up to 10 times (10 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special game state (big hit state) that is advantageous for the player, and the player is allowed to win a ball in the variable winning device 65 in the game. As a value (game value) is given, a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than usual.

The through gate 67, the general winning opening 63 on the right side of the front view of the third symbol display device 81, the small winning opening unit 73, the second starting opening 71, and the variable winning device 65 are fired by a left-handed game. The ball is arranged at a position where it cannot win a prize. Further, the first starting port 64 is arranged at a position where the ball launched in the right-handed game cannot win a prize. The variable winning device 65 may be arranged at a position where the ball fired in the left-handed game can win, or the first starting port 64 may be arranged at a position where the ball fired in the right-handed game can win. You may set it.

Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not enter any of the winning openings (entrance openings) 63, 64, 65, 71, 73 are guided through the out openings 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. The balls that have won (inflowed) into each of the winning ports 63, 64, 65, 71, 73 (exhaust port 73g and specific area) are also guided to the ball discharging path in the same manner as the balls that have passed through the out opening 66, and are pachinko machines. 10 It is discharged to the outside.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a read-only memory (Read Only Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as “ROM”) 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and controls stored in the ROM 202. Random access memory (Random Access Memory; hereinafter abbreviated as "RAM") 203, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing a program, and other interrupt circuits and timer circuits. Various circuits such as a data transmission / reception circuit are built-in.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

In the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery, the setting of the dynamic display and the variation effect of each special symbol in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the display result of the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83 The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a lottery is executed. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer 203c for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

The ROM 202 includes a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a small hit type table 202c, a hold number table 202d, a stop pattern table 202e, a variable pattern table 202f, a jackpot open table 202g, a small hit open table 202h, and a normal figure. At least the random number table 202i, the normal figure fluctuation table 202j, the ordinary electric service opening table 202k, the winning opening opening pattern table 202m, and the time saving end condition table 202n are stored. The main control device 110 executes the above-mentioned main control by various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables stored in the ROM 202.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like perform a big hit lottery, a dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, a variable effect setting of the third symbol display device 81, a lottery of the variable display display result of the normal symbol display device 83, and the like. Therefore, it is used in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110. Further, in the description of the various counters, various tables stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, various control timings, transitions of the gaming state, and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 to 25.

For the jackpot lottery, the dynamic display setting of the special symbol display device 37, and the setting of the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot or small hit lottery and the jackpot symbol The jackpot type counter C2 used for selecting the stop type, the stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the effect mode of the variation effect, and the first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The variation type counter CS1 used for selecting the variation pattern and the small hit type counter CK used for selecting the stop type of the small hit symbol are used.

Further, the counter C4 per normal figure is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the counter C4 per normal figure.

Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to "0".

Each counter is updated, for example, at "4 ms" intervals, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and some counters are irregular in the main process (see FIG. 30). Is updated to, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer 203c set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 includes a hold ball execution area 203f composed of four hold areas (first hold first to fourth areas) related to the first special symbol and four hold areas (four hold areas related to the second special symbol). A second reserved ball storage area 203e composed of (second reserved first to fourth areas) is provided, and each of these areas is set at the timing of entering the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71. In addition, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the small hit type counter CK is stored.

Each counter will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 9999") to reach the maximum value (for example, "9999" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999"). After reaching "0", it returns to "0". In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated from the initial value. Will be done.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the jackpot random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the jackpot random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take a value of "0 to 9999", the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of "0 to 9999". The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start opening 64 (starting prize), the first hold first 1 to 2 provided in the first hold ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start port 64 (first special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first holding area of any of the fourth areas. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second start opening 71 (starting prize), the second hold first 1 to 2 provided in the second hold ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second start opening 71 (second special symbol). It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any second holding area of the fourth area.

The value of the random number for which the jackpot random number counter C1 is a jackpot or a small hit is set by the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. That is, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the hold area of the first hold ball storage area 203d becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a1 corresponding to the first special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it matches the value of the random number to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit. Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 in the holding area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e becomes the jackpot set by the jackpot random number table 202a2 corresponding to the second special symbol. If it matches the value of the random number, it is determined to be a big hit, and if it matches the value of the random number to be a small hit, it is determined to be a small hit.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, the details of the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to each special symbol will be described. FIG. 7A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a1 (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1”) corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202. FIG. 7B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table 202a2 (hereinafter, referred to as “special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2”) corresponding to the second special symbol stored in the ROM 202. be.

In the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 and the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment, the number of jackpot random numbers is set differently for each set value. Further, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers required for displacement for each setting is compensated from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to the loss. That is, when the number of jackpot random numbers is increased in order to displace each setting, the number of lost random numbers is reduced and the decrease is allocated as the number of jackpot random numbers. In this way, by making the number of jackpot random numbers different according to the game state, the probability of winning a jackpot is changed for each setting.

On the other hand, in each special symbol, the number of small hit random numbers is set to be the same for each set value. That is, the number of small hit random numbers in the first special symbol is configured to be the same for each set value. Similarly, the number of small hit random numbers in the second special symbol is also configured to be the same for each set value. In this way, by making the number of small hit random values the same for each set value in each special symbol, the ratio of the game value given considering only the small hit game in all the set values in each special symbol can be obtained. It becomes equivalent.

In this way, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers for each setting of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is compensated from the number of lost random numbers in all the set values. Configure to. In addition, the number of small hit random numbers of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is configured so as not to be changed for each setting. That is, the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers due to the setting change is compensated by reducing the number of lost random numbers and allocating the decrease to the jackpot random numbers, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol. The number of small hit random numbers is the same for each first special symbol or second special symbol setting. With this configuration, it is possible to calculate the payout rate for each set value by considering only the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers, which increases the man-hours when designing the game specifications. It can be suppressed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values due to the setting change can be acquired when the jackpot random number counter C1 is the easiest to stay in the game. It is configured to compensate from the combination of the most random number values other than (that is, the lost random number value). With this configuration, for example, it is possible to make it difficult to determine the setting from the number of appearances of the lost combination, which is the most frequent combination in the variation effect of the first special symbol. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the set value of the pachinko machine 10 to be detected by setting the setting discriminating element by the player only as the appearance rate of the jackpot whose appearance probability is lower than that of the lost role. As a result, even if the setting is low (that is, the set value 1 or the like), the game can be continued without causing the player to detect the setting, and the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values due to the setting change is used as the loss random number value corresponding to the loss role in the jackpot random number counter C1 that does not give the player a game value. It is configured to compensate from the number.

Unlike the big hit role and the small hit role, the lost role is a role that does not give a game value, so it is provided for each pachinko machine 10 and is provided on a data lamp (not shown) that displays the game result and the like on the pachinko machine 10. It is a role that is not clearly (largely) displayed. Here, if the number of jackpot random numbers corresponding to the jackpot game, which is easily displayed clearly (on a large scale) on the data lamp, and the number of small hit random numbers corresponding to the small hit game are both changed for each setting. When the player glances (confirms) the appearance rate of the two elements of the big hit game and the small hit game with the data lamp, it becomes easy to guess the setting determination of the pachinko machine 10. As a result, for example, when the player finds out the setting of the pachinko machine 10 set to a low setting (for example, the set value "1"), the player does not play the game on the pachinko machine 10 and pachinko. There is a risk that the operation of the machine 10 will be reduced.

Therefore, the increase in the number of jackpot random number values due to the change in the probability set value is not given to the player in the jackpot random number counter C1 and is not clearly (largely) displayed on the data lamp. By configuring so as to compensate from the number of lost random numbers corresponding to, the setting discriminating factor by the player is only the appearance rate of the big hit, and the set value of the pachinko machine 10 is hard to be detected from the appearance rate of the small hit. be able to. Therefore, the discriminating element of the probability setting value is limited to the appearance rate of the winning combination based on one random value, and for example, even if the setting value is low (that is, the setting value "1", etc.) is set to the player. It is possible to continue the game without detecting it and promote the operation of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 7A, in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 of the first embodiment, when the set value is "1", the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the jackpot in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. The number of (big hit random number values) is 50, and the value "0 to 49" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability in the first special symbol of the set value "1" is set to be 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%).

When the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is two, and the values "50, 51" are special. FIG. 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "1" is set to be 2/10000 = 0.02 / 100 (that is, 0.02%).

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9948 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The values "52 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the first special symbol of the set value "1" is set to be 9948/10000 = 99.48 / 100 (that is, 99.48%).

That is, in the set value "1", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 1 is compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers having the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 52, and the value "0 to 51" is special. FIG. 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value "2" is set to be 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52%).

Further, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is two as in the case of the set value "1". The value "52,53" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "2" is set to be 2/10000 = 0.02 / 100 (that is, 0.02%).

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9946 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The values "54 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the first special symbol of the set value "2" is set to be 9946/10000 = 99.46 / 100 (that is, 99.46%).

That is, in the set value "2", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 1 is configured to be compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers with the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (both 0.02%) as the set value "1", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (0.5% → 0.52%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “1”.

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 54, and the value "0 to 53" is special. FIG. 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value "3" is set to be 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%).

When the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is the same as that of the set value "1" and the set value "2". Similarly, the value "54,55" of the two is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "3" is set to be 2/10000 = 0.02 / 100 (that is, 0.02%).

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9944 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The values "56 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the first special symbol of the set value "3" is set to be 9944/10000 = 99.44 / 100 (that is, 99.44%).

That is, in the set value "3", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 1 is compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers having the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

Therefore, the set value "3" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (both 0.02%) as the set value "2", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (0.52% → 0.54%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 56, and the value "0 to 55" is special. FIG. 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value "4" is set to be 56/10000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56%).

Further, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is the same as in the case of the set values "1" to "3". The values "56, 57" of the two are specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "4" is set to be 2/10000 = 0.02 / 100 (that is, 0.02%).

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9942 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "58 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the first special symbol of the set value "4" is set to be 9942/10000 = 99.42 / 100 (that is, 99.42%).

That is, in the set value "4", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 1 is compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers having the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

Therefore, the set value "4" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (both 0.02%) as the set value "3", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (0.54% → 0.56%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 58, and the value "0 to 57" is special. FIG. 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value "5" is set to be 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58%).

Further, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is the same as in the case of the set values "1" to "4". The value "58,59" of the two is specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "5" is set to be 2/10000 = 0.02 / 100 (that is, 0.02%).

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9940 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "60 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the first special symbol of the set value "5" is set to be 9940/10000 = 99.4/100 (that is, 99.4%).

That is, in the set value "5", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 1 is compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers having the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

Therefore, the set value "5" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (both 0.02%) as the set value "4", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (0.56% → 0.58%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “4”.

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is 60, and the value "0 to 59" is special. FIG. 1 is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the jackpot probability of the first special symbol of the set value "6" is set to be 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%).

Further, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1 is the same as in the case of the set values "1" to "5". The values "60, 61" of the two are specified (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the small hit probability in the first special symbol of the set value "6" is set to be 2/10000 = 0.02 / 100 (that is, 0.02%).

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 is the remaining 9938 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The values "62 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. That is, the loss probability of the first special symbol in the first special symbol of the set value "6" is set to be 9938/10000 = 99.38 / 100 (that is, 99.38%).

That is, in the set value "6", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 1 is compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers having the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

Therefore, the set value "6" in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1 has the same small hit probability (both 0.02%) as the set value "5", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (0.58% → 0.6%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

Next, as shown in FIG. 7B, in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 of the first embodiment, when the set value is "1", the jackpot random number counter that becomes a jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. The number of C1 values (big hit random number values) is 50 as in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1, and the value "0 to 49" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the second special symbol with the set value "1" is 50/10000 = 0.5 / 100 (that is, 0.5%) as in the case of the first special symbol. It is set.

Here, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is 2715, and the values "50 to 2764" are Special figure 2 It is defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "1" is set to be 2715/10000 = 27.15 / 100 (that is, 27.15%).

Therefore, when the set value is "1", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 7235 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "275-9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol of the set value "1" is set to be 7235/10000 = 72.35 / 100 (that is, 72.35%).

That is, in the set value "1", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 2 is configured to be compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers with the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

In this way, the small hit probability of the second special symbol is significantly higher than the small hit probability of the first special symbol (0.02% → 27.15%), and is selected very much compared to the first special symbol. It is set to an easy number. That is, in the lottery game in the second special symbol, the setting is such that it is easy to select in the order of loss → small hit → big hit. Here, by setting the small hit probability of the second special symbol to 2715/10000 ≈ 1 / 3.68, one or more balls are averaged within the maximum number of reserved balls (that is, four) of the second special symbol. It is configured so that small hits are likely to occur. Therefore, by holding the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol up to the maximum number, it is configured so that a small hit is likely to occur in the reserved second special symbol.

Next, when the set value is "2", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 52 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , The value "0 to 51" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the second special symbol of the set value "2" is 52/10000 = 0.52 / 100 (that is, 0.52%) as in the case of the first special symbol. It is set.

Here, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is 2715 as in the case of the set value "1". , The value "52 to 2766" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "2" is set to be 2715/10000 = 27.15 / 100 (that is, 27.15%).

Therefore, when the set value is "2", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 7233 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The values "1767 to 9999" are defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol of the set value "2" is set to be 7233/10000 = 72.33 / 100 (that is, 72.33%).

That is, in the set value "2", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 2 is configured to be compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers with the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

Therefore, the set value "2" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (both 27.15%) as the set value "1", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (0.5% → 0.52%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than when the set value is “1”.

Next, when the set value is "3", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 54, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , The value "0 to 53" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the second special symbol of the set value "3" is 54/10000 = 0.54 / 100 (that is, 0.54%) as in the case of the first special symbol. It is set.

Here, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the same as in the case of the set values "1" and "2". , 2715, and the value "54 to 2768" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "3" is set to be 2715/10000 = 27.15 / 100 (that is, 27.15%).

Therefore, when the set value is "3", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 7231 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "2769 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol of the set value "3" is set to be 7231/10000 = 72.31 / 100 (that is, 72.31%).

That is, in the set value "3", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 2 is configured to be compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers with the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

Therefore, the set value "3" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (both 27.15%) as the set value "2", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (0.52% → 0.54%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “2”.

Next, when the set value is "4", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 56 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , The value "0 to 55" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the second special symbol of the set value "4" is 56/10000 = 0.56 / 100 (that is, 0.56%) as in the case of the first special symbol. It is set.

Here, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the same as in the case of the set values "1" to "3". , 2715, and the value "56 to 2770" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "4" is set to be 2715/10000 = 27.15 / 100 (that is, 27.15%).

Therefore, when the set value is "4", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 7229 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "2771 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol of the set value "4" is set to be 7229/10000 = 72.29 / 100 (that is, 72.29%).

That is, in the set value "4", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 2 is configured to be compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers with the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

Therefore, the set value "4" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (both 27.15%) as the set value "3", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (0.54% → 0.56%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “3”.

Next, when the set value is "5", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 58, as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , The value "0 to 57" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the second special symbol of the set value "5" is 58/10000 = 0.58 / 100 (that is, 0.58%) as in the case of the first special symbol. It is set.

Here, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the same as in the case of the set values "1" to "4". , 2715, and the value "58 to 2772" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "5" is set to be 2715/10000 = 27.15 / 100 (that is, 27.15%).

Therefore, when the set value is "5", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 7227 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "2773 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol of the set value "5" is set to be 7227/10000 = 72.27 / 100 (that is, 72.27%).

That is, in the set value "5", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 2 is configured to be compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers with the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

Therefore, the set value "5" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (both 27.15%) as the set value "4", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (Low probability state: 0.56% → 0.58%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value "4".

Next, when the set value is "6", the number of values (big hit random number values) of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is the jackpot in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is 60 as in the special figure 1 jackpot random number table 202a1. , The value "0 to 59" is specified (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the jackpot probability of the second special symbol in the second special symbol of the set value "6" is 60/10000 = 0.6 / 100 (that is, 0.6%) as in the case of the first special symbol. It is set.

Here, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (small hit random number values) that are small hits in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2 is the same as in the case of the set values "1" to "5". , 2715, and the value "60 to 2774" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the small hit probability in the second special symbol of the set value "6" is set to be 2715/10000 = 27.15 / 100 (that is, 27.15%).

Therefore, when the set value is "6", the number of random number values (lost random number values) that are lost in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 is the remaining 7225 other than the jackpot random number value and the small hit random number value. The value "2775 to 9999" is defined (set) in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2. That is, the loss probability of the second special symbol of the set value "6" is set to be 7225/10000 = 72.25 / 100 (that is, 72.25%).

That is, in the set value "6", the increase in the number of jackpot random numbers in Special Figure 2 is configured to be compensated for by reducing the number of lost random numbers with the highest appearance rate in the game. There is.

Therefore, the set value "6" in the special figure 2 jackpot random number table 202a2 has the same small hit probability (both 27.15%) as the set value "5", but the jackpot probability is slightly improved. (0.58% → 0.6%), it can be said that the jackpot game is more likely to occur than in the case of the set value “5”.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The jackpot type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when a jackpot occurs, and is added one by one in order within a predetermined range (for example, "0 to 99"), and the maximum value (for example, "0 to 99") is added. In the case of a counter that can take the value of "", it is configured to return to "0" after reaching "99"). The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, a big hit is made among the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area as the first holding area where the random number counter C1 is stored. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71, a big hit among the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 71. It is stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same second holding area as the second holding area in which the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, a random number (big hit random number value) or a small hit in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved area 1 in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a jackpot. If it is not a random number (small hit random number value), that is, a random number that is lost (missing random number value), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are lost. It will be the time. Further, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area 1 in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e is a random number (small hit random number value) that becomes a small hit, it fluctuates. The fluctuation pattern in the production and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of a small hit. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the 1st reserved ball storage area 203d or the 2nd reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (big hit random number value) that becomes a jackpot, the variation effect is produced. The fluctuation pattern and stop type in are the ones at the time of big hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the jackpot are determined according to the jackpot type indicated by the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the same holding area.

As described above, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99", and the jackpot type counter C2 and the jackpot type stored in the ROM 202 are stored. The jackpot type is determined based on the table 202b. The jackpot type table 202b includes a special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol, and a special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. And are provided.

Here, the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 8B is also stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure which shows typically an example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the initialization by clearing the RAM of the pachinko machine 10, the number of times the "time saving function" is given in association with the jackpot of the special symbol (the above-mentioned time saving limit number of times) is a predetermined number of times. (Three times in the first embodiment), the gaming state after the end of the jackpot after reaching the time saving limit number is always shifted to the low probability state of the normal symbol to which the "time saving function" is not given. It is equipped with a time-saving limit function that prohibits the transition of ordinary symbols to a high-probability state. That is, after the pachinko machine 10 is initialized by clearing the RAM, each time the time saving limit is reached, the normal symbol is set to the low probability state at the end of the next big hit (hereinafter, the low probability state of the normal symbol is always selected at the end of the big hit). Is sometimes referred to as "time saving limit is activated"), and it is configured to be in a low probability state of a normal symbol after the end of a big hit.

On the other hand, when the time saving limit number has not been reached, that is, the number of jackpots to which the "time saving function" is given is 1 to 3 times (hereinafter, the state before the time saving limit function is activated is referred to as "before the time saving limit is reached". ”) Is configured so that it can be in a high-probability state of a normal symbol after the end of a big hit.

With this configuration, every time the "time saving function" is continuously generated a predetermined number of times via the big hit (small hit), the low probability state of the normal symbol can be surely set, and the high probability state of the normal symbol can be set. It is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value during the "renso" from occurring in a short period of time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result that is far from the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 appears, which is given to the player. It can be configured so that the playing value per hour is not too high (too much). In addition, in order to make the ball ejection rate of this pachinko machine 10 equal to the ball ejection rate of a normal pachinko machine that does not have a time saving limit function, the amount of decrease in the ball ejection rate due to the limitation of the number of "renso" is set. It is possible to make up for the jackpot of a special symbol by making it easier to generate, or to increase the game value that can be given at the time of the jackpot, and it is a versatile machine that can not be done with a normal pachinko machine that does not have a time saving limit function. Playability can be realized.

As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is divided into a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and further, before reaching the time reduction limit or the time reduction limit. It is a table that is divided according to the time of arrival, and further, the jackpot type according to the type of the special symbol and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are associated with each other. The jackpot type that can be selected may be different depending on the game state in which the player stays.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a jackpot type, the maximum number of rounds is 3 and the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 and the small winning opening unit 73 (hereinafter, the variable winning device 65 and the small winning opening unit 73 The opening pattern may be referred to as the "winning opening opening pattern"), which is "X1", "time saving A", "time saving B", "time saving C", "time saving D", and "time saving F", and the maximum number of rounds. Is 9 rounds, and the winning opening opening pattern is "X2", and "time saving E" and "time saving G" are provided. The details of the winning opening opening pattern will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not the "time saving function" is given after the end of the jackpot state and the number of times shortened to be given differ depending on the gaming state and the time saving limit number of times. It is configured.

Specifically, in the lottery game of the first special symbol, in the "normal game state (mainly" normal game state A ")" in which the "time saving function" is not activated, the jackpot type "time saving A" was won. In this case, the "time saving function" is not given after the jackpot ends, while the "time saving function" is given after the big hit type "time saving B" is won. There is. If the jackpot type "time reduction C" is selected instead of the jackpot type "time reduction A" or "time reduction B" when the time reduction limit is reached in the "time reduction state", the "time reduction function" is activated after the jackpot ends. It is configured not to be granted.

In the lottery game of the second special symbol, in the "normal game state (mainly" normal game state B ")" in which the "time saving function" is not activated, the jackpot type "time saving D" or "time saving E" was won. In that case, the jackpot type "time saving D" or "time saving E" was won in the "time saving state" in which the "time saving function" is activated after the jackpot ends. In some cases, the "time saving function" is provided after the jackpot ends. If the jackpot type "time reduction F" or "time reduction G" is selected instead of the jackpot type "time reduction D" or "time reduction E" when the time reduction limit is reached in the "time reduction state", after the jackpot ends. It is configured so that the "time saving function" is not added. The end conditions of the "time saving function" given for each jackpot type will be described in detail in the time saving end condition table 202n (see FIG. 15).

In the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 and the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2, possible values of the jackpot type counter C2 for determining the jackpot type are associated with each jackpot type.

In the example of the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 shown in FIG. 8A, the first special symbol is used before the time reduction limit is reached and after the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the first to third jackpots after the time reduction limit reset). When a big hit occurs, the value "0 to 49" of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with "time saving A", and the value "50 to 99" of the big hit type counter C2 corresponds to "time saving B". It is attached. In addition, when the jackpot of the first special symbol occurs when the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the fourth jackpot after resetting the time reduction limit), the jackpot type is compared to "time reduction C" instead of "time reduction A". The value "0 to 49" of the counter C2 is associated, and the value "50 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with the "time reduction C" instead of the "time reduction B".

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d. When the value of the counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 of the same first holding area is the jackpot type in Special Figure 1. Determined from table 202b1, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "time saving A" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type is determined. "Time saving B" is decided.

Therefore, if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot type of "time saving A" is 50% and the jackpot type of "time saving B" is 50%. , Will be won. In addition, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol when the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type of "time reduction C" is 50% instead of "time reduction A", and "time reduction B" is replaced by "time reduction B". The jackpot type of "C" will be won at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, before the time reduction limit is reached (after the time reduction limit is reached), the selection ratios of the jackpot types "time reduction A" and "time reduction B" are selected at the same level (both 50%). When the time saving limit is reached, the jackpot type "time saving C" is always selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the first starting port 64 can be won and the first special symbol can be dynamically displayed, but it is difficult to win the second starting port 71. As a result, it is difficult to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Further, in the right-handed game, the second special symbol can be dynamically displayed by winning the second starting port 71, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed because it is difficult to win the first starting port 64. Is hard to execute. Then, when the time saving limit is activated, it means that the "time saving function" is operating, that is, the state during the "ream villa", and in the present embodiment, the right-handed game is encouraged during the "ream villa". Therefore, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is difficult to execute. Therefore, when the time saving limit is activated in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the player dares to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol even though the right-handed game is encouraged. This is a case where a left-handed game is performed and a ball is won in the first starting port 64 to execute a dynamic display of the first special symbol. Further, since the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to preferentially execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol over the dynamic display of the first special symbol, in the "time reduction state", In the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the "time saving C" that can be selected when the time saving limit is operated is set so as to be practically difficult to be derived (not derived).

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 jackpot type table 202b2 shown in FIG. 8B, the second special before the time reduction limit is reached and after the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the first to third jackpots after the time reduction limit reset). When a big hit of a symbol occurs, the value "0 to 49" of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with "time saving D", and the value "50 to 99" of the big hit type counter C2 is associated with "time saving E". Are associated with each other. In addition, when the jackpot of the second special symbol occurs when the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the fourth jackpot after resetting the time reduction limit), the jackpot type is compared to "time reduction F" instead of "time reduction D". The value "0 to 49" of the counter C2 is associated, and the value "50 to 99" of the jackpot type counter C2 is associated with "time saving G" instead of "time saving E".

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of any of the first holding areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. When the value of the counter C1 is a jackpot value, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 of the same first holding area is the special figure 2 jackpot type. Determined from table 202b2, for example, if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "7", "time saving D" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is "95", the jackpot type is determined. "Time saving E" is decided.

Therefore, if the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot type of "time saving D" is 50% and the jackpot type of "time saving E" is 50%. , Will be won. In addition, when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the time saving limit is reached, the jackpot type of "time saving F" is 50% instead of "time saving D", and "time saving E" is replaced with "time saving E". The jackpot type of "G" will be won at a rate of 50%.

Therefore, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, before the time reduction limit is reached (after the time reduction limit is reached), the jackpot type "time reduction D" or "time reduction E" is selected, and when the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction F" is selected. "Or" time saving G "is selected. As a result, after winning the first big hit, if the "ream villa" state continues without shifting to the low probability state of the normal symbol (except in the big hit state), the "time saving function" is given. Every time the big hit state of the special symbol occurs four times, a low probability state of the normal symbol (that is, "normal game state B") can be generated after the fourth big hit. As a result, every time a large hit (or small hit) to which the "time saving function" is given occurs a predetermined number of times, the low probability state of the normal symbol can be always set, and the high probability state of the normal symbol continues to be "continuous". It is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value in the "villa" from occurring in a short time. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a game result that is far from the ratio of the number of balls obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 appears, which is given to the player. It can be configured so that the playing value per hour is not too high (too much). In addition, in order to make the ball ejection rate of this pachinko machine 10 equal to the ball ejection rate of a normal pachinko machine that does not have a time saving limit function, the amount of decrease in the ball ejection rate due to the limitation of the number of "renso" is set. It is possible to make up for the jackpot of a special symbol by making it easier to generate, or to increase the game value given at the time of the jackpot, and it is a versatile machine that can not be done with a normal pachinko machine that does not have a time saving limit function. Playability can be realized.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, since the right-handed game is not encouraged (prohibited) in the "normal game state A", the lottery result by the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "normal game state" is obtained. The gaming state that can be derived is the "normal gaming state B".

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The small hit type counter CK determines the small hit type (big hit content) given when the ball passes through a specific area during the small hit game by winning the small hit, and determines a predetermined range (for example, the content of the big hit). , "0-99") are added one by one in order, and after reaching the maximum value (for example, "99" in the case of a counter that can take a value of "0-99"), it returns to "0". ing. The value of the small hit type counter CK is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31)).

Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64, a big hit is made among the first holding first to fourth areas of the first holding ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first starting port 64. It is stored in the small hit type counter storage area 203d5 of the same first hold area as the first hold area in which the random number counter C1 is stored. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71, a big hit among the second holding first to fourth areas of the second holding ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 71. It is stored in the small hit type counter storage area 203e5 of the same second holding area as the second holding area in which the random number counter C1 is stored.

Here, for example, a random number (big hit random number value) or a small hit in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved area 1 in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e is a jackpot. If it is not a random number (small hit random number value), that is, a random number that is lost (missing random number value), the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation effect and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are lost. It will be the time. Further, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the 1 holding area in the 1st reserved ball storage area 203d or the 2nd reserved ball storage area 203e is a random number (big hit random number value) that becomes a jackpot, the variation effect is performed. The fluctuation pattern and the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") are those at the time of big hit. On the other hand, if the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the 1 hold area in the 1st hold ball storage area 203d or the 2nd hold ball storage area 203e is a small hit random number (small hit random number value). The fluctuation pattern and stop type in the fluctuation production are those at the time of a small hit. In this case, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type at the time of the small hit are determined according to the small hit type indicated by the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the same holding area.

As described above, the value of the small hit type counter CK in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of "0 to 99" and stored in the small hit type counter CK and ROM 202. The small hit type is determined based on the small hit type table 202c. The small hit type table 202c includes a special figure 1 small hit type table 202c1 referred to in the first lottery game of the first special symbol and a special figure 2 small hit referred to in the second lottery game of the second special symbol. A type table 202c2 is provided.

Here, with reference to FIG. 9, the special figure 1 small hit type table 202c1 and the special figure 2 small hit type table 202c2 will be described. FIG. 9A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 small hit type table 202c1 corresponding to the first special symbol stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 9B is also stored in the ROM 202. It is a figure which shows typically an example of the special figure 2 small hit type table 202c2 corresponding to the 2nd special symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as described above, when a small hit is won in the lottery game of each special symbol, the small winning opening unit 73 (see FIG. 3) is openly driven and each special symbol is operated. It is configured to open a specific area in the small winning opening unit 73 at a timing according to the type. Then, when the ball passes through the specific area during the small hit game, the big hit game is started according to the value of the small hit type counter CK.

As shown in FIGS. 9 (a) and 9 (b), the small hit type table 202c is divided into a first special symbol and a second special symbol, and further, before reaching the time reduction limit or in the time reduction. It is divided according to the time when the limit is reached, and further, depending on whether or not the specific area has been passed during the small hit, the small hit type according to the type of the special symbol and the value of the small hit type counter CK Is a table associated with. In addition, the small hit type that can be selected may be different depending on the game state in which the player stays.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a small hit type, when the ball does not pass through the specific area, the maximum number of rounds is one and the winning opening opening pattern is "Y1". "And" small hit B "are provided, while when the ball passes through a specific area, the maximum number of rounds is 1 + 3 and the winning opening opening pattern is" Y2 "," time saving H "and" time saving I ". , "Time saving J" and "Time saving L", and "Time saving K" and "Time saving M" in which the maximum number of rounds is 1 + 9 and the winning opening opening pattern is "Y3" are provided. The details of the winning opening opening pattern will be described later with reference to FIG.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as in the case of the big hit, whether the "time saving function" is given after the big hit state based on the passage through the specific area during the small hit game is given according to the game state and the time saving limit number of times. It is configured so that whether or not it is given and the number of time reductions given are different.

Specifically, in the lottery game of the first special symbol, if a small hit is won in the "normal game state (mainly," normal game state A ")" in which the "time saving function" is not activated, When the ball does not pass through the specific area, it becomes "small hit A" only for the small hit game, while when the ball passes through the specific area, it becomes the small hit type "time saving H", and after the big hit game accompanying the passage of the specific area. It is configured to be given a "time saving function". In addition, when the time reduction limit is reached in the "time reduction state", if a small hit is won, when the ball does not pass through the specific area, it becomes "small hit A" only for the small hit game, while the specific area is the ball. Although the small hit type "time reduction I" is used instead of the small hit type "time reduction H" when the player passes through, the "time reduction function" is not provided after the big hit game accompanying the passage through the specific area.

In the lottery game of the second special symbol, in the "normal game state (mainly" normal game state B ")" in which the "time saving function" is not activated, if a small hit is won, the ball will hit a specific area. When it does not pass, it becomes "small hit B" only for the small hit game, while when the ball passes through the specific area, it becomes the small hit type "time reduction J" or "time reduction K", and after the big hit game accompanying the passage of the specific area, it becomes "small hit B". "Time saving function" is given. In addition, when the time reduction limit is reached in the "time reduction state", if a small hit is won, when the ball does not pass through the specific area, it becomes "small hit B" only for the small hit game, while the specific area is the ball. When the ball passes, the small hit type "time saving J" or "time saving K" is replaced with the small hit type "time saving L" or "time saving M", but the "time saving function" is performed after the big hit game accompanying the passage through the specific area. It is configured not to be granted. The end conditions of the "time saving function" given based on each small hit type will be described in detail in the time saving end condition table 202n (see FIG. 15).

In the special figure 1 small hit type table 202c1 and the special figure 2 small hit type table 202c2, the possible values of the small hit type counter CK that determines the small hit type are associated with each small hit type, respectively. There is.

In the example of the special figure 1 small hit type table 202c1 shown in FIG. 9A, the first special symbol is before the time reduction limit is reached and after the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the number of big hits is the first to the third after the time reduction limit is reset). When a small hit is generated, the value "0 to 99" of the small hit type counter CK is associated with "small hit A" or "time saving H" regardless of whether or not the specific area has passed. In addition, when a small hit of the first special symbol occurs when the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the fourth big hit after resetting the time reduction limit number), "small hit A" or "time reduction" regardless of whether or not the specific area has passed. The value "0 to 99" of the small hit type counter CK is associated with "time saving I" instead of "H".

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of the first special symbol before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any one of the first reserved ball storage areas 203d. When the value of the counter C1 is a small hit, the small hit type associated with the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the small hit type counter storage area 203d5 of the same first holding area is special. FIG. 1 is determined from the small hit type table 202c1. For example, regardless of the value of the small hit type counter CK, the small hit type is "small hit A" or "time saving H" depending on whether or not a specific area has passed. Is decided.

Therefore, if a small hit is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), "small hit A" or "time saving H" is selected depending on whether or not the specific area has passed. The small hit type will be won at a rate of 100%. In addition, when a small hit is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol when the time reduction limit is reached, "time reduction I" is used instead of "small hit A" or "time reduction H" depending on whether or not a specific area has passed. The small hit type will be won at a rate of 100%.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the left-handed game, the first starting port 64 can be won and the first special symbol can be dynamically displayed, but it is difficult to win the second starting port 71. As a result, it is difficult to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Further, in the right-handed game, the second special symbol can be dynamically displayed by winning the second starting port 71, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol can be executed because it is difficult to win the first starting port 64. Is hard to execute. Then, when the time saving limit is activated, it means that the "time saving function" is operating, that is, the state during the "ream villa", and in the present embodiment, the right-handed game is encouraged during the "ream villa". Therefore, the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be executed, while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is difficult to execute. Therefore, when the time saving limit is activated in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the player dares to execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol even though the right-handed game is encouraged. This is a case where a left-handed game is performed and a ball is won in the first starting port 64 to execute a dynamic display of the first special symbol. Further, since the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to preferentially execute the dynamic display of the second special symbol over the dynamic display of the first special symbol, in the "time reduction state", In the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the "time saving I" that can be selected when the time saving limit is operated is set so as to be practically difficult to be derived (not derived).

Next, in the example of the special figure 2 small hit type table 202c2 shown in FIG. 9B, the second is before the time reduction limit is reached and after the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the number of big hits is the first to the third after the time reduction limit is reset). When a small hit of a special symbol occurs, when the sphere does not pass through the specific area, the small hit type counter CK value "0 to 99" is associated with "small hit B". , When the sphere passes through the specific area, the value of the small hit type counter CK "0 to 49" is associated with "time saving J", and the value of the small hit type counter CK "0 to 49" is associated with "time saving K". 50 to 99 ”are associated with each other. In addition, when a small hit of the second special symbol occurs when the time reduction limit is reached (that is, the fourth big hit after resetting the time reduction limit number), when the ball does not pass through the specific area, "small hit B" Is associated with the value of the small hit type counter CK "0 to 99", while when the sphere passes through a specific area, it is small with respect to "time saving L" instead of "time saving J". The hit type counter CK values "0 to 49" are associated with each other, and the small hit type counter CK values "50 to 99" are associated with "time saving M" instead of "time saving K".

That is, in the winning / failing lottery of the second special symbol before reaching the time saving limit (after reaching the time saving limit), the jackpot random number stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of any first holding area of the second holding ball storage area 203e. When the value of the counter C1 is a small hit, the small hit type associated with the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the small hit type counter storage area 203e5 of the same first holding area is special. FIG. 2 is determined from the small hit type table 202c2. For example, when the value of the small hit type counter CK is "7" depending on the presence or absence of passing through a specific area, "time saving J" is determined as the small hit type. When the value of the small hit type counter CK is "95", "time saving K" is determined as the small hit type.

Therefore, if a small hit is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol before reaching the time reduction limit (after reaching the time reduction limit), "small hit B" or "time reduction" depends on whether or not the specific area has passed. The small hit types of "J" or "Time saving K" will be won at the same rate (that is, 50%). In addition, when the small hit is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the time reduction limit is reached, "small hit B", "time reduction J" or "time reduction K" is selected depending on whether or not the specific area has passed. Instead of, the small hit types of "time saving L" or "time saving M" will be won at the same ratio (that is, 50%).

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, the opening pattern of the variable winning device 65 and / or the small winning opening unit 73 when a big hit or a small hit is won will be described. FIG. 10 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a winning opening opening pattern table 202m. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable winning device 65 and / or the small winning opening unit 73 associated with each round are opened according to the winning big hit type or small hit type.

As shown in FIG. 10, in the winning opening opening pattern "X1" selected when the jackpot type "time saving A", "time saving B", "time saving C", "time saving D" or "time saving F" is won, From the first round to the third round, the variable winning device 65 is opened, and then the jackpot game ends.

Next, in the winning opening opening pattern "X2" selected when the jackpot type "time saving E" or "time saving G" is won, the variable winning device 65 is opened from the first round to the ninth round, and then the jackpot. The game is configured to end.

Next, in the winning opening opening pattern "Y1" selected when the small hit type "small hit A" or "small hit B" is won, the small winning opening unit 73 is opened in the first round, and then the small winning opening unit 73 is opened. It is configured so that the winning game ends and the big hit game does not start.

Next, in the winning opening opening pattern "Y2" selected when the small hit type "time saving H", "time saving I", "time saving J" or "time saving L" is won, the small winning opening unit is used in the first round. When 73 is opened and the ball passes through the specific area in the first round, the big hit game is started at the end of the small hit game. In the jackpot game, the variable winning device 65 is opened from the second round to the fourth round, and then the jackpot game ends.

Even if the winning opening opening / closing pattern "Y2" is initially selected for the small hit type, if the ball does not pass through the specific area in the first round during the small hit game, the above-mentioned winning opening The opening / closing pattern is "Y1", the jackpot game is not started, and the subsequent "time saving function" is not added, and the game shifts to the "normal game state". This is because, despite the small hit that the specific area is opened during the "time reduction state", the small hit game is ended without letting the ball win the specific area, and the second starting port 71 is won. A game in which a ball is won by another winning opening (for example, general winning opening 63) while continuing the "time reduction state" in which the auxiliary function is activated to prevent the loss of the ball. This is to prevent it. In particular, when a fraudulent act (so-called goto act) is performed in which a piano wire or a plastic piece is intruded from the outside of the pachinko machine 10 to create a situation in which a ball can be easily won in the other winning openings. Since it is easier to win prize balls by continuing the "time reduction state", as a countermeasure against these fraudulent acts, by ending the "time reduction state" based on the winning of the small hit game, as a game specification It is possible to prevent unintended payout of prize balls. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in addition to the number of fluctuations of each special symbol, when the small hit game is won 5 times in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, or in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. When the small hit game is won once, the time saving end condition is satisfied and the "time shortening state" ends. The details of the time saving end condition will be described later in the description of the time saving end condition table 202n in FIG.

Next, in the winning opening opening pattern "Y3" selected when the small hit type "time saving K" or "time saving M" is won, the small winning opening unit 73 is opened in the first round, and in the first round, the small winning opening unit 73 is opened. When the ball passes through the specific area, the big hit game is started at the end of the small hit game. In the jackpot game, the variable winning device 65 is opened from the second round to the tenth round, and then the jackpot game ends. Even if the winning opening opening / closing pattern "Y3" is initially selected for the small hit type, the ball passes through the specific area in the first round during the winning game, as in the winning opening opening pattern "Y2". If this is not done, the winning opening opening / closing pattern "Y1" is obtained, the jackpot game is not started, and the subsequent "time saving function" is not added, and the game shifts to the "normal game state".

Next, the jackpot opening table 202g will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the jackpot opening table 202g stored in the ROM 202. The jackpot opening table 202g is referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and based on the jackpot type at the time of the jackpot occurrence of each special symbol, the opening mode of the jackpot opening opening / closing plate 65a of the variable winning device 65, etc. (Number of rounds, maximum opening time, maximum number of winnings, number of winning balls) and the game state to be transferred after the big hit is specified.

As described above, in the jackpot opening table 202g, the opening mode and the like are classified based on the type of the special symbol and the jackpot type or the small hit type. Specifically, it is for "special figure 1" which is referred to when a big hit or a small hit is won in the first special symbol, and "special figure" which is referred to when a big hit or a small hit is won in the second special symbol. For 2 ”, the opening mode of the big winning opening opening / closing plate 65a, the game state to be transferred after the big hit is finished, and the like are specified.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the case of "Special Figure 1" of the jackpot opening table 202g, when the jackpot type "time saving A" is won, the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) is opened for 3 rounds. The maximum number of open seconds in one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is "14". Set to "pieces". Then, after the jackpot game of the jackpot type "time reduction A" is completed, if it is a jackpot in the "normal game state", it shifts to "normal game state A", while if it is a jackpot in the "time shortened state", it is "time". It shifts to the shortened state B ”.

Next, in the case of the jackpot opening table 202g for "Special Figure 1", when the jackpot type "time saving B" is won, the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) is opened for 3 rounds and 1 round. The maximum number of open seconds is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "14". NS. Then, after the jackpot game of the jackpot type "time reduction B" is completed, the jackpot in the "normal game state" shifts to the "time reduction state A", while the jackpot in the "time reduction state" shifts to the "time reduction state". It shifts to the shortened state B ”.

Next, in the case of the jackpot opening table 202g for "Special Figure 1", when the jackpot type "time saving C" is won, the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) is opened for 3 rounds and 1 round. The maximum number of open seconds is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "14". NS. Then, after the jackpot game of the jackpot type "time saving C" is completed, the time saving limit function is activated, so that the game shifts to the "normal gaming state B" regardless of the gaming state.

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 1" of the jackpot opening table 202g, the variable winning device 65 is conditioned on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area while the small winning opening unit 73 is open by winning the small hit type "time saving H". (Large winning opening) is opened over 3 rounds, the maximum number of open seconds in 1 round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of winnings in 1 round is set to "10", 1 The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of is set to "14". Then, after the big hit game of the small hit type "time reduction H" is completed, if it is a big hit in the "normal game state", it shifts to "time reduction state A", while if it is a big hit in the "time reduction state", it is " It shifts to the time reduction state B ”.

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 1" of the jackpot opening table 202g, the variable winning device 65 is conditioned on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area while the small winning opening unit 73 is open by winning the small hit type "time saving I". (Large prize opening) is opened for 3 rounds, the maximum number of open seconds for 1 round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of prizes for 1 round is set to "10". The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of is set to "14". Then, after the jackpot game of the small hit type "time saving I" is completed, the time saving limit function is activated, so that the game shifts to the "normal game state B" regardless of the game state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11, in the case of "Special Figure 2" of the jackpot opening table 202 g, when the jackpot type "time saving D" is won, the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) spans three rounds. The maximum number of open seconds in one round is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning. Is set to "14". Then, after the jackpot game of the jackpot type "time reduction D" is completed, the jackpot in the "normal game state" shifts to the "time reduction state A", while the jackpot in the "time reduction state" shifts to the "time reduction state". It shifts to the shortened state B ”.

Next, in the case of the jackpot opening table 202g for "Special Figure 2", when the jackpot type "time saving E" is won, the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) is opened for 9 rounds and 1 round. The maximum number of open seconds is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "14". NS. Then, after the jackpot game of the jackpot type "time reduction E" is completed, the jackpot in the "normal game state" shifts to the "time reduction state A", while the jackpot in the "time reduction state" shifts to the "time reduction state". It shifts to the shortened state B ”.

Next, in the case of the jackpot opening table 202g for "Special Figure 2", when the jackpot type "time saving F" is won, the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) is opened for 3 rounds and 1 round. The maximum number of open seconds is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "14". NS. Then, after the jackpot game of the jackpot type "time saving F" is completed, the time saving limit function is activated, so that the game shifts to the "normal gaming state B" regardless of the gaming state.

Next, in the case of the jackpot opening table 202g for "Special Figure 2", when the jackpot type "time saving G" is won, the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) is opened for 3 rounds and 1 round. The maximum number of open seconds is set to "30 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "14". NS. Then, after the jackpot game of the jackpot type "time saving G" is completed, the time saving limit function is activated, so that the game shifts to the "normal gaming state B" regardless of the gaming state.

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 2" of the jackpot opening table 202g, the variable winning device 65 is conditioned on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area while the small winning opening unit 73 is open by winning the small hit type "time saving J". (Large prize opening) is opened for 3 rounds, the maximum number of open seconds for 1 round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of prizes for 1 round is set to "10". The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of is set to "14". Then, after the big hit game of the small hit type "time saving J" is completed, if it is a big hit in the "normal game state", it shifts to "time reduction state A", while if it is a big hit in the "time reduction state", it is " It shifts to the time reduction state B ”.

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 2" of the jackpot opening table 202g, the variable winning device 65 is conditioned on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area while the small winning opening unit 73 is open by winning the small hit type "time saving K". (Large prize opening) is opened for 9 rounds, the maximum number of open seconds for 1 round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of prizes for 1 round is set to "10". The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of is set to "14". Then, after the big hit game of the small hit type "time reduction K" is completed, if it is a big hit in the "normal game state", it shifts to "time reduction state A", while if it is a big hit in the "time reduction state", it is " It shifts to the time reduction state B ”.

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 2" of the jackpot opening table 202g, the variable winning device 65 is conditioned on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area while the small winning opening unit 73 is open by winning the small hit type "time saving L". (Large prize opening) is opened for 3 rounds, the maximum number of open seconds for 1 round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of prizes for 1 round is set to "10". The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of is set to "14". Then, after the jackpot game of the small hit type "time saving L" is completed, the time saving limit function is activated, so that the game shifts to the "normal game state B" in any game state.

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 2" of the jackpot opening table 202g, the variable winning device 65 is conditioned on the condition that the ball passes through the specific area while the small winning opening unit 73 is open by winning the small hit type "time saving M". (Large prize opening) is opened for 9 rounds, the maximum number of open seconds for 1 round is set to "30 seconds", and the maximum number of prizes for 1 round is set to "10". The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the winning of is set to "14". Then, after the big hit game of the small hit type "time saving M" is completed, it is the time when the time saving limit function is activated, so that the game shifts to the "normal game state B" in any game state.

Next, the small hit opening table 202h will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the small hit opening table 202h stored in the ROM 202. The small hit opening table 202h is referred to at the time of the small hit of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the small prize opening opening / closing plate of the small winning opening unit 73 is based on the small hit type at the time of the small hit of each special symbol. The opening mode of 73a and the like (number of times of opening in one round, maximum opening time, maximum number of winnings, number of winning balls) are defined.

As described above, in the small hit opening table 202h, the opening mode and the like are classified based on the type of the special symbol and the small hit type. Specifically, for "special figure 1" referred to when a small hit is won in the first special symbol, and for "special figure 2" referred to when a small hit is won in the second special symbol. The opening mode of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and the gaming state to be shifted after the end of the big hit accompanying the passage of the specific area are defined.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the case of "Special Figure 1" of the small hit opening table 202h, when the small hit type "small hit A" is won, the small winning opening unit 73 (small winning opening) is one round. It is opened twice during, the maximum opening seconds of 1 opening is set to "0.1 seconds", and the closing time (that is, interval time) between 1 opening and the next opening is "1.2". It is set to "seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "1". Then, after the small hit game of the small hit type "small hit A" is completed, since the ball has not passed through the specific area, the game shifts to the "normal game state".

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 1" of the small hit opening table 202h, when the small hit type "time saving H" is won, the small winning opening unit 73 (small winning opening) is opened twice in one round. The maximum opening seconds of 1 opening is set to "0.1 seconds", and the closing time (that is, interval time) between the opening of 1 and the next opening is set to "1.2 seconds". The maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "1". Then, after the small hit game of the small hit type "time saving H" is completed, the game shifts to the big hit game (3 rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area, and it is before the time saving limit function is activated. "Time saving function" is given. It should be noted that the small hit type "time saving H" is configured so that the ball is difficult to pass or cannot pass depending on the opening mode of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and the specific area opening / closing plate 73d, so that it cannot be substantially generated. It is a hit type.

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 1" of the small hit opening table 202h, when the small hit type "time saving I" is won, the small winning opening unit 73 (small winning opening) is opened twice in one round. The maximum opening seconds of 1 opening is set to "0.1 seconds", and the closing time (that is, interval time) between the opening of 1 and the next opening is set to "1.2 seconds". The maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "1". Then, after the small hit game of the small hit type "time saving I" is completed, the game shifts to the big hit game (3 rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area, and the time saving limit function is activated. The "time saving function" is not added, and the game shifts to the "normal game state". As with the small hit type "time saving H", the small hit type "time saving I" is configured to make it difficult or impossible for the ball to pass depending on the opening mode of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and the specific area opening / closing plate 73d. , It is a small hit type that can not occur practically.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12, in the case of "Special Figure 2" of the small hit opening table 202h, when the small hit type "small hit B" is won, the small winning opening unit 73 (small winning opening) is used. It is opened 9 times during one round, the maximum opening seconds of 1 opening is set to "0.1 seconds", and the closing time (that is, interval time) between one opening and the next opening is ". It is set to "1.2 seconds", the maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "1". Then, after the small hit game of the small hit type "small hit B" is completed, since the ball has not passed through the specific area, the game shifts to the "normal game state".

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 2" of the small hit opening table 202h, when the small hit type "time saving J" is won, the small winning opening unit 73 (small winning opening) is opened 9 times in one round. The maximum opening seconds of 1 opening is set to "0.1 seconds", and the closing time (that is, interval time) between the opening of 1 and the next opening is set to "1.2 seconds". The maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "1". Then, after the small hit game of the small hit type "time saving J" is completed, the game shifts to the big hit game (3 rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area, and it is before the time saving limit function is activated. "Time saving function" is given.

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 2" of the small hit opening table 202h, when the small hit type "time saving K" is won, the small winning opening unit 73 (small winning opening) is opened 9 times in one round. The maximum opening seconds of 1 opening is set to "0.1 seconds", and the closing time (that is, interval time) between the opening of 1 and the next opening is set to "1.2 seconds". The maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "1". Then, after the small hit game of the small hit type "time saving K" is completed, the game shifts to the big hit game (9 rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area, and it is before the time saving limit function is activated. "Time saving function" is given.

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 2" of the small hit opening table 202h, when the small hit type "time saving L" is won, the small winning opening unit 73 (small winning opening) is opened 9 times in one round. The maximum opening seconds of 1 opening is set to "0.1 seconds", and the closing time (that is, interval time) between the opening of 1 and the next opening is set to "1.2 seconds". The maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "1". Then, after the small hit game of the small hit type "time saving L" is completed, the game shifts to the big hit game (3 rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area, and the time saving limit function is activated. The "time saving function" is not added, and the game shifts to the "normal game state".

Next, in the case of "Special Figure 2" of the small hit opening table 202h, when the small hit type "time saving M" is won, the small winning opening unit 73 (small winning opening) is opened 9 times in one round. The maximum opening seconds of 1 opening is set to "0.1 seconds", and the closing time (that is, interval time) between the opening of 1 and the next opening is set to "1.2 seconds". The maximum number of winnings in one round is set to "10", and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on one winning is set to "1". Then, after the small hit game of the small hit type "time saving M" is completed, the game shifts to the big hit game (9 rounds) based on the ball passing through the specific area, and the time saving limit function is activated. The "time saving function" is not added, and the game shifts to the "normal game state".

Here, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the opening / closing mode of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a by the small winning opening solenoid 73b based on the small winning of each special symbol, the detection mode of the ball in the small winning opening switch 73c, Opening / closing mode of the specific area opening / closing plate 73d by the specific area solenoid 73e, detection mode of the sphere in the specific area switch 73f, setting mode of the jackpot flag 203r (see FIG. 5) based on the detection of the sphere in the specific area switch 73f, etc. Will be explained. FIG. 13 shows the drive patterns of the small winning opening solenoid 73b and the specific area solenoid 73e when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the detection modes of the small winning opening switch 73c and the specific area switch 73f. It is a timing chart which showed the setting mode of a jackpot flag 203r. Further, FIG. 14 shows a drive pattern of the small winning opening solenoid 73b and the specific area solenoid 73e when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and a detection mode of the small winning opening switch 73c and the specific area switch 73f. It is a timing chart showing the setting mode of the jackpot flag 203r.

As shown in FIG. 13, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the small winning opening solenoid 73b is turned on twice in one round as a small hit game for "0.1 seconds". As a result, the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Then, while the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is open, the ball launched in the right-handed game flows into the small winning opening unit 73 and is detected by the small winning opening switch 73c.

When a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the specific area solenoid 73e is turned on "4 seconds" after the small winning opening solenoid 73b is started, and the specific area opening / closing plate 73d is closed. Although it shifts from the state to the open state, "2.6 seconds" after the small winning opening solenoid 73b is finally closed ("4 seconds" -first open "0.1 seconds" + interval time "1. Since it is opened in "2 seconds" + final opening "0.1 seconds" = "2.6 seconds"), the ball that has flowed into the small winning opening unit 73 does not flow down to the specific area side and is in a closed state. The upper surface of the specific region opening / closing plate 73d flows down to the discharge port 73g side and flows into the discharge port 73g.

Therefore, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the ball cannot (or is difficult) to flow into the small winning opening unit 73 while the specific area is open. It is configured so that a big hit game based on passing through a specific area in a small hit of a special symbol cannot occur (difficult to occur).

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 14, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the small winning opening solenoid 73b is used 9 times in one round as a small hit game for "0.1 seconds". Is turned on, and the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is displaced from the closed state to the open state. Then, while the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is open, the ball launched in the right-handed game flows into the small winning opening unit 73 and is detected by the small winning opening switch 73c.

When a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the specific area solenoid 73e is turned on "4 seconds" after the small winning opening solenoid 73b is started, and the specific area opening / closing plate 73d is closed. Even after the state is displaced from the state to the open state and the specific area solenoid 73e is turned on so that the ball can flow into the specific area, the small winning opening solenoid 73b is turned on a plurality of times (6 times in the first embodiment). Then, the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a is opened, so that the ball flowing into the small winning opening unit 73 flows down to the specific region side. Then, when the ball flowing down to the specific area is detected by the specific area switch 73f, the jackpot flag 203r is set to ON along with the detection.

Therefore, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the ball can flow into the small winning opening unit 73 while the specific area is open, so that the second special symbol can flow into the second special symbol. A big hit game based on passing through a specific area in a small hit is configured to occur.

In this way, it is possible to make different whether or not the ball passes through the specific area according to the special symbol won in the small hit, and to make different whether or not the big hit game based on the small hit occurs.

Next, the time saving end condition table 202n will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the time saving end condition table 202n stored in the ROM 202. The time saving end condition table 202n is referred to at the end of the jackpot game won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol (at the time of transition to the gaming state), and depends on the gaming state at the time when the jackpot is won. The end condition of the "time saving function" given in the above is specified for each game state.

The time saving end condition table 202n of the first embodiment is divided into before reaching the time saving limit, after reaching the time saving limit, and when the time saving limit is reached, and is classified according to the gaming state. Specifically, before reaching the time saving limit or after reaching the time saving limit, the jackpot is for "normal gaming state A" and "normal gaming state B", which is referred to when the jackpot is won in "normal gaming state A". For "normal game state B" which is referred to when winning, and for "time saving state A / B" which is referred to when a big hit is won in "time saving state A" or "time saving state B". , The end condition of "time saving function" is set. Further, when the time saving limit is reached, the end condition of the "time saving function" is set for the "time saving state B" which is referred to when the jackpot is won in the "time saving state B". When the time saving limit is reached, at least the "time saving function" is continuously granted a plurality of times, so that it is not referred to in the "time saving state A" or the "normal game state". There is no provision for "shortened state A" or "normal game state".

The "time saving function" of the first embodiment is obtained by deriving the jackpot lottery result in any of the special symbols, or by satisfying any one of the plurality of time saving end conditions shown below. It is configured to exit. Specific time-saving end conditions include "special figure 1 time-saving number of times" indicating the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed after the jackpot ends, and the number of times the second special symbol is dynamically displayed after the jackpot ends. "Special figure 2 time reduction number of times" and "Special figure 1 and special figure 2 total time reduction number of times" indicating the total number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol after the end of the big hit, and the end of the big hit "Special figure 1 small hit" indicating the number of times the small winning opening unit 73 is operated (opened) based on the winning of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol later, and the second special symbol after the big hit is completed. "Special figure 2 small hit" is defined, which indicates the number of times the small winning opening unit 73 is operated (opened) based on the winning of the small hit game in the dynamic display.

First, as shown in FIG. 15, when the jackpot type "time reduction A" is executed in the "normal game state A" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the "time reduction function" is not given in the first place. "Special figure 1 time reduction number", "Special figure 2 time reduction number" and "Special figure 1 / special figure 2 total time reduction number" are all set to "0 times", and "Special figure 1 small hit" is "5 times". , "Special figure 2 small hit" is set to "1 time".

If the jackpot type "time saving A" is executed in the "normal game state A" before reaching the time saving limit or after reaching the time saving limit, the "time saving function" is not given, but "5 in the special figure 1 small hit". The values of "1 time" are set for "times" and "special figure 2 small hit". This means that when the big hit game is completed, regardless of whether the "time saving function" is given, and regardless of the big hit type or the small hit type (excluding "small hit A" and "small hit B"). By configuring to set the time saving end condition based on the number of small hits, it is possible to standardize the processing without determining the big hit type or the small hit type after the big hit ends, so that the main controller 110 at the end of the big hit It is possible to reduce the control burden of.

In addition, by setting the time saving end condition by "special figure 2 small hit" to "1 time", when the small hit of the second special symbol is won, "time saving" regardless of whether or not the ball passes through the specific area. The "function" can be terminated. With this configuration, even though the small hit of the second special symbol was won in the "time reduction state", the ball is not intentionally passed through the specific area, and the "time reduction state" is continued, and other While maintaining the state of the winning assistance function to the second starting port 71 until just before the time saving end condition is satisfied, an attempt is made to win a ball in another winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 63) to obtain a winning ball. It is possible to prevent games to be played.

Next, in the "normal game state A" before reaching the time saving limit or after reaching the time saving limit, the jackpot type "time saving B", "time saving D" or "time saving E", or the small hit type "time saving J", "time saving K" Or, when "Time saving H" is executed, "Special figure 1 time saving number" is "7 times", "Special figure 2 time saving number" is "1 time", and "Special figure 1 and special figure 2 total time saving number" is It is set to "7 times", "special figure 1 small hit" is set to "5 times", and "special figure 2 small hit" is set to "1 time".

Therefore, in the "normal game state A" before reaching the time saving limit or after reaching the time saving limit, the jackpot type "time saving B", "time saving D" or "time saving E", or the small hit type "time saving J", "time saving K" Alternatively, when "time saving H" is executed, the "time saving function" given after the jackpot ends is that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed seven times or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 1 Whether it is executed times, the dynamic display of the 1st special symbol and the dynamic display of the 2nd special symbol are executed 7 times in total, or the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the 1st special symbol. The small winning opening unit 73 based on is operated (opened) five times, or the small winning opening unit 73 based on winning the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is operated (opened) once. The "time saving function" is configured to end when any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, after the "time saving function" is completed, if the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol remains, the game shifts to the "normal game state B", and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed. If the number of reserved balls does not remain, the game shifts to "normal game state A".

Therefore, in the "normal game state A" before reaching the time saving limit or after reaching the time saving limit, the jackpot type "time saving B", "time saving D" or "time saving E", or the small hit type "time saving J", "time saving K" Alternatively, the "time reduction state A" based on the "time reduction H" is a game state in which the right-handed game is encouraged, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol has priority over the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Therefore, the time saving end condition based on the fact that the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the winning of the second starting port 71 is executed once is easily satisfied.

In the "time reduction state (both" time reduction state A "and" time reduction state B ")", the left-handed game is performed without performing the right-handed game, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. Since the game aiming at the jackpot by the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not encouraged as a game specification, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is the maximum number of reserved balls or more in the "time reduction state" (first). In the embodiment, the "time saving function" is configured to end even when it is executed 7 times).

Next, when the jackpot type "time saving D" or "time saving E" or the small hit type "time saving J" or "time saving K" is executed in the "normal game state B" before reaching the time saving limit or after reaching the time saving limit. , "Special figure 1 time reduction number" is set to "7 times", "Special figure 2 time reduction number" is set to "1 time", "Special figure 1 and special figure 2 total time reduction number" is set to "7 times", and "Special figure 2 time reduction number" is set to "Special figure 2 time reduction number". "Fig. 1 small hit" is set to "5 times", and "special figure 2 small hit" is set to "1 time".

Therefore, when the jackpot type "time saving D" or "time saving E" or the small hit type "time saving J" or "time saving K" is executed in the "normal game state B" before reaching the time saving limit or after reaching the time saving limit. , The "time saving function" given after the jackpot ends is whether the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed seven times, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once, or the first special symbol. The dynamic display of the second special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed 7 times in total, or the small winning opening unit 73 based on winning the small hit game in the dynamic display of the 1st special symbol is executed 5 times. One condition is either activated (opened) or the small winning opening unit 73 based on winning the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is activated (opened) once. It is configured so that the "time saving function" ends when it is established. Then, after the "time saving function" is completed, if the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol remains, the game shifts to the "normal game state B" again, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed. If the number of reserved balls does not remain, the game shifts to "normal game state A".

Therefore, in the "normal game state B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D" or "time reduction E" or the small hit type "time reduction J" or "time reduction K" is used for "time reduction". The "state A" is a gaming state in which the right-handed game is encouraged, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the first special symbol. It is configured so that the time saving end condition based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the winning of 71 is executed once is easily satisfied.

Next, in the "time reduction state A / B" before reaching the time reduction limit or after reaching the time reduction limit, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or the small hit type "time reduction" When "J", "Time saving K" or "Time saving H" is executed, "Special figure 1 time saving number" is "100 times", "Special figure 2 time saving number" is "100 times", "Special figure 1 / special FIG. 2 “Total time reduction number” is set to “100 times”, “Special figure 1 small hit” is set to “5 times”, and “Special figure 2 small hit” is set to “1 time”.

Therefore, in the "time reduction state A / B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or the small hit type "time reduction" When "J", "Time saving K" or "Time saving H" is executed, the "Time saving function" given after the jackpot ends is that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times or the second special. Whether the dynamic display of the symbol is executed 100 times, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total, or in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. The small winning opening unit 73 based on winning the small hit game is operated (opened) five times, or the small winning opening unit 73 based on winning the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 1. The "time saving function" is configured to end when any one of the conditions is satisfied, that is, the operation (opening) is performed. Then, after the "time saving function" is completed, if the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol remains, the game shifts to the "normal game state B" again, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed. If the number of reserved balls does not remain, the game shifts to "normal game state A".

Therefore, in the "time reduction state A / B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or the small hit type "time reduction" The "time reduction state B" based on "J", "time reduction K" or "time reduction H" is a game state in which right-handed games are encouraged, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the first special symbol. Since the small hit probability of the second special symbol is 2715/10000, the second special symbol is executed before the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times. It is configured so that small hits are extremely easy to appear in the dynamic display of. As a result, the time saving end condition based on the operation (opening) of the small winning opening unit 73 based on the small hit winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is easily satisfied.

Next, in the "time reduction state B" when the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction F", "time reduction G" or "time reduction C", or the small hit type "time reduction L", "time reduction M" or "time reduction I" When is executed, the time saving limit function is activated, so "Special figure 1 time saving number" is "0 times", "Special figure 2 time saving number" is "0 times", "Special figure 1 and special figure 2 total time saving" The "number of times" is set to "0 times", the "special figure 1 small hit" is set to "5 times", and the "special figure 2 small hit" is set to "1 time".

With this configuration, during the "time reduction state A", by winning a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol, a time saving number of times extremely larger than the small hit probability of the second special symbol is given. It is possible to shift to the "shortened state B", and if the big hit or the small hit is won again in the special symbol in the "time shortened state B", it is possible to shift to the "time shortened state B" again and the big hit. It is possible to continuously grant the consecutive villas until the time saving limit function is activated.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, a gaming mode in each gaming state in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a transition condition of the gaming state in each gaming state, and a transition destination will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing a launch mode in each game state and a transition destination of the game state based on the winning jackpot type, small hit type, and the like. Further, FIG. 17 shows the transition to the game state, the jackpot probability of the special symbol, the hit probability of the normal symbol, the recommended ball launch mode, the main winning destination, and the fluctuation time of the first special symbol in each game state. , The fluctuation time of the second special symbol, the special symbol that is likely to be stopped first, and the right-handed possibility. Note that, in FIG. 16, the transition of the gaming state when the game is played in the non-recommended firing mode is also shown, but the description thereof will be omitted here for convenience of explanation.

First, as shown in FIG. 16, the transition to the "normal game state A" is triggered by the initial state at the time of shipment from the factory and the RAM clear state, and the big hit type by the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "normal game state A". When the "time saving A" is won, or when all the dynamic display of the second special symbol held in the "normal game state B" is executed, the process shifts to the "normal game state A" (Fig.). 16).

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, in the "normal game state A", as described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the low probability state, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is also in the low probability state. Further, in the "normal game state A", the left-handed game is encouraged, and the ball launched in the left-handed game mainly wins the first starting port 64. Then, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the first special symbol is performed in the range of "5 seconds to 190 seconds", and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the second special symbol is also "5 seconds to 190 seconds". (See FIGS. 18 to 24 described later). In this "normal game state A", when a right-handed game is performed, the firing mode is detected by a through gate 67 or the like, and the firing in the right-handed game is suppressed based on the detection. The voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5) or the like is configured to execute the right-handed prohibition notification.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16, the opportunity to shift to the "time reduction state A" is when the jackpot type "time reduction B" is won in the "normal game state A" or the jackpot type in the "normal game state B". Alternatively, when the small hit types "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction J", and "time reduction K" are won, the process shifts to the "time reduction state A" (see FIG. 16).

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, in the "time reduction state A", as described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the low probability state, while the hit probability of the normal symbol is in the high probability state. Further, in the "time reduction state A", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball launched in the right-handed game mainly wins the second starting port 71. Then, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the second special symbol is "3 seconds (at the time of loss), 50 seconds (at the time of big hit)", and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the second special symbol is "3 seconds (at the time of loss), 50 seconds (at the time of big hit)". It takes 40 to 50 seconds (see FIGS. 18 to 24 described later). In the "time reduction state A", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the right-handed suggestion notification for prompting the right-handed game is executed by the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5). It is configured to be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16, the opportunity to shift to the "time reduction state B" is the jackpot type or the small hit type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction J", "time reduction J" in the "time reduction state A". If you win "Time saving K", or if you win the big hit type or small hit type "Time saving D", "Time saving E", "Time saving J", "Time saving K" in "Time saving state B", "Time saving K" It shifts (again) to the shortened state B (see FIG. 16).

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, in the "time reduction state B", as described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the low probability state, while the hit probability of the normal symbol is in the high probability state. Further, in the "time reduction state B", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the ball launched in the right-handed game mainly wins the second starting port 71. Then, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the second special symbol is set to "15 seconds (in either case)", and the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of 1 of the second special symbol is "3 seconds to 15". It is performed in "seconds" (see FIGS. 18 to 24 described later). In the "time reduction state B", the right-handed game is encouraged, and the right-handed suggestion notification for prompting the right-handed game is executed by the third symbol display device 81 and the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 5). It is configured to be.

Next, as shown in FIG. 16, the transition to the "normal game state B" is triggered by the activation of the time reduction limit function in the "time reduction state B" to obtain the big hit type or the small hit type "time reduction F", "time reduction G", and so on. When "Time saving L" and "Time saving M" are won, and when the end condition of "Time saving function" is satisfied in "Time saving state A" (that is, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is 7 times, the second special The dynamic display of the symbol is 1 time, the total number of dynamic display of the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol is 7 times, the small hit of the 1st special symbol is 5 times, or the small hit of the 2nd special symbol is When either of the 1 times is satisfied) or when the end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied in the "time reduction state B" (that is, the dynamic display of the 1st special symbol is 100 times and the 2nd special symbol is satisfied. The dynamic display of the first special symbol is 100 times, the total number of dynamic displays of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is 100 times, the small hit of the first special symbol is 5 times, or the small hit of the second special symbol is 1. When any of the times is established), the state shifts to the "normal game state B".

Further, as shown in FIG. 17, in the "normal game state B", as described above, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is in the low probability state, and the hit probability of the normal symbol is also in the low probability state. Further, in the "normal game state B", since the game result of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is awaited, the right-handed notification lamp 37c (see FIG. 3) is not lit and the left-handed game is encouraged. However, in the third symbol display device 81 and the like, none of the launch modes is encouraged. Then, when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the process shifts to the "normal game state A", so that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is not executed and the dynamic display of 1 of the second special symbol is executed. The fluctuation time is "60 seconds to 70 seconds" (see FIGS. 18 to 24 described later).

With this configuration, if the ball passes through a specific area based on the big hit or the small hit while the "time saving function" is given, the small hit can be substantially won. It is possible to shift to the "time reduction state B" in which the number of time reductions corresponding to the number of fluctuations is given.

Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state A", the jackpot type "time reduction B" is won, and in the "time reduction state A" given after the end of the jackpot, the jackpot or the small hit is made in the second special symbol. By winning, the game state after the big hit can be shifted to the "time reduction state B". Then, in the "time reduction state B", by winning the big hit or the small hit in the second special symbol again, the game state after the big hit can be shifted to the "time reduction state B" again.

Therefore, if the ball passes through a specific area based on the big hit or the small hit while the "time saving function" is granted, it is based on the small hit winning until the time saving limit function is activated. It is possible to generate a big hit. Therefore, by winning a big hit or a small hit while the "time saving function" is given, it is possible to create a state in which the game value is substantially guaranteed by continuous big hits. It is possible to create playability and improve the interest of the game.

Further, for example, in the "normal game state A", the jackpot type "time reduction B" is won, and in the "time reduction state A" given after the jackpot ends, the jackpot or the big hit or in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed If a small hit occurs and all four reserved second special symbols at that time generate a big hit or a small hit, the first and second reserved symbols are reserved. The time saving limit function is activated by the big hit or small hit of the special symbol, and once it shifts to the "normal game state B", the "time" is again by the big hit or small hit of the second special symbol held in the third. It becomes the shortened state A ”. Then, since the fourth special big hit or small hit of the second special symbol is the big hit or small hit in the "time reduction state A" having the "time saving function", after that, the "time reduction state B" is performed again. , And the big hit or small hit is substantially guaranteed until the time saving limit function is activated again. Therefore, in the "normal game state A", the jackpot type "time saving B" is won, and in the "time shortening state A" given after the jackpot ends, the jackpot or the small hit is performed in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed. If, and all four reserved second special symbols at that time generate a big hit or a small hit, the execution is performed during the dynamic display of the second special symbol that is being executed for the first time. The jackpot or small hit in the dynamic display of the four reserved second special symbols, including the jackpot of the jackpot type "time saving B" by the second special symbol in the middle, and the dynamic of the second special symbol to be reserved in the future In the display, until the time saving limit function is activated, that is, the remaining two big hits or small hits are substantially guaranteed. That is, in the "time reduction state A", a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol during the execution of the dynamic display of the first second special symbol, and four are held at that time. If all of the 2nd special symbols are big hits or small hits, a total of 7 big hits or small hits including 2 unheld hits (hereinafter, may be referred to as "7 consecutive hits"). It is possible to give a look-ahead notice of the occurrence of Since it can be recognized, it is possible to create new playability and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description of various counters will be continued. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to, for example, add "1" in order within the range of "0 to 99", reach the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then return to "0".

In the first embodiment, the fluctuation effect at the time of big hit, small hit, and loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is roughly determined by the number of held fluctuation effects and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. The production mode is selected. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a long pattern (hereinafter, may be referred to as “long”) in which a relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected for each production mode and a fluctuation time shorter than the long pattern are used. Is fixed to a middle pattern (hereinafter, may be referred to as "middle") in which is easily selected and a short pattern (hereinafter, may be referred to as "short") in which a fluctuation time shorter than the middle pattern is easily selected. A special fluctuation pattern (hereinafter, may be referred to as "special fluctuation") in which a specific fluctuation time is selected is prepared.

Specifically, "non-reach (long)" production mode in which "reach display" does not occur, "non-reach (middle)" or "non-reach (short)" production mode, and "normal reach" as "reach display" A "normal reach" effect mode in which only the variable element is executed, a "super reach" effect mode in which the variable element of the "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of the "normal reach", and a variation of the "normal reach" as well. A "special reach" effect mode in which a variable element of "special reach" is executed by developing from an element, a "special variation 1" effect mode in which a fixed effect is executed in a predetermined game state, and a "special variation" Five effect modes are selected: 2 "effect mode or" special variation 3 "effect mode.

Here, each effect mode will be described in detail. Among the production modes, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (middle)" production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode (hereinafter, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (long)" production mode, "non-reach (long)" production mode The "reach (middle)" production mode and the "non-reach (short)" production mode may be collectively referred to as the "non-reach" production mode). In the third symbol display device 81 in which the columns Z1 to Z3 fluctuate, after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" that shuffles each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 at high speed is performed, the second symbol row Z1 that stops first. This is an effect mode in which the same third symbol does not stop in Z3 and "reach display" does not occur.

The fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" is, for example, the third symbol displayed in each symbol row Z1 to Z3 (see FIG. 4) in the fluctuation effect of the third symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81. , A variable element that is scrolled vertically downward on the display screen at high speed. In this "high-speed fluctuation", the third symbol is changed so that the player cannot clearly recognize the display content of the third symbol, and the stop result of the fluctuation effect displayed last time is irregularly mixed (shuffled). Is executed.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, a specific production mode ("non-reach (middle)" production mode and "non-reach (short)" production mode) is excluded. It is configured so that the fluctuation element of "slow fluctuation" is performed.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element means that in the third symbol fluctuation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81, after the above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element, the third symbol is slowed down at a speed visible to the player. A variable element that scrolls to. In the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation", each symbol row Z1 to Z3 is stopped and displayed in order while causing the player to recognize the display content of the third symbol. If the same third symbol stops in the 2 symbol rows (for example, left symbol row Z1 and right symbol row Z3 (see FIG. 4)) that are stopped and displayed first, it is assumed that "reach display" has occurred and "normal reach" is displayed. While developing into a variable element, if a different third symbol stops in the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that are stopped and displayed first, the remaining symbol row Z2 is stopped and displayed, and the fluctuation effect is ended. It is configured in. The details of the variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" or each variable element including the variable element of "low-speed fluctuation" will be described later.

Therefore, in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, then the "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are stopped in order. A different third symbol stops in the two symbol rows Z1 and Z3 that stop first, the remaining one symbol row Z2 stops, and the variation effect of 1 ends. On the other hand, in the "non-reach (middle)" production mode or the "non-reach (short)" production mode, the fluctuation element of the "low speed fluctuation" is not performed after the "high speed fluctuation" is performed, and the fluctuation of the "high speed fluctuation" is performed. After the end of the element, each symbol row Z1 to Z3 stops at the same time, and a third symbol different from the second symbol rows Z1 and Z3 (for example, the second symbol row that stops first in the "non-reach (long)" effect mode). Stops, the other symbol row Z2 also stops, and the variation effect of 1 ends.

Among the effect modes, the "normal reach" effect mode means that in the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81, the same third symbol is stopped in the second symbol rows Z1 and Z3 to be stopped and displayed first. Immediately after, the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, and it is one of the production modes of "reach display" that does not develop into other "reach display", that is, the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". be.

Among the production modes, the "super reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable element of "super reach" is executed by developing from the variable element of "normal reach".

Among the production modes, the "special reach" production mode is one of the "reach display" production modes in which the variable elements of the "special reach" are executed by developing from the variable elements of the "normal reach".

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31)). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64, the jackpot random number counter C1 in the first hold first to fourth areas provided in the first hold ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first start port 64 is set. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 of the first hold area to be stored. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second start port 71, the jackpot random number counter C1 in the second hold first to fourth areas provided in the second hold ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second start port 71 is set. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 of the second hold area to be stored.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 has a stop pattern selection counter C3 according to whether or not the variation effect is correct, the current game state, and the number of variation effects (number of reserved balls) of each special symbol currently pending. The stop pattern table 202e that refers to the value is configured differently. That is, a plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202e are provided, and are configured to be selected according to the number of fluctuation effects (number of reserved balls) of both special symbols on standby.

Further, in the first embodiment, when determining a detailed variation pattern of the variation effect, first, based on the hold number table 202d provided in the ROM 202, the appropriateness of the variation effect, the current gaming state, and the current gaming state. Any stop pattern table 202e corresponding to the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls) is selected. Then, the effect mode, which is a rough mode of the variation effect, is selected based on the selected stop pattern table 202e and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. After that, a detailed fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) of the fluctuation effect is determined based on the selected effect mode and the value of the variation type counter CS1 described later.

The plurality of types of stop pattern tables 202e are set so that the range of random values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 in which the effect mode is selected for each stop pattern table 202e is different. A plurality of the stop pattern tables 202e are prepared in order to change the selection ratio of the effect mode of the variation effect according to the success or failure of the variation effect, the game state, and the number of reserved balls. That is, (1) a big hit occurs in the fluctuation effect of the acquired third symbol, or (2) the current gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is "normal gaming state A", "normal gaming state B", or "time shortened state". This is to change the selection ratio of the effect mode depending on whether it is "A" or "time reduction state B" and (3) how many balls are reserved for the variable effect. ..

This is because, as the first reason, the degree of expectation that becomes a big hit is changed for each production mode. That is, depending on whether the jackpot lottery is won, the small hit lottery is won, or the jackpot lottery is lost, the stop pattern, that is, the "non-reach" production mode, the "normal reach" production mode, or the "super reach" production mode , And, by configuring so that the selection ratio of the "special reach" effect mode is different, a big hit or a small hit (limited to the dynamic display of the second special symbol. The same shall apply hereinafter) for each effect mode. Change the degree of expectation. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot lottery is won, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode are easily selected, and when the jackpot lottery is not won, the "non-reach" production is performed. It is configured so that the mode and the "normal reach" production mode can be easily selected.

With this configuration, the "super reach" production mode and the "special reach" production mode can be easily hit by a big hit or a small hit, and the "normal reach" production mode and the "non-reach" production mode can be set. It is possible to make a big hit or a small hit difficult production or a big hit or a small hit non-small hit production, and it is possible to differentiate the big hit expectation degree or the small hit expectation degree for each production mode. Therefore, when a big hit or a small hit easily appears in the variable effect, the player is informed that there is a high possibility that a big hit or a small hit will occur while the big hit or the small hit easy effect is performed. It suggests and enhances the interest of the game.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, specifically, when the acquired lottery result is a big hit or a small hit, it is easy to select an effect that makes it easy to make a big hit or a small hit, and it is difficult to make a big hit or a small hit. Based on the stop pattern table 202e, which makes it difficult to select the effect, the effect mode (stop pattern), which is a rough content of the variable effect, is selected. On the other hand, if the acquired lottery result is a loss or a small hit (limited to the dynamic display of the first special symbol. The same shall apply hereinafter), it is difficult to select a big hit or a small hit, and it is difficult to select a big hit or a small hit. It is configured to select the effect mode (stop pattern) of the variable effect based on the stop pattern table 202e, which makes it easy to select the effect that is difficult to hit. As a result, when notifying the player of the lottery result of the third symbol in the variable effect, if an effect that is easy to make a big hit or a small hit is executed, a big hit or a small hit is likely to occur in the variable effect, and a big hit. Alternatively, when an effect that is difficult to make a small hit is executed, it is difficult for a large hit or a small hit to occur in the variable effect, and a difference is provided in the expected value of the big hit or the expected value of the small hit for each effect mode (stop pattern). , It is possible to enhance the interest of the game during the execution of the fluctuation production.

Further, as the second reason, the ball enters the first starting port 64 in a state where the number of times of waiting for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol has reached the upper limit, or the second special (in the "time reduction state B"). This is to reduce as much as possible waste balls (so-called no lottery of special symbols due to overflow winning) based on the entry of balls into the second starting port 71 when the number of waiting times for the symbol variation effect has reached the upper limit.

Specifically, the number of times of waiting for the variation effect of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is set to a maximum of 4 times, respectively, and the variation effect is executed for at least a certain period of time. In the gaming state in which the ball easily enters the second starting port 71 in the "shortened state", it is easy to reach the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. In this game state, if a fluctuation effect with a long fluctuation time is selected, balls entering the second starting port 71 frequently occur when the maximum number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached, and the second starting port 71 is bent. Despite entering the ball, the lottery opportunity for the second special symbol cannot be obtained. In addition, even in the "normal game state", if a variation effect having a long fluctuation time is selected while the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol has been reached, the first special symbol is reserved during the execution of the variation effect. Since the number of balls is not digested, even if a ball enters the first starting port 64 during that time, the lottery opportunity for the first special symbol cannot be obtained. In such a state, the player determines that the game value cannot be obtained even if the ball is put into the first starting port 64, and the fluctuation effect is digested and the number of reserved balls can be obtained again. The ball is stopped from firing until the game is interrupted. If the game is interrupted, the operating rate of the pachinko machine 10 will decrease, which will affect the management of the game hall.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the gaming state in which the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or the second special symbol) can be easily reached, or the number of reserved balls is close to (or matches) the maximum number of reserved balls. The number of reserved balls is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202e, which makes it easy to select a short variation time. As a result, it is possible to suppress the entry of balls into the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 when the maximum number of reserved balls of the third symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) has been reached. can.

Further, the third reason is that the execution time is set to be long and the end of the variation effect is delayed, so that the state in which the variation effect is executed is maintained for a long time. Specifically, when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is small (not present), a ball is newly inserted into either the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 within the fluctuation time of the variable effect being executed. If the ball is not made, the next variation effect cannot be started, and the demo screen or the like must be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. If the player does not perform the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 even though the ball is fired to play the game, the player can obtain the interest related to the jackpot lottery that the player is looking for. Instead, I get excited about the game. Further, the player recognizes that the pachinko machine 10 is difficult for the ball to enter the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 because the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81. There is a risk that the pachinko machine 10 will stop playing on the pachinko machine 10 because it is determined that it is difficult to obtain the game value.

Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured to select the effect mode of the variation effect based on the stop pattern table 202e, which makes it easy to select a long variation time when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is small. There is. As a result, the situation in which the variation effect is not performed in the third symbol display device 81 is unlikely to occur, and the execution state of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained for a long time.

Further, as the fourth reason, when the player enters the "time reduction state A" from the "normal game state A" through the jackpot, the "triple acquisition challenge production (see FIG. 61)" described later is executed after the jackpot game. However, immediately after the jackpot ends, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed instead of the state in which the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stored. Here, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed for a long period of time (for example, "15 seconds"), the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is increased during the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Even if it is stored, the above "triple acquisition challenge production" cannot be started until the dynamic display of the first special symbol is completed, and the "triple acquisition challenge" is completed until the dynamic display of the first special symbol is completed. It is necessary to wait for the execution of the "directing", and the game may be delayed, and the player may be awakened to the game.

Therefore, when the player enters the "time reduction state A" from the "normal game state A" via the big hit, when the loss or the small hit is derived by the dynamic display of the first special symbol, it is fixed and in small steps. After the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is stored while the dynamic display of the first special symbol is being executed by performing the variable number of seconds (“3 seconds” in the first embodiment). , It becomes possible to start the "triple acquisition challenge production" based on the execution of the dynamic display of the second special symbol relatively early. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by preventing the game from being delayed and suppressing the player from being awakened to the game.

Further, as the fifth reason, as described above, when the player enters the "time reduction state A" from the "normal game state A" through the jackpot, the "triple acquisition challenge effect" described later after the jackpot game (see FIG. 61). ) ”Is executed, but immediately after the jackpot ends, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed instead of the state in which the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stored. Here, when a jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the "triple acquisition challenge effect" executed based on the dynamic display of the second special symbol is a fixed number of seconds (first). In the embodiment, it is performed in "60 seconds" or "70 seconds (re-variation amount)"), but when a jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed. If the number of fluctuating seconds (for example, "120 seconds", "30 seconds", etc.) that deviates from the time of is selected, it will be different from the fluctuating time (scale) of the "triple acquisition challenge production", so the first special symbol It is necessary to prepare a special effect pattern for a big hit in the dynamic display of the game, which may increase the development man-hours for creating the effect pattern, increase the processing load of selecting the effect pattern, or complicate the effect content.

Therefore, when the player enters the "time reduction state A" from the "normal game state A" through a jackpot, the fixed "triple" is used regardless of which lottery result is derived in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. In addition to configuring so that "acquisition challenge production" is selected, even if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is a big hit, select the same fluctuation time as "triple acquisition challenge production" and select "triple acquisition challenge production". ”, It is configured to show that the jackpot of the first special symbol is derived. With this configuration, the jackpot effect of the first special symbol and the effect content of the second special symbol when entering the "time reduction state A" are made equivalent, and the special for the first special symbol is made. Since it is not necessary to prepare the production pattern, the man-hours for developing the production pattern can be reduced, the processing burden of selecting the production pattern can be reduced, and the production content is clarified and understood by the player. Easy playability can be realized.

Here, the details of the hold number table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18A is a diagram schematically showing a reserved number table 202d1 for special figure 1 corresponding to the first special symbol, and FIG. 18B is a diagram for special figure 2 corresponding to the second special symbol. It is a hold number table 202d2.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the first start port 64, whether or not the variation effect is correct and the effect thereof are determined. Refer to the reservation number table 202d1 for special figure 1 based on the game state at the time point and the total number of hold points of the variation effect of the first special symbol at that time point, and select one of the stop pattern tables 202e1 to 202e8. It is configured. Further, when the variation effect of the second special symbol is performed based on the ball entering the second starting port 71, the appropriateness of the variation effect, the game state at that time, and the second special at that time are also performed. It is configured to refer to the reservation number table 202d2 for special figure 2 based on the total number of reservations of the symbol variation effect and select one of the stop pattern tables 202e1 to 202e8. Then, a rough effect mode of the variation effect is determined based on any one of the selected stop pattern tables 202e1 to 202e8 and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3.

Specifically, as shown in the reserved number table 202d1 for the special figure 1 of FIG. 18A, the total number of reserved balls is "1" at the time of the loss extraction or the small hit extraction of the "normal game state A". In the case of "3 to 3", A table 202e1 (see FIG. 19A) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected. Further, when the loss extraction or the small hit extraction of the "normal game state A" is performed and the total number of reserved balls is "4", the B table 202e2 of the stop pattern table 202e (see FIG. 19B). ) Is selected. On the other hand, at the time of extracting the jackpot in the "normal game state A", the C table 202e3 (see FIG. 20A) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202d1 for special figure 1 of FIG. 18A, the stop pattern table is used regardless of the number of reserved balls at the time of loss extraction or small hit extraction in the “time reduction state A”. The D table 202e4 of 202e (see FIG. 20B) is selected. On the other hand, at the time of extracting the jackpot in the "time reduction state A", the E table 202e5 (see FIG. 21A) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202d1 for special figure 1 of FIG. 18A, the stop pattern table is used regardless of the number of reserved balls at the time of loss extraction or small hit extraction in the “time reduction state B”. The F table 202e6 of 202e (see FIG. 21B) is selected. On the other hand, at the time of extracting the jackpot in the "time reduction state B", the G table 202e7 (see FIG. 22A) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

That is, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, in the "normal game state A", if the big hit is not won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol (that is, a loss or a small hit), the first at that time. It is configured to select A table 202e1 or B table 202e2 of the stop pattern table 202e based on the number of reserved balls of the special symbol. On the other hand, in the "normal game state A", when the jackpot is won by the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the C table 202e3 of the stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls and the game state at that time. It is configured to be.

Further, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, in the "time reduction state A" or the "time reduction state B", although it is not related to the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, each of them is based on the result. The D table 202e4, the E table 202e5, the F table 202e6, or the G table 202e7 of the fixedly corresponding stop pattern table 202e is configured to be selected.

In addition, when a big hit is won in the "normal game state A", or even in the "time reduction state A" or the "time reduction state B", the stop pattern table 202e is configured to be different depending on the number of reserved balls. May be good. For example, when the number of reserved balls is large when a big hit is won, the stop pattern table 202e may be configured so that a relatively short fluctuation pattern can be easily selected.

In this case, for example, in each effect mode in which the "reach display" is executed, it is configured to select an effect mode in which only the time of the variable element portion of the "high-speed fluctuation" is changed. With this configuration, for example, when the fluctuation effect is started with the maximum number of reserved balls of the first special symbol being four times, the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" can be set in a short time (for example, 5 seconds). Even if it is performed, at the time when the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" ends (when it is recognized as the fluctuation element of the short "high-speed fluctuation"), "reach display" may occur in the fluctuation production. Therefore, even when a short "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is performed, the "reach display" other than the "non-reach (middle)" production mode or the "non-reach (short)" production mode is executed. By configuring the aspect to be executed, it is possible to make it impossible to know whether the fluctuation effect is a big hit or a loss at the time of execution of the fluctuation element of the short "high-speed fluctuation".

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202d2 for special figure 2 of FIG. 18B, when the loss of the “normal game state A” is extracted and the total number of reserved balls is “1 to 3”. A table 202e1 (see FIG. 19A) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected. Further, when the loss of the "normal game state A" is extracted and the total number of reserved balls is "4", the B table 202e2 of the stop pattern table 202e (see FIG. 19B) is selected. .. On the other hand, at the time of the big hit extraction or the small hit extraction of the "normal game state A", the C table 202e3 (see FIG. 20A) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls. Since the dynamic display of the second special symbol is configured so as not to be substantially selected in the "normal game state A", the above A to C tables are executed when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. 202e1 to 202e3 are configured so that they cannot be referred to.

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202d2 for special figure 2 of FIG. 18B, in the “time reduction state A”, the E table of the stop pattern table 202e is displayed regardless of the lottery result and the number of reserved balls. 202e5 (see FIG. 21 (a)) is selected. This is because the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state A" is configured to perform the "triple acquisition challenge effect" described later, so that the lottery result and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol are performed. Regardless of the above, a fixed number of variable seconds (in the first embodiment, "60 seconds" or "70 seconds (when there is a re-variation)") is configured to be selected. Therefore, in the "time reduction state A", even when a jackpot is extracted in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the equivalent effect can be selected so that the first special symbol can be selected. Since it is not necessary to prepare a special production pattern, the man-hours for developing the production pattern can be reduced, the processing burden of selecting the production pattern can be reduced, and the production content is clarified for the player. It is possible to realize playability that is easy to understand.

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202d2 for special figure 2 of FIG. 18B, when the loss of the “time reduction state B” is extracted and the total number of reserved balls is “1”, the stop is stopped. The F table 202e6 (see FIG. 21B) of the pattern table 202e is selected. Further, when the loss of the "time reduction state B" is extracted and the total number of reserved balls is "2 to 4", the D table 202e4 of the stop pattern table 202e (see FIG. 20B) Be selected. On the other hand, at the time of the big hit extraction or the small hit extraction of the "time reduction state B", the G table 202e7 (see FIG. 22A) of the stop pattern table 202e is selected regardless of the number of reserved balls.

Next, as shown in the reserved number table 202d2 for special figure 2 of FIG. 18B, in the "normal game state B", the H table of the stop pattern table 202e is used for any lottery result and any number of reserved balls. 202e8 (see FIG. 22B) is selected. This is a dynamic display of the second special symbol performed after the "triple acquisition challenge production" described later fails in the "normal game state B", and is a small hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Since it is set to the probability (about 1 / 3.68), it is relatively possible that a small hit has occurred in the maximum number of reserved balls (that is, 4) in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is in a high state. Therefore, in order to make it easy for the player to understand the timing (interval) of whether or not to make a small hit (or big hit), the effect is performed for a fixed period, and the player is asked whether the small hit (or big hit) or the loss. By showing, it is possible to provide a production that is easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Next, each stop pattern table 202e will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22. FIG. 19A is a diagram schematically showing an example of A table 202e1 of the stop pattern table 202e, and FIG. 19B is a diagram schematically showing an example of B table 202e2 of the stop pattern table 202e. It is a figure. Further, FIG. 20A is a diagram schematically showing an example of C table 202e3 of the stop pattern table 202e, and FIG. 20B is a diagram schematically showing an example of D table 202e4 of the stop pattern table 202e. It is a figure shown. Further, FIG. 21A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the E table 202e5 of the stop pattern table 202e, and FIG. 21B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the F table 202e6 of the stop pattern table 202e. It is a figure shown. Further, FIG. 22A is a diagram schematically showing an example of the G table 202e7 of the stop pattern table 202e, and FIG. 22B is a diagram schematically showing an example of the H table 202e8 of the stop pattern table 202e. It is a figure shown.

As shown in FIG. 19A, in the A table 202e1 of the stop pattern table 202e, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each “non-reach (long)” effect mode is set to “0” to “74”. , The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95" to "95". It is set to "97", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98" and "99".

In addition, in A table 202e1, "non-reach (middle)" production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode, "special variation 1" production mode, "special variation 2" production mode, and "special variation 3" In the production mode (hereinafter, the "special variation 1" production mode, the "special variation 2" production mode, and the "special variation 3" production mode may be collectively referred to as the "special variation" production mode). On the other hand, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned, and the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "special variation" effect mode are not selected. Has been done.

Next, as shown in FIG. 19B, in the B table 202e2 of the stop pattern table 202e, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode is “0” to “74”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "normal reach" effect mode is set to "75" to "94", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is "95". The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is set to "98,99".

In the B table 202e2, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned to the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, and the "special variation" effect mode. However, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode and the "special variation" effect mode are not selected.

That is, in the A table 202e1, the "non-reach (long)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio. Further, in the B table 202e2, the "non-reach (middle)" production mode is 75%, the "normal reach" production mode is 20%, the "super reach" production mode is 3%, and the "special reach" production mode is 2%. It is set to be a selection ratio.

That is, in the A table 202e1, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, and in the B table 202e2, the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected instead of the "non-reach (long)" effect mode. It is configured as follows. On the other hand, in the A table 202e1 and the B table 202e2, each "reach display" is configured to be selected at the same ratio.

Therefore, the A table 202e1 and the B table 202e2 are selected so that only the "non-reach" effect mode is different from the "non-reach (long)" effect mode or the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode. It can be said that the A table 202e1 tends to have a relatively long fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation effect as compared with the B table 202e2. In other words, it can be said that the B table 202e2 tends to have a shorter variation time of the selected variation effect than the A table 202e1.

In this way, when the lottery result of the loss is extracted in the "normal game state A" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the effect mode of the variable effect is selected based on the number of reserved balls of the pending variable effect. Configure to. For example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the “non-reach (middle)” effect mode in which the variable effect time is relatively short is selected. As a result, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is large, the execution time of the variable effect to be executed is shortened and the number of times the variable effect is executed is increased, so that the execution efficiency of the variable effect can be improved.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls for the variable effect is small, the variable effect time is longer than the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in order to secure the ball entry time to the first starting port 64. Select the "non-reach (long)" production mode. As a result, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode, which has a longer variable effect time than when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected, can be performed, so that the ball enters the first starting port 64. By making it easier to secure time and increasing the possibility that a new start prize will be generated during the execution time of the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81, it is possible to maintain the situation in which the variation effect is being executed. ..

In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202e selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variation effect is configured to be different in the selection of the effect mode in the variation effect of the loss, but the first start port 64 Alternatively, substantially the same effect mode is selected between the determination of the variation effect based on the ball entering the second starting port 71 and the determination of the variation effect based on the start of the variation effect based on the entry. It is configured in.

Specifically, for example, in the case of a variable effect of loss, either A table 202e1 or B table 202e2 is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect. In the table 202e1 and the B table 202e2, a "non-reach (long)" production mode or a "non-reach (middle)" production mode, a "normal reach" production mode, a "super reach" production mode, or a "special reach" production mode The values of the stop pattern counters C3 assigned to are set to be the same.

That is, the only difference is whether the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected or the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected based on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, and the "non-reach" effect is selected. Substantially the same production mode is selected, only the time at which the production mode is selected is different. Therefore, the effect mode selected at the start winning and the effect mode selected at the start of the fluctuation are substantially the same (same type) even when the game state changes (for example, the number of reserved balls increases). The production mode of is selected. As a result, even when a pre-reading notice such as "pending change notice" is given based on the effect mode selected at the time of starting prize, the contents of the variable effect to be executed are substantially the same (same type), and the pre-reading is performed. In the variable effect that is the target of the advance notice, it is possible to execute an effect that does not cause a discrepancy with the content of the look-ahead notice.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20A, in the C table 202e3 of the stop pattern table 202e, the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the “normal reach” effect mode is set to “0” to “4”. The range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "super reach" effect mode is set to "5" to "39", and the range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to the "special reach" effect mode is "40" to "40" to "". It is set to "99".

Since the C table 202e3 is the stop pattern table 202e selected at the time of a big hit and the "reach display" always occurs, the "non-reach" effect mode is not selected. Further, in the C table 202e3, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is not assigned to the "special variation" effect mode, and the "special variation" effect mode is also set not to be selected.

Next, as shown in FIG. 20B, in the D table 202e4 of the stop pattern table 202e, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “non-reach (short)” effect mode (“0” to “0” to “ 99 ")," non-reach (long) "effect mode," non-reach (middle) "effect mode, other" reach display ", and" special variation "effect mode are assigned the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Not done. Therefore, when the first special symbol is lost or the small hit is extracted in the "time reduction state A", and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B" is "2 to 4". When extracting the loss in, it is set so that the “non-reach (short)” production mode is always used.

As described above, the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "time reduction state A" causes the dynamic display of the second special symbol, which is executed preferentially over the dynamic display of the first special symbol, to be executed at an early stage. In order to suppress the extension of the game, the fluctuation time of 1 of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is fixed, and the number of small fluctuation seconds is selected. It is configured to select the D table 202e4 in which the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is completely selected.

Further, the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B" is a state in which the "time reduction function" is given 100 times and has a small hit probability (about 1 / 3.68). The probability of a small hit during the "time saving function" is about 99.99%, and it is configured to substantially win a small hit during 100 times of the "time saving function". Therefore, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B", if the loss fluctuation is performed for a long time, the game may be delayed and the player may be awakened to the game. Therefore, even in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B", the D table 202e4 is configured to select the "non-reach (short)" effect mode without exception at the time of loss extraction. As a result, the winning assistance function is activated, and the second special is executed when the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is large in the "time reduction state" in which a small hit can be substantially won. By shortening the execution time of the dynamic display of the symbol, the execution efficiency of the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be improved. As a result, it is possible to suppress the extension of the game and prevent the player from awakening.

In the first embodiment, when a small hit is derived in the lottery of the first special symbol, the variation effect in the third symbol display device 81 is equivalent to the "loss display" or the "reach display" at the time of the loss derivation. Is configured to appear, and the "loss display" or "reach display" when the loss is derived and the "loss display" or "reach display" when the small hit is derived are indistinguishable. There is. On the other hand, in the special symbol display device 37, the result stopped at the time of deriving the loss and the result stopped at the time of deriving the small hit are identifiablely displayed, and the small winning opening unit 73 is opened at the time of deriving the small hit. According to the display result of the special symbol display device 37 and the driving mode of the small winning opening unit 73, it is possible to identify whether the loss is derived or the small hit is derived.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21A, in the E table 202e5 of the stop pattern table 202e, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “special variation 1” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , The "non-reach" effect mode, the other "reach display", the "special variation 2" effect mode, and the "special variation 3" effect mode are not assigned the value of the stop pattern counter C3. Therefore, regardless of the lottery result of the first special symbol in the "time reduction state A" and the second special symbol in the "time reduction state A", the "special variation 1" effect mode is always used. It is set to be.

With this configuration, when entering the "time reduction state A", when the jackpot is derived by the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the "triple acquisition challenge" in the dynamic display of the second special symbol It is possible to select the fluctuation time equivalent to the "effect", and it can be shown that the jackpot of the first special symbol is derived in the "triple acquisition challenge production". Therefore, a special effect pattern for the first special symbol is prepared by making the jackpot effect of the first special symbol and the effect of the winning / failing result of the second special symbol equivalent when entering the "time reduction state A". Since it is not necessary to do so, the man-hours for developing the production pattern can be reduced, the processing burden of selecting the production pattern can be reduced, and the playability can be easily understood by the player by clarifying the production content. It can be realized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 21B, in the F table 202e6 of the stop pattern table 202e, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “non-reach (long)” effect mode (“0” to “0” to “”. The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned to the "99"), "non-reach (middle)" production mode, "non-reach (short)" production mode, other "reach display", or "special variation" production mode. Not done. Therefore, the loss of the first special symbol in the "time reduction state B" is extracted or the small hit is extracted, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B" is "1". At the time of extraction, it is set to always have a "non-reach (long)" effect mode.

With this configuration, if the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is small despite the state in which the "time saving function" is activated and the winning assistance function is activated, the second start is performed. In order to secure the time for the ball to enter the mouth 71, a “non-reach (long)” effect mode having a relatively long fluctuation time is selected. This makes it easier to secure the time for the ball to enter the second starting port 71, and there is a possibility that a new starting prize will be generated for the second starting port 71 during the execution time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. By increasing the value, it is possible to maintain the situation in which the dynamic display of the second special symbol is being executed. Further, even when the dynamic display of the second special symbol is interrupted and the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed, by selecting the fluctuation time equivalent to the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the second special symbol can be displayed. It is possible to reduce the difference between the dynamic display of the 1 special symbol and the dynamic display of the 2nd special symbol, to perform the production without interrupting the fluctuation and without discomfort.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22A, in the G table 202e7 of the stop pattern table 202e, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “special variation 2” effect mode (“0” to “99”). ), The "non-reach" effect mode, the other "reach display", the "special variation 1" effect mode, and the "special variation 3" effect mode are not assigned the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3. Therefore, at the time of the jackpot extraction of the first special symbol in the "time reduction state B" and the jackpot extraction or the small hit extraction of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B", the "special variation 2" effect mode is always used. It is set to be.

As described above, the "time reduction state B" is a state in which a substantial small hit (based on a big hit) is promised, and a long fluctuation time is executed depending on whether or not the small hit is made. If this happens, the game will be delayed, and the player may be awakened to the game. Further, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed and the jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, an effect different from the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. If it is configured as, it is necessary to prepare a special effect pattern for a big hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, which increases the development man-hours for creating the effect pattern, increases the processing load of selecting the effect pattern, or the content of the effect. May be complicated.

Therefore, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B", the big hit or the small hit is derived with a relatively short fluctuation time (that is, "20 seconds") at the time of the big hit extraction or the small hit extraction. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the extension of the game and prevent the player from awakening.

In addition, a special effect pattern for the first special symbol is prepared by making the contents of the jackpot effect of the first special symbol and the jackpot effect or small hit effect of the second special symbol equivalent in the "time reduction state B". Since it is not necessary to do so, the man-hours for developing the production pattern can be reduced, the processing burden of selecting the production pattern can be reduced, and the playability can be easily understood by the player by clarifying the production content. It can be realized.

Next, as shown in FIG. 22B, in the H table 202e8 of the stop pattern table 202e, the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is assigned only to the “special variation 3” effect mode (“0” to “99”). , "Non-reach" effect mode, other "reach display", "special variation 1" effect mode, and "special variation 2" effect mode are not assigned the value of the stop pattern counter C3. Therefore, regardless of the lottery result, the second special symbol in the "normal game state B" is set to always be in the "special variation 3" effect mode.

As described above, the "normal game state B" is the second special symbol held during the operation of the "time saving function" when the "time saving function" in the "time saving state A" or the "time saving state B" is completed. It is in a state of digesting the dynamic display of. Therefore, whether or not the small hit or the big hit can be derived again in this "normal game state B" and the "ream villa" state can be maintained is a part that is interesting to the player. Therefore, while showing the fluctuation in the "normal game state B" firmly, the timing (interval) of whether or not to make a small hit (or a big hit) is constant, and the production is performed in a fixed period so that the player can easily understand. By showing the player whether it is a small hit (or a big hit) or a loss, it is possible to provide a production that is easy for the player to understand, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In this way, as shown in the C table 202e3, in the variable effect at the time of winning the jackpot of the first special symbol of the "normal game state A", the "special reach" effect mode> the "super reach" effect mode> the "normal reach" effect. The selection ratio is higher in the order of the modes, and as shown in the A table 202e1 and the B table 202e2, in the variation effect of the first special symbol of the "normal game state A" at the time of loss or small hit, the "normal reach" effect mode> The selection ratio is set to increase in the order of "super reach" effect mode> "special reach" effect mode. Therefore, it is highly possible that the jackpot display result will appear in the order of "special reach" production mode> "super reach" production mode> "normal reach" production mode for the jackpot expectation at the time of appearance of each "reach display". It is configured to be. As a result, the player can be shown the degree of expectation for the jackpot depending on the effect mode of the variable effect, and the player can enjoy the uplifting feeling of the big hit according to the effect mode of the variable effect executed by the player.

Based on the above, the game is determined by determining the effect mode of the variable effect to be executed based on the type of the special symbol, the appropriateness of the variable effect, the game state at that time, and the number of reserved balls of the variable effect at that time. By shortening the execution time of the variable effect and increasing the number of times the variable effect is executed based on the situation in which the variable effect is performed, it is possible to select an effect mode that enhances the execution efficiency of the variable effect.

When "reach display" is selected when the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect is large (for example, "4"), the stop pattern in which the effect element of the "high-speed fluctuation" of each "reach display" is shortened. A table 202e may be provided. Further, the effect mode may be selected based on the total number of reserved symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Further, when the number of reserved balls for the variation effect is large, the stop pattern table 202e may be provided in which the effect element of "low speed variation" is omitted in each effect mode. Further, the stop pattern table 202e may be provided in which the selection rate of each effect mode is completely different depending on the number of reserved balls of the variable effect. However, if the selection rate of each effect mode differs depending on the number of reserved balls in the variable effect, the number of reserved balls at the time of the pre-reading notice execution decision and the said The number of reserved balls at the time of executing the variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead notice may differ. In such a case, a process for maintaining consistency between the content of the pre-reading notice and the content of the variable effect is required, which complicates the process.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be added by "1" in order within the range of "0 to 9", and return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "9"). The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) described later is executed, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 30). Then, at the timing when the ball wins the first start port 64, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the first start port 64. Of the first reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203d4 of the first reserved area. Further, at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the RAM 203 provided corresponding to the second starting port 71. Of the second reserved first to fourth areas, the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the variable type counter storage area 203e4 of the second reserved area.

This fluctuation type counter CS1 is used to determine a detailed fluctuation time (rough fluctuation pattern) of the fluctuation effect. That is, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is detailed by the value of the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern table 202f stored in the ROM 202 in the effect mode selected by the stop pattern table 202e and the stop pattern selection counter C3. Determine the fluctuation time. The voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 determine the reach type and the fine symbol variation mode of the third symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the fluctuation time determined by the variation type counter CS1. In addition, the presence or absence of the advance notice effect and the execution mode of the advance notice effect are determined.

In this way, the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 selects a rough fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect and determines only the fluctuation time. With this configuration, it is not necessary to control the detailed advance notice lottery or the like necessary for executing the variation effect in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, so that the processing of the MPU 201 related to the variation effect can be reduced. can. Further, it is not necessary to prepare a command for the total variation pattern of the variation effect in the main control device 110, and the ROM capacity of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

Further, in the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the variation effect is performed by determining the detailed variation pattern in the variation effect based on the variation time (rough variation pattern) determined by the main control device 110. You can increase the degree of freedom in choosing. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 whose game state changes from moment to moment, it is possible to select or change the effect content of the variable effect at any time in response to the change, and it is possible to execute an appropriate effect according to the game state. can.

Here, the details of the variation pattern table 202f will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24. In this pachinko machine 10, as the variation pattern table 202f, the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202f1 used at the time of loss and small hit of the first special symbol and the special figure used at the time of big hit of the first special symbol are used. 1 variable pattern table for big hits 202f2, special figure 2 used when the second special symbol is lost, 2 variable pattern table for losing 202f3, and special figure 2 used for big hits and small hits of the second special symbol 2 for big hits and small hits A variation pattern table 202f4 is prepared.

FIG. 23 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202f1 stored in the ROM 202, and FIG. 23 (b) is a special figure stored in the ROM 202. 1 is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table 202f2 for big hits, and FIG. 24 (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table 202f3 for special figure 2 stored in ROM 202. FIG. 24 (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the special figure 2 jackpot / small hit variation pattern table 202f4 stored in the ROM 202. As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, the fluctuation pattern tables 202f1 to 202f4 are grouped based on the selected effect mode.

Specifically, it is referred to when the "non-reach (long)" production mode is determined as the production mode when the first special symbol is lost or a small hit, or when the second special symbol is lost. E0: For "Non-reach long" and "Non-reach (short)" production mode, which is referred to when the "Non-reach (middle)" production mode is determined, is determined. The "E2: non-reach short" and "normal reach" production modes referred to when the "normal reach" production mode is determined, and the "super reach" production mode are determined. When the "E4: Super Reach" production mode referred to in the case, the "E5: Special Reach" production mode referred to when the "Special Reach" production mode is determined, and the "Special Variation 1" production mode are determined. It is divided into "E6: special variation 1" referred to in "E8: special variation 3" and "E8: special variation 3" referred to when the "special variation 3" production mode is determined.

In addition, for "E3: normal reach", which is referred to when the "normal reach" production mode is determined as the production mode at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol, or at the time of the big hit / small hit of the second special symbol, "E4: Super Reach" which is referred to when the "Super Reach" production mode is decided, "E5: Special Reach" which is referred to when the "Special Reach" production mode is decided, and "Special" "E6: Special variation 1" referred to when the "variation 1" effect mode is determined, and "E7: special variation 2" referred to when the "special variation 2" effect mode is determined. "Special variation 3" It is divided into "E8: Special variation 3" which is referred to when the production mode is determined.

Then, the value of the variable type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is not a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value), that is, If it is a lost value or a small hit value (small hit random number value), refer to the reserved number table 202d1 for Special Figure 1 and refer to the game state at that time and the number of reserved balls at that time. The stop pattern table 202e is selected based on the above, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202e. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202f1 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202f1, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is set in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the reserved fluctuation production.

In the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202f1, which is referred to when the first special symbol is lost, "E0: non-reach long" includes "high-speed fluctuation (high-speed fluctuation (" high-speed fluctuation ()) in which the total fluctuation time is "15 seconds". One fluctuation pattern (variation time. Hereinafter, it is naturally possible to replace "variation pattern" with "fluctuation time") of "long)" fluctuation element + "slow fluctuation" fluctuation element "is prepared. There is.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "variable elements of", and only "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202f1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. All values ("0-9") are associated with "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "". That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, "the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. NS.

Here, each fluctuation element constituting the fluctuation pattern will be described. The variable element constitutes a part of the variable effect of 1, and each variable element is combined to form the variable effect of 1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as the fluctuation elements, the fluctuation elements of "high-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation", the fluctuation element of "normal reach", the fluctuation element of "super reach", and the fluctuation element of "special reach" A variable element, a variable element of "re-variation", a variable element of "special variation 1", a variable element of "special variation 2", and a variable element of "special variation 3" are provided.

The variable element of "high-speed fluctuation" is a variable element that scrolls and fluctuates at high speed so that the content of the third symbol cannot be clearly recognized by the player. The fluctuation element of this "high-speed fluctuation" is performed for "15 seconds" at the beginning of the fluctuation production when the "non-reach (long)" production mode or the like is selected (hereinafter, referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (long)"). (In some cases), when a "non-reach (middle)" production mode is selected, "5 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the fluctuation production (hereinafter, it may be referred to as "high-speed fluctuation (medium)"). When the "non-reach (short)" effect mode or the like is selected, "3 seconds" is performed at the beginning of the variation effect (hereinafter, it may be referred to as "high-speed variation (short)"). When the fluctuation element of the "high-speed fluctuation" ends, the fluctuation element of the "low-speed fluctuation" described later is started (executed), or the fluctuation effect ends as it is.

The "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element is started after the execution of the "high-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element of "15 seconds", and whether or not the third symbol is visibly scrolled to generate "reach display" is determined. It is a variable factor to show. This "low-speed fluctuation" variation element is not executed when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, or the "special variation" effect mode is selected, and is not executed. When a "reach (middle)" production mode, a "non-reach (short)" production mode, or a production mode other than the "special variation" production mode (for example, a "non-reach (long)" production mode) is selected, It takes "5 seconds" after the variable element of "high speed fluctuation".

That is, in the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode or the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, after the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" is performed, each symbol sequence of the third symbol display device 81 is "". It is configured to stop rapidly (so-called bitter stop) without going through the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation". Further, in the "special fluctuation" production mode, the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation" and the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" are not performed, and a predetermined production (for example, "triple acquisition challenge production" or the like) is performed respectively. It is configured. When the fluctuation element of this "low speed fluctuation" ends, the fluctuation effect may end as it is.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is a variation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" of "10 seconds" and a variation of "low-speed fluctuation" of "5 seconds". A variation effect is composed of a variation pattern including elements. Further, in the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode, the variation effect is configured by the variation pattern of only the variation elements of the "high-speed variation (medium)" of "5 seconds". Further, in the "non-reach (short)" effect mode, the variation effect is configured by the variation pattern of only the variation elements of the "high-speed variation (short)" of "3 seconds".

The variable element of "normal reach" remains when the same symbol (hereinafter, may be referred to as "reach forming symbol") is stopped and displayed in the two symbol sequences that stop first in the variable element of "low speed fluctuation". It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs depending on the fluctuation result of the symbol sequence of. This "normal reach" variation element is performed "5 seconds" after the "low speed variation" variation element when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "normal reach" is executed, the pattern of directly displaying "loss display", the pattern of directly displaying "big hit display", and the pattern of "super reach" There are a pattern that develops into a variable element, a pattern that develops into a variable element of "special reach", and a pattern that once makes a temporary "loss display" appear and then executes the variable element of "re-variation". Has been done.

The variable element of "super reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol sequence is continued, and the variable element of the third symbol display device 81 It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a predetermined effect (for example, "battle effect"). This "super reach" variable element is performed "40 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "super reach" is executed, a pattern in which the "loss display" is directly displayed and a pattern in which the "big hit display" is directly displayed are temporarily provided. A pattern is prepared in which the variable element of "re-variation" is executed after the "loss display" is displayed.

The variable element of the "special reach" is developed and executed when the variable element of the "normal reach" does not stop the "loss display" and the fluctuation of the remaining symbol sequence is continued, and the variable element of the "special reach" is executed in the third symbol display device 81. It is a variable element that shows whether or not a big hit occurs by performing a special effect (for example, "competitive effect") different from the above-mentioned predetermined effect. This "special reach" variable element is performed "160 seconds" after the execution of the "normal reach" variable element.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of the "special reach" is executed, a pattern that directly displays the "loss display" and a pattern that directly displays the "big hit display" are temporarily provided. There is a pattern that "re-variates" after the "loss display" appears.

It should be noted that, after the execution of the variable element of "normal reach", it is configured to develop into the variable element of "super reach" or the variable element of "special reach". When the symbol is stopped, it may be configured to suddenly develop into a "super reach" variable element or a "special reach" variable element without going through the "normal reach" variable element. Further, the variable element of "special reach" may be configured to be executed after the variable element of "super reach" is executed.

The variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that develops and is executed after the "loss display" appears once in any of the "reach display", and the "big hit display" appears. The variable element of this "re-variation" is performed for "10 seconds" after any "reach display".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern in which the “big hit display” appears after the execution of the fluctuation element of the “re-variation” is prepared.

Further, the variable element of this "re-variation" is configured to occur only when the jackpot game is won. That is, in the case of "missing display (including small hit display of the first special symbol. The same shall apply hereinafter)", the variable element of "re-variation" is configured not to be executed. This is because the variable element of "re-variation" is a variable element that changes the temporarily stopped "loss display" to one of the "big hit displays", so in the case of "loss display" that has not won the jackpot. If you go to, there will be a discrepancy in the production. Therefore, the fluctuation element of this "re-variation" is only in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202f2 and the special figure 2 jackpot / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202f4 (see FIGS. 23 (b) and 24 (b)). It is selected and is configured not to be selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202f1 and the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3 (see FIGS. 23 (a) and 24 (a)).

The variable element of "special variation 1" is executed at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol in the "time reduction state A" and the lottery result of both the second special symbols, and is used in the "triple acquisition challenge production" described later. The corresponding variable factor. The variable element of this "special variation 1" is "60 seconds" or "60 seconds" or "60 seconds" from the start of the variation effect of the lottery result of either the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the "time reduction state A". 70 seconds (at the time of re-variation) ”.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "special variation 1" is executed, the pattern that directly shows the failure pattern of "loss display", that is, the "triple acquisition challenge production", and the pattern that directly "exists" There is a pattern that shows the success pattern of "big hit / small hit display" and a pattern that once shows a temporary "loss display", that is, a pattern that executes the variable element of "re-variation" after the failure pattern is shown. Has been done.

The variable element of "special variation 2" is executed at the time of the big hit of the first special symbol and the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B", and is executed at the time of the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol. It is a variable element corresponding to one big hit or small hit of one of the "triple effects" that occurs after displaying the success pattern in. The fluctuation element of this "special variation 2" is performed "20 seconds" from the start of the jackpot of the first special symbol and the jackpot or small hit of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B".

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a pattern is prepared in which the success pattern of the “big hit / small hit display” is directly displayed after the execution of the variable element of the “special variation 2”.

The variable element of the "special variation 3" is executed in any lottery result of the second special symbol in the "normal game state B", and is a variable element corresponding to the "ream villa continuation challenge production" described later. The variable element of this "special variation 3" is performed "40 seconds" or "50 seconds (at the time of re-variation)" from the start of the variation effect of any of the lottery results of the second special symbol in the "normal game state B". ..

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the variable element of "special variation 3" is executed, the pattern that directly shows the failure pattern of "loss display", that is, the "continuous villa continuation challenge production", and the pattern that directly " There is a pattern that shows the success pattern of "big hit / small hit display" and a pattern that once shows a temporary "loss display", that is, a pattern that executes the variable element of "re-variation" after the failure pattern is shown. Has been done.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202f1, "E1: non-reach / middle" has a total fluctuation time of "5 seconds" and "only the fluctuation elements of" high-speed fluctuation (medium) "". One variation pattern of is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (medium) "". It is set to "0 to 9", and only "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (medium) "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202f1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. "Only the variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (medium) "" are associated with all the values ("0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "only the variation element of" high-speed variation (medium) "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202f1, "E2: non-reach short" includes "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" in which the total fluctuation time is "3 seconds". One variation pattern of is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: non-reach short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "". It is set to "0 to 9", and only "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202f1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation type counter CS1 can be taken. "Only the variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" are associated with all the values ("0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "only the variation element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202f1, "E3: normal reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "20 seconds". One fluctuation pattern of "variation element of" + "variation element of" normal reach "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0 to 9" for "variable elements of" normal reach "", and only the "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "" Is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202f1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ( "0-9") is associated with "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element. That is, in the case of the "normal reach" production mode in the fluctuation production of the first special symbol, the fluctuation pattern is always "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element. Is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202f1, "E4: Super Reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "60 seconds". "Variable element" + "Normal reach" variable element + "Super reach" variable element "is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". It is "0 to 9" for the element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach", and the variable element of the "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low speed fluctuation". + "Normal reach" variable element + "Super reach" variable element "is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202f1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take. ("0-9") is associated with "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element " There is. That is, in the case of the "super reach" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is always "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element. + "Variable element of" super reach "" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 1 loss / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202f1, "E5: special reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "180 seconds". "Variable element +" Normal reach "variable element +" Special reach "variable element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". It is "0 to 9" for the element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "special reach", and the variable element of the "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low speed fluctuation". + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element "can only be selected.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 loss / small hit variation pattern table 202f1 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take. ("0-9") is associated with "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element " There is. That is, in the case of the "special reach" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, the variation pattern is always "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element. + "Variable element of" special reach "" is selected.

It should be noted that the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss and small hit of the first special symbol is determined as the fluctuation pattern as it is, so that the fluctuation pattern may be determined without using the fluctuation type counter CS1. good. Further, although the selection is made using only the fluctuation type counter CS1, a plurality of fluctuation type counters may be used in combination for selection (selection of presence / absence of notice display, etc.).

Next, with reference to FIG. 23 (b), the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202f2 referred to at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the first holding ball storage area 203d corresponding to the first special symbol is a value that becomes a jackpot, the number of holdings for special figure 1 With reference to the table 202d1, the stop pattern table 202e is selected based on the game state at that time, the number of reserved balls at that time, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same hold area. The effect mode is selected based on the stop pattern table 202e. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202f2 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the group (group) of the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202f2, the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area was held in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation production.

In the fluctuation pattern table 202f2 for special figure 1 jackpot, "E3: normal reach" includes the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" of "20 seconds" + "low speed fluctuation". "Normal reach" fluctuation element "and" 30 seconds "" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variation element +" low-speed fluctuation "variation element +" normal reach "variation element +" re-variation " Two fluctuation patterns with "variation element" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0-2" for "normal reach" fluctuation element, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation It is "3 to 9" for "element".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202f2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation element of "high speed variation (long)" + "low speed". The fluctuation pattern of "variation" + "normal reach" fluctuation pattern is 30%, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "re-variation" The fluctuation pattern of "variation element" is set to be selected at a ratio of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 1, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" The fluctuation pattern of "variation factor" is easy to select (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element to be selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202f2, in "E4: Super Reach", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "60 seconds" Element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Two fluctuation patterns of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Has been done.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element "for" 0-3 "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "variable element It is "4-9" for "variable element + variable element of" super reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202f2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + " Fluctuation element of "low speed fluctuation" + fluctuation element of "normal reach" + fluctuation element of "super reach" is 40%, fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation factor of "low speed fluctuation" + " The fluctuation pattern of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 1, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" The fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" + "variable element of" re-variation "" is easily selected (60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element should also be selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit from any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202f2, in "E5: Special Reach", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "180 seconds" Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" Two fluctuation patterns of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern. Has been done.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "for" 0-4 "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "variable element It is "5-9" for "variable element + variable element of" special reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202f2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, the variation element of "high-speed variation (long)" + " 50% of the fluctuation pattern of "low speed fluctuation" + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "special reach" fluctuation factor, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + " The fluctuation pattern of "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element "is set to be selected at a ratio of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot of the first special symbol, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "special reach" Fluctuation pattern of "Fluctuation element" and "Variation element of" High-speed fluctuation (long) "+ Fluctuation factor of" Low-speed fluctuation "+ Fluctuation factor of" Normal reach "+ Fluctuation factor of" Super reach "+ Fluctuation of" Re-variation " The fluctuation pattern of "elements" is selected evenly (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide playability in which a jackpot can be expected equally in any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202f2, "E6: special fluctuation 1" includes "only the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 1 "" with the total fluctuation time of "60 seconds" and the total fluctuation time. There are two variable patterns that can be selected, "70 seconds" "variable element of" special variation 1 "+ variable element of" re-variation "", and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each variation pattern. It is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: special fluctuation 1" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 0" with respect to "only the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 1 "". 3 ”and“ 4-9 ”for“ the variable element of “special variation 1” + the variable element of “re-variation””.

That is, when the "special variation 1" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202f2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, "only the variation element of" special variation 1 "" The fluctuation pattern is set to be selected at a ratio of 40% and the fluctuation pattern of "variant element of" special fluctuation 1 "+ fluctuation element of" re-variation "" is selected at a ratio of 60%.

Therefore, in the "special variation 1" effect mode selected at the time of the jackpot in Special Figure 1, the variation pattern of "variable element of" special variation 1 "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is easily selected (60% of the total). ). Further, by configuring the fluctuation pattern of "only the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 1 "" to be selected, it is possible to provide a game playability in which a big hit can be expected from any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 1 jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202f2, "E7: special fluctuation 2" has one fluctuation pattern of "only the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 2 "" with the total fluctuation time of "20 seconds". It is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 23 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E7: special fluctuation 2" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 0" with respect to "only the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 2 "". It is set to "9", and only "only the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 2 "" can be selected.

That is, when the "special variation 2" effect mode is selected in the special figure 1 jackpot variation pattern table 202f2 referred to when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("" "Only the variable elements of" special variation 2 "" are associated with "0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "special variation 2" effect mode in the variation effect of the first special symbol, "only the variation element of" special variation 2 "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

By configuring in this way, if a jackpot is won, a relatively long fluctuation pattern can be easily selected, and by enhancing the production content of the fluctuation effect in which the jackpot occurs, the game can be played. You can improve your interest. In addition, if the jackpot is not won, that is, if the hit is lost or small, a relatively short fluctuation pattern such as a "non-reach" effect mode can be easily selected, so that the hit or small hit can be easily selected. By shortening the effect content of the time variation effect, the variation effect can be efficiently digested. Further, in a special game state (“time reduction state A”, “time reduction state B”, etc.), by executing a fixed effect, it is possible to execute an effect that is easy for the player to understand.

Next, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is not a value that becomes a jackpot (big hit random number value), or as a small hit. If it is not a value (small hit random number value), that is, if it is a value that is lost, refer to the reservation number table 202d2 for special figure 2 and refer to the game state at that time and the hold at that time. The stop pattern table 202e is selected based on the number of balls, and the effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same holding area and the stop pattern table 202e. Then, a group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the special figure 2 loss fluctuation pattern table 202f3 group (group), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area was held in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation production.

In the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3 referred to when the second special symbol is lost, "E0: non-reach long" includes "high-speed fluctuation (long)" with an overall fluctuation time of "15 seconds". One fluctuation pattern of "variation element of" + "variation element of" low speed fluctuation "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E0: non-reach long" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + "low-speed fluctuation". It is set to "0 to 9" for "variable elements of", and only "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take. ("0-9") is associated with "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "". That is, in the case of the "non-reach (long)" production mode in the fluctuation production of the second special symbol, "the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ the fluctuation element of" low-speed fluctuation "" is always selected as the fluctuation pattern. NS.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss fluctuation pattern table 202f3, "E1: non-reach middle" includes one of "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (medium) "" in which the total fluctuation time is "5 seconds". Fluctuation patterns are available.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E1: non-reach middle" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (medium) "". It is set to "0 to 9", and only "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (medium) "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take. "Only the variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (medium) "" are associated with ("0-9"). That is, in the case of the "non-reach (middle)" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "only the variation element of" high-speed variation (medium) "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss fluctuation pattern table 202f3, "E2: non-reach short" includes one of "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" in which the total fluctuation time is "3 seconds". Fluctuation patterns are available.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E2: non-reach short" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is for "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "". It is set to "0 to 9", and only "only the fluctuation element of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" can be selected.

That is, when the "non-reach (short)" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take. "Only the variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (short) "" are associated with ("0-9"). That is, in the case of the "non-reach (short)" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "only the variation element of" high-speed variation (short) "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for special figure 2 loss, in "E3: normal reach", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "15 seconds" + One fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" normal reach "" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0 to 9" for "variable elements of" normal reach "", and only the "variable elements of" high-speed fluctuation (long) "+ variable elements of" low-speed fluctuation "+ variable elements of" normal reach "" Is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0 to 0"). 9 ”) is associated with“ high-speed fluctuation (long) ”variable element +“ low-speed fluctuation ”variable element +“ normal reach ”variable element”. In other words, in the case of the "normal reach" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is always "" high-speed variation (long) "variation element +" low-speed variation "variation element +" normal reach "variation element". Is selected.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for special figure 2 loss, in "E4: Super Reach", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "60 seconds" One variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" super reach "variation element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". It is "0 to 9" for the element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "super reach", and the variable element of the "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low speed fluctuation". + "Normal reach" variable element + "Super reach" variable element "is set to be selectable.

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0"). ~ 9 ") is associated with" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" super reach "variable element". That is, in the case of the "super reach" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is always "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element. + "Variable element of" super reach "" is selected.

Next, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f3 for special figure 2 loss, in "E5: special reach", the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "180 seconds" One variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" special reach "variation element" is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (a), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". It is "0 to 9" for the element + the variable element of "normal reach" + the variable element of "special reach", and the variable element of the "high speed fluctuation (long)" + the variable element of "low speed fluctuation". + "Normal reach" variable element + "Special reach" variable element "can only be selected.

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("0"). ~ 9 ")) is associated with" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "variable element +" special reach "variable element". That is, in the case of the "super reach" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, the variation pattern is always "high speed variation (long)" variation element + "low speed variation" variation element + "normal reach" variation element. + "Variable element of" special reach "" is selected.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3, "E6: special variation 1" has one variation pattern of "only the variation element of" special variation 1 "" with the total variation time of "60 seconds". It is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 24A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: special fluctuation 1" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 0" with respect to "only the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 1 "". It is set to "9", and only the "variable element of" special variation 1 "" can be selected.

That is, when the "special variation 1" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("" "Only the variable elements of" special variation 1 "" are associated with "0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "special variation 1" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "only the variation element of" special variation 1 "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3, "E8: special variation 3" has one variation pattern of "only the variation element of" special variation 3 "" with the total variation time of "40 seconds". It is prepared.

In the example shown in FIG. 24A, the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: special fluctuation 3" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 0" with respect to "only the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 3 "". 9 ”is set so that only the“ variable element of “special variation 3” ”can be selected.

That is, when the "special variation 3" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 loss variation pattern table 202f3 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all the values that the variation type counter CS1 can take ("" "Only the variable elements of" special variation 3 "" are associated with "0 to 9"). That is, in the case of the "special variation 3" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "only the variation element of" special variation 3 "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, with reference to FIG. 24 (b), the special figure 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 202f4 referred to at the time of the big hit or the small hit of the second special symbol will be described. In the first embodiment, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the holding area having the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the second special symbol is a value that becomes a jackpot, or becomes a small hit. If it is a value, the stop pattern table 202e is selected based on the game state at that time and the number of balls held at that time with reference to the holding number table 202d2 for special figure 2, and the same holding area is selected. The effect mode is selected based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern table 202e. Then, the group (group) to be referred to in the special figure 2 big hit / small hit variation pattern table 202f4 is determined based on the selected effect mode. In the special figure 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202f4 group (group), the fluctuation pattern (variation time) associated with the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the holding area is set in the holding area. It is determined as a fluctuation pattern in the reserved fluctuation production.

Special Figure 2 In the fluctuation pattern table 202f4 for big hits and small hits, in "E3: Normal reach", the fluctuation factor of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "20 seconds" "Element +" Normal reach "variable element" and "30 seconds" "High-speed fluctuation (long)" variable element + "Low-speed fluctuation" variable element + "Normal reach" variable element + "Re- Two fluctuation patterns of "variation" and "variation element" are prepared so as to be selectable, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each fluctuation pattern.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E3: normal reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation element of "low-speed fluctuation". + "0-2" for "normal reach" fluctuation element, "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation It is "3 to 9" for "element".

That is, when the "normal reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot / small hit variation pattern table 202f4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the "high-speed variation (long)" variation element. + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor 30%, "High speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "Low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "Normal reach" fluctuation factor + The fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a rate of 70%.

Therefore, in the "normal reach" effect mode selected at the time of big hit or small hit of the second special symbol, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + The fluctuation pattern of "variable elements of" re-variation "" is easily selected (70% of the total). In addition, by configuring the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element to be selected, any fluctuation pattern can be selected. It is possible to provide playability that can be expected to be a big hit or a small hit.

Next, in the special figure 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202f4, in "E4: Super Reach", the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "60 seconds" "Variable element of" + "Normal reach" + "Super reach" variable element "and" High-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" Low-speed fluctuation "variation of the total fluctuation time of" 70 seconds " Two fluctuation patterns of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" super reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is prepared for each fluctuation pattern. Are associated with each other.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E4: Super Reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" variable element + "super reach" variable element "for" 0-3 "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "variable element It is "4-9" for "variable element + variable element of" super reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "".

That is, when the "super reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot / small hit variation pattern table 202f4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the "high-speed variation (long)" variation. Factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor "variation pattern is 40%," high speed fluctuation (long) "variation factor +" low speed fluctuation "variation The variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" super reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" is set to be selected at a ratio of 60%.

Therefore, in the "super reach" effect mode selected at the time of big hit or small hit of the second special symbol, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + Fluctuation element of "super reach" + Fluctuation element of "re-variation" "variation pattern is easy to select (60% of the total). In addition, the fluctuation pattern of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + "super reach" fluctuation element should also be selected. Therefore, it is possible to provide playability in which a big hit or a small hit can be expected from any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 big hit / small hit fluctuation pattern table 202f4, in "E5: special reach", the fluctuation element of "high speed fluctuation (long)" + "low speed fluctuation" with the total fluctuation time of "180 seconds" "Variable element of" + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "and" high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variation of the total fluctuation time of" 190 seconds " Two fluctuation patterns of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" special reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" are prepared so that they can be selected, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is prepared for each fluctuation pattern. Are associated with each other.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E5: special reach" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the fluctuation element of "high-speed fluctuation (long)" + the fluctuation of "low-speed fluctuation". Element + "normal reach" variable element + "special reach" variable element "for" 0-4 "," high-speed fluctuation (long) "variable element +" low-speed fluctuation "variable element +" normal reach "variable element It is "5-9" for "variable element + variable element of" special reach "+ variable element of" re-variation "".

That is, when the "special reach" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot / small hit variation pattern table 202f4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the "high-speed variation (long)" variation. 50% of the fluctuation pattern of "element +" low-speed fluctuation "variation factor +" normal reach "variation factor +" special reach "variation factor", "high-speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low-speed fluctuation" fluctuation The variation pattern of "element +" normal reach "variation element +" special reach "variation element +" re-variation "variation element" is set to be selected at a ratio of 50%.

Therefore, in the "special reach" effect mode selected at the time of big hit or small hit of the second special symbol, "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation element + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation element + "normal reach" fluctuation element + Fluctuation pattern of "special reach" fluctuation pattern and "high speed fluctuation (long)" fluctuation factor + "low speed fluctuation" fluctuation factor + "normal reach" fluctuation factor + "super reach" fluctuation factor + "re-reach" The fluctuation pattern of "variation element" of "variation" is selected evenly (50% each). As a result, it is possible to provide playability in which a big hit or a small hit can be expected equally in any fluctuation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot / small hit variation pattern table 202f4, "E6: special variation 1" includes "only the variation element of" special variation 1 "" with an overall variation time of "60 seconds". Two fluctuation patterns, "the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 1 "+ the fluctuation element of" re-variation "" with the fluctuation time of "70 seconds", are prepared so as to be selectable, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is prepared for each fluctuation pattern. The value of is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: special fluctuation 1" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 0" with respect to "only the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 1 "". 3 ”and“ 4-9 ”for“ the variable element of “special variation 1” + the variable element of “re-variation””.

That is, when the "special variation 1" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot / small hit variation pattern table 202f4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the variation element of "special variation 1" is selected. The fluctuation pattern of "only" is set to be selected at a ratio of 40%, and the fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" special fluctuation 1 "+ fluctuation element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 60%.

Therefore, in the "special variation 1" effect mode selected at the time of a big hit or a small hit of the second special symbol, the variation pattern of "variable element of" special variation 1 "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is easily selected. (60% of the total). Further, by configuring the variation pattern of "only the variation element of" special variation 1 "" to be selected, it is possible to provide a game playability in which a big hit or a small hit can be expected from any variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot / small hit variation pattern table 202f4, "E7: special variation 2" includes one of "only the variation element of" special variation 2 "" in which the total variation time is "20 seconds". Fluctuation patterns are available.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E6: special fluctuation 2" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 0" with respect to "only the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 2 "". It is set to "9", and only the "variable element of" special variation 2 "" can be selected.

That is, when the "special variation 2" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot / small hit variation pattern table 202f4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, all the variation type counter CS1 can take. "Only the variable element of" special variation 2 "" is associated with the value ("0-9"). That is, in the case of the "special variation 2" effect mode in the variation effect of the second special symbol, "only the variation element of" special variation 2 "" is always selected as the variation pattern.

Next, in the special figure 2 jackpot / small hit variation pattern table 202f4, "E8: special variation 3" includes "only the variation element of" special variation 3 "" with an overall variation time of "40 seconds". Two fluctuation patterns of "50 seconds" of "special fluctuation 3" fluctuation element + "re-variation" fluctuation element are prepared so that the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be selected for each fluctuation pattern. The value of is associated.

In the example shown in FIG. 24 (b), the correspondence between the fluctuation pattern in "E8: special fluctuation 3" and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is "0 to 0" with respect to "only the fluctuation element of" special fluctuation 3 "". 3 ”and“ 4-9 ”for“ the variable element of “special variation 3” + the variable element of “re-variation””.

That is, when the "special variation 3" effect mode is selected in the special figure 2 jackpot / small hit variation pattern table 202f4 referred to when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed, the variation element of "special variation 3" is selected. The fluctuation pattern of "only" is set to be selected at a ratio of 40%, and the fluctuation pattern of "variable element of" special fluctuation 3 "+ fluctuation element of" re-variation "" is set to be selected at a ratio of 60%.

Therefore, in the "special variation 3" effect mode selected at the time of a big hit or a small hit of the second special symbol, the variation pattern of "variable element of" special variation 3 "+ variable element of" re-variation "" is easily selected. (60% of the total). Further, by configuring the variation pattern of "only the variation element of" special variation 3 "" to be selected, it is possible to provide a game playability in which a big hit or a small hit can be expected from any variation pattern.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description will be continued. The counter C4 per normal figure is configured as a loop counter that is incremented by 1 in order within the range of "0 to 99", reaches the maximum value (that is, "99"), and then returns to "0". Further, when the counter C4 per normal figure makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the counter C4 per normal figure.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the counter C4 per normal figure (value = "0 to 99"), and is 1 for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). It is updated several times and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 30).

The value of the counter C4 per normal figure is updated periodically (in the first embodiment, once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31)), and the timing at which it is detected that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 is detected. Then, it is stored in any of the normal map holding areas 1 to 4 provided in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h of the RAM 203. Then, the data is sequentially shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i in the order of being stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h, with respect to the value of the counter C4 per normal figure stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i. Make a hit judgment.

The value of the random number that is the hit of the normal symbol is set by the random number table 202i per normal figure stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110 for each game state (for example, 1/100 in the low probability state and 99 / in the high probability state. 100 etc.), and the value of the normal figure per counter C4 stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i of the RAM 203 matches the value of the hit random number set by the random number table 202i per normal figure. In addition, it is judged as a hit. Then, the normal symbol variation table 202j is referred to according to the game state, and the variable display time of the normal symbol is set (for example, when the prize assist function is not activated, the "normal game state" is "4 seconds", and the prize assist function is set. It is 0.1 seconds or the like in the "time shortened state" during operation), and after the variable display time elapses on the normal symbol display device 83, a symbol "○" is lit and displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). After that, the normal electric service opening table 202k is referred to according to the game state, and the opening time of the normal electric service 72 is set (for example, when the winning assist function is not activated, 0.1 seconds × 1 in the “normal game state”. (3 seconds x 3 times, etc. in the "time reduction state" when the prize-winning assist function is activated), and during the opening time, the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 is opened, and during that time, the second starting port 71 The ball is configured to be able to win a prize.

On the other hand, if the value of the normal figure counter C4 stored in the normal figure holding area does not match the value of the hit random number set by the random number table 202i per normal figure, it is determined to be lost. Then, the variable display time is set with reference to the normal figure fluctuation table 202j according to the game state, and after the variable display time elapses in the normal symbol display device 83, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol (normal symbol). It is lit and displayed. The random number table 202i per normal figure, the normal figure fluctuation table 202j, and the ordinary electric service opening table 202k will be described later in FIG. 25.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, and inputs / outputs. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as an output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as "I / O") are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 30) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 28) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

The RAM 203 further includes a first reserved ball number counter 203a, a second reserved ball number counter 203b, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, a reserved ball execution area 203f, and a normal figure reserved ball number counter 203g. , Fuzu holding ball storage area 203h, Fuzu holding ball execution area 203i, time saving flag 203j, time saving limit counter 203k, special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, special figure 2 time saving counter 202n, total time saving counter 203o, special figure 1 small hit It has at least a time saving counter 203p and a special figure 2 small hit time saving counter 202q.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a has a special symbol based on the ball entering the first starting port 64 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. The number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the dynamic display of the first special symbol performed by the display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) is set to a maximum of four times. It is a counter that counts up to.

The first reserved ball number counter 203a is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S116 in FIG. 28). Then, every time the starting prize to the first starting port 64 is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 32). S303). On the other hand, the first reserved ball number counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol is executed (see S5009 in FIG. 34).

Like the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is the second starting port 71 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. On hold of the dynamic display of the second special symbol performed by the special symbol display device 37 (variation effect of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol performed by the third symbol display device 81) based on the start winning prize. It is a counter that counts the number of balls (the number of standbys) up to 4 times.

Similar to the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S116 in FIG. 28). Then, every time the start winning prize to the second starting port 71 is detected and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (FIG. 32). See S307). On the other hand, the second reserved ball number counter 203b is decremented by 1 each time the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol is executed (see S5006 in FIG. 34).

The value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (that is, the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol) or the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (that is, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol) is the first reserved ball. Voice lamp control device 113 by a number command or a second reserved ball number command (hereinafter, the first reserved ball number command and the second reserved ball number command may be collectively referred to simply as a “reserved ball number command”). (See S310 in FIG. 32). In the first reserved ball number command, every time the start winning prize to the first starting port 64 is detected and the first reserved ball number counter 203a is incremented by 1, the second reserved ball number command is sent to the second starting port 71. This is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 every time the second reserved ball number counter 203b is added by 1.

The voice lamp control device 113 is a hold ball of a dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol or the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 by the first hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command. You can get the value of the number itself. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 can manage the number of times the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol is held without accessing the main control device 110. Further, every time a start winning prize to the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 is detected, the first hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113. By doing so, the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display (variation effect) of each special symbol managed by the voice lamp control device 113 is actually held in the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like (variation). Even if the number of reserved balls deviates from the number of reserved balls in the production), the deviation can be corrected by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command received next.

Further, in the first embodiment, when the main control device 110 transmits the first hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command to the voice lamp control device 113, the first hold ball number command or the second hold ball number command is transmitted. In the ball number command, not only the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b added by 1, but also the trigger of the addition of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6) in accordance with the above-mentioned start winning. Also include the value.

That is, when there is a start prize, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the main control device 110. Each value is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command.

In the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variable type counter CS1 transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command. Each value of is pre-read before the fluctuation effect based on each value is executed, and what happens to the fluctuation effect (whether or not it becomes a big hit, what happens to the fluctuation time, etc.) is before the execution of the fluctuation effect. to decide. Then, based on the judgment result by the pre-reading, it is possible to decide the execution of various effects, and to determine the effect contents and the execution time (timing) of the "pending change notice".

It should be noted that the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command indicating the number of reserved balls of the fluctuation effect and the command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be separately transmitted. As a command indicating the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like different from the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command, the command is the first at the timing of entering the ball into the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71. Along with generating a 1-hold ball count command or a second hold ball count command, a variation pattern command based on the incoming ball and a command similar to the stop type command (pre-variation pattern command and pre-stop type command) are generated, and voice lamp control is performed. It may be configured to transmit to the device 113. In this case, with respect to the program for generating the pre-variation pattern command and the pre-stop type command, the program can be easily created by diverting the program of the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

As described above, the first reserved ball storage area 203d has a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, and a small hit type counter CK acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the start winning prize is detected in the first starting port 64. , A memory for storing each value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), the counter buffer 203c of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 The value is acquired and stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores (holds) data (counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 values) corresponding to one start prize of the first special symbol up to four times. It has one holding area (first holding first to fourth area) (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the second reserved ball storage area 203e includes the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the small hit type counter CK acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the start winning prize is detected in the second starting port 71. , A memory for storing each value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the variation type counter CS1. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the second starting port 71 during the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31), the counter buffer 203c of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 The value is acquired and stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. The second reserved ball storage area 203e stores (holds) data (counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 values) corresponding to one start prize of the second special symbol up to four times. It has two holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) (see FIG. 6).

As described above, the reserved ball execution area 203f is the large hit lottery or small hit lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device, which are starting or executing the execution. It is a memory for storing data (counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 values) to be referred to in processing such as setting of dynamic display and fluctuation effect of 81.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the large hit lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the small hit lottery, the special symbol display device 37 and In order to execute processing such as dynamic display of the third symbol display device 81 and setting of variation effect, each start winning prize stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e described above is used. Of the corresponding data (each value of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1), when the data corresponding to the start winning prize related to the second special symbol is stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, one of the data is started. The data corresponding to the winning is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, the data corresponding to the start winning prize related to the second special symbol is not stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the data corresponding to the starting winning prize related to the first special symbol is stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d. If so, the data corresponding to one of the starting prizes of the data is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f.

That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and the dynamic display (variable effect) relating to the first special symbol relates to the second special symbol. It is configured to be executed on the condition that the dynamic display (variable effect) is not held. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f will be described. The first reserved ball storage area 203d, the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the reserved ball execution area 203f are a large hit lottery or a small hit lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, and the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display. It is used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to set the dynamic display of the device 81 and the variation effect.

As described above, it is used for the big hit lottery or the small hit lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the dynamic display of the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the setting of the variable effect. The jackpot random number counter C1 to be used, the jackpot type counter C2 used to determine the jackpot type, the small hit type counter CK used to determine the small hit type, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the effect mode of the variation effect. And the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for determining the fluctuation pattern are used. The first reserved ball storage area 203d stores the respective values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the first starting port 64 (starting winning). Then, the second reserved ball storage area 203e sets the respective values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball wins the second starting port 71 (starting winning). Remember.

The first reserved ball storage area 203d is composed of four reserved areas (first reserved first to fourth areas). In each of the four holding areas (first holding first to fourth areas), the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter storage area for storing the value of the jackpot type counter C2 are stored. 203d2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, variation type counter storage area 203d4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1, and small for storing the value of the small hit type counter CK. A hit type counter storage area 203d5 is provided.

Further, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is composed of four reserved areas (second reserved ball storage areas 1 to 4) like the first reserved ball storage area 203d. Similar to the first holding ball storage area 203d, the four holding areas (second holding first to fourth areas) have a jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 for storing the value of, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter storage area 203e4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1. A small hit type counter storage area 203e5 for storing the value of the hit type counter CK is provided.

In the first embodiment, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1, 203e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, 203e3, and the variation type counter storage area 203d4, 203e4 are small. The hit type counter storage areas 203d5 and 203e5 are collectively provided in one reserved ball storage area 203d and 203e, but a plurality of reserved ball storage areas are provided for each of the counters C1 to C3, CK and CS1. You may.

As described above, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the maximum data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CK, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the first starting port 64 (starting winning). Up to 4 times are stored, but in that case, among the vacant areas of the 4 hold areas (1st hold 1st to 4th areas), the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) is ordered in order. Data is stored. That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the start winning to the first start port 64, which is older in time, is stored, and in the first hold first area, the first start port 64, which is the oldest in time, is stored. The data corresponding to the start winning prize will be stored.

Further, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CK, CS1) acquired at the timing when the ball wins the second starting port 71 (starting winning) is for a maximum of four times. In that case, the data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 holding areas (2nd holding 1st to 4th areas). Be remembered. That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the start winning to the second start port 71, which is older in time, is stored, and in the second reserved first area, the second start port 71, which is the oldest in time, is stored. The data corresponding to the start winning prize will be stored.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203f is composed of only one area. Similar to the first reserved ball storage area 203d or the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the reserved ball execution area 203f includes a jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 for storing the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and a jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type counter storage area 203f2 that stores the value, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203f3 that stores the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter storage area 203f4 that stores the value of the variation type counter CS1, and the small hit type. A small hit type counter storage area 203f5 for storing the value of the counter CK is provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CK, CS1) is stored in the second hold first area of the second hold ball storage area 203e. If so, the data stored in the second reserved first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f5 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, the data is not stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e, and the first of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. When the data is stored in the hold first area, the data stored in the first hold first area is shifted to the respective areas 203f1 to 203f5 of the hold ball execution area 203f.

Then, the data shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203f is referred to in the fluctuation start processing (see FIG. 35), the jackpot lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the lottery result is performed. And determine the stop type. In the special symbol display device 37, dynamic display is performed based on the determined fluctuation pattern and stop type under the control of the main control device 110.

Further, the fluctuation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 by the fluctuation pattern command and the stop type command. Then, under the control of the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variation effect has come, it determines whether or not the data is stored in the second reserved first area of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. As a result of the judgment, when it is determined that the data is stored in the second reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 in the second reserved first area is used as the jackpot random number in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to the counter storage area 203f1. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203e2 in the second hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3 in the second hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter is shifted to the storage area 203f3, the random value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 203e4 in the second hold 1st area is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4, and the small hit type counter in the second hold 1st area is shifted. The random value of the storage area 203e5 is shifted to the small hit type counter storage area 203f5.

Then, when the data shift to the hold ball execution area 203f is completed, the second hold ball first area becomes vacant, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the second hold ball storage area 203e. ) Is packed into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the first embodiment, in the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the data is shifted only in the second reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the second holding ball storage area 203e will be described. For example, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the second reserved ball storage area 203e. It is assumed that it has been done. In this state, when the data in the second hold first area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203f and the second hold first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 has data in other areas (second to fourth). Is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second hold second area is shifted to the second hold first area, the data in the second hold third area is shifted to the second hold second area, and the data in the second hold fourth area is shifted. To the second hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b when the start determination of the variation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the second reserved second area to the second reserved second area. Shifts to one area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed in the second hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the second reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the second holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the data is not stored in the second hold first area of the second hold ball storage area 203e when the execution start timing of the variation effect is reached, the MPU 201 then holds the first hold. It is determined whether or not data is stored in the first reserved first area of the sphere storage area 203d. As a result of the determination, if the data is stored in the first reserved first area, the random number value of the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the first reserved first area is used as the jackpot random number counter storage area 203f1 of the reserved ball execution area 203f. Shift to. Similarly, the random value of the jackpot type counter storage area 203d2 in the first hold first area is shifted to the jackpot type counter storage area 203f2, and the random value of the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3 in the first hold first area is changed. The stop pattern selection counter is shifted to the storage area 203f3, and the random value of the fluctuation type counter storage area 203d4 in the first hold first area is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203f4, and the small hit type counter in the first hold first area is shifted. The random value of the storage area 203d5 is shifted to the small hit type counter storage area 203f5.

Then, when the data shift to the hold ball execution area 203f is completed, the first hold ball first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored (held) in each area (second to fourth) of the first hold ball storage area 203d. ) Is packed into the area (1st to 3rd) that is one smaller than the area number. In the first embodiment, in the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the data is shifted only in the first reserved area (first to fourth) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the first holding ball storage area 203d will be described. For example, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "4", and the data is stored in all the areas (first to fourth) of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. It is assumed that it has been done. In this state, when the data in the first hold first area is shifted to the hold ball execution area 203f and the first hold first area becomes empty, the MPU 201 has data in other areas (second to fourth). Is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the first hold second area is shifted to the first hold first area, the data in the first hold third area is shifted to the first hold second area, and the data in the first hold fourth area is shifted. To the first hold third area.

Further, for example, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a at the time when the start determination of the fluctuation effect is made is "2", the MPU 201 transfers only the data of the first reserved second area to the first reserved ball number. Shifts to one area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold area (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reserved area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area having an area number smaller by one. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the first holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

In this way, the data related to the dynamic display of the first special symbol to be executed and the data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol to be executed are separately stored and related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol. When the data is stored, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed, and when the data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not stored, the first special symbol If the dynamic display is stored, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed. With this configuration, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed over the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the dynamic display is performed based on each data, so that the first special symbol is displayed. It is possible to execute the dynamic display of the symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The normal symbol display is based on the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 detected in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) that is periodically executed every 4 milliseconds. This is a counter for counting the number of reserved balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display of the normal symbol performed by the device 83 up to 4 times.

Similar to the reserved ball number counters 203a and 203b, the normal figure reserved ball number counter 203g is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S116 in FIG. 28). Then, each time the passage of a ball through the through gate 67 is detected and the number of reserved balls in the variable display related to the normal symbol increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value "4" (see S406 in FIG. 33). On the other hand, the normal figure reservation ball number counter 203 g is decremented by 1 each time the variable display of the normal symbol is executed (see S705 in FIG. 46).

The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h is a memory for storing the normal figure per counter C4 acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the passage of the ball to the through gate 67 is detected. When the MPU 201 detects that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), it acquires the value of the counter C4 per normal figure from the counter buffer 203c and stores the normal figure holding ball. Store in area 203h. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h has four holding areas (normal figure) so that data (value of counter C4 per normal figure) corresponding to one holding ball of a normal symbol can be stored (held) up to four times. It has 1st to 4th areas on hold) (see FIG. 6).

The normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is a memory for storing data (value of counter C4 per normal figure) to be referred to in the process of winning lottery or variable display of a normal symbol being executed or starting execution. be.

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol, the above-mentioned normal symbol holding ball is executed in order to execute processing such as a winning lottery for the normal symbol and setting of the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. One of the data (value of the counter C4 per normal figure) stored in the storage area 203h is shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i. The shift in the first embodiment means moving the data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 6 again, the details of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i will be described. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h and the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i are used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in order to perform processing such as a winning lottery for normal symbols and setting of variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. NS.

As described above, the normal symbol hit counter C4 used for the normal symbol winning lottery is used for setting the normal symbol winning lottery and the variable display of the normal symbol display device 83. The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h stores the value of the counter C4 per normal figure acquired from the counter buffer 203c by the MPU 201 when the ball passes through the through gate 67.

The normal figure holding ball storage area 203h is composed of four holding areas (the normal figure holding first to fourth areas). Each of the four holding areas (the first to fourth areas for holding the normal figure) is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the counter C4 for the normal figure.

Data (value of counter C4 per normal figure) acquired at the timing when the ball passes through the through gate 67 is stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h up to four times. In that case, four holdings are performed. Data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) in the vacant area (1st to 4th areas on hold). That is, the smaller the area number, the more data corresponding to the passage of the sphere to the old through gate 67 in time is stored, and the first area on hold of the normal figure stores the data corresponding to the passage of the sphere to the oldest through gate 67 in time. The data corresponding to the passage will be stored.

On the other hand, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is composed of only one area. Similar to the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is provided with a random number counter storage area (not shown) for storing the value of the normal figure counter C4.

When the MPU 201 determines that the execution timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the data stored in the normal figure hold ball storage area 203h of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203h is transferred to the normal figure hold ball execution area 203i. shift.

Then, the data shifted to the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is referred to in the normal figure variation processing (see FIG. 46), a winning lottery is performed based on the reference data and the game state, and the contents of the variable display are performed. To determine. In the ordinary symbol display device 83, variable display is performed based on the determined content under the control of the main control device 110.

The details of the data shift will be described. When the MPU 201 determines that the execution start timing of the variable display of the normal symbol has come, the random number value of the random number counter storage area (not shown) per the normal figure in the normal figure hold first area of the normal figure hold ball storage area 203h. Is shifted to the random number counter storage area (not shown) per normal figure in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i.

Then, when the data shift to the normal figure reservation ball execution area 203i is completed, the normal figure reservation first area becomes empty, so that the data is stored in each area (second to fourth) of the normal figure reservation ball storage area 203h. Shift processing is performed to pack the (held) data into the areas (first to third) where the area number is one smaller. In the first embodiment, in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h, the data is shifted only in the normal figure holding area (1st to 4th) in which the data is stored (held).

Here, the data shift performed for each holding area in the normal drawing holding ball storage area 203h will be described. For example, the value of the normal figure holding ball number counter 203g when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made is "4", and the entire area (1st to 4th) of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h is set. Suppose the data is stored. In this state, when the data in the first area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the execution area 203i for holding the normal figure and the first area for holding the normal figure becomes empty, the MPU 201 moves to another area (second to fourth). Each of the data of is shifted to the area (1st to 3rd) which is one smaller than the area number. That is, the data in the second area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the first area for holding the normal figure, the data in the third area for holding the normal figure is shifted to the second area for holding the normal figure, and the data in the fourth area for holding the normal figure is shifted. Is shifted to the third area where the data is reserved.

Further, for example, if the value of the normal figure holding ball number counter 203g when the start determination of the variable display of the normal symbol is made is "2", the MPU 201 normally uses only the data of the normal figure holding second area. Figure Hold Shifts to the first area and ends the data shift. As described above, in the first embodiment, the data shift processing is not performed for the normal map holding areas (third to fourth) in which the data is not stored (held), so that the number of data shifts is reduced. It is possible to reduce the control burden.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth) may be configured to shift to an area in which the area number is one smaller. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in the normal drawing holding area (second to fourth), so that the program can be easily created.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. The time saving flag 203j is a flag for indicating that the "time saving function" is in progress in the on state. The time saving flag 203j is set to off as an initial value when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Then, at the end of the jackpot, if the jackpot is not a jackpot in the "normal game state", that is, if it is a jackpot that occurred during the "time reduction state", or if the jackpot is a jackpot in the "normal game state". Even if it is, it is a case where the jackpot type is other than the jackpot type "time saving A" and the time saving limit number of times has not been reached (that is, the value of the time saving limit counter 203k described later is smaller than "3". ), The time saving flag 203j in the off state is set to on (see S6706 in FIG. 45). After that, the time saving end conditions set for each "time reduction state" (the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, the first When any one of the small hits of the special symbol and the small hits of the second special symbol is satisfied, or when a big hit occurs, the time reduction flag 203j is set to off (). See S5309 in FIG. 37 or S6002 in FIG. 38).

In the time saving limit counter 203k, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10 or the initialization of the time saving limit counter 203k (that is, clearing 0), the number of jackpots of the special symbol to which the "time saving function" is given is a predetermined number of times (first). In the embodiment, it is a counter for counting whether or not the number of times (3 times) has been reached. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, after the initialization of the pachinko machine 10, each time the number of jackpots of the special symbol to which the "time saving function" is given reaches a predetermined number of times, the predetermined number of times is reached. It is equipped with a time-saving limit function that always shifts the gaming state after the end of the jackpot at the time of arrival to the low-probability state of the normal symbol and prohibits the transition to the high-probability state of the normal symbol. The MPU 201 of the main control device 110 is configured to refer to the value of the time reduction limit counter 203k in order to count the predetermined number of times.

The time saving limit counter 203k is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on, and then the "time saving function" is given to the special symbol without entering the low probability state (except in the jackpot state) of the normal symbol. Every time a big hit occurs, it is added by 1 (see S6703 in FIG. 45). In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, either when a jackpot other than the jackpot type "time reduction A" is won in the low probability state of the normal symbol, that is, in the "normal game state", or in the "time reduction state". Since it is configured so that a "time saving function" is given when a big hit occurs, if a big hit other than the big hit type "time saving A" is won in the "normal game state", or in the "time saving state". When a big hit occurs, the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is added by "1".

Then, when the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is no longer smaller than "3", that is, when the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is "3" or more, a predetermined number of "time saving functions" are given. When it is judged that the jackpot has been continuously generated and the predetermined time saving limit number has been reached in the "ream villa" state, and the jackpot ends, the "time saving function" is not given. The value of the time saving limit counter 203k is initialized (that is, cleared to 0) (see S6708 in FIG. 45). Further, when the "ream villa" state to which the "time saving function" is given ends, that is, when any of the time saving ending conditions is satisfied in the "time saving state", the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is initially set. It is configured to be converted (that is, cleared to 0) (see S5310 in FIG. 37).

When the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 wins the jackpot of the special symbol, the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is confirmed at the end of the jackpot game, and the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is smaller than "3". If is, the state shifts to the high probability state of the normal symbol. On the other hand, when the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is not smaller than "3", that is, when it is "3" or more, the normal symbol is left in the low probability state without being in the high probability state, and the "normal game" Move to "state".

With this configuration, every time the number of jackpots to which the "time saving function" is given reaches the predetermined number of times without returning to the "normal gaming state", the gaming state after the end of the jackpot is always set to the normal symbol. It is possible to shift to the low probability state of. Therefore, it is obtained when the player continuously plays the game on the pachinko machine 10 by suppressing the occurrence of an excessive jackpot "renso" in a short time due to the continuous high probability state of the normal symbol. It is possible to equalize the payout rate, and it can be configured so that the game value given to the player does not become too high.

The special figure 1 time saving counter 203m is a counter for determining the end condition of 1 of the "time saving function", and counts the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol set for each jackpot type is executed after the jackpot ends. Then, it is a counter for discriminating the time saving end condition of "Special Figure 1 Number of Fluctuations". As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time saving end condition according to the number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is different for each jackpot type, and it is set for each jackpot type or small hit type. When the number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed is executed, the executing "time saving function" is terminated, and the state is changed from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

The special figure 1 time reduction counter 203m is set to “0” as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 28). Then, in the "normal game state A" or "normal game state B" (that is, the non-winning assistance state), the jackpot type "time reduction B", "time reduction D" or "time reduction E", or the small hit type "time reduction J" Or "Time saving K" is won, "7" is set in the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203m after the end of the jackpot (see S6707 in FIG. 45). In addition, in the "time reduction state A" or "time reduction state" (winning assistance state), before reaching the time reduction limiter (after reaching the time reduction limiter), the jackpot types "time reduction D", "time reduction E", and "time reduction A" Or "Time saving B", or if you win the small hit type "Time saving J", "Time saving K" or "Time saving H", after the end of the big hit, the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203m will be "100". Is set (see S6707 in FIG. 45).

On the other hand, the special figure 1 time saving counter 203m is used every time the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed once when the "time saving function" is enabled, that is, when the time saving flag 203j is turned on. Is subtracted by 1 (see S5302 in FIG. 37).

Then, when the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203m becomes "0" (S5303: No in FIG. 37), it is determined that the time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the first special symbol is satisfied, and the time saving end condition is turned on. The time saving flag 203j is set to off (see S5309 in FIG. 37), and the "time saving function" is terminated.

The special figure 2 time saving counter 203n is a counter for determining the end condition of 1 of the "time saving function", and counts the number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol set for each jackpot type is executed after the jackpot ends. Then, it is a counter for discriminating the time saving end condition of "Special Figure 2 Number of Fluctuations". As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time saving end condition according to the number of executions of the dynamic display of the second special symbol is different for each jackpot type, and it is set for each jackpot type or small hit type. When the number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed is executed, the executing "time saving function" is terminated, and the state is changed from the "time reduction state" to the "normal game state".

The special figure 2 time saving counter 203n is set to “0” as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 28). Then, in the "normal game state A" or "normal game state B" (that is, the non-winning assistance state), the jackpot type "time reduction B", "time reduction D" or "time reduction E", or the small hit type "time reduction J" Or "Time saving K" is won, "1" is set in the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203n after the end of the jackpot (see S6707 in FIG. 45). In addition, in the "time reduction state A" or "time reduction state" (winning assistance state), before reaching the time reduction limiter (after reaching the time reduction limiter), the jackpot types "time reduction D", "time reduction E", and "time reduction A" Or "Time saving B", or if you win the small hit type "Time saving J", "Time saving K" or "Time saving H", after the end of the big hit, the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203n is "100". Is set (see S6707 in FIG. 45).

On the other hand, the special figure 2 time saving counter 203n is used every time the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once when the "time saving function" is enabled, that is, when the time saving flag 203j is turned on. Is subtracted by 1 (see S5311 in FIG. 37).

Then, when the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203n becomes "0" (S5312: No in FIG. 37), it is determined that the time saving end condition based on the number of executions of the second special symbol is satisfied, and the time saving end condition is turned on. The time saving flag 203j is set to off (see S5309 in FIG. 37), and the "time saving function" is terminated.

The total time saving counter 203o is a counter for determining the end condition of 1 of the "time saving function", and the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are performed 100 times in total after the jackpot ends. It is a counter for counting whether or not it has been executed and determining the time saving end condition of "special figure 1 and special figure 2 total number of fluctuations". As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the time saving end condition depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed differs for each jackpot type, and the first special symbol set for each jackpot type. And the time saving end condition is different depending on the total number of executions of the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the total number of executions of the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol set for each jackpot type or small hit type. When is performed, the running "time saving function" is terminated, and the state is configured to shift from the "time saving state" to the "normal game state".

The total time reduction counter 203o is set to "0" as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 28). Then, in the "normal game state A" or "normal game state B" (that is, the non-winning assistance state), the jackpot type "time reduction B", "time reduction D" or "time reduction E", or the small hit type "time reduction J" Or "Time saving K" is won, "1" is set in the value of the total time saving counter 203o after the end of the jackpot (see S6707 in FIG. 45). In addition, in the "time reduction state A" or "time reduction state" (winning assistance state), before reaching the time reduction limiter (after reaching the time reduction limiter), the jackpot types "time reduction D", "time reduction E", and "time reduction A" Or "Time saving B", or if you win the small hit type "Time saving J", "Time saving K" or "Time saving H", "100" is set in the value of the total time saving counter 203o after the end of the big hit. (See S6707 in FIG. 45).

On the other hand, the total time saving counter 203o dynamically displays the first special symbol or the second special symbol once when the "time saving function" is enabled, that is, when the time saving flag 203j is turned on. Each time it is done, it is subtracted by 1 (see S5304 or S5313 in FIG. 37).

Then, when the value of the total time saving counter 203o becomes "0" (see S5305: No or S5314: No in FIG. 37), the time saving end condition based on the total number of executions of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Is determined to have been established, the on time saving flag 203j is set to off (see S5309 in FIG. 37), and the "time saving function" is terminated.

The special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p is a counter for determining the end condition of 1 of the "time reduction function", and counts the number of times the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol after the end of the big hit. , It is a counter for discriminating the time saving end condition of "special figure 1 small hit".

The special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p is set to “0” as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 28). Then, one of the big hit types or the small hit types is won, and at the stage when the big hit is completed, the value of the special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p is set to "5" regardless of which big hit type or small hit type. Is set (see S6707 in FIG. 45). On the other hand, the special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p is used for the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol when the "time reduction function" is enabled, that is, when the time reduction flag 203j is turned on. Based on this, when the small winning opening unit 73 is opened, 1 is subtracted (see S5307 in FIG. 37).

Then, when the value of the special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p becomes "0" (see 5308: No in FIG. 37), a small prize is won based on the winning of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. It is configured to determine that the time saving end condition by opening the mouth unit 73 is satisfied, set the turned on time saving flag 203j to off (see S5309 in FIG. 37), and end the "time saving function". ..

The special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q is a counter for determining the end condition of 1 of the "time reduction function", and counts the number of times the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol after the end of the big hit. , It is a counter for discriminating the time saving end condition of "special figure 2 small hit".

The special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q is set to “0” as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 28). Then, one of the big hit types or the small hit types is won, and at the stage when the big hit is completed, the value of the special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q is set to "1" regardless of which big hit type or small hit type. Is set (see S6707 in FIG. 45). On the other hand, the special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q is used for the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol when the "time reduction function" is enabled, that is, when the time reduction flag 203j is turned on. Based on this, when the small winning opening unit 73 is opened, 1 is subtracted (see S5316 in FIG. 37).

Then, when the value of the special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q becomes "0" (see 5317: No in FIG. 37), a small prize is won based on the winning of the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is configured to determine that the time saving end condition by opening the mouth unit 73 is satisfied, set the turned on time saving flag 203j to off (see S5309 in FIG. 37), and end the "time saving function". ..

The jackpot flag 203r is a flag for determining whether or not to generate a jackpot state based on the fact that the sphere has passed through a specific area.

The jackpot flag 203r is set to off as an initial value by the initial setting process of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on (see S117 in FIG. 28). Then, when the ball is detected by the specific area switch 73f provided in the specific area that can be opened during the small hit game, the big hit flag 203r is set to ON (see S6304 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, when it is determined that the jackpot flag 203r is set to on in the hit processing (see FIG. 38) described later (see S6006: Yes in FIG. 38), the jackpot flag 203r is set to off (see FIG. 38). 38 S6007). After the jackpot flag 203r is set from on to off, the jackpot game according to the jackpot type or the small hit type is started.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 (a) to 25 (c), the details of the random number table 202i per normal figure, the normal figure fluctuation table 202j, and the ordinary electric service opening table 202k will be described. First, FIG. 25A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a random number table 202i per normal figure stored in the ROM 202.

As described above, in the random number table 202i per normal figure, the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state of the normal symbol which is the "normal game state" (a period other than the "time reduction state" (during the jackpot of the special symbol). (Including))) is used for the "normal symbol low probability state" and the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is a state in which the normal symbol is more likely to be hit than the "normal symbol low probability state". It can be divided into two types, one for the "normal symbol high probability state" used in the case of "state". Then, the number of hit random numbers included in each of the "normal symbol low probability state" and the "normal symbol high probability state" is set differently. In this way, by making the number of winning random numbers different between the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state", the "ordinary symbol low probability state" and the "ordinary symbol high probability state" can be used. , The probability of winning in the variable display of ordinary symbols is changed.

As shown in FIG. 25 (a), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of values of the counter C4 per normal figure, which is a hit in the case of the "normal symbol low probability state", is one, and the value "99". Is specified (set) in the random number table 202i per figure. That is, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal symbol low probability state" (that is, the "normal game state") is 1/100, and it is set so that almost no hit is derived in the variable display of the normal symbol.

On the other hand, the number of values of the counter C4 per normal figure, which is a hit in the "normal symbol high probability state", is 99, and the values "1 to 99" are defined (set) in the random number table 202i per normal figure. ing. That is, the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal symbol high probability state" (that is, the "time shortened state") is 99/100, and it is set so that the hit is almost derived in the variable display of the normal symbol.

As a result, by changing the winning / failing probability of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is possible to make a difference between the situation where the normal electric service 72 is hardly opened and the situation where it is easy to open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 72 is easy to open, so that a prize can be won to the second starting port 71 side, or the normal electric service 72 is difficult to open. By making the situation in which it is difficult for the ball to win the second starting port 71 depending on the game state, it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

In particular, in the "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol high probability state" is reached, the normal electric service 72 is likely to be in the open state, and the ball fired by the right-handed game is the ordinary electric. If the small winning opening unit 73 provided on the upstream side of the winning combination 72 is not open, it is configured so that the second starting opening 71 can be easily won. In other words, a ball hit right in the "time shortened state" is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 71 except in the state where the small winning opening unit 73 is open, and is arranged on the downstream side of the small winning opening unit 73, and is a normal electric machine. It is configured so that it is difficult to be guided to the variable winning device 65 side provided at a position where it is difficult to win a prize unless it rolls on the appearance plate 72a of the winning combination 72.

On the other hand, in the jackpot game state, it becomes the "normal symbol low probability state", the normal electric role 72 is more difficult to open than the "time shortened state", and the ball fired by the right-handed game is closed on the ordinary electric role 72. Is configured to roll completely from the right end to the left end and flow down to the downstream side where the variable winning device 65 is arranged. In other words, the ball hit right during the jackpot state is configured so that it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 71 from the "time shortened state" and can win a prize in the open variable winning device 65. As a result, when the variable winning device 65 is opened during the jackpot state, if the ordinary electric service 72 is in the state of blocking the second starting port 71, the ball can win the variable winning device 65. It is in a state where the game value based on the winning of the variable winning device 65 can be acquired.

On the other hand, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol low probability state" is set, the variable display time of the normal symbol is long, and the normal electric service 72 is difficult to open, and when it is opened. However, since the normal electric service 72 is opened only for a short time, even if the ball is fired in the right-handed game, it is difficult to win the second starting port 71 from the "normal symbol high probability state". Further, the first starting port 64 is not provided with a device for assisting a prize such as the ordinary electric service 72, and the through gate 67 is not arranged in the flow area of the ball launched in the left-handed game. Therefore, the ball launched by the left-handed game is not configured to easily win a prize in the first starting port 64 by the winning assist function. Therefore, in other words, in the "normal game state", even if the right-handed game is played, it is difficult for the right-handed ball to win the second starting port 71, and the ball launched in the left-handed game is also , The first starting port 64 must be won without using the winning assist function, and the first starting port 64 is configured to win a prize by itself in order to execute the dynamic display of the first special symbol. ..

In the "normal game state", the player can win a prize in the second starting port 71 in the "normal game state" by providing a plurality of types of variable display time of the normal symbol and opening patterns of the normal electric service 72. It is more preferable to configure it so that it is difficult to grasp the timing and to make it difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 71. In addition, in the "normal game state", when a right-handed game is played, an error is notified due to the passage of the ball to the through gate 67, so that the player and the employee of the game hall are notified of the error. By suggesting that the game mode is not encouraged, the player may suppress the game in the right-handed game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 25 (b), the details of the normal figure variation table 202j for determining the variable display time of the ordinary symbol will be described. FIG. 25B is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the normal figure variation table 202j stored in the ROM 202.

The normal figure fluctuation table 202j is divided into two types, one for the "normal game state" referred to in the "normal game state" and the other for the "time shortened state" referred to in the "time shortened state". Then, the variable display time of the normal symbol set for the "normal game state" and the "time reduction state" is set differently. In this way, by making the variable display time of the normal symbol different in each game state, the time for deriving the winning / failing result of the normal symbol is changed in each game state.

As shown in FIG. 25 (b), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the "normal game state" is set to "4 seconds". It is specified in 202j. That is, in the "normal game state", the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stop symbol is set to be "4 seconds" without exception.

Further, the variable display time of the normal symbol set in the "time shortened state" is defined in the normal map fluctuation table 202j so as to be "0.1 seconds". That is, in the "time reduction state", the time from the start of the variable display of the normal symbol to the derivation of the stop symbol is set to be "0.1 seconds" without exception.

As a result, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol according to the game state, it is possible to change the period from when the ball passes through the through gate 67 until the normal electric service 72 is released. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, it becomes a hit with a variable display due to the passage of the through gate 67, and the ordinary electric service 72 is released based on the corresponding situation, and the ball passes through the through gate 67. It is possible to make a difference depending on the game state whether or not the player can flow into the second starting port 71 as it is. Therefore, by changing the variable display time of the normal symbol for each game state, it is possible to make the winning mode for the through gate 67 and the second starting port 71 of one ball different, and the game performance is different for each game state. Can be born.

In particular, in the "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the variable display time of the normal symbol is short and it is easy to win a hit, so while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72. The normal electric service 72 is in an open (immersive) state, and the ball launched by the right-handed game can win a prize in the second starting port 71. In other words, the ball hit right in the "time shortened state" is configured so that it is easy to win a prize in the second starting port 71 and it is difficult to win a prize in the variable winning device 65.

On the other hand, in the jackpot game in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the variable display time of the normal symbol is longer than that in the "time shortened state", and it is difficult to win the hit than in the "time shortened state". While the ball is rolling, it is easy for the normal electric service 72 to keep the closed (protruding) state, and the ball launched by the right-handed game rolls the upper surface of the infestation plate 72a of the normal electric service 72 from the right end to the left end. It is configured so that it can move completely and flow down to the variable winning device 65 side. In other words, the ball hit right during the jackpot game is configured so that it is difficult to win a prize in the second starting port 71 from the "time shortened state" and can win a prize in the variable winning device 65.

Next, the ordinary electric service opening table 202k will be described with reference to FIG. 25 (c). FIG. 25 (c) is a schematic view schematically showing an example of the ordinary electric service opening table 202k stored in the ROM 202. The ordinary electric service opening table 202k is referred to at the time of hitting the ordinary symbol, and the opening (immersion) time and the number of times of opening of the ordinary electric service 72 are defined based on the gaming state at the timing when the ordinary symbol hit occurs.

The ordinary electric service opening table 202k is divided into groups based on the game state in which ordinary symbols are drawn. Specifically, the opening mode (opening time) of the ordinary electric service 72 is for the "normal gaming state" referred to in the "normal gaming state" and for the "time shortening state" referred to in the "time shortening state". ) Is changed.

As shown in FIG. 25 (c), in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "normal game state" which is a low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal electric service 72 set when the normal symbol is won. The number of times of opening is one, and the opening time is specified by the ordinary electric service opening table 202k so as to be "0.1 seconds". That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "normal game state", the normal electric service 72 is set to be released for "0.1 seconds" x 1 time = "0.1 seconds". There is.

In addition, in the "time reduction state" which is a high probability state of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric service 72 set when the normal symbol is won is "3 seconds", and the number of times of opening is 3 times (opening). The interval time between the opening and the opening is specified by the ordinary electric service opening table 202k so as to be "0.5 seconds"). That is, when the normal symbol is won in the "probability fluctuation state" or the "time reduction state", the normal electric service 72 is configured to be released for "3 seconds" x 3 times = "9 seconds". Will be done.

As a result, by changing the opening mode of the ordinary electric service 72 according to the gaming state, it is possible to make a difference in the length of the period during which the ordinary electric service 72 is open. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 72 is open for a long period of time, so that it is easy to win a prize on the second starting port 71 side, or the normal electric service 72 is open. By making it difficult for the ball to win the second starting port 71 due to the short situation depending on the game state, it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

In particular, in the "time reduction state" in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the "normal symbol high probability state" is reached, the opening period of the normal electric service 72 is extended, and the ball launched by the right-handed game is the second starting port. It is configured so that it is easy to win a prize to 71. In other words, a ball hit right in the "time shortened state" is likely to win a prize in the second starting port 71, and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is likely to be accumulated, so that the fluctuation shortening function is activated. It is easy to use, and it is configured so that the dynamic display of the second special symbol can be performed efficiently.

In addition, in the jackpot game in which the right-handed game is encouraged, the ball launched by the right-handed game is the second from the "normal symbol low probability state" and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the normal electric service 72 are "time shortened state". It is configured so that it is difficult to win a prize in the starting port 71. In other words, for a ball hit to the right during a jackpot game, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol is less likely to accumulate than in the "time shortened state", so the movement of the second special symbol is performed from the "time shortened state". It is difficult to get a lottery opportunity to display the target.

In this way, by providing each gaming state in which the high-probability state or low-probability state of the special symbol and the high-probability state or low-probability state of the normal symbol are combined, the game playability is changed to each gaming state, and variations are made. Can provide abundant games and improve the interest of the games.

The hit probability of the variable display of the normal symbol and the variable display time of the variable display are not limited to the above embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, any ratio may be used as long as it is easier to win a normal symbol in the "time shortened state" than in the "normal game state". For example, the probability of hitting a normal symbol in the "normal game state". May be set to about 50/100 so that it is difficult to hit, or the hit probability of a normal symbol in the "time shortened state" may be set to about 50/100 = 1/2. Further, any time may be used as long as the variable display time is shorter in the "time shortened state" than in the "normal game state". For example, the variable display time of the normal symbol in the "normal game state" is set to "10 seconds" or more. It may be a long time (for example, "30 seconds") or a short time less than "10 seconds" (for example, "1 second").

Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening the ordinary electric service 72 are not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be changed as appropriate. Specifically, as the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72, any opening time may be used as long as the opening time in the "time shortened state" is more advantageous to the player than in the "normal gaming state". For example, "normal" The opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 in the "game state" or the like may be set to "0.1 seconds" or more (for example, "1 second"), or the number of times of opening may be set to "1 time" or more (for example, "3 times"). ") May be set. Further, the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 in the "time shortened state" may be a long time of "3 seconds" or more (for example, "5 seconds"), or a short time of less than "3 seconds" (for example, "1"). Seconds ") may be used. Further, the number of times the ordinary electric service 72 is opened in the "probability fluctuation state" or the like may be set to a large number of times (for example, "3 times") or more.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description will be continued. In addition to the counter buffer 203c shown in FIG. 6, the RAM 203 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, and various flags, counters, and inputs. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as / output (Input / Output; hereinafter abbreviated as “I / O”) are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 30) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 28) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal of the MPU 201 is configured so that the power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 detects balls that have won prizes in the winning ports 63, 64, 65, 71, and 73, balls that have passed through the through gate 67, and balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path through the out port 66. Various switches 208 including a switch group including a switch (for example, a large winning opening switch 65c, a small winning opening switch 73c, a specific area switch 73f, etc.) and a sensor group, and a start-up mode at power-on are set. The setting key 501 for the purpose, the setting change switch 502 for updating the probability setting value by being pressed in the "setting change mode", and the RAM erase switch 503 for erasing the data stored in the RAM 203 are connected. NS.

Further, on the output side of the input / output port 205, the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol display device 37, the normal symbol display device 83, the normal symbol hold lamp 84, and the variable winning device 65 open and close the large winning opening. To open and close the large winning opening solenoid 65b for driving the opening and closing of the plate 65a to the front side and the small winning opening opening and closing plate 73a that can switch whether or not the ball can flow into the small winning opening unit 73. Small winning opening solenoid 73b, a specific area solenoid for opening and closing a specific area opening / closing plate 73d that can switch whether or not a ball can flow into a specific area (not shown) provided in the small winning opening unit 73. 73e, a normal electric service solenoid (not shown) for driving the haunting plate 72a of the normal electric service 72, and other solenoid 209 are connected. The MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208, 502, 503 and the state of the setting key 501, and displays the display contents of the probability display device 504 as one of the execution results of the various processes. Set.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, a prize ball detection switch 217 for detecting the paid out prize balls is connected to the payout control device 111. The prize ball detection switch 217 is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launching unit 112a includes a firing solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of 51, and the ball is fired with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is used to output audio from an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, turn on / off output from a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and produce fluctuations. The third such as "3 consecutive acquisition challenge production", "7 consecutive acquisition production", "3 consecutive production", "ream villa continuation challenge production", "timer production", "special button production", "pending change notice" It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the symbol display device 81.

The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. In the first embodiment, the command is configured to be transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the command cannot be transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 to the main control device 110. ing. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are configured so that commands can be transmitted and received to each other.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 may be changed. The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled and the display control device 114 is used to change the rear image of the "super reach" effect mode and determine the effect development timing in the "special button effect". The third symbol display device 81 is instructed to display the display based on the pressing of the frame button 22.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the variation effect of the third symbol in the third symbol display device 81 and "" Executes display control of "3 consecutive acquisition challenge production", "7 consecutive acquisition production", "3 consecutive production", "continuous villa continuation challenge production", "timer production", "special button production", "hold change notice" It is a thing. The details of "3 consecutive acquisition challenge production", "7 consecutive acquisition production", "3 consecutive production", "continuous villa continuous challenge production", "timer production", and "special button production" will be described later. ..

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, and a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to a power failure or the like. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 48). The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient time for executing the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process.

Here, with reference to FIG. 26, the detailed electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 26 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113. In addition to various control programs executed by the MPU 221, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a jackpot random number table 222a, a jackpot type table 222b, a stop pattern table 222c, a variation pattern table 222d, and a small hit type as fixed value data. Table 222e is at least stored. These tables 222a to 222e are all the same as the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot type table 202b, the small hit type table 202c, the stop pattern table 202e, and the variation pattern table 202f provided in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110. ..

The voice lamp control device 113 is a jackpot random number counter C1, a jackpot type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c in the main control device 110 and transmitted by the hold ball number command. The look-ahead process can be executed based on each value of the counter CS1, the jackpot random number table 222a, the jackpot type table 222b, the stop pattern table 222c, the fluctuation pattern table 222d, and the small hit type table 222e.

Then, what kind of effect will the pending variable effect that is the target of the look-ahead processing be as a result of this look-ahead processing (whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a "reach display", etc.). Is determined before the execution of the variable effect to determine the execution of various effects, or to change the display mode of the reserved symbol displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4). Controls to determine the content (and execution time (timing)) are executed.

The RAM 223 includes a special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a, a special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b, a sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, a sub second reserved ball number counter 223d, a first reserved information storage area 223e, and a second reserved information. At least a storage area 223f and an execution information storage area 223g are provided.

The special figure 1 variation start flag 223a is a flag indicating that the variation effect of the first special symbol should be started in the on state. The special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 1 stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1225 in FIG. 52). .. Then, it is turned off when the variation effect of the first special symbol is set (see S1302 in FIG. 56).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a fluctuation effect of the first special symbol on standby when the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is turned on. In this case, the setting process of the variation effect of the first special symbol (see S1302 to S1309 in FIG. 56) for executing the variation effect of the first special symbol during the standby is performed.

The special figure 2 variation start flag 223b is a flag indicating that the variation effect of the second special symbol should be started in the ON state. The special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is set to off as an initial value when the power is turned on, and is turned on when the special figure 2 stop type command output from the main controller 110 is received (see S1235 in FIG. 53). .. Then, it is turned off when the variation effect of the second special symbol is set regardless of whether or not it is executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see S1311 in FIG. 56).

Then, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 has a variation effect of the second special symbol on standby when the special figure 2 variation start flag 223b is turned on. In this case, the setting process of the variation effect of the second special symbol for executing the variation effect of the second special symbol during the standby (see S1311 to S1318 in FIG. 56) is performed.

The sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, like the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, is a variation effect of the first special symbol that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37). (Dynamic display), it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command (held ball soot command) transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c displays the reserved balls. It is designed to manage numbers.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol is added by entering the ball into the first starting port 64, and the number of reserved balls counter 203a in the main control device 110. When the first reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the values are added, the addition of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 included in the first reserved ball number command. The later value (that is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is stored in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c (see S1207 in FIG. 51).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a is subtracted by the main control device 110. When the variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received and the mode of the variation effect of the first special symbol is set regardless of the execution on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the reception, the sub-first 1 The value of the reserved ball number counter 223c is subtracted (updated) by 1 (see S1305 in FIG. 56). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the first reserved ball number counter 203a, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c, so that the main control The value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c can be updated while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the device 110.

The sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is a variation effect of the second special symbol that can be executed by the third symbol display device 81 (special symbol display device 37), similarly to the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. (Dynamic display), it is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110 up to four times.

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 cannot directly access the main control device 110 to acquire the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 stores and updates the number of reserved balls based on the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d manages the number of reserved balls. It has become.

Specifically, in the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol is added by entering the ball into the second starting port 71, and the number of reserved balls counter 203b in the main control device 110. When the second reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received when the values are added, the addition of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110 included in the second reserved ball number command. The later value (that is, the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is stored in the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d (see S1211 in FIG. 51).

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 corresponds to the variation effect of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 when the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is subtracted by the main control device 110. When the variation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are received, and the mode of the variation effect of the second special symbol is set regardless of the execution on the third symbol display device 81 in accordance with the reception, the sub-number 2 The value of the reserved ball number counter 223d is subtracted (updated) by 1 (see S1314 in FIG. 56). In this way, according to the command transmitted from the main control device 110 in accordance with the update of the second reserved ball number counter 203b, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d, so that the main control The value of the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d can be updated while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the device 110.

The value of the sub-first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub-second reserved ball number counter 223d is used to display the reserved symbol and the executed symbol on the third symbol display device 81 in the gaming state in which the variation effect of each special symbol is encouraged. Used. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 sets the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in response to the reception of the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command to the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter. Stored in the number counter 223d (see S1207 or S1211 in FIG. 51), or responds to the reception of the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command, or the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command. Then, at the timing of updating the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball counter 223d (see S1305 or S1314 in FIG. 56), it corresponds to a special symbol encouraged according to the gaming state. In order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the sub 1st reserved ball counter 223c and the sub 2nd reserved ball counter 223d after storage or updating, the display 1st reserved ball number command or the display 2nd hold The ball count command is transmitted to the display control device 114.

When the display control device 114 receives the display first reserved ball number command or the display second reserved ball number command, the value of the reserved ball number indicated by the command, that is, the sub-first of the voice lamp control device 113. The reserved symbols corresponding to the values of the reserved ball number counter 223c and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d and the execution symbol indicating the variation effect during execution are displayed in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 (FIG. 4B). Control the drawing of the image so that it is displayed in (see).

As described above, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c is changed while synchronizing with the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110, and the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is changed. The value is changed while synchronizing with the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. Therefore, the number of reserved symbols displayed in the cockpit display area Db (see FIG. 4B) of the third symbol display device 81 is also the number of reserved balls counter 203a of the main control device 110 regarding the encouraged special symbol. It can be changed while synchronizing with the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls on which the special symbol variation effect encouraged according to the gaming state is reserved.

The first reserved information storage area 223e is information for performing the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol that is reserved, that is, the first reserved ball that is acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the main control device 110 starts winning a prize. Area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol transmitted by the number command. Is.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK and CS1 stored in the first hold information storage area 223e and the tables 222a to 222e stored in the ROM 222 to use the first special symbol. It is configured to perform a variable effect of.

The second reserved information storage area 223f is information for performing the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol that is reserved, that is, the second reserved ball that is acquired from the counter buffer 203c when the main control device 110 starts winning a prize. Area for storing each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the small hit type counter CK, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 related to the variation effect of the second separate symbol transmitted by the number command. Is.

The voice lamp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK and CS1 stored in the second hold information storage area 223f and the tables 222a to 222e stored in the ROM 222 to use the second special symbol. It is configured to perform a variable effect of.

The execution information storage area 223g is executed by the special symbol display device 37, and information on the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81, that is, the start winning prize in the main control device 110. The jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, which are acquired from the counter buffer 203c and transmitted by the first reserved ball number command or the second reserved ball number command. This is an area for storing each value of the type counter CS1.

When the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, it executes the setting of the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the information for performing the variation effect stored in the first reserved information storage first area of the first reserved information storage area 223e or the first reserved information storage first area of the second reserved information storage area 223f described above. (Each value of counters C1 to C3, CK, CS1, etc.) is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g.

Here, with reference to FIG. 27, the details of the first reserved information storage area 223e, the second reserved information storage area 223f, and the execution information storage area 223g will be described. FIG. 27 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configurations of the first reserved information storage area 223e, the second reserved information storage area 223f, and the execution information storage area 223g.

The first reserved information storage area 223e has four areas, the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas. In each of the first reserved information storage areas 1 to 4, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and the jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored are stored. 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, the variation type counter storage area 223e4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored, and the value of the small hit type counter CK are stored. At least a small hit type counter storage area 223e5 is provided.

Further, the second reserved information storage area 223f has four areas of the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, similarly to the first reserved information storage area 223e. In each of the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, a jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored and a jackpot type counter storage area in which the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored are stored. 223f2, stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, variation type counter storage area 223f4 in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored, and the value of the small hit type counter CK are stored. At least a small hit type counter storage area 223f5 is provided.

Further, in the execution information storage area 223g, the jackpot random number counter storage area 223g1 in which the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed is stored, and the jackpot type counter The jackpot type counter storage area 223g2 in which the value of C2 is stored, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223g3 in which the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is stored, and the variation type counter storage area in which the value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored. At least 223 g4 and a small hit type counter storage area 223 g5 in which the value of the small hit type counter CK is stored are provided.

Specifically, the execution information storage area 223g is an area corresponding to the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol currently being executed. In addition, the first reserved information storage first area of the first reserved information storage area 223e corresponds to the variation effect of the first special symbol held first in time among the variation effects of the first reserved symbol. The first reserved information storage second area is an area corresponding to the second oldest reserved variation effect of the first special symbol in terms of time. , The first reserved information storage third area is an area corresponding to the third oldest reserved fluctuation effect of the first special symbol in terms of time among the reserved first special symbol variation effects, and is the first reserved area. The information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the fourth oldest reserved variation effect of the first special symbol in terms of time among the pending variation effects of the first special symbol.

Further, the second reserved information storage first area of the second reserved information storage area 223f corresponds to the variation effect of the second special symbol held first in time among the variation effects of the second special symbol held. The second area for storing the second reserved information is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect that is held second in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects. , The second reserved information storage third area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect, which is the third oldest in time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects, and is the second hold. The information storage fourth area is an area corresponding to the second special symbol variation effect that has been reserved for the fourth oldest time among the reserved second special symbol variation effects.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the small hit type counter CK, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 The value is extracted from the first reserved ball count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 includes the extracted values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 in the first reserved ball number command in the corresponding first reserved information storage first to fourth areas. It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223e1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223e3, the variation type counter storage area 223e4, and the small hit type counter storage area 223e5 in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the first reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ X ≦ 4), the number of variable effects of the first special symbol held at that time is X. , The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command of the first special symbol held in the Xth time among the fluctuation effects of the reserved first special symbol. Since it corresponds to the variation effect, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 in the first hold information storage X area are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 included in the first reserved ball number command in the first reserved X area of the first reserved ball storage area 203d. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the first hold X area of the main control device 110 are stored in the first hold information storage X area.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball number command from the main control device 110, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the small hit type counter CK, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 Each value of is extracted from the second reserved ball count command. Then, the voice lamp control device 113 includes the extracted values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 in the second reserved ball number command in the corresponding second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively. It is stored in the jackpot random number counter storage area 223f1, the jackpot type counter storage area 223f2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 223f3, the variation type counter storage area 223f4, and the small hit type counter storage area 223f5 in the area corresponding to the number of reserved balls.

Specifically, if the number of reserved balls included in the second reserved ball number command is X (1 ≦ Y ≦ 4), the number of variable effects of the second special symbol held at that time is Y. , The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 included in the second reserved ball number command of the first special symbol held in the Yth time among the fluctuation effects of the second special symbol held. Since it corresponds to the variation effect, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the counter storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 in the first hold information storage Y area are stored. At this time, the main control device 110 stores the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 included in the second reserved ball number command in the second reserved ball storage area 203e in the second reserved ball storage area 203e. That is, the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the second reserved Y area of the main control device 110 are stored in the second storage information storage Y area.

On the other hand, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command indicating the start of the variation effect of the first special symbol from the main control device 110, the first reserved information storage area 223e The process of shifting the information stored in the execution information storage area 223g is executed. That is, when the hold information regarding the first special symbol exists, the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol held first in time is started, so that the first special symbol held first is executed. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first storage area for storing the first reserved information corresponding to the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol currently being executed. It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g5 of the corresponding execution information storage area 223g.

Then, when the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first reserved information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g. Puts the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first hold information storage second area into the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first hold information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first holding information storage third area are moved, and the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 are set to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first holding information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first hold information storage fourth area are changed to the storage areas 223e1 to the first hold information storage third area. Move to 223e5.

Further, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command indicating the start of the variation effect of the second special symbol from the main control device 110, the second reserved information storage area 223f The process of shifting the information stored in the execution information storage area 223g is executed. That is, when the hold information regarding the second special symbol exists, the execution of the variation effect of the second special symbol held first in time is started, so that the second special symbol held first is executed. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the respective storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the first area for storing the second reserved information corresponding to the variation effect of It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g5 of the corresponding execution information storage area 223g.

Then, when the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second reserved information storage first area are moved to the storage areas 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g. Sets the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second hold information storage second area to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second hold information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second holding information storage third area are moved, and the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 are set to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second holding information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second holding information storage fourth area are changed to the storage areas 223f1 to the second holding information storage third area. Move to 223f5.

As a result, the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored in the execution information storage area 223g. Further, in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas and the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas, respectively, the first reserved first to first reserved ball storage areas 203d of the main control device 110 are stored. The same values as the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the four areas and the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e are stored. That is, in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the fluctuation effects of the first special symbol and the second special symbol, which are being executed and held by the main control device 110, are the execution information. It is stored in the storage area 223g, the first reserved information storage area 223e, and the second reserved information storage area 223f.

In the voice lamp control device 113, when the look-ahead process (not shown) is performed, the first special symbol or the second special symbol reserved from the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c or the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d. Grasp the number of variable effects (number of reserved balls). Then, based on the number of reserved balls, the variation effect of the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas is suspended. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the area are pre-read, and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation effect is a big hit, the fluctuation time, and the like. For example, if the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c is "1" and the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is "0", the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the first special symbol is Since the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is 0 times, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 are pre-read for the first area for storing the first reserved information. , Make a judgment. If the value of the sub first reserved ball counter 223c is "0" and the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is "4", the number of reserved balls in the variation effect of the first special symbol is Since it is 0 times and the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol is 4, the values of the stored counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 are pre-read for the second reserved information storage fourth area. , Make a judgment.

The pachinko machine 10 is configured so that a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 in only one direction, and the voice lamp control device 113 accesses RAM 203 or the like of the main control device 110. Can't. On the other hand, the voice lamp control device 113 is provided with the first hold information storage area 223e and the second hold information storage area 223f, and the first special symbol and the second special symbol held by the main control device 110 are changed. Since the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 corresponding to the effect are also stored in the voice lamp control device 113, the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first hold information storage area 223e and the second hold information storage area 223f are also stored. , CK, CS1 can be referred to, and the pre-reading process can be executed by the voice lamp control device 113. That is, when the reserved 1st special symbol and / and the 2nd special symbol variation effect is executed, what will be the result of the variation effect (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the variation time)? Etc.) can be determined before the execution of the variable effect to determine the execution of various effects.

The shift processing described above in the first hold information storage area 223e or the second hold information storage area 223f and the execution information storage area 223g is the special figure 1 variation pattern command, the special figure 1 stop type command, or the special figure 2 variation. Number of balls held when a pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command are received (update based on reception of special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 1 stop type command or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and special figure 2 stop type command 1st hold information storage 1st to 4th areas or 2nd hold information storage 1st to 1st based on the values of the sub 1st hold ball number counter 223c and the sub 2nd hold ball number counter 223d before the operation is performed. Data is moved (shifted) only in the area corresponding to the reserved fluctuation effect among the four areas.

For example, the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c before the update when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received is "4", and the entire area of the first reserved information storage area 223e. It is assumed that the data is stored in (the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas). In this case, the data in the first hold information storage first area is shifted to the execution information storage area 223 g, the data in the first hold information storage second area is shifted to the first hold information storage first area, and the first hold information is stored. The data in the storage third area is shifted to the first hold information storage second area, and the data in the first hold information storage fourth area is shifted to the first hold information storage third area.

On the other hand, if the value of the sub first hold ball count counter 223c before the update when the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received is "2", the first hold information storage first area The data is shifted to the execution information storage area 223g, the data in the first hold information storage second area is shifted to the first hold information storage first area, and the data shift is completed. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the data shift processing is not performed for the first hold information storage third and fourth areas where the fluctuation effect is not held, the number of data shifts can be reduced. , The control burden can be reduced.

Regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas is stored in an area where the area number is one smaller (execution information storage area 223 g, Alternatively, it may be configured to shift to the first reserved information storage first to third areas or the second reserved information storage first to third areas), respectively. In that case, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the data is stored (held) in each of the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas or the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas. Therefore, it is possible to easily create a program.

Returning to FIG. 26, the description will be continued. The RAM 223 also has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until a process corresponding to the command is performed.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 51) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process causes the command determination process to be performed. The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the special symbol variation effect and the continuous notice in the third symbol display device 81 are produced. It controls the production.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 28 to 48. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and is started periodically (in this embodiment, at a cycle of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing a start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, the initial value setting process accompanying the power-on is executed (S101). For example, the access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as voice lamp control device 113, payout control device 111, etc.) to become operable, weight processing (“1 second” in this embodiment). Is executed (S102). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S103).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 (see FIG. 5) provided in the main control device 110 is turned on (S104). As a result of the determination, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), it is further determined whether or not the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105). If it is not stored (S105: No), there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally. In this case, the processing is shifted to S116 in order to initialize the RAM 203. do.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S105: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S106), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S107: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data has been destroyed, and the process is shifted to S116 even in such a case.

As will be described later in the process of S156 in FIG. 30, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S104: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S105: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S107: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S108). Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S109).

When it is determined in the process of S109 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S109: Yes), the RAM erase switch 503: is off and the setting key 501: is turned on when the power is turned on, so that the user stands up. In order to start the raising mode in the "setting confirmation mode", first, the probability setting value is displayed on the probability display device 504 (S110), and then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S111). The "setting confirmation mode" is maintained until the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: No). On the other hand, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S111: Yes), the display of the probability setting value on the probability display device 504 is finished (S112), the "setting confirmation mode" is finished, and the process shifts to S113. do. If the setting key 501 is not turned on in the processing of S109 (S109: No), the processing of S110 to S112 is skipped and the processing is shifted to S113 in order to start the startup mode in the "normal mode". do.

In the process of S113, a set value command is generated based on the probability set value, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S113), and then an interrupt is permitted (S114). Then, the process proceeds to the main process (see FIG. 30) described later.

The set value command set here is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the external output process (see S201 of FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt process described later. Upon receiving this set value command, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to store (store) the probability set value indicated by the set value command in the set value memory (not shown) provided in the RAM 223. ..

On the other hand, in the process of S104, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S104: Yes), it is determined whether to start the startup mode in "RAM clear mode" or "setting change mode". In order to determine, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S115).

If it is determined in the process of S115 that the setting key 501 is not turned on (S115: No), the process shifts to S116 in order to start the start mode in the "RAM clear mode".

In the process of S116, the initialization process (S116, S117) of the RAM 203 is executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on regardless of the setting change, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 503. NS. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 503 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S116, S117) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set (S105: No) or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) (S107: No), the initial RAM 203 is also set. The conversion process (S116, S117) is executed.

In the RAM initialization process (S116, S117), that is, in the "RAM clear mode", the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to "0" (S116), and then the initial value (for example, the first reserved ball count counter 203a) is set in the RAM 203. "0" clear, etc.) is set (S117). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to the process of S113.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S115 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S115: Yes), the setting change process is performed in order to set the startup mode to the "setting change mode" (S118).

Here, the setting change process (S118) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing this setting change process (S118).

This setting change process (S118) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the "setting change mode", and is to accept and confirm the change (update) of the probability setting value from the hall related persons and the like. It is the processing of.

In this setting change process (S118), first, the probability display device 504 sets the start of display of the current probability set value (S121), and the process shifts to S122. By the start setting of the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the probability display device 504.

Note that the probability setting value displayed here is not the probability setting value set before the power is turned off, but may be fixed to a specific value without fail. That is, when the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may always start the display with a specific probability setting value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "3" which is an intermediate value of the probability setting values. It may be "4" or "6" which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall personnel and the like can change the probability setting value from the specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode", the probability display device 504 may start displaying the probability set value set before the power is turned off as it is. .. As a result, the hall personnel and the like can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the start-up mode is set to the "setting change mode", if the probability setting value set in the probability display device 504 before the power is turned off is "3" or more, the probability setting value is set to "3" or more. The display starts as "3", and if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is less than "3", the display starts with the probability setting value set before the power is turned off. It may be done. For example, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high such as "5" or "6", there may be many cases where the probability setting value is to be slightly reduced (for example, only 1). In such a case, if the display of the probability set value is started with the probability set value set before the power is turned off as it is, the following problems occur. That is, the update of the probability set value is added by 1 each time the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, and when the probability set value is "6" and the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on, the probability set value is set to "". It is done by returning to "1". Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability set value from "6" to "5", it is necessary to make the probability set value make one round while repeatedly turning on the RAM erase switch 503. On the other hand, when the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, the probability setting value is started to be displayed at "3" to set the probability while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on. The value can be updated.

Next, in the process of S122, it is determined whether or not the probability set value is in the range of "1" to "6" (S122), and it is not within the predetermined range, that is, an abnormal probability set value is obtained. If so (S122: No), the probability set value is changed to the initial value (S123), and the process proceeds to S124. The initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which is an intermediate value of the probability setting values. It may be "6" which is the maximum value of the probability setting value. On the other hand, if it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" as a result of the processing of S122 (S122: Yes), the probability setting value is a normal value, so the processing of S123 Is skipped and the process proceeds to S124.

In the process of S124, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124). As a result, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is not turned on (S124: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125).

As a result of S125, if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is not turned on (S125: No), the process returns to S122, while if it is determined that the setting change switch 502 is turned on (S125: Yes), the probability The set value is updated (S126), and the process returns to the process of S122.

To update the probability setting value, which is the process of S126, if the probability setting value up to that point is "1" to "5", 1 is added to the probability setting value, and the probability setting value up to that point is "6". In the case of "", it is performed by returning the probability setting value to "1". The probability set value updated by the process of S126 is displayed on the probability display device 504.

The loop processing of S122 → S123 → S124: No → S125 (and S126) → S122 continues to be executed until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on in the processing of S124 (S124: Yes). Then, when it is determined by the processing of S124 that the RAM erase switch 503 is turned on (S124: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the probability display device 504 is used as the probability setting value to be used in the future game. (S127), and the jackpot random number table 202a corresponding to the probability setting value is set (S128).

After the processing of S128, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the off state (S129). In the process of S129, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the on state to the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state, and the setting key 501 may be determined. By detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As a result of the processing of S129, while it is determined that the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S129: No), the processing of S129 is repeatedly executed. Then, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing of S129 (S129: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value in the probability display device 504 is set (S130), and this setting change is made. The process (S118) is terminated.

After the setting change process is completed, the process returns to the start-up process (see FIG. 28), the process is shifted to S116, the RAM 203 initialization process is executed (S116, S117), and the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared). .. In this way, the hall related persons strongly recognize that the data of the RAM 203 is erased after the RAM erasing switch 503 is turned on to determine the probability set value in the processing of S124. Can be made to.

Further, in the process of S124, the probability setting value is determined by the ON detection of the RAM erase switch 503, but the probability setting value may be determined by the OFF detection of the setting key 501.

Next, with reference to FIG. 30, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the above-mentioned start-up process will be described. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the counter update process and the power off process are roughly classified.

In the main process, first, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151). If the information on the occurrence of the power failure is not stored in the RAM 203 (S151: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power supply is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S152, S153).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S152). Specifically, when the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and the counter value reaches the maximum value (“9999”, “99” in this embodiment), Clear to "0". Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the processing of S207 (see FIG. 31) of the timer interrupt processing described later (S153), and the process proceeds to the processing of S151.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), which will be described later, is started and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed depending on the state of the game. For example, during the jackpot, the variable winning device 65 is controlled to open and close, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal symbol display device 83 controls the display of the normal symbol. Further, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the special symbol display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the acquired jackpot random number counter C1 differs depending on whether it is in the high probability state or the low probability state. come. Therefore, the time required to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant and changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The above-mentioned processes S152 and S153, which are one process of the main process, are executed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. That is, since the update of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is repeatedly executed using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number are used. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the initial value of the counter C4 per normal figure) can be updated at random, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated at random. In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the normal figure per counter C4 that use these as the initial value of the update are randomly updated. Can have sex.

In the process of S151, if the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S151: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. Since the NMI interrupt processing described later in FIG. 48 has been executed, the processing at the time of power cutoff after S154 is executed.

In the process of S154, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S154), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to another control device (payout control device 111, voice lamp control device 113, or other peripheral control device). ) (S155). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S156), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S157), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The process of S151 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S152 and S153, which is performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main control device 110, various settings by the timer interrupt processing are completed, and at the timing when the updates of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are completed, the power failure occurrence information is confirmed. .. Therefore, when returning from the power cut-off state, the process can be started from the process of S151 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S151 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process.

Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S101) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), it is possible to start from the process of S151. As a result, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process of the first embodiment.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S201). In the timer interrupt process and the main process (see FIG. 30), commands or signals to be transmitted to the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the hall computer (not shown), etc. are generated based on various processes. When a command is generated, it is temporarily stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in RAM 203, and when a signal is generated, a device corresponding to the signal (for example, a hall computer and a pachinko machine 10 are connected). Outputs a signal to an external output terminal board (not shown) for the purpose. In the external output process of S201, output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission is transmitted to each control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side, and the signal is output to various devices.

After the processing of S201, next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S202), and then the hitting process for executing the processing at the time of hitting each special symbol is executed (s). S203). This hit process (S203) will be described later in FIG. 38.

After S203, next, the ordinary electric service control process for executing the drive control process of the ordinary electric service 72 is executed (S204). Briefly, the normal symbol display device 83 performs variable display of the normal symbol on the condition that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, and as a result of the variable display of the normal symbol, the winning symbol of the normal symbol (for example, " When the "○" symbol) appears and becomes a hit state, the normal electric service 72 is opened for a predetermined time, while when the lost symbol of the normal symbol (for example, the "x" symbol) appears, the normal electric service 72 Keep closed. This ordinary electric service control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

After the processing of S204, the reading processing of various winning switches is then executed (S205). That is, the state of various switches 208 connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch 208 is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved. Further, a prize ball command corresponding to the number of acquired balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 based on the prize detection information is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. As a result, a predetermined prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S206). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“9999” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0”. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“99” in the first embodiment), it is cleared to “0” and the second initial value is cleared. The updated value of the random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, the normal figure hit counter C4, and the small hit type counter CK are updated (S207). Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the fluctuation type counter CS1, the normal figure hit counter C4, and the small hit type counter CK are each added by 1, and their counter values are maximum. When the value (in the first embodiment, "9999", "99", "99", "9", "99", "99", respectively) is reached, the value is cleared to "0", respectively. When the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure hit counter C4 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is used as the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure hit counter C4. Is read as the initial value of, and the initial value is set in the jackpot random number counter C1 or the normal figure per counter C4. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 and CK are stored in the corresponding counter buffer 203c area of the RAM 203.

Next, the start winning process associated with winning the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is executed (S208). The details of this start winning process (S208) will be described later with reference to FIG. 32.

Next, a gate passing process for determining whether or not the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is executed (S209). When it is determined in the gate passage process (S209) that the sphere has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is acquired from the counter buffer 203c, and the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is the normal figure. It is stored in the holding ball storage area 203h (see FIG. 6), and the holding number of the variable display of the normal symbol is displayed on the normal symbol holding lamp 84. The details of this gate passing process (S209) will be described later with reference to FIG. 33.

After the gate passage process (S209) is executed, the process for dynamically displaying the special symbol by the special symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device 81 based on the process content of the start winning process (S208) is performed. The special figure variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol is executed (S210). The details of the special figure variation processing (S210) will be described later with reference to FIG. 34.

Next, it is a setting process for determining whether or not the normal symbol is correct or not based on the processing content of the gate passing process (S209), and for performing variable display of the normal symbol based on the determination result on the normal symbol display device 83. Figure variation processing is executed (S211). In this normal symbol variation processing (S211), the hit probability of the normal symbol is performed with either a high probability (for example, 99/100) or a low probability (1/100) according to the game state described above. Then, the normal symbol is variably displayed based on the hit / fail result, and the display result according to the hit / fail result is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83. The details of the normal map variation processing (S211) will be described later with reference to FIG. 46.

After executing the normal figure fluctuation process (S211), the launch control process is executed (S212), and other processes that should be executed periodically are executed (S213) to end the timer interrupt process. ..

The launch control process (S212) is provided on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and the stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process of determining whether to turn on / off the firing of a ball. Then, when the ball launch is on, the information of the ball launch signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 in order to transmit the ball launch signal to the launch control device 112. As a result, the ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the external output process (S201) of the timer interrupt process that is executed next.

Further, in the present embodiment, the process to be executed periodically is executed by the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31), and in the main process, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interrupt process. Although the case of performing the timer interrupt processing has been described, a part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. .. For example, the prize ball count signal, the payout abnormality signal read process (S202), the hit process (S203), the ordinary electric service control process (S204), and the switch read process (S205), which were executed in the timer interrupt process in the present embodiment. ) May be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main process, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the process to be executed every predetermined time is executed, and each of them is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals, but the process to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed according to the state of the game. Since the time required for the operation changes, the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even in such a configuration.

Next, the start winning process (S208), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 32. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S208).

The start winning process (S208) determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, and if there is a winning, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 are won. The process of storing (holding) in the first holding ball storage area 203d or the second holding ball storage area 203e corresponding to the starting ports 64 and 71 is executed. Further, a process for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the voice lamp control device 113 is executed.

In this start winning process (S208), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first starting port 64 (S301). Here, the first is based on the output signal of the first start port switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) into the first start port 64, which is read in the switch read process (see S205 in FIG. 31). 1 The ball entering the starting port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 31).

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting port 64 (there was a starting prize) (S301: Yes), then the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (the first held in the main control device 110). 1 It is determined whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N1 of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S302). Then, even if there is a prize in the first start opening 64, if the number of balls on hold for operation is not N1 <4 (S302: No), this start prize process (S208) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Return to.

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N1 <4 (S302: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a (number of pending balls N1) is added by 1 (S303). Then, since the prize is won in the first starting port 64 corresponding to the first special symbol this time, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination of each random number values C1 to C3 and CS1 (S304), and processing is performed. To S305.

In the processing of S305, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6) and stored in S304. Of the first reserved first to fourth areas provided in the first reserved ball storage area 203d set as the destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203d1 of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the first reserved ball counter 203a. , The jackpot type counter storage area 203d2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203d3, the variable type counter storage area 203d4, and the small hit type counter storage area 203d5, respectively (S305).

Specifically, for example, in the processing of S304 based on the winning of the first starting port 64, the first reserved ball storage area 203d is set as the storage destination, and the first reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S303. If the value of 203a is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 are held in each storage area of the first holding first area. If the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "2", the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "3" in each storage area of the first reserved second area. If there is, counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved third area, and if the value of the first reserved ball counter 203a after addition is "4", counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the first reserved fourth area. , CK, CS1 values are reserved.

Next, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (number of operation reserved balls N1) after addition by the processing of S303, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (held) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d by the processing of S305, The number of first reserved balls in order to transmit the first reserved ball number command including each value of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 and the small hit type counter CK to the voice lamp control device 113. The command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S306). As a result, the first reserved ball count command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 31) that is executed next. When the process of S306 is completed, the start winning process (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

As the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 included in the first reserved ball count command in the processing of S306, the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c by the processing of S309 may be used, or the processing of S305. In, the value stored (held) in the first reserved ball storage area 203d may be read out and used.

In the process of S301, when it is determined that the ball has not won the first starting port 64 (S301: No), then it is determined whether or not the ball has won the second starting port 71 (starting winning). (S307). Here, as in the case of the first starting port 64, the second starting port switch (not shown) that detects the entry (winning) into the second starting port 71, which is read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 31). Based on the output signal of, the ball entering the second starting port 71 is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 31).

When it is determined that the ball has won the second starting port 71 (there was a starting prize) (S307: Yes), then the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the second held in the main control device 110). 2 It is determined whether or not the operation holding ball number N2 of the dynamic display (variation effect) of the special symbol is less than the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment) (S308). Then, if there is no winning in the second starting port 71 (S307: No), or even if there is a winning in the second starting port 71, the number of pending balls N2 <4 (S308: No), this The start winning process (S208) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls N2 <4 (S308: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b (number of reserved balls N2) is added by 1 (S309). Then, since the prize is won in the second starting port 71 corresponding to the second special symbol this time, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination of the respective random number values C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 (S310). , The process shifts to S311.

In the processing of S311, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the small hit type counter CK is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6) and stored in S310. Of the second reserved first to fourth areas provided in the second reserved ball storage area 203e set as the destination, the jackpot random number counter storage area 203e1 of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the second reserved ball number counter 203b. , The jackpot type counter storage area 203e2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203e3, the variable type counter storage area 203e4, and the small hit type counter CK are held (stored), respectively (S311).

Specifically, for example, in the processing of S310 based on the winning of the second starting port 71, the second reserved ball storage area 203e is set as the storage destination, and the second reserved ball number counter after addition by the processing of S309. If the value of 203b is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 are reserved in each storage area of the second reserved first area. If the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "2", the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "3" in each storage area of the second reserved second area. If there is, counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved third area, and if the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b after addition is "4", counters C1 to C3 are stored in each storage area of the second reserved fourth area. , CK, CS1 values are reserved.

Next, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (the number of operating reserved balls N2) after the addition by the processing of S309, and the jackpot random number counter C1 stored (held) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e by the processing of S311. The number of second reserved balls in order to transmit the second reserved ball number command including each value of the jackpot type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variable type counter CS1 and the small hit type counter CK to the voice lamp control device 113. The command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S312). As a result, the second reserved ball count command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 31) that is executed next. When the process of S312 is completed, the start winning process (S208) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

As the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 included in the second reserved ball count command in the processing of S312, the values themselves read from the counter buffer 203c by the processing of S309 may be used, or the processing of S311. In, the value stored (held) in the second reserved ball storage area 203e may be read out and used.

Further, in the processing of S301 and S307, when a ball wins the first starting port 64 and the second starting port 71 at the same time, the winning process of the ball to the first starting port 64 is preferentially executed, and the second starting is performed. Wait for the ball winning process to enter the mouth 71, and execute the ball winning process to the waiting second starting port 71 in the start winning process (S208) in the next timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). It may be configured as.

Next, with reference to FIG. 33, a gate passage process (S209), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing this gate passing process (S209). The gate passing process (S209) determines whether or not the ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67, and when the ball has passed (entered), the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is stored in the normal figure reserved ball. The process of storing (holding) in the area 203h is executed.

In this gate passing process (S209), first, it is determined whether or not the sphere has passed through the through gate 67 (S401). Here, to the through gate 67 based on the output signal of the through gate switch (not shown) that detects the passage (entry) of the ball to the through gate 67 read in the switch reading process (see S205 in FIG. 31). Passage (entry ball) is detected over three timer interrupt processes (see FIG. 31).

In the process of S401, if the sphere has not passed through the through gate 67 (S401: No), the gate passage process (S209) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). On the other hand, when it is determined that the ball has passed (entered) the through gate 67 (S401: Yes), then whether or not the game state is the "normal game state", that is, the launch of the ball in the left-handed game is encouraged. It is determined whether or not the gaming state is being played (S402).

In the process of S404, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display of the second special symbol is changing, or whether or not the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol exists (S404). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the second special symbol is not changing and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol does not exist (S404: No), in the "normal game state A". Since the ball fired by the non-encouragement (prohibited) right-handed game, not the encouraged left-handed game, has passed through the through gate 67, an alarm sound is output from the audio output device 226 (see FIG. 5). At the same time, the third symbol display device 81 executes a normal right-handed error process such as displaying the character display "Return to left-handed" (S404), and shifts the process to S405.

With this configuration, when a ball is detected by the through gate 67 in the "normal game state" where right-handed games are not encouraged, error processing such as outputting an alarm sound is performed to perform right-handed games. In the game state where the game is not encouraged, the player is discouraged from performing the right-handed game, the game in the game form different from the recommended game specification is eliminated as much as possible, and the game performance expected in each game state is realized. can do.

In the process of S402, if the game state is not the "normal game state" (S402: No), the right-handed game is encouraged in the "time reduction state" or the jackpot game is in progress. The right-handed error processing is not performed, the processing of S403 and S404 is skipped, and the processing is shifted to S405.

Further, even when it is determined that the player is in the "normal game state" (S402: Yes), in the processing of S403, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is changing, or the movement of the second special symbol is performed. When it is determined that the number of reserved balls on the target display exists (that is, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b is larger than "0") (S404: Yes), right-handed strike in the "normal game state B". Since the ball launched by the game has passed through the through gate 67, in this case, the normal right-handed error processing of S404 is not executed, the processing of S404 is skipped, and the processing is shifted to S405.

In the process of S405, the value of the normal figure holding ball number counter 203g (the operation holding ball number HN of the variable display of the normal symbol held in the main control device 110) is the upper limit value (“4” in the first embodiment). It is determined whether or not it is less than (S405). Then, even if there is a passage (entry) to the through gate 67, if the number of balls on hold for operation is not HN <4 (S405: No), this gate passage process (S209) is terminated and a timer interrupt process (FIG. 31) Return to.

On the other hand, if the number of operation-holding balls HN <4 (S404: Yes), the value of the normal figure reservation-holding number counter 203g (operation-holding number HN) is added by 1 (S406). Then, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure is read from the counter buffer 203c (see FIG. 6), and the read data is read from the normal figure holding first to fourth areas provided in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h. It is stored in the area corresponding to the value indicated by the counter for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure (S407).

Specifically, for example, if the value of the normal figure holding ball counter 203g after addition by the processing of S406 is "1", the value of the normal figure holding counter C4 is held in the normal figure holding first area. If the value of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure after addition is "2", it is in the second area for holding the normal figure, and if the value of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure after addition is "3", it is in the normal figure. If the value of the counter for the number of reserved balls of the normal figure after addition is "4" in the third area of the hold, the value of the counter C4 per the normal figure is held in the fourth area of the hold of the normal figure. After the processing of S407 is completed, the gate passing processing (S209) is finished, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31).

In the first embodiment, the normal symbol hold ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol is not transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, but the normal figure hold ball number command related to the variable display of the normal symbol is used. It may be configured to transmit to the voice lamp control device 113 to perform an effect (notification) regarding a reserved symbol or the like related to a variable display of a normal symbol. In this case, by including the value of the counter C4 per normal figure in the command for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure and transmitting it, the voice lamp control device 113 is configured to be able to execute the so-called look-ahead processing related to the normal symbol, and the effect related to the normal symbol is produced. It may be configured to provide variations.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, a special figure variation process (S210), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this special figure variation processing (S210).

This special symbol variation processing (S210) controls the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and the control related to the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state. It is something to do.

In this special symbol variation processing (S210), the MPU 201 first determines whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently a big hit (S5001). The jackpots include during the jackpot game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the jackpot, and during the predetermined time before the start of the jackpot game (that is, the jackpot opening). This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game (that is, the jackpot ending). As a result of the determination in S5001, if the jackpot of any of the special symbols is in progress (S5001: Yes), the special symbol variation processing (S210) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31).

In the processing of S5001, if it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S5001: No), then it is determined whether or not either the first special symbol or the second special symbol is currently hitting the small hit. (S5002). As the small hit, the predetermined time during the small hit game displayed by the third symbol display device 81 and the special symbol display device 37 at the time of the small hit and before the start of the small hit game (that is, the small hit opening). And during a predetermined time after the end of the small hit game (that is, the small hit ending) are included. As a result of the determination in S5002, if any of the special symbols is in the small hit (S5002: Yes), the special figure variation process (S210) is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

In the process of S5002, if it is determined that the small hit is not being made (S5002: No), then it is determined whether or not the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S5003), and the special symbol is displayed. If the display mode of the symbol display device 37 is not during dynamic display (S5003: No), then it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display on the special symbol display device 37 is stopped (S5004). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S5004: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). As a result, the stop symbol in the dynamic display (variation effect) is displayed on the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol. ..

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S5004, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the dynamic display is stopped (S5004: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball count counter 203b (the second special reserved in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number N2) of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the symbol is larger than "0" (S5005). As a result, if the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is not "0" (S5005: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the second special symbol. First, the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is subtracted by 1 (S5006). This is because the variable start processing (S5011), which will be described later, starts the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable effect) related to the second special symbol. This is because the number of reserved balls related to the special symbol is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the second reserved ball storage area 203e is shifted (S5007). This data shift process (S5007) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the second reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 2 Hold 1st area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 2nd hold 2nd area → 2nd hold 1st area, 2nd hold 3rd area → 2nd hold 2nd area, 2nd hold 4th area → 2nd hold The data in each area is shifted, such as in the third area.

On the other hand, in the process of S5005, when it is determined that the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operating reserved ball number N2) is "0" (S5005: No), then the first reserved ball number counter 203a (S5008), it is determined whether or not the value of (the number of operation-holding balls N1 of the dynamic display (variation effect) regarding the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is larger than "0". As a result, if the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is not "0" (S5008: Yes), it is the execution start timing of the dynamic display (variation effect) related to the first special symbol. First, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is subtracted by 1 (S5009). This is because the variable start process (S5011), which will be described later, starts the execution of the dynamic display (variable effect) of one of the reserved dynamic displays (variable effect) related to the first special symbol. This is because the number is reduced by one.

Next, the data stored in the first reserved ball storage area 203d is shifted (S5010). This data shift process (S5010) is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d toward the reserved ball execution area 203f. 1 Hold 1st area → Hold ball execution area 203f, 1st hold 2nd area → 1st hold 1st area, 1st hold 3rd area → 1st hold 2nd area, 1st hold 4th area → 1st hold The data in each area is shifted, such as in the third area.

After the data shift processing of S5007 or S5010, the fluctuation start processing for the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the hold ball execution area 203f by the data shift processing. Then (S5011), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the fluctuation start processing (S5011), which is one of the special figure fluctuation processing (S210) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation start processing (S5011).

In this fluctuation start processing (S5011), as described above, whether or not to dynamically display each special symbol, setting processing of the dynamic display when dynamically displaying each special symbol, and the like are performed.

In this fluctuation start processing (S5011), first, a jackpot lottery (win / fail determination) for determining whether or not a jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a. Process (S5101).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is determined by referring to the jackpot random number table 202a set based on the probability set value and the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. It is determined based on. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, the jackpot random number value is defined so that the jackpot probability is 50/10000 at the set value "1" and 60/10000 at the set value "6".

In the processing of S5101, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and when they match, a jackpot is obtained. Determine if there is. When it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot as a result of the processing of S5101 (S5101: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8A). Alternatively, the display mode at the time of a big hit is set based on (see FIG. 8B) (S5102).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, after the jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds, "normal game state A" "Time saving A" that shifts to "Time saving A", "Time saving B" that shifts to "Time saving state A" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds, or "Normal game state B" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds "Time saving C" to shift, "Time saving D" to shift to "Time saving state A" or "Time saving state B" after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds, or "Time saving" after the jackpot with the maximum number of rounds of 9 rounds "Time saving E" that shifts to "shortened state A" or "time shortening state B", or "time saving F" that shifts to "normal game state B" after a big hit with a maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds, or a maximum number of rounds of 9 It is determined whether it is the "time saving G" that shifts to the "normal game state B" after the big hit. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode at the time of jackpot in the special symbol display device 37 (display mode of the special LED group 37b) is set.

Specifically, whether the data stored in the hold ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the first hold ball storage area 203d or the data shifted from the second hold ball storage area 203e is determined by the hold ball execution area 203f. If the data is stored in the shift source buffer (not shown) and shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the value of the jackpot type counter C2. The jackpot type is determined based on the special figure 1 jackpot type table 202b1 (see FIG. 8A). Further, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the special feature. FIG. 2 The jackpot type is determined based on the jackpot type table 202b2 (see FIG. 8B).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S5103), and the process proceeds to S5109. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, it is based on the display mode (stop type) at the time of a big hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f. The effect mode is selected, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect modes. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of the jackpot, first, the stop pattern table 202e (see FIGS. 19 to 22) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the jackpot.

Then, in the variation pattern table 202f provided for each effect mode set in the process of S5102, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

When it is determined that the hit is not a jackpot in the processing of S5101 (S5101: No), subsequently, based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the jackpot random number table 202a. A small hit lottery (win / fail determination) process for determining whether or not a small hit is performed is performed (S5104).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, whether or not it is a small hit in the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set so as to be the same in all probability set values. Further, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, whether or not it is a small hit is set so as to be the same for all probability set values. Specifically, in the special figure 1 big hit random number table 202a1, the small hit random number value is defined so that the small hit probability is 2/10000 in all settings. Further, in the special figure 2 big hit random number table 202a2, the small hit random number value is defined so that the small hit probability is 2715/10000 in all settings.

In the process of S5104, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is compared with the small hit random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and when they match, when they match. It is determined that the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a small hit. When it is determined as a small hit as a result of the processing of S5104 (S5104: Yes), the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the small hit type table 202c (FIG. 9 (a)). ) Or (see FIG. 9B)), and the display mode at the time of a small hit is set (S5102).

In this process, according to the small hit type table 202c, the small hit type associated with the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f, that is, "small hit A" in which the big hit state does not occur. , "Time saving H" where the maximum number of rounds shifts to "Time reduction state A" after a big hit of 3 rounds, or "Time saving I" where the maximum number of rounds shifts to "Normal game state B" after a big hit of 3 rounds, or a big hit "Small hit B" where the state does not occur, "Time reduction J" which shifts to "Time reduction state A" or "Time reduction state B" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds, or a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 9 rounds "Time saving K" that later shifts to "time saving state A" or "time saving state B", or "time saving L" that shifts to "normal game state B" after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 3 rounds, or the maximum number of rounds It is determined whether or not is the "time saving M" that shifts to the "normal game state B" after the big hit of 9 rounds. Then, based on the determined small hit type, the display mode at the time of small hit (display mode of the special LED group 37b) in the special symbol display device 37 is set.

Specifically, whether the data stored in the hold ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the first hold ball storage area 203d or the data shifted from the second hold ball storage area 203e is determined by the hold ball execution area 203f. When the data is stored in the shift source buffer (not shown) and shifted from the first reserved ball storage area 203d, the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is used. , The small hit type is determined based on the special figure 1 small hit type table 202c1 (see FIG. 9A). Further, when the data stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is the data shifted from the second reserved ball storage area 203e, the value of the small hit type counter CK stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f and the value of the small hit type counter CK are displayed. The small hit type is determined based on the special figure 2 small hit type table 202c2 (see FIG. 9B).

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of small hit is determined (S5106), and the process proceeds to S5109. Specifically, in the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the display mode (stop type) at the time of a small hit and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f are set. The effect mode is selected based on the effect mode, and the dynamic time (variation time) of the dynamic display (variation effect) is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1 from the selected effect mode. In determining the fluctuation pattern at the time of a small hit, first, the stop pattern table 202e (see FIGS. 19 to 22) to be used is selected according to the stop type of the small hit.

Then, in the variation pattern table 202f provided for each effect mode set in the process of S5105, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f is selected. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

On the other hand, in the process of S5104, when it is determined that the hit is not a small hit (S5104: No), the result of the dynamic display of each special symbol is a loss, so the display mode at the time of the loss is set (S5107). In the process of S5107, the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f and the first hold ball number counter. Based on the value of 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b and the current gaming state, as the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, a "non-reach" effect mode, a "normal reach" effect mode, and a "super reach" effect mode. One of the "special reach" effect mode and the "special variation" effect mode is set. In the first embodiment, the stop pattern table 202e is set so that the range of values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each effect mode is different according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined (S5108), and the process proceeds to S5109. In the process of S5108, the special symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 determine the fluctuation time until the stop display is performed with the lost symbol. Specifically, in the fluctuation pattern table 202f provided for each display mode (effect mode) at the time of loss determined in the processing of S5107, it corresponds to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203f. Select the attached fluctuation pattern. Then, the fluctuation time is set based on the relationship between the fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation time defined in advance.

In this way, the effect mode and fluctuation pattern setting process at the time of big hit, the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the small hit time, and the effect mode and variation pattern setting process at the time of loss are the same random number values C3. By making a judgment using the same judgment program using CS1, the programs can be standardized and the development man-hours at the time of development can be reduced.

In the processing of S5109, the display control device 114 is notified of the fluctuation time according to the fluctuation pattern via the voice lamp control device 113 based on the fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern determined by the processing of S5103, S5106, and S5108. The fluctuation pattern command to be used is set (S5109).

Specifically, for example, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the jackpot lottery is won, the jackpot is the jackpot type "time saving A", and the fluctuation pattern of "super reach" of "60 seconds" is If selected, a variation pattern command indicating the "super reach" of the first special symbol, jackpot, "time saving A", and "60 seconds" (that is, special figure 1 variation pattern command. Hereinafter, the first special symbol is related. The variation pattern command may be referred to as "Special Figure 1 variation pattern command"). In addition, if the big hit lottery and the small hit lottery are lost in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and if the fluctuation pattern of the "super reach" of "60 seconds" is selected, the second special symbol, the loss, A variation pattern command indicating "super reach" of "60 seconds" (that is, a special figure 2 variation pattern command. Hereinafter, a variation pattern command related to the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special figure 2 variation pattern command". ) Is set.

In this way, even if the variation effect has the same variation time, by setting the variation pattern command together with the propriety of the variation effect and the content of the rough variation pattern, the voice lamp control device 113 can perform the effect mode including the result. It is possible to grasp the content and the fluctuation time of the above, and to determine the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect in detail based on the information.

Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S5102, S5105 or S5107 via the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S5110), and the special figure variation processing (FIG. See 34).

Specifically, for example, if a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the content of the jackpot is the jackpot type "time saving A", a specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "7"). The stop type command indicating that it is the first special symbol / "time saving A" (that is, the special figure 1 stop type command. Hereinafter, the stop type command related to the first special symbol is referred to as "" symbol, etc.). Special figure 1 Stop type command ”) is set. Further, if the jackpot is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the content of the jackpot is the jackpot type "time saving D", the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "3" symbol, etc.) is Without specifying, the stop type command indicating that the second special symbol is "time saving D" (that is, the special figure 2 stop type command. Hereinafter, the stop type command related to the second special symbol is referred to as "special figure 2 stop type". It may be called "command").

On the other hand, if the jackpot is not won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the "super reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "787") is Without specifying, a special figure 1 stop type command indicating that it is a "super reach" effect mode at the time of loss is set. Further, if the big hit is not won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the "normal reach" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "737") is specified. Without doing so, a special figure 2 stop type command indicating that the mode is a "normal reach" effect mode at the time of loss is set. Further, if the big hit is not won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the "non-reach (long)" effect mode is selected, the specific stop mode of the third symbol (for example, "258"" is selected. Etc.) is not specified, and a special figure 2 stop type command indicating that it is a “non-reach (long)” effect mode at the time of loss is set.

In this way, by setting a rough stop type based on the success or failure of the variation effect in the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 (display control device 114) grasps the stop type based on the success or failure and makes them. It is possible to determine the stop result of the variation effect in detail based on the information of.

These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are executed in the processing of S201 of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 31) to be executed next. It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command or the stop type command, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command or a display type command based on the variation pattern command or the stop type command, and transmits the variation pattern command or the display type command to the display control device 114.

Returning to FIG. 34, the description will be continued. In the process of S5008, when it is determined that the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (operating reserved ball number N1) is "0" (S5008: No), a demonstration effect is performed on the third symbol display device 81. It is determined whether or not the state is in the state, that is, whether or not the demonstration is in progress (S5012). In this determination process, after transmitting a demo command to the display control device 114 via the voice lamp control device 113, the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a or the second reserved ball number counter 203b (operation holding ball number N1 or operation). It is determined that the demonstration is in progress until it is determined that any value of the number of reserved balls N2) is larger than "0".

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S5012: No), a demo command to be transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 is set (S5013), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is in progress (S5012: Yes), the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) as it is. The demo command set in the process of S5013 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 31). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the demo command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display demo command to the display control device 114, and the display control device 114 demos to the third symbol display device 81 based on the reception of the display demo command. Control to display the effect.

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is no reserved ball when a predetermined time elapses after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, if the fluctuation effect is not started even after a lapse of a predetermined time after the fluctuation is stopped, the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined in the process of S5012 that the demonstration is not in progress (S5012: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has elapsed after the fluctuation is stopped is further performed. After the execution and the fluctuation stop, the process of S5012 may be executed and the demo command may be set when the second predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the player can be shown the stopped symbol of the stopped fluctuation effect for a relatively long time without starting the demonstration effect immediately.

In the process of S5003, when it is determined that the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 is being dynamically displayed (S5003: Yes), whether or not the variation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol being executed has elapsed. Or, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed has elapsed, and the dynamic display of the first special symbol or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is determined according to the determination result. The variable stop process (S5014) for stopping the above is performed, the special figure variation process (S210) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

Here, with reference to FIG. 35, the fluctuation stop processing (S5014), which is one of the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 34) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing this fluctuation stop processing (S5014).

In this fluctuation stop processing (S5014), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of each special symbol has elapsed, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the stop result according to each stop type is the special symbol. While displaying on the display device 37, each confirmation command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when the "time saving function" is in an effective gaming state, that is, in the "time saving state", the time saving of the "time saving function" ends according to the counting result of the number of fluctuations in the dynamic display of the special symbol. It is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied, and if the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is satisfied, a process of switching the "time saving function" from valid to invalid is performed.

In the fluctuation stop processing (S5014), first, it is determined whether or not the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the special symbol being executed has elapsed (S5201). The display time during dynamic display of the special symbol on the special symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 or the like (special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command or special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command). If the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of this special symbol has not elapsed (S5201: No), the special symbol display device 37 according to the special symbol being executed The display of the special LED group 37b is updated (S5202), the fluctuation stop processing is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 34).

In the first embodiment, in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37, the upper LED group 37b1 is lit in a predetermined lighting pattern from the start of the dynamic display of the first special symbol until the fluctuation time elapses. Alternatively, a display mode for turning off is set, and a display mode for turning on or off the lower LED group 37b2 in a predetermined lighting pattern is set from the start of the dynamic display of the second special symbol until the fluctuation time elapses. ..

On the other hand, in the processing of S5201 if the dynamic display time (variation time) of the dynamic display of the special symbol in the special LED group 37b of the special symbol display device 37 has elapsed (S5201: Yes), the special symbol display device 37 For the special LED group 37b of the above, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of the special symbol is stopped (S5203). The stop symbol is preset by the process of S5102, S5105 or S5107 of the variation start process (see FIG. 35).

In the first embodiment, when the determination result of the dynamic display of each special symbol is lost, only the leftmost LED of the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed, and the determination result is a small hit. In a certain case, the upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed in one of a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns, and if the determination result is a big hit, the type of the big hit ( The upper LED group 37b1 or the lower LED group 37b2 is lit and displayed in a lighting pattern corresponding to the type).

When the display mode of the special symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol of the dynamic display of each special symbol is set in the process of S5203, the stop symbol of the variation effect of each special symbol in the third symbol display device 81 is special. In order to make a definite display in synchronization with the display of the special LED group 37b in the symbol display device 37, a definite command is set (S5204), and the process shifts to S5205. When the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed by the third symbol display device 81, a confirmation command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol (that is, the special symbol 1 confirmation command; hereinafter, When the confirmation command related to the first special symbol may be referred to as "special symbol 1 confirmation command") and the third symbol display device 81 is executing the variation effect of the second special symbol, the confirmation command is executed. A confirmation command for confirming the variation effect of the second special symbol (that is, a special figure 2 confirmation command. Hereinafter, a confirmation command relating to the second special symbol may be referred to as a "special figure 2 confirmation command"). Set.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the special figure 1 confirmation command, the voice lamp control device 113 has a display special feature for the display control device 114 in order to stop the variation effect of the first special symbol executed by the third symbol display device 81. When the confirmation command of FIG. 1 is transmitted and the confirmation command of special figure 2 is received, the display special for display control device 114 is stopped in order to stop the variation effect of the second special symbol being executed by the third symbol display device 81. Fig. 2 Send the confirmation command. By receiving the display special figure 1 confirmation command or the display special figure 2 confirmation command, the display control device 114 of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to stop the variation effect and display the stopped symbol in a definite manner.

Next, in the process of S5205, it is determined whether or not the "time saving function" is activated, that is, whether or not it is the "time saving state" (S5205). As a result of the determination, if the "time saving function" is not activated (S5205: No), the processing of S5206 is skipped, the fluctuation stop processing (S5014) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 34). .. On the other hand, if the "time saving function" is activated (S5205: Yes), the time saving counting process for executing the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is executed (S5206). This fluctuation stop processing (S5014) is terminated, and the process returns to the special figure fluctuation processing (see FIG. 34).

Here, with reference to FIG. 37, a time saving counting process (S5206), which is one process of the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this time saving counting process (S5206).

In this time saving counting process (S5206), when the "time saving function" is enabled, the dynamic display of the special symbol which is the end condition of the "time saving function" set for each big hit type or small hit type. (For example, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, or the total number of fluctuations of the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is counted, and the counting result determines the time saving end condition. It is determined whether or not the condition is satisfied, and the "time saving function" is changed from valid to invalid according to the determination result. Further, in this time saving counting process (S5206), when the "time saving function" is enabled, the movement of the special symbol which is the end condition of the "time saving function" set for each big hit type or small hit type. The number of small hits won in the target display (for example, the number of small hits in the first special symbol or the number of small hits in the second special symbol) is counted, and it is determined whether or not the counting result satisfies the time saving end condition. Therefore, the "time saving function" is changed from valid to invalid according to the discrimination result.

In this time saving counting process (S5206), first, the type of dynamic display of the stopped special symbol is determined (S5301). As a result of the determination, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol is stopped (S5301: "Special Figure 1"), it means that the dynamic display of the first special symbol has been executed once. The value of the time saving counter 203m is subtracted by 1 (S5302), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted special figure 1 time saving counter 203m is larger than "0" (S5303). As a result of the determination, if the value of the special figure 1 time saving counter 203m is larger than "0" (S5303: Yes), the time saving end condition based on the number of dynamic display times of the first special symbol is not satisfied. Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the total time reduction counter 203o (S5304), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted total time reduction counter 203o is larger than "0" (S5305). As a result of the determination, if the value of the total time reduction counter 2033o is larger than "0" (S5305: Yes), the time reduction end condition based on the total dynamic display count of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied. Since there is no such processing, the process shifts to S5306.

In the process of S5306, it is determined whether or not a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the stopped first special symbol (S5306). As a result of the determination, if the small hit is not won (S5306: No), none of the time saving end conditions is satisfied yet, so the processing of S5306 to S5310 is skipped and the time saving counting processing (S5206) is ended. Then, the process returns to the fluctuation stop processing (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, if a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the stopped first special symbol (S5306: Yes), the value of the special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p is subtracted by 1 (S5307), and then subtracted. It is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p is larger than “0” (S5308). As a result of the determination, if the value of the special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p is larger than "0" (S5308: Yes), the time reduction end condition based on the number of small hit winnings in the first special symbol is not satisfied. , S5309 and S5310 are skipped, the time saving counting process (S5206) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5303, when the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203m is not larger than "0" (S5303: No), that is, when the value of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203m is "0" or less, Since the time saving end condition based on the dynamic display number of the first special symbol is satisfied, the process shifts to S5309 in order to invalidate the "time saving function". Further, in the processing of S5305, when the value of the total time saving counter 203o is not larger than "0" (S5305: No), that is, when the value of the total time saving counter 203o is "0" or less, the first special symbol And since the time saving end condition based on the total dynamic display number of the second special symbol is satisfied, the process is shifted to S5309 in order to invalidate the "time saving function" also in this case. Further, in the processing of S5308, when the value of the special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p is not larger than "0" (S5308: No), that is, when the value of the special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p is "0" or less. In some cases, the time saving end condition based on the number of small hits won in the first special symbol is satisfied. Therefore, in this case as well, the process is shifted to S5309 in order to invalidate the "time saving function".

Further, in the process of S5301 when it is determined that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is stopped (S5301: "special figure 2"), the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once. Therefore, the value of the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203n is subtracted by 1 (S5311), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted special figure 2 time reduction counter 203n is larger than "0" (S5311). S5312). As a result of the determination, if the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203n is larger than "0" (S5312: Yes), the time saving end condition based on the dynamic display count of the second special symbol is not satisfied. Then, 1 is subtracted from the value of the total time reduction counter 203o (S5313), and then it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted total time reduction counter 203o is larger than “0” (S5314). As a result of the determination, if the value of the total time reduction counter 2033o is larger than "0" (S5314: Yes), the time reduction end condition based on the total dynamic display count of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is satisfied. Since there is no such process, the process is shifted to S5315.

In the process of S5315, it is determined whether or not a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the stopped second special symbol (S5315). As a result of the determination, if the small hit is not won (S5315: No), none of the time saving end conditions is satisfied yet, so the processing of S5316 and S5317, and S5309 and S5310 is skipped, and this time saving counting is performed. The process (S5206) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36). On the other hand, if a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the stopped second special symbol (S5315: Yes), the value of the special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q is subtracted by 1 (S5316), and then subtracted. It is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q is larger than “0” (S5317). As a result of the determination, if the value of the special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q is larger than "0" (S5317: Yes), the time reduction end condition based on the number of small hit winnings in the second special symbol is not satisfied. , S5309 and S5310 are skipped, the time saving counting process (S5206) is terminated, and the process returns to the fluctuation stop process (see FIG. 36).

On the other hand, in the processing of S5312, when the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203n is not larger than "0" (S5312: No), that is, when the value of the special figure 2 time saving counter 203n is "0" or less, Since the time saving end condition based on the dynamic display number of the second special symbol is satisfied, the process shifts to S5309 in order to invalidate the "time saving function". Further, in the processing of S5314, when the value of the total time saving counter 203o is not larger than "0" (S5314: No), that is, when the value of the total time saving counter 203o is "0" or less, the first special symbol And since the time saving end condition based on the total dynamic display number of the second special symbol is satisfied, the process is shifted to S5309 in order to invalidate the "time saving function" also in this case. Further, in the processing of S5317, when the value of the special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q is not larger than "0" (S5317: No), that is, when the value of the special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q is "0" or less. In some cases, the time saving end condition based on the number of small hits won in the second special symbol is satisfied. Therefore, in this case as well, the process is shifted to S5309 in order to invalidate the "time saving function".

In the process of S5309, the time saving flag 203j in which the "time saving function" is enabled is set to off (S5309). Then, since the state of the "time saving function" is invalidated, the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is cleared to "0" (S5310), the time saving counting process (S5206) is terminated, and the fluctuation stop process (FIG. 36). See). As a result, the "time saving function" is invalidated, and the time saving limit number of times is also initialized.

In this way, in the state where the "time saving function" is enabled, by individually determining each of the plurality of time saving end conditions provided, the "time saving function" can be appropriately enabled or disabled according to the game state, and the game can be played. A wide variety of games can be made to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 38, a hit process (S203), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this hit process (S203).

In this winning process (S203), when a big hit of each special symbol occurs, the number of times (the number of rounds) of opening of the variable winning device 65 (big winning opening) is set according to the type of big hit, and the variable winning device 65 Set the opening time of. Then, in the case of the jackpot state (game), the jackpot opening / closing control process (S610) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed, and the jackpot state is set to end at the timing when the jackpot state ends. The end process (S612) is executed.

Further, in this hit processing (S203), when a small hit of each special symbol occurs, the number of times the small winning opening unit 73 is opened (the number of rounds) is set according to the small hit, and the small winning opening unit 73 Set the opening time. Then, in the case of the small hit state (game), the small hit opening / closing control process (S614) for opening or closing the small winning opening unit 73 is executed, and the small hit state ends at the timing when the small hit state ends. The small hit end process (S616) for setting the end is executed.

Further, in this hit processing (S203), when the ball passes through a specific area that can be opened during the small hit game, the variable winning device 65 (large winning opening) is changed according to the type of big hit generated by the passing. The number of times of opening (the number of rounds) is set, and the opening time of the variable winning device 65 is set. Then, in the case of a jackpot state (game) based on passing through a specific area, the jackpot opening / closing control process (S610) for opening or closing the variable winning device 65 is executed as in the case of a jackpot with a special symbol, and the jackpot state At the timing of the end of, the jackpot end process (S612) for setting the end of the jackpot state is executed.

In the hit processing (S203), first, it is determined whether or not a jackpot is won in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols (S6001). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is won (S6001: Yes), in order to perform the jackpot game, first, in order to disable the "time saving function" during the jackpot game, the time saving flag 203j is set to off (S6002). ), Then, the number of rounds according to the big hit type (or small hit type) is set in the round counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S6003).

Then, in order to transmit the jackpot opening command indicating that the jackpot is started to the voice lamp control device 113, the jackpot opening command is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S6004). Next, the opening time (for example, "30 seconds", "10 seconds", or "1 second") corresponding to the big hit type (or small hit type) is set (S6005), and the process shifts to S6013. As a result, the jackpot opening command according to the jackpot type is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 31) that is executed next.

The above-mentioned round counter is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the round counter, and when the value is set in the round counter (that is, "1" or more), the variable winning device 65 is opened and controlled according to the jackpot game, and the round is performed. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the round counter becomes "0", the jackpot being executed is terminated.

In the processing of S6001, if it is determined that the jackpot has not been won in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols (S6001: No), then the ball has passed through a specific area in the small winning opening unit 73. It is determined whether or not the jackpot flag 203r is turned on based on (S6006). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot flag is turned on (S6006: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through a specific area in the small winning opening unit 73 during the small hit game, so first, the jackpot flag 203r is set to off. (S6007), the process is shifted to S6002, and the same process as in the case of making a big hit with a special symbol is performed. In this case, a process (S6002) for setting the number of rounds according to the small hit type in the round counter is performed.

With this configuration, in addition to winning the big hit in the dynamic display of the special symbol, the ball is won in the small hit and the opening timing is different depending on the small hit type during the small hit game. By passing through, a jackpot game equivalent to the dynamic display of a special symbol can be performed. Further, by making different whether or not the ball can pass through the specific area depending on the type of small hit, it is possible to make different whether or not a big hit can occur depending on the type of small hit. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety in which the jackpot game is given and improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S6006, if it is determined that the jackpot flag 203r is not turned on (S6006: No), then it is determined whether or not the small hit is won in the dynamic display of any of the special symbols (S6008). ). As a result of the determination, if a small hit is won (S6008: Yes), a winning opening (that is, a small winning opening unit 73) that is opened according to the special symbol won in the small hit is opened in order to perform the small hit game. At the same time, the number of times the small winning opening unit 73 is opened according to the small hit type (the type of the special symbol won in the small hit) is set in the opening counter (not shown) provided in the RAM 203 (S6009).

Then, in order to transmit the small hit opening command indicating that the small hit is started to the voice lamp control device 113, the small hit opening command is set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6010). Next, the opening time of the small hit (for example, "0.5 seconds" or "30 seconds") is set (S6011). Then, "10" is set in the winning counter (not shown) (S6012), and the process shifts to S6013. As a result, the small hit opening command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 by the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 31) that is executed next.

The above-mentioned open counter is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the opening counter, and when the value is set in the opening counter (that is, "1" or more), while controlling the opening of the small winning opening unit 73 according to the small hit game, The value of the open counter is subtracted by 1. Then, when the value of the open counter becomes "0", the small hit being executed is terminated.

Further, the above-mentioned winning counter is set to "0" as an initial value when the power is turned on. The MPU 201 confirms the value of the winning counter, and when the value is set in the winning counter (that is, "1" or more), the variable winning device 65 or the small winning opening according to the big hit game or the small hit game. While the unit 73 is open-controlled, the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 each time a ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 65c or the small winning opening switch 73c. Then, when the value of the winning counter becomes "0", one round of the running big hit game or small hit game is ended.

In the process of S6013, it is determined whether or not it is a small hit (S6013). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the small hit is in progress (S6013: Yes), the small hit opening / closing control process for executing the opening / closing control of the small winning opening unit 73 is executed (S6014).

Here, the small hit opening / closing control process (S6014), which is one of the hit processes (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this small hit opening / closing control process (S6014).

In this small hit opening / closing control process (S6014), the opening / closing control of the small winning opening unit 73 is executed based on the number of times the small winning opening unit 73 is opened (that is, the opening counter) set in the winning processing (S203).

In this small hit open / close control process (S6014), first, it is determined whether or not the value of the open counter (not shown) is larger than "0" (S6101). As a result of the determination, if the opening counter is not a value larger than "0", that is, if the value of the opening counter is "0" or less (S6101: No), the number of times the small winning opening unit 73 is opened during the small hit game. Is not left, so the small hit opening / closing control process (S6014) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 38).

On the other hand, if the value of the open counter is larger than "0" as a result of the determination of S6101 (S6101: Yes), then the opening time set in S6011 of the hit process (S203) or the small hit open. It is determined whether or not the interval time set based on the table 202h has elapsed (S6102). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the small hit has not elapsed (S6102: No), it is not the opening timing of the small winning opening unit 73, so the processing of S6103 to S6105 is skipped and the processing is performed to S6106. Move to.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6102, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the small hit has passed (S6102: Yes), it is the opening timing of the small winning opening unit 73, so first, the small winning is given according to the special symbol of the small hit. The opening of the mouth unit 73 is set (S6103). Then, the opening time of 1 in the small winning opening unit 73 is set (S6104), and then a small winning opening opening command indicating that the small winning opening unit 73 has been opened is generated, and a command is sent provided in the RAM 203. It is set in the credit ring buffer (S6105), and the process is transferred to S6106.

In the process of S6106, it is determined whether or not the small winning opening unit 73 is open at the time of a small hit (S6106). As a result of the determination, if the small winning opening unit 73 is not open at the time of small hit (S6106: No), the small winning opening unit 73 is not open at the time of small hit, but during the opening time or the interval time. Therefore, the processes of S6107 and S6108 are skipped, the small hit opening / closing control process (S6014) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, in the process of S6106, when it is determined that the small winning opening unit 73 is open at the time of a small hit (S6106: Yes), first, the specific area device open / close control process for executing the open / close control of the specific area is performed. Do (S6107).

Here, with reference to FIG. 40, a specific area device open / close control process (S6107), which is one process of the small hit open / close control process (S6014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing this specific area device open / close control process (S6107).

In this specific area device opening / closing control process (S6107), opening / closing control of a specific area during the small hit game is performed.

In this specific area device open / close control process (S6107), first, it is determined whether or not the specific area is open, that is, whether or not the specific area solenoid 73e is turned on (S6201). As a result of the determination, when the specific area is not opened, that is, when the specific area solenoid 73e is turned off (S6201: No), then whether or not the opening condition of the specific area is satisfied, that is, small. It is determined whether or not "4 seconds" have passed since the first opening of the winning opening unit 73 (S6202). As a result of the determination, when the opening condition of the specific area is satisfied, that is, at the timing when "4 seconds" have elapsed from the first opening of the small winning opening unit 73 (S6202: Yes), the specific area solenoid 73e is turned on from off. Is set to, the opening setting of the specific area is performed (S6203), and the process shifts to S6204.

In the process of S6201, when it is determined that the specific area is open, that is, when the specific area solenoid 73e is turned on (S6201: Yes), the processes of S6202 and S6203 are skipped and the process is performed. To S6204. Further, in the process of S6202, if the opening condition of the specific area is not satisfied (S6203: No), the processes of S6204 and S6205 are skipped, the specific area device open / close control process (S6107) is terminated, and the process is small. The process returns to the hit opening / closing control process (see FIG. 39).

In the process of S6204, whether or not the closing condition of the specific area is satisfied, that is, when the sphere is detected by the specific area switch 73f or the opening time of the specific area (for example, "5 seconds" from the opening of the specific area). (S6205: Yes), it is determined that the closing condition of the specific area is satisfied, and in order to close the specific area, the specific area solenoid 73e is set from on to off, and the closing setting of the specific area is set. (S6205), the specific area device open / close control process (S6107) is terminated, and the process returns to the small hit open / close control process (see FIG. 39).

In this way, the opening / closing control process of a specific area is performed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition during the small hit game, and the specific area can be opened during the small hit game so that the ball can pass through. It is possible to generate a game.

Returning to FIG. 39, the description will be continued. After the opening / closing control process of the specific area device in S6107, then, in order to determine the closing condition of the small winning opening unit 73 that is being opened, the small winning opening opening / closing process is performed (S6108), and this small hit opening / closing control process (S6014) is performed. ) Is finished, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 38).

Here, with reference to FIG. 41, the small winning opening opening processing (S6108), which is one of the small hit opening / closing control processing (S6014) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the processing during opening of the small winning opening (S6108).

In this small winning opening opening processing (S6108), a process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the opening small winning opening unit 73 is satisfied is executed.

In the small winning opening opening processing (S6108), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of 1 of the small winning opening unit 73 set in S6104 of the small hit opening / closing control processing (S6014) described above has elapsed (S6108). S6301). As a result of the determination, if it is not the timing when the opening time of 1 of the small winning opening unit 73 has elapsed (S6301: No), then whether or not the small winning opening switch 73c is turned on, that is, into the small winning opening unit 73 It is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (S6302).

In the process of S6302, if the ball is detected by the small winning opening switch 73c and the ball has won a prize in the small winning opening unit 73 (S6302: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6303), and then It is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter subtracted by 1 is greater than "0" (S6304). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6304: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 or more balls are won in the small winning opening unit 73 and the small Since the end condition of the winning game (the closing condition of the small winning opening unit 73) is satisfied, the process shifts to S6305 in order to close the small winning opening unit 73.

In the closing process of the small winning opening unit 73 from S6305, first, the closing setting of the small winning opening unit 73 is set (S6305), and then the small winning opening unit 73 is closed with respect to the voice lamp control device 113. The small winning opening closing command to be shown is set (S6306), and the process shifts to S6307. The small winning opening closing command set in the process of S6306 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next. The external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 31). ), The sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, in the processing of S6307, since the end condition of the small hit game is satisfied, the value of the open counter is cleared to "0" (S6307), the small winning opening opening processing (S6108) is ended, and the small hit is completed. The process returns to the open / close control process (see FIG. 39).

In the process of S6302, if it is determined that the small winning opening switch 73c is not turned on (S6302: No), then it is determined whether or not the specific area switch 73f is turned on (S6308). As a result of the determination, if the specific area switch 73f is turned on (S6308: Yes), it means that the ball has passed through the specific area while the specific area is open during the small hit game, so that the big hit game is generated after the small hit game. Therefore, the jackpot flag 203r is set to ON (S6309), the small winning opening opening processing (S6108) is performed, and the process returns to the small hit opening / closing control processing (see FIG. 39). On the other hand, in the processing of S6308, if it is determined that the specific area switch 73f is not turned on (S6308: No), the processing of S6309 is skipped, and the small winning opening opening / closing process (S6108) is performed to open / close the small hit. The process returns to the control process (see FIG. 39).

As a result, during the small hit game, the big hit game can be generated after the small hit game based on the fact that the ball passes through the specific area at the timing when the specific area is open, and the big hit game is given. Can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the process of S6301 when it is determined that the opening time of 1 of the small winning opening unit 73 has elapsed (S6301: Yes), the closing condition for opening 1 of the small winning opening unit 73 is satisfied, and the opening of the small winning opening unit 73 is performed. Since it is the closing timing of the small winning opening unit 73, the process shifts to S6310 in order to close the small winning opening unit 73.

In the process of S6310, in order to close the small winning opening unit 73 that is open, the small winning opening solenoid 73b is turned from on to off to set the closing of the small winning opening unit 73 (S6310), and then the voice lamp control device. A small winning opening closing command indicating the end of opening of 1 of the small winning opening unit 73 is set for 113 (S6311). The small winning opening closing command set in the process of S6311 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 31). Inside, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the small winning opening closing command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect to the effect that the small winning opening unit 73 is closed. Since the opening and closing of the small winning opening unit 73 in the small hit game takes a short time (opening "0.1 seconds" and closing "1.2 seconds"), the voice lamp control device 113 closes the small winning opening. Even when a command is received, the effect associated with the opening and closing of 1 of the small winning opening unit 73 may not be executed.

After the processing of S6311, since the opening of 1 of the small winning opening unit 73 is completed, the value of the opening counter is subtracted by 1 (S6312), and the processing during opening of the small winning opening (S6108) is completed. Return to the small hit opening / closing control process (see FIG. 39). As a result, during the small hit game, the small winning opening unit 73 can be opened by the number of times set to the value of the opening counter during one round.

Returning to the hit process (S203) of FIG. 38, the description will be continued. After the small hit opening / closing control process (see FIG. 39) of S6014 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the open counter is larger than "0" (S6015). As a result of the determination, if the open counter is a value larger than "0" (S6015: Yes), the small hit is continued, so the processing of S6016, which is the end setting processing of the small hit, is skipped and this hit processing (S203). ) Is finished.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6015, when the value of the open counter is not larger than "0" (S6015: No), that is, when the value of the open counter is "0" or less, the small winning opening unit in this small hit Since all the opening operations of 73 have been completed, in order to end the small hit state, a small hit end process (S6016) is performed, and this hit process (S203) is completed.

Here, with reference to FIG. 42, a small hit end process (S6016), which is one process of the hit process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this small hit end process (S6016).

In this small hit end processing (S6016), first, the value of the winning counter is cleared to "0" (S6401), and then, when the specific area is open, the closing processing of the specific area is set (S6402). Then, a small hit end setting process (S6403) for executing various processes at the end of the small hit is performed, the small hit end process (S6106) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 38).

Returning to FIG. 38, the description will be continued. In the process of S6013, if it is determined that the small hit game is not in progress (S6013: No), then it is determined whether or not the big hit is in progress (S6017). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the jackpot is in progress (S6017: Yes), the jackpot opening / closing control process for executing the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 65 is executed (S6018).

Here, the jackpot opening / closing control process (S6018), which is one of the hit processes (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described with reference to FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this jackpot opening / closing control process (S6018).

In this jackpot opening / closing control process (S6018), the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 65 is executed based on the number of times the variable winning device 65 is opened set in the winning process (S203).

In this jackpot opening / closing control process (S6018), first, the opening time set in S6005 of the hit process (S203) or S6610 (see FIG. 44) of the jackpot opening opening process (S6507) described later is set. It is determined whether or not the interval time has elapsed (S6501). As a result of the determination, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the big hit has not elapsed (S6501: No), it is not the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, and the variable winning device 65 is continuously closed. The process is skipped and the process is transferred to S6506.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6501, if the opening time or the interval time at the time of the big hit has elapsed (S6501: Yes), it is the opening timing of the variable winning device 65, so the opening setting of the variable winning device 65 is performed (S6502), and then , Set "10" in the winning counter (not shown) (S6503). Then, the maximum opening time of the variable winning device 65 at the time of a big hit (“30 seconds” in the first embodiment) is set (S6504), and a big winning opening opening command indicating that the variable winning device 65 is opened is issued. It is generated, set in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 (S6505), and the processing is shifted to S6506. The voice lamp control device 113 that has received the large winning opening opening command executes the fact that the variable winning device 65 has been opened in the third symbol display device 81, and informs the player that the variable winning device 65 has been opened. It is configured to encourage the player to win a ball in the variable winning device 65 that is open to the player.

In the process of S6506, it is determined whether or not the variable winning device 65 is open (S6506). As a result of the determination, if the variable winning device 65 is not open (S6506: No), the variable winning device 65 is not open but during the opening time or the interval time, so the process of S6507 is skipped and this is performed. The jackpot opening / closing control process (S6018) is finished, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 38). On the other hand, in the process of S6506, when it is determined that the variable winning device 65 is open (S6506: Yes), the large winning opening opening process is performed in order to determine the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened. This is performed (S6507), the jackpot opening / closing control process (S6018) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 38).

Here, with reference to FIG. 44, a process during opening of the big winning opening (S6507), which is one process of the jackpot opening / closing control process (S6018) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the process during opening of the large winning opening (S6507).

In the process of opening the large winning opening (S6507), a process of determining whether or not the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 being opened is satisfied is executed.

In the process during opening of the large winning opening (S6507), first, it is determined whether or not the opening time of the variable winning device 65 set in S6504 of the above-mentioned jackpot opening / closing control process (S6018) has elapsed (S6601). As a result of the determination, if the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has elapsed (S6601: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is satisfied, and the closing timing of the variable winning device 65 in that round is obtained. The process shifts to S6606 in order to clear the value of the counter "0" (S6602) and close the variable winning device 65. The closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S6606 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6601, if the opening time of the variable winning device 65 has not elapsed (S6601: No), then whether or not the large winning opening switch 65c is turned on, that is, the ball is sent to the variable winning device 65. It is determined whether or not a prize has been won (S6603).

In the process of S6603, when it is determined that the ball is not detected by the big winning opening switch 65c (S6603: No), the big winning opening opening / closing processing (S6507) is terminated and the big hit opening / closing control process (FIG. See 43). On the other hand, if the ball is detected by the large winning opening switch 65c and the ball has won the variable winning device 65 (S6603: Yes), the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1 (S6604), and the value of the winning counter is subtracted by 1. It is determined whether or not is a value larger than "0" (S6605). If the value of the winning counter is not greater than "0" (S6605: No), that is, if the value of the winning counter is "0" or less, 10 or more balls are won in the variable winning device 65 and the variable winning is made. Since the closing condition of the device 65 is satisfied, the process shifts to S6606 in order to close the variable winning device 65.

On the other hand, in the process of S6605, when it is determined that the value of the winning counter is larger than "0" (S6605: Yes), the closing condition of the variable winning device 65 is not satisfied, and the variable winning device 65 In order to continue the opening of the above, the processing of S6606 to S6610 is skipped, and the processing (S6507) during the opening of the large winning opening is terminated. After the completion of the large winning opening opening processing (S6507), the process returns to the big hit opening / closing control processing (see FIG. 43).

Next, in the closing process of the variable winning device 65 from S6606, first, the closing setting of the variable winning device 65 is set (S6606), and then it is shown to the voice lamp control device 113 that the variable winning device 65 is closed. The big winning opening closing command is set (S6607), and the process shifts to S6608. The large winning opening closing command set in the process of S6607 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed next. The external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 31). ), The sound is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, in the processing of S6608, since one round of the variable winning device 65 was digested, the value of the round counter was subtracted by 1 (S6608), and then the value of the round counter subtracted by 1 in the processing of S6608 was "0". It is determined whether or not the value is larger than (S6609). When the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S6609: Yes), the number of rounds in the jackpot (the number of remaining open times of the variable winning device 65) remains, so the next variable winning device Set the interval time (for example, "2 seconds", "1 second" or "0.5 seconds") until the 65 is opened (S6610), finish the process during opening the big winning opening (S6507), and hit the jackpot. The process returns to the open / close control process (see FIG. 43).

On the other hand, in the processing of S6609, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S6609: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the variable winning device 65 in this jackpot Since all the opening operations have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, the interval time is not set (that is, S6610 is skipped), the jackpot opening / closing process (S6507) is terminated, and the jackpot opening / closing control is performed. The process returns to the process (see FIG. 43).

Returning to the hit process (S203) of FIG. 38, the description will be continued. After the jackpot opening / closing control process (see FIG. 43) of S6018 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the value of the round counter is larger than "0" (S6019). As a result of the determination, if the round counter is a value larger than "0" (S6019: Yes), the jackpot state is continued, so that the jackpot end setting process S6020 is skipped and this hit process (S203). To finish.

On the other hand, in the processing of S6019, when the value of the round counter is not larger than "0" (S6019: No), that is, when the value of the round counter is "0" or less, the variable winning device 65 in this jackpot Since all the opening operations have been completed, in order to end the jackpot state, a jackpot end process (S6020) is performed, and this hit process (S203) is terminated.

Here, with reference to FIG. 45, a jackpot end process (S6020), which is one process of the hit process (S203) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this jackpot end process (S6020).

In this jackpot end processing (S6020), the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is updated based on the winning jackpot type (big hit based on the small hit type), and the number of times the "time saving function" is given is counted. Then, when the number of times of granting the "time saving function" has reached the time saving limit number, the process of clearing the time saving limit counter 203k to "0" and initializing the time saving limit number of times is executed. On the other hand, when the number of times the "time saving function" is given has not reached the time saving limit number, the "time saving function" is given based on the jackpot type (big hit based on the small hit type), and the time saving of the "time saving function" is given. Set the end condition.

In this jackpot end process (S6020), first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot was won in the "normal game state" (S6701). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot is won in the "normal game state" (S6701: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the jackpot type "time saving A" is won (S6702). As a result of the determination, if the jackpot type "time reduction A" is won (S6702: Yes), the jackpot type "time reduction A" in the "normal game state" is not given the "time reduction function" and is "normal game state". In order to reset (initialize) the time saving limit number of times, the process shifts to S6708. The processing from S6708 will be described later.

On the other hand, in the process of S6701, when it is determined that the game is not in the "normal game state" (S6701: No), that is, the jackpot game is in the "time shortened state". In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when a big hit is won in the "time reduction state", regardless of which big hit type or small hit type, as long as the time saving limit number is not reached, the "time saving function" Is configured to be given. Further, in the processing of S6702, when it is determined that the winning is for a jackpot type or a small hit type other than the jackpot type "time saving A" (S6702: No), the jackpot types "time saving B", "time saving C", " Winning "Time saving D", "Time saving E", "Time saving F", "Time saving G", "Time saving H", "Time saving I", "Time saving J", "Time saving K", "Time saving L" or "Time saving M" It means that it was done. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the jackpot type or the small hit type other than the jackpot type “time saving A” is configured to be provided with the “time saving function” as long as the time saving limit number of times is not reached.

Therefore, when it is determined in the processing of S6701 that it is not in the "normal game state" (S6701: No), or when it is determined that the jackpot type "time saving A" in the "normal game state" is not won (S6702: No), the value of the time reduction limit counter 203k is added by 1 (S6703), then the time reduction limit number command indicating the time reduction limit number is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S6704), and the process shifts to S6705. do. The time saving limit number of times command set in the process of S6704 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the time reduction limit number of times command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect according to the time reduction limit number of times (for example, a time reduction limit number suggestion effect, etc.).

In the process of S6705, it is determined whether or not the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is smaller than "3" (S6705). As a result of the determination, if the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is smaller than "3" (S6705: Yes), first, in order to activate the "time saving function", the time saving flag 203j is set to ON (S6706). Next, based on the time saving end condition table 202n (see FIG. 15), the time saving end condition (number of operations) according to the big hit type or the small hit type is set to the special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, the special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, and the total time saving. The counter 203o, the special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p, and the special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203203q are set (S6707), and the process shifts to S6710. As a result, the "time saving function" can be enabled until any of the time saving end conditions set in S6707 is satisfied.

On the other hand, as a result of the determination of S6705, when the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is not smaller than "3", that is, when the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is larger than "3" (S6705: No), the time saving limit number of times is reached. Therefore, the process is shifted to S6708 in order not to add the "time saving function" and to reset the time saving limit number of times.

In the processing of S6708, the value of the time saving limit counter 203k is cleared to "0" (S6708), and the processing is shifted to S6709. As a result, it is possible to set the "normal game state" in which the "time saving function" is not activated.

In this way, when the time saving limit number of times has been reached in the jackpot end processing (S6020), the jackpot is hit by temporarily shifting to the "normal game state" and initializing the time saving limit number of times. After the end, the number of times the "time saving function" is given can be counted from the initial value of the time saving limit number of times.

In the processing of S6709, a time saving limit clear command indicating that the time saving limit number of times has been reached and the time saving limit number of times has been reset is set in the voice lamp control device 113 (S6709), and the processing is shifted to S6710. The time saving limit clear command set in the process of S6709 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 36) to be executed next. Then, it is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the time reduction limit clear command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes an effect relating to the fact that the time reduction limit number of times has been reached.

In the process of S6710, an ending command indicating the start of the jackpot ending effect is set for the voice lamp control device 113 (S6710). The ending command set in the process of S6710 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process of the timer interrupt process (see S201 in FIG. 31). It is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

Upon receiving the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 executes a jackpot ending effect.

After the processing of S6710 is completed, various processing at the end of the jackpot such as setting the ending time (for example, "30 seconds", "10 seconds" or "1 second") according to the game state is executed. The setting process is performed (S6711), the jackpot end process (S6020) is terminated, and the process returns to the hit process (see FIG. 38).

Next, with reference to FIG. 46, a normal figure variation process (S211), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this normal map variation processing (S211).

This normal symbol variation processing (S211) controls the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83 due to the passage of the sphere through the through gate 67.

In this normal figure variation processing (S211), first, it is determined whether or not the normal electric service 72 is currently protruding (operating), that is, whether or not the normal symbol is hit (S701). As a result of the determination, if the normal electric service 72 is protruding (S701: Yes), the normal symbol is being hit, so the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated as it is, and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). ) Return.

On the other hand, if the ordinary electric service 72 is not protruding (S701: No), it is not a hit of the ordinary symbol. Therefore, next, whether or not the display mode of the ordinary symbol display device 83 is in the variable display of the ordinary symbol is determined. Determine (S702). As a result of the determination, if the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is not during the variable display of the normal symbol (S702: No), then, after the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 is stopped, a predetermined time (for example, "1 second") ") It is determined whether or not it has passed (S703). As a result, if a predetermined time has not elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S703: No), the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). As a result, the stop symbol in the variable display is displayed on the normal symbol display device 83 for a predetermined time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S703, if a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable display is stopped (S703: Yes), the value of the normal figure reserved ball count counter (not shown) (held in the main control device 110). It is determined whether or not the operation-holding ball number HN) of the variable display relating to the normal symbol is larger than "0" (S704).

As a result of the processing of S704, if the value of the normal figure hold ball number counter (operation hold ball number HN) is not larger than "0" (S704: No), there is no hold ball number of the variable display of the normal symbol to be executed. Therefore, the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). On the other hand, if the value of the normal figure reserved ball counter (HN of operating reserved balls) is larger than "0" (S704: Yes), it is determined that it is the execution start timing of the variable display related to the reserved normal symbol. Then, first, the value of the counter for the number of reserved balls in the normal figure (the number of reserved balls for operation HN) is subtracted by 1 (S705). This is because the number of reserved balls related to the normal symbol is reduced by one as the execution of the variable display of one of the reserved variable displays related to the normal symbol is started by the processing (S706 to S712) described later. Because.

Next, the data stored in the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h is shifted (S706). This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the normal figure holding first to fourth areas of the normal figure holding ball storage area 203h toward the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i. Hold 1st area → Fuzu hold ball execution area 203i, Fuzu hold 2nd area → Fuzu hold 1st area, Fuzu hold 3rd area → Fuzu hold 2nd area, Fuzu hold 4th area → Fuzu The data in each area is shifted, such as the hold third area.

After the data shift processing of S706, the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 83 is variable based on the data stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i by the data shift process (that is, the value of the counter C4 per normal figure). In order to execute the display, it is determined whether or not the time saving flag 203j is turned on, that is, whether or not the "time saving function" is enabled (S707). As a result of the determination, if the time saving flag 203j is not turned on (S707: No), the "time saving function" is in an invalid state, so the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "4 seconds" (S708), and processing is performed. To S710. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving flag 203j is turned on (S707: Yes), since the "time saving function" is effectively set, the variable display time of the normal symbol is set to "0.1 seconds". (S709), and the process shifts to S710.

As a result, the "time saving function" is enabled, and in the "time saving state" in the right-handed game, while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72 (that is, about 3 seconds). , When the fluctuation of the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped and the variable display is successful, the normal electric service 72 is opened, and almost all the balls rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72 are downward in front view. It falls to and flows into the second starting port 71. On the other hand, in the jackpot game in which the "time saving function" is disabled and the game is played by a right-handed game, it is difficult to stop the variable display of the normal symbol while the ball is rolling on the upper surface of the normal electric service 72. Also, even if the variable display of the normal symbol is stopped, it is set so that it is difficult to win, so that it is difficult for the ball to flow into the second starting port 71, so in the same right-handed game Even if there is, it is possible to create a game state that flows into the second starting port 71 and the variable winning device 65 and a game state that is difficult to flow in, and it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the process of S710, the stop symbol in the variable display of the normal symbol, that is, the propriety of the variable display of the normal symbol is determined by referring to the random number table 202i per normal symbol according to the game state (S710). Specifically, in the "normal game state" or during the big hit game, that is, in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i is referred to with reference to the group for the low probability state in the random number table 202i per normal figure. The value of the counter C4 per normal symbol stored in is determined, and the stop symbol of the variable display of the normal symbol (that is, whether the normal symbol is correct or not) is determined. Further, in the "time reduction state", that is, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the normal figure is stored in the normal figure holding ball execution area 203i with reference to the group for the high probability state in the random number table 202i per normal figure. The value of the hit counter C4 is determined, and the stop symbol of the variable display of the normal symbol (that is, whether the normal symbol is correct or not) is determined. After the process of S710, the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

As a result, by changing the probability of winning or failing the normal symbol according to the game state, whether or not the normal electric service 72 is easily opened when the ball passes through the through gate 67 when the player hits right. Can make a difference. As a result, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the normal electric service 72 is likely to be opened (that is, the normal symbol is in a high probability state) and the normal symbol is likely to flow into the second starting port 71 side, or is normal. In a situation where the electric service 72 is difficult to open (that is, a low probability state of a normal symbol), the upper surface of the closed (protruding) normal electric service 72 is completely rolled from the left end to the right end, and the second starting port 71 side. By making the situation where it is difficult to flow into the game different depending on the game state, it is possible to create different playability for each game state.

In the process of S702, when it is determined that the display mode of the normal symbol display device 83 is in variable display (S702: Yes), it is determined whether or not the variable display time has elapsed (S711). The variable display time of the normal symbol display device 83 is determined according to the game state by the processing of S708 or S709, and if this variable display time has not elapsed (S711: No), the display of the normal symbol display device 83 is performed. Is updated (S712), the normal map variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

On the other hand, if the variable display time of the variable display on the normal symbol display device 83 has elapsed (S711: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol preset by S710 is set for the normal symbol display device 83. (S713), the normal figure variation process (S211) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 36).

As a result, when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, the variable display in the normal symbol display device 83 is set based on the normal symbol variation process (S211), and the variable display is started in the normal symbol display device 83. From to the time when the variable display time elapses, the "○" symbol and the "×" symbol are alternately lit. Then, when the variable display result is a hit, the symbol "○" is lit, while when the variable display result is a loss, the symbol "x" is lit.

Next, with reference to FIG. 47, a normal electric service control process (S204), which is one process of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110, will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this ordinary electric service control process (S204).

This ordinary electric service control process (S204) executes open / close (protruding and immersive) drive control of the ordinary electric service 72 according to the game state when a hit of the normal symbol occurs. That is, the opening (immersion) time of the ordinary electric service 72 is set according to the game state, the ordinary electric service 72 is opened and driven based on the set time, and the normal electric service 72 is released when the set protrusion time elapses. The control for closing (protruding) the ordinary electric service 72 during (immersion) is executed.

In this ordinary electric service control process (S204), first, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric service 72 is open (immersed), that is, whether or not the normal symbol is hit (S801). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the ordinary electric service 72 is not open (S801: No), that is, if it is determined that the ordinary symbol is not hit, then whether the variable display of the ordinary symbol is completed? Whether or not it is determined (S802).

As a result of the determination in S802, if the variable display of the normal symbol is not completed (S802: No), the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). If the variable display of the normal symbol is completed (S802: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the winner is won in the variable display (S803).

As a result of the determination in S803, if it is determined that the variable display does not win (S803: No), the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated and the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31). Return to. On the other hand, when it is determined in the variable display that the winning is won (S803: Yes), first, in order to execute the control regarding the winning, whether or not the time saving flag 203j is turned on, that is, " It is determined whether or not the "time saving function" is enabled (S804).

As a result of the determination in S804, when the time saving flag 203j is set to off (S804: No), the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 in the hit state is set to "0. Set to "1 second" (S805), and set "1" to the value of the electric service counter (not shown) in order to open the ordinary electric service 72 once based on the corresponding situation (S806). The process shifts to S809.

On the other hand, in the processing of S804, when the time saving flag 203j is set to ON (S804: Yes), the opening (immersion) time of the ordinary electric service 72 in the hit state based on the specified contents of the ordinary electric service opening table 202k. Is set to "3 seconds" (S807), and "3" is set to the value of the electric service counter (S808) in order to open the ordinary electric service 72 three times based on the corresponding situation, and the process is sent to S809. Transition.

In the processing of S809, the ordinary electric service 72 is opened (immersed) (S809), the ordinary electric service 72 that was in the closed (protruding) state is driven to the open state, and the ordinary electric service control process (S204) is performed. After finishing, the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

As a result, when the player hits the right, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 reaches the arrangement position of the ordinary electric service 72, and the normal electric service 72 is open for a long time or a short time. Can make a difference. As a result, the ball that has passed through the through gate 67 is likely to be guided to the second starting port 71 side, or the upper surface of the ordinary electric service 72 is completely rolled from the left end to the right end in the closed state of the ordinary electric service 72. By making the situation in which the ball is difficult to be guided to the second starting port 71 side different depending on the gaming state, it is possible to produce different game performance for each gaming state.

In the process of S801, when it is determined that the ordinary electric service 72 is open (S801: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the ordinary symbol is hit, it is then set in S805 or S807. It is determined whether or not one opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 has elapsed (S810). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that one opening time of the set ordinary electric service 72 has not elapsed (S810: No), in order to maintain the open state of the ordinary electric service 72, S811 to S813 The process is skipped, the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

On the other hand, in the process of S810, when it is determined that one opening time of the set ordinary electric service 72 has elapsed (S810: Yes), first, the process of closing (protruding) the ordinary electric service 72 is performed. Perform (S811), and subtract "1" from the value of the electric service counter set in the process of S806 or S808 (S812). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the subtracted electric service counter is larger than "0" (S813). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the electric service counter is larger than "0" (S813: Yes), the number of times the normal electric service 72 is opened based on the corresponding situation remains, so the process is performed. After shifting to S809 and performing a predetermined interval process (in the first embodiment, a closing period of "0.5 seconds"), the opening process of the ordinary electric service 72 is performed again. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the electric service counter is not larger than "0" (S813: No), that is, when the value of the electric service counter is "0" or less, the ordinary electric service based on the corresponding situation Since all of the 72s have been opened, the normal electric service 72 is not reopened, the normal electric service control process (S204) is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 31).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the through gate 67 is made different from the winning probability and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol according to the game state and the opening time of the normal electric service 72 accompanying the winning. In a right-handed game in which the ball can pass through, in the "time reduction state" in which the "time saving function" is effective, the open state of the normal electric service 72 is configured to occur frequently, and the ball is almost the second starting port 71. Can flow into. On the other hand, even in the same right-handed game, during the jackpot game in which the "time saving function" is invalid, the closed state of the ordinary electric service 72 is configured to be long, and the upper surface of the closed ordinary electric service 72 is at the left end. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to flow into the second starting port 71 side by rolling completely from to the right end. Therefore, the inflow pattern to the second starting port 71 is different for each game state during the right-handed game, the game value given to the player is different, the variation of the game is enriched, and the interest of the game is improved. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the NMI interrupt process executed in the main control device 110 when a power failure or the like occurs will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like.

By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110. The MPU 201 in which the power failure signal SG1 is input to the NMI terminal interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, and stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power failure occurrence information (S901). ), Ends the NMI interrupt process.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 to 58. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly divided into a start-up process (see FIG. 49) that is started when the power is turned on and a main process (see FIG. 50) that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S1001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S1117 (see FIG. 50) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S1002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 50, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S1117. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S1117 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S1002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power is turned off in S1117. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S1006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if it is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S1003: Yes), the process proceeds to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if the data destruction of the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S1003: No), the process proceeds to S1008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S1004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S1117 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S1003: No), and the process proceeds to S1008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S1002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S1117, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S1004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S1004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S1004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of the RAM 223, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to "0".

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S1005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S1006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not there is data corruption in the RAM 223. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S1005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S1007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. You may do it.

In the process of S1008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S1008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S1117 is executed (see S1116 in FIG. 50). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S1117 is executed, the process of S1008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the power is started after the power failure occurs and the execution of the power cutoff process of S1117 is completed. Therefore, in such a case (S1008: Yes), the work area of the RAM 223 is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S1011) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S1008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power supply is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S1008 is performed via the processes of S1004 to S1006. This is the case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S1008: No), S1009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S1010, the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S1010), and then interrupt permission is set. Then (S1011), the process shifts to S1012.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S1009 is that when the processing of S1008 is reached via the processing of S1004 to S1006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S1004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

In the process of S1012, it is determined whether or not the set value command is received from the main control device 110 (S1012), and the process of S1012 is repeatedly executed and waits until the set value command is received (S1012: No). Then, when the set value command is received from the main control device 110 (S1012: Yes), the probability set value indicated by the set value command is stored in the set value memory (not shown), and the main process (see FIG. 50). Move to.

In this way, in the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113, the main process (see FIG. 50) continues until the set value command generated at the end of the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 28) is received. By waiting for the transition, the probability set value set by the main control device 110 can be reliably grasped by the voice lamp control device 113, and the processes after the main process can be executed based on the probability set value. Further, when the set value command is not received from the main control device 110, the start-up process of the main control device 110 has not been reached until the end of the start-up process, and the start-up process of the main control device 110 has not been normally completed. The start-up process of the lamp control device 113 is not normally completed, and the process is not shifted to the main process. With this configuration, it is possible to grasp whether or not the start-up process of the main control device 110 is normally executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and the main control device 110 is normally started up. It is possible to prevent the runaway of the voice lamp control device 113 in the absence state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 50, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this main process.

When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not "1 millisecond" or more has elapsed since the previous process of S1101 was executed (S1101), and if "1 millisecond" or more has not elapsed (S1101). S1101: No), the process proceeds to S1110 without performing the processes of S1102 to S1109. In the processing of S1101, it is not necessary to process in a short cycle (within "1 millisecond") in S1102 to S1109 to determine whether or not "1 millisecond" has elapsed, whereas in S1110. This is because it is preferable to execute the variation effect processing of S1111 and the command determination processing of S1111 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S1111 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S1110 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay.

In the process of S1101, if it is determined that "1 millisecond" or more has passed since the process of S1101 was executed last time (S1101: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1102. When the process of S1101 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 49, the process proceeds to the process of S1102 as it is.

In the process of S1102, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S1103 to S1112 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S1102). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S1107 described later (S1103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S1104). .. The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, "30 seconds") when the power is turned on, and the notification is a voice output device 226 or a lamp display device. It is done by 227. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If it is not at the time of turning on the power, the process proceeds to the process of S1105 without performing the notification by the power-on notification process.

Next, in the process of S1105, a hit effect process for executing an effect related to a big hit or a small hit set by the command determination process of S1111 described later is performed (S1105), and the process proceeds to the process of S1106.

Next, in the process of S1106, the frame button input monitoring / effect process is executed (S1106). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing, during the valid period of the frame button 22 operated by the player in order to enhance the effect, the input of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed is monitored, and the input is monitored during the valid period. This is a process for setting to perform an effect (for example, "special button effect" or the like) corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. The frame button input monitoring / effect processing will be described later in FIG. 58.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is completed, the lamp editing process is then executed (S1107), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S1108). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S1108, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S1109), and the process proceeds to the process of S1110. In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the variation effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S1107 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing / output process of S1108 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81. Runs in time.

In the process of S1110, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, the special figure 1 variation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command received from the main control device 110, or the special figure 2 variation pattern command and Based on the special figure 2 stop type command, the variation effect processing corresponding to the first special symbol or the second special symbol is executed (S1110), and the processing is transferred to S1111. Details of this variation effect processing (S1110) will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

In the process of S1111, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S1111), and the process proceeds to the process of S1112. The details of this command determination process (S1111) will be described later with reference to FIG. 51.

In S1112, a counter update process for updating various counters provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S1112). For example, the counter that determines the detailed fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation effect is updated, and the hold change counter (not shown) that draws the "hold change notice" is updated in this counter update process. The counter is updated by sequentially adding 1 within a predetermined range (“0 to 99” in this embodiment), reaching the maximum value (“99”), and then returning to “0”.

When the processing of S1112 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S1113). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S1115), and the power-off process is executed (S1116). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S1117), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the information on the occurrence of the power failure is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S1113 (S1113: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S1114), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S1114: No), the process returns to the process of S1101 and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S1114: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing.

Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S1111).

This command determination process (S1111) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is received from the main control device 110 or the display control device 114 as described above. Judge the command that was executed.

In the command determination process (S1111), first, it is determined whether or not a command from the main control device 110 is received in the command storage area provided in the RAM 223 (S1201). As a result of the determination, if a command is received from the main control device 110 (S1201: Yes), the first command received from the main control device 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the first command from the main control device 110 is analyzed. 1 It is determined whether or not a command related to dynamic display (variation effect) of a special symbol (that is, a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command, a special figure 1 stop type command, a special figure 1 confirmation command, etc.) has been received (S1202). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol has been received (S1202: Yes), the special figure 1 command process for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1203). The command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 50).

Here, a special figure 1 command process (S1203) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing this special figure 1 command processing (S1203).

In this special figure 1 command process (S1203), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are executed.

In the special figure 1 command processing (S1203), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S1221). As a result of the determination, if the special figure 1 variation pattern command is received (S1221: Yes), the variation pattern type of the first special symbol included in the received special figure 1 variation pattern command is extracted (S1222).

The variation pattern type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 56) described later, the variation of the first special symbol with respect to the display control device 114 according to the game state. Special figure 1 for display that notifies the start of production and its fluctuation pattern type Used when setting a fluctuation pattern command. After that, the special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 1 variation pattern command has not been received (S1221: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1223). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command has been received (S1223: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 1 stop type command (S1224).

The stop type of the first special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 56) described later, the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed with respect to the display control device 114 according to the game state. Special figure for display to notify the stop type of Fig. 1 Used when setting the stop type command. After that, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a indicating that the variation effect of the first special symbol is started is set to on (S1225), the special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the command determination process is completed. Return to (see FIG. 50).

As for the special figure 1 stop type command, the fluctuation pattern is indicated by the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command when the variation effect of the first special symbol is started. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main control device 110 to indicate the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol. By setting the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a to ON by the processing of S1225, the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the first reserved ball number command first in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 56) executed later. Judgment as to whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the first special symbol extracted based on the above matches the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the first special symbol extracted from the received special figure 1 variation pattern command. I do. In addition, the stop type of the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the first reserved ball count command, and the first stop type extracted from the received special figure 1 stop type command. It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variation effect of the special symbol matches. As a result of these determinations, in the variation effect of the first special symbol of 1, the variation pattern based on the first reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 1 variation pattern command do not match, or the first If the stop type based on the held ball count command and the stop type based on the special figure 1 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and the abnormality is detected. It is configured to handle errors to indicate.

When it is determined that the special figure 1 stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1223 (S1223: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1223: No). S1226). The special figure 1 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the first special symbol when the variation effect of the first special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has been received (S1226: Yes), the change of the first special symbol is changed when the change effect of the first special symbol is executed for the display control device 114. A display special figure 1 confirmation command for confirming and displaying the effect is set (S1227), the special figure 1 command process (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 1 confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, and when the third symbol display device 81 executes the variation effect of the first special symbol, the first special figure 1 It is configured to confirm and display the variation effect of the symbol.

As a result of the processing of S1226, when it is determined that the special figure 1 confirmation command has not been received (S1226: No), other processing related to the variation effect of the first special symbol is performed (S1228), and this special figure 1 command processing is performed. (S1203) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. In the process of S1202, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the first special symbol has not been received (S1202: No), then the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed by the main controller 110. It is determined whether or not a command related to display (variation effect) (that is, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command, a special figure 2 stop type command, a special figure 2 confirmation command, etc.) has been received (S1204). Then, when it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol has been received (S1204: Yes), the special figure 2 command process for executing each process related to the command is performed (S1205). The command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 50).

Here, a special figure 2 command process (S1205) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the special figure 2 command processing (S1205).

In this special figure 2 command process (S1205), various setting processes related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol transmitted from the main control device 110 are executed.

In the special figure 2 command processing (S1205), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 (S1231). As a result of the determination, if the special figure 2 variation pattern command is received (S1231: Yes), the variation pattern type of the second special symbol included in the received special figure 2 variation pattern command is extracted (S1232).

The variation pattern type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect processing (see FIG. 56) described later, the variation of the second special symbol with respect to the display control device 114 according to the game state. Special figure 2 for display that notifies the start of the effect and its variation pattern type Used when setting the variation pattern command. After that, the special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 variation pattern command has not been received (S1231: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 stop type command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1233). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command has been received (S1233: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the special figure 2 stop type command (S1234).

The stop type of the second special symbol extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation effect process (see FIG. 56) described later, the display control device 114 is subjected to the variation effect of the second special symbol according to the game state. Special figure 2 for display that notifies the stop type of No. 2 Used when setting the stop type command. After that, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b indicating that the variation effect of the second special symbol is started is set to on (S1235), the special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the command determination process is completed. Return to (see FIG. 50).

As for the special figure 2 stop type command, the fluctuation pattern is indicated by the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command after the main control device 110 transmits the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command when the variation effect of the second special symbol is started. It is a command that is always transmitted from the main control device 110 to indicate the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol. By setting the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b to on by the processing of S1235, the value of each counter C1 or the like included in the second reserved ball number command first in the fluctuation effect processing (see FIG. 56) executed later. Judgment as to whether or not the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the second special symbol extracted based on is the same as the variation pattern type of the variation effect of the second special symbol extracted from the received special figure 2 variation pattern command. I do. In addition, the stop type of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol extracted based on the value of each counter C1 or the like previously included in the second reserved ball count command, and the second stop type extracted from the received special figure 2 stop type command. It is determined whether or not the stop type of the variation effect of the special symbol matches. As a result of these determinations, in the variation effect of the second special symbol of 1, the variation pattern based on the second reserved ball number command and the variation pattern based on the special figure 2 variation pattern command do not match, or the second If the stop type based on the held ball count command and the stop type based on the special figure 2 stop type command do not match, it is determined that some abnormality (for example, command reception abnormality due to noise) has occurred, and the abnormality is detected. It is configured to handle errors to indicate.

When it is determined that the special figure 2 stop type command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1233 (S1233: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received from the main control device 110 (S1233: No). S1236). The special figure 2 confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol when the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed on the third symbol display device 81. When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has been received (S1236: Yes), the change of the second special symbol is changed when the change effect of the second special symbol is executed for the display control device 114. A display special figure 2 confirmation command for confirming the effect is set (S1237), the special figure 2 command process (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

When the display control device 114 receives the display special figure 2 confirmation command from the voice lamp control device 113, and when the third symbol display device 81 executes the variation effect of the second special symbol, the second special figure 2 While the symbol variation effect is confirmed and displayed, if the second special symbol variation effect is not executed in the third symbol display device 81, the display special symbol 2 confirmation command is ignored (the processing based on is not executed). , The display content is not changed based on).

When it is determined that the special figure 2 confirmation command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1236 (S1236: No), another process related to the variation effect of the second special symbol is performed (S1238), and this special figure 2 command processing is performed. (S1205) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 50).

Returning to FIG. 50, the description will be continued. In the process of S1204, if it is determined that the command related to the dynamic display (variation effect) of the second special symbol has not been received (S1204: No), then the first reserved ball count command is issued from the main control device 110. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S1206). Then, when it is determined that the first reserved ball number command has been received (S1206: Yes), the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a (see FIG. 5) of the main controller 110 included in the first reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the first special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted and stored in the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1207). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 also included in the first reserved ball number command was updated in S1207. It is stored in the first hold information storage first to fourth areas of the first hold information storage area 223e indicated by the value of the sub first hold ball number counter 223c (S1208). Then, a display first reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the reserved ball number of the variation effect of the first special symbol is set (S1209), and this command determination process (S1111) is terminated. , Return to the main process (see FIG. 50).

Here, since the first reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball wins the first starting port 64 (starting winning), the process of S1207 is performed every time there is a starting winning. Therefore, the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the sound is heard when the start winning prize is detected. The value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c of the lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the first reserved ball number counter 203a of the main control device 110.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process by referring to the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS stored in the first hold information storage area 223e. That is, before the execution of the variation effect, what will be the result of the variation effect of the reserved first special symbol when the variation effect is executed (whether or not it will be a big hit, what will happen to the fluctuation time, etc.) It is possible to decide the execution of various effects by making a judgment.

When it is determined that the first reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1206 (S1206: No), then it is determined whether or not the second reserved ball count command has been received from the main controller 110. (S1210). Then, when it is determined that the second reserved ball number command has been received (S1210: Yes), the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b (see FIG. 5) of the main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball number command. (That is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted and stored in the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 (S1211). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 also included in the second reserved ball number command was updated in S1211. It is stored in the second hold information storage first to fourth areas of the second hold information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the sub second hold ball number counter 223d (S1212). Then, a display second reserved ball number command for notifying the display control device 114 of the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol is set (S1213), and the second special symbol in the "time reduction state A" is set. In order to execute the effect related to the look-ahead processing based on the dynamic display of (that is, "3 consecutive acquisition challenge effect", "7 consecutive acquisition effect" and "timer effect"), hold confirmation processing is performed (S1214), and this command The determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 50).

Here, since the second reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when a ball wins a prize (starting prize) in the second starting port 71, the process of S1211 is performed every time there is a starting winning prize. Therefore, the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 can be adjusted to the value of the second reserved ball number counter 203b of the main control device 110. Therefore, even if the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110 due to the influence of noise or the like, the sound is heard when the start winning prize is detected. The value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d of the lamp control device 113 can be modified to match the value of the second reserved ball counter 203b of the main control device 110.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 can execute the look-ahead process by referring to the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS stored in the second hold information storage area 223f. That is, what will happen to the result of the variable effect of the reserved second special symbol when the variable effect is executed (whether or not it will be a big hit, whether or not it will be a small hit, and what will happen to the fluctuation time? Etc.) can be determined before the execution of the variable effect to determine the execution of various effects.

Here, with reference to FIG. 54, the hold confirmation process (S1214), which is one of the command determination processes (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing this hold confirmation process (S1214).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the period for storing the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state A" is "20 seconds" from the start of the "time reduction state A". Is configured to perform a "timer effect". Then, in this hold confirmation process (S1214), the player is given a ball according to the number of hold balls of the second special symbol indicated by the second hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 during the "timer effect". When the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol reaches the maximum value (that is, 4) while performing the process for executing the "striking instruction effect" that prompts the firing of "7 consecutive" Perform the process for executing the "acquisition effect".

In the hold confirmation process (S1214), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the "time reduction state A" (S1241). If the result of the determination is not "time reduction state A" (S1241: No), the hold confirmation process (S1214) is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, when the game state is determined to be the "time reduction state A" in the process of S1241 (S1241: Yes), the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol during the execution of the "timer effect" is urged. In order to execute the "striking instruction effect", first, whether or not the value of the sub second reserved ball count counter 223d is smaller than "2", that is, the holding of the dynamic display of the second special symbol at that time. It is determined whether or not the number of balls is less than "2" (0 or 1) (S1242). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d is smaller than "2" (S1242: Yes), then, after the executing "timer effect" is started, " It is determined whether or not "5 seconds" or more has passed (S1243).

As a result of the determination in S1243, if "5 seconds" or more have not passed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1243: No), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Among them, a super-strong hitting instruction command (normal) is set to notify the player of the "super-strong hitting instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 59 (a) described later) that urges the player to shoot the ball very strongly (see FIG. 59 (a) described later). S1244), the hold confirmation process (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

When the display control device 114 receives the super-strong hitting instruction command (normal) from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 very strongly urges the player to shoot the ball during the "timer effect" in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to display "super-strong striking instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 59 (a) described later).

As a result of the determination in S1243, if "5 seconds" or more have passed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1243: Yes), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Of these, the super-strong that notifies the player of the "super-strong hitting instruction production (special)" (see FIG. 59 (b) described later) that urges the player to launch the ball more strongly than the "super-strong hitting instruction production (normal)". A striking instruction command (special) is set (S1245), the hold confirmation process (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

When the display control device 114 receives the super-strong hitting instruction command (special) from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 "super-strong hits" the player to shoot a ball during the "timer effect" in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to display a "super-strong striking instruction effect (special)" (see FIG. 59 (b) described later) that urges more strongly than the "direction instruction effect (normal)".

In the process of S1242, when it is determined that the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is not smaller than "2" (S1242: No), then the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is "3". It is determined whether or not the value is smaller than, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol at that time is "2" (2) (S1246). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d is smaller than "3" (S1246: Yes), then, after the executing "timer effect" is started, " It is determined whether or not "10 seconds" or more has passed (S1247).

As a result of the determination in S1247, if "10 seconds" or more have not passed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1247: No), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Among them, a strong hitting instruction command (normal) for notifying the player of the "strong hitting instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 59 (c) described later) that strongly urges the player to launch the ball is set (S1248). The hold confirmation process (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

When the display control device 114 receives a banging instruction command (normal) from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 strongly urges the player to shoot a ball during the “timer effect” in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to display "direction instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 59 (c) described later).

As a result of the determination of S1247, if "10 seconds" or more have passed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1247: Yes), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Among them, the strong hitting instruction to notify the player of the "strong hitting instruction directing (special)" (see FIG. 59 (d) described later) that further strongly urges the player to launch the ball from the "strong hitting instruction directing (normal)". A command (special) is set (S1249), the hold confirmation process (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

When the display control device 114 receives the strong hitting instruction command (special) from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 "strongly hits" the player to shoot the ball during the "timer effect" in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to display a "strong hitting instruction effect (special)" (see FIG. 59 (d) described later) that strongly encourages the effect (normal).

In the process of S1246, when it is determined that the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is not smaller than "3" (S1246: No), then the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is "4". It is determined whether or not the value is smaller than, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol at that time is "3" (3) (S1250). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the value of the sub-second reserved ball count counter 223d is smaller than "4" (S1250: Yes), then, after the executing "timer effect" is started, " It is determined whether or not "15 seconds" or more have passed (S1250).

As a result of the determination in S1247, if "15 seconds" or more have not passed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1250: No), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Among them, a middle hitting instruction command (normal) for notifying the player of the "middle hitting instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 60 (a) described later) for prompting the player to launch the ball is set (S1252), and this hold. The confirmation process (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

When the display control device 114 receives the middle hitting method instruction command (normal) from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 prompts the player to shoot the ball during the “timer effect” in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to display "instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 60 (a) described later).

As a result of the determination of S1251, if "15 seconds" or more have passed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1251: Yes), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Among them, the middle-hit instruction to notify the player of the "middle-hit instruction (special)" (see FIG. 60 (b) described later) that more strongly urges the player to launch the ball than the "middle-hit instruction (normal)". A command (special) is set (S1253), the hold confirmation process (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

When the display control device 114 receives the middle hitting instruction command (special) from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 "instructs the player to shoot the ball during the" timer effect "in the third symbol display device 81. It is configured to display a "middle hitting instruction effect (special)" (see FIG. 59 (d) described later) that strongly encourages the effect (normal).

In the process of S1250, when it is determined that the value of the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d is not smaller than "4" (S1250: No), that is, the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is If the maximum number of reserved balls is 4, then is the weak hitting instruction command set to notify the display control device 114 that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has already been stored up to the maximum value? Whether or not it is determined (S1254). As a result of the determination, if the weak hitting instruction command has been set (S1254: Yes), the hold confirmation process (S1214) is terminated and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

On the other hand, in the process of S1254, when it is determined that the weak hitting instruction command has not been set (S1254: No), the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol has reached the maximum value for the player. A weak striking instruction command (normal) for notifying the "weak striking instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 60 (c) described later) is set (S1255), and then four are stored in the second. Performs a 7-series effect command setting process (S1256) that determines whether or not all big hits or small hits occur in the dynamic display of the special symbol and determines whether or not to execute the "7-series acquisition effect", and this hold confirmation process. (S1214) is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process (see FIG. 51).

When the display control device 114 receives a weak striking instruction command (normal) from the voice lamp control device 113, the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol during the "timer effect" in the third symbol display device 81. Is configured to display a "weak striking instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 60 (c) described later), which suggests that has reached the maximum value.

As described above, in the first embodiment, "super-strength method instruction effect (special)"> "super-strength method instruction effect (normal)"> "strong-strength method instruction effect (special)"> "strong-strength method" "Instruction effect (normal)"> "Medium hitting instruction effect (special)"> "Medium hitting instruction effect (normal)"> "Weak hitting instruction effect (normal)" Are configured to be different. In this way, in the "timer effect" in the "time reduction state A", the ball is directed to the player according to the remaining time of the "timer effect" and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. By urging the launch, the player can be urged to acquire the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state A", which is the most important as the game specification, and in the "time reduction state A". It is possible to easily give the player the playability according to the set game specifications.

In particular, in the "timer effect" in the "time reduction state A", when the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not reached the maximum value (that is, four), the "striking instruction effect" By urging the player to store the hold of the dynamic display of the second special symbol by continuing to execute, the number of hold balls of the second special symbol is stored up to the maximum value in the "time reduction state A", which will be described later. It is possible to execute the "7 consecutive acquisition effect". As a result, it is possible to easily give the player the playability according to the set game specifications.

Here, with reference to FIG. 55, a 7-series effect command setting process (S1256), which is one process of the hold confirmation process (S1214) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the 7-series effect command setting process (S1256).

In this 7-series effect command setting process (S1256), in the "time reduction state A", a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, and the second special symbol is held at that time. 2 When all the dynamic displays of the special symbols generate big hits or small hits, the execution of the "7 consecutive acquisition effect" that pre-reads the occurrence of 7 consecutive hits including the two unheld hits is set.

In this 7-series effect command setting process (S1256), first, whether or not a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol that is executed first after entering the "time reduction state A". That is, it is determined whether or not the jackpot random number value or the small hit random number value is stored in the data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol stored in the execution information storage area 223g (S1261). Based on this determination, if there is a big hit or a small hit, the game shifts to the "time reduction state B", and if there is no big hit or a small hit, the game shifts to the "normal game state B". As a result of the determination, if a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol that is executed first after entering the "time reduction state A" (S1261: Yes), the second running second. After executing the dynamic display of the special symbol, a big hit or a small hit occurs and the game state shifts to the "time reduction state B". Therefore, in the dynamic display of the four second special symbols that are held next. Whether or not a big hit or a small hit occurs, that is, a big hit random value or a small hit disorder in the data related to the dynamic display of the second special symbol stored in the first to fourth areas of the second reserved information storage area 223f. It is determined whether or not the numerical value is stored (S1262).

In the process of S1262, when it is determined that a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the four reserved second special symbols (S1262: Yes), the gaming state is the "time reduction state A (executing). "Dynamic display of the second special symbol)" → "Time reduction state B (Dynamic display of the first second special symbol on hold)" → "Time reduction state B (Dynamic display of the second special symbol on hold)" Target display) ”→ Time saving limit function activated →“ Normal game state B (Dynamic display of the third special symbol on hold) ”→“ Time reduction state A (Dynamic display of the second special symbol on hold 4th) (Display) ”, so the dynamic display of the second special symbol on hold becomes a big hit or a small hit of the second special symbol in the“ time reduction state A ”, and shifts to the“ time reduction state B ”. .. Therefore, until the next time saving limit function is activated, by shifting to the "time reduction state B" in which the big hit or the small hit is substantially guaranteed, the second special symbol being executed is held once + held. The second in the "time reduction state A" that a total of seven big hits or small hits can occur, four times for the second special symbol and two times for the second special symbol until the time saving limit function is activated. It can be grasped during the execution of the dynamic display of the special symbol. Therefore, in the processing of S1262, if it is determined that a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the four reserved second special symbols (S1262: Yes), seven big hits or small hits occur. A 7-series effect command for notifying the display control device 114 of the execution of the "7-series acquisition effect" (see FIG. 61 (d) described later) is set (S1263), and this 7-series effect command setting process (S1256) is set. ) Is terminated, and the process returns to the hold confirmation process (see FIG. 54).

The 7-series effect command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 50). .. In the display control device 114, the display control of the "7-series acquisition effect" is performed in the third symbol display device 81 during the execution of the success pattern of the "3-series acquisition challenge effect" in response to the 7-series effect command.

In the process of S1261, when it is determined that no big hit or small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol that is executed first after entering the "time reduction state A" (S1261: No). , Since the transition from the "time reduction state A" to the "time reduction state B" does not occur and the transition to the "normal game state B", seven big hits or small hits cannot occur at this point. The process is skipped, the 7-series effect command setting process (S1256) is terminated, and the process returns to the hold confirmation process (see FIG. 54).

Further, in the process of S1262, although a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol that is executed first after entering the "time reduction state A" (S1261: Yes), it is suspended. Since no big hit or small hit is generated in all of the dynamic display of the four second special symbols, the game state is not changed as described above, and seven big hits or small hits are not generated. Therefore, the processing of S1263. Is skipped, the 7-series effect command setting process (S1256) is terminated, and the process returns to the hold confirmation process (see FIG. 54).

With this configuration, in the "time reduction state A", a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the first second special symbol, and four second special symbols are held at that time. When all the big hits or small hits occur, the 4th second special symbol becomes a small hit (or big hit) in the dynamic display, and the game shifts to the "time reduction state B" and is still held. It is possible to pre-read the occurrence of a total of 7 jackpots or small hits, including 2 that are not, and by executing the pre-reading notice for each of the 7 consecutive hits, the game value of consecutive jackpots equal to or greater than the maximum number of reserved balls Since the player can be made to recognize the state in which the grant is substantially guaranteed, it is possible to create new playability and improve the interest of the game.

Returning to FIG. 51, the description will be continued. If it is determined that the second reserved ball count command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1210 (S1210: No), then it is determined whether or not the limit number of times command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1214). ). Then, when it is determined that the limit number command has been received (S1214: Yes), the time saving limit number included in the limit number command, that is, the total number of times of the "time saving function" after the time saving limit is cleared is stored ( S1215), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 57).

The voice lamp control device 113 can change the effect balance of the variable effect and set the effect content based on the time reduction limit number of times stored (stored) in S1215.

If it is determined that the limit number of times command has not been received as a result of the processing of S1214 (S1214: No), the processing is shifted to S1216. If it is determined in the process of S1201 that the command from the main control device 110 has not been received (S1201: No), the process shifts to S1216.

In the process of S1216, the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S1216), the command determination process (S1111) is terminated, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 50). Here, if the other command received is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. For example, the demo command received from the main control device 110 is set as a display demo command by the process of S1216, temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and then the command output of the main process. It is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the process (S1102).

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this variation effect processing (S1110).

This variation effect processing (S1110) is executed in the main processing (see FIG. 50), and the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first special symbol or the first in the main display area Dm (see FIG. 4) of the third symbol display device 81 according to the gaming state. 2 Execute various processes for executing the variation effect of the special symbol. Specifically, when the start condition of the variation effect of the first special symbol is satisfied, the variation effect of the first special symbol is configured to be performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81. .. Further, when the start condition of the variation effect of the second special symbol is satisfied, the variation effect of the second special symbol is configured to be performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81.

In the variation effect processing (S1110), first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 variation start flag 223a provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1301). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is on (S1301: Yes), both the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 1 stop type command are received, so that the first special In order to start the variation effect of the symbol, the special figure 1 variation start flag 223a is turned off (S1302), and then the data included in the first hold information storage area 223e provided in the first hold information storage area 223e is executed. The information is shifted to the information storage area 223g (S1303), and the data included in the first hold information storage second to fourth areas provided in the first hold information storage area 223e is stored in the first hold information storage first to third areas. It shifts to the area (S1304), subtracts 1 from the value of the sub-first reserved ball count counter 223c (S1305), and shifts the process to S1306.

That is, in this case, the variation effect of the first special symbol held is reduced by one, and the execution of the variation effect of the first special symbol held first in time is started, so that the first special symbol is held first. 1st Hold Information Corresponding to the Variable Effect It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first hold information storage second area are transferred to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first hold information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first holding information storage third area are moved, and the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 are set to the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first holding information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223e1 to 223e5 of the first hold information storage fourth area are changed to the storage areas 223e1 to the first hold information storage third area. Move to 223e5.

As a result, in the execution information storage area 223g, the same values as the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored, and the first hold information storage. In the first reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the area 223e, the counters C1 to C3 stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the first reserved ball storage area 203d of the main control device 110, respectively. , CK, CS1 and the same values will be stored.

In the process of S1306, the display first reserved ball number command is set based on the value of the sub first reserved ball number counter 223c subtracted in the process of S1305 (S1306), and the process shifts to S1307.

The display first reserved ball count command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 50). Will be sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 according to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect of the first special symbol indicated by the first reserved ball number command for display. conduct.

Next, in the process of S1307, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the variation pattern is acquired. In order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern, the display special figure 1 variation pattern command is set (S1307), and the process shifts to S1308. ..

The display special figure 1 variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 50). Will be sent. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the first special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display special diagram 1 variation pattern command. Then, the display control of the variation effect of the first special symbol is started.

Next, in the process of S1308, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the stop type of the variation effect of the first special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the stop type is acquired. A display special figure 1 stop type command is set in order to display the variation effect of the first special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type (S1308), and this variation effect process (S1110). ) Is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 50).

The special display 1 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 50). Will be sent. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect of the first special symbol executed by the display special diagram 1 variation pattern command set by the process of S1308 is confirmed and displayed, the display special diagram 1 stop type command is used. Set the stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

In the process of S1301, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a is not on (S1301: No), then it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b provided in the RAM 223 is on (S1309). ). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is on (S1309: Yes), both the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command and the special figure 2 stop type command are received, so that the second special In order to start the fluctuation effect of the symbol, the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is turned off (S1310), and then the data included in the second hold information storage first area provided in the second hold information storage area 223f is executed. The information storage area is shifted to 223 g (S1311), and the data included in the second hold information storage second to fourth areas provided in the second hold information storage area 223f is stored in the second hold information storage first to third areas. After shifting to the area (S1312), the value of the sub second reserved ball count counter 223d is decremented by 1 (S1313), and the process shifts to S1314.

That is, in this case, the change effect of the second special symbol held is reduced by one, and the execution of the change effect of the second special symbol held first in time is started, so that the change effect is held first. 2nd Hold Information Corresponding to the Variable Effect It is moved to each storage area 223g1 to 223g5 of the execution information storage area 223g. Further, the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second hold information storage second area are transferred to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second hold information storage first area. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second holding information storage third area are moved, and the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 are set to the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second holding information storage second area. The values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the storage areas 223f1 to 223f5 of the second holding information storage fourth area are changed to the storage areas 223f1 to the second holding information storage third area. Move to 223f5.

As a result, in the execution information storage area 223g, the same values as the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the hold ball execution area 203f of the main control device 110 are stored, and the second hold information storage area 223f is stored. In the second reserved information storage first to fourth areas of the above, the counters C1 to C3 and CK stored in the first reserved first to fourth areas of the second reserved ball storage area 203e of the main control device 110, respectively. , The same value as CS1 will be stored.

In the process of S1314, the display second reserved ball number command is set based on the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d subtracted in the process of S1313 (S1314), and the process shifts to S1315.

The second reserved ball count command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 in FIG. 50). Will be sent. The display control device 114 controls the display of the reserved symbol in the cockpit display area Db of the third symbol display device 81 according to the number of reserved balls of the variation effect of the second special symbol indicated by the second reserved ball number command for display. conduct.

Next, in the process of S1315, based on the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g, the variation pattern of the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed from now on is acquired, and the variation pattern is acquired. Special figure for display 2 for displaying the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the variation pattern. The variation pattern command setting process is executed (S1315).

Here, with reference to FIG. 57, a display special figure 2 variation pattern command setting process (S1315), which is one process of the variation effect process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the display special figure 2 variation pattern command setting process (S1315).

In this display special figure 2 variation pattern command setting process (S1315), the display special figure 2 variation pattern command is set in order to execute the variation effect of the second special symbol according to the game state and the validity of the second special symbol. do. In particular, the display special figure 2 variation pattern command corresponding to the success pattern or the failure pattern of the "triple acquisition challenge effect" is set according to the success or failure of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state A". In addition, the display special figure 2 variation pattern command corresponding to the time of consecutive villas is set according to the validity of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B". Further, a display special figure 2 variation pattern command corresponding to the success pattern or the failure pattern of the "renso continuation challenge production" is set according to the success or failure of the second special symbol in the "normal game state B".

In this display special figure 2 variation pattern command setting process (S1315), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the “time reduction state A” (S1321). As a result of the determination, when the game state is the "time reduction state A" (S1321: Yes), the "triple acquisition challenge effect" is executed in the "time reduction state A". 2 It is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit occurs in the variation effect of the special symbol (S1322).

As a result of the determination, if it is determined that a big hit or a small hit occurs in the variable effect of the second special symbol being executed (S1322: Yes), it is executed in the "triple acquisition challenge effect" in the "time reduction state A". By generating a big hit or a small hit in the variation effect of the second special symbol in the middle, the game state that shifts after the end of the big hit game is "time shortened" by the occurrence of the big hit or the small hit in the "time saving function". It becomes "state B", and thereafter, it becomes a state in which the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit is substantially guaranteed until the time saving limit function is activated. Therefore, in order to execute the success pattern of the "triple acquisition challenge effect" (see FIG. 61 (a) described later), a display triple acquisition variation pattern command is set (S1323), and this display special figure 2 The variation pattern command setting process (S1315) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1322, if a big hit or a small hit does not occur in the variable effect of the second special symbol being executed (S1322: No), in the "triple acquisition challenge effect" in the "time reduction state A", The "time saving function" in the "time saving state A" based on the fact that the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed once because the big hit or the small hit does not occur in the variable effect of the second special symbol being executed. When the time saving end condition is satisfied, the game state shifts to the "normal game state B". Therefore, in order to execute the failure pattern of the "triple acquisition challenge effect" (see FIG. 61 (b) described later), a display triple non-acquisition variation pattern command is set (S1324), and this display special figure is used. 2. The variation pattern command setting process (S1315) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 56).

In the process of S1321, when it is determined that the gaming state is not the "time shortening state A" (S1321: No), then it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the "time shortening state B" (S1325). As a result of the determination, when the game state is the "time reduction state B" (S1325: Yes), it is a state in which a substantial big hit or small hit is guaranteed in the "time reduction state B". It is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit occurs in the variation effect of the second special symbol inside (S1326).

As a result of the determination, if it is determined that a big hit or a small hit occurs in the variation effect of the second special symbol being executed (S1326: Yes), the variation effect of the second special symbol being executed in the "time reduction state B" By the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit in, the occurrence of a big hit or a small hit in a state where the "consecutive state" is substantially guaranteed, and the fluctuation time is relatively short among the big hit fluctuations (No. In one embodiment, the display continuous villa acquisition fluctuation pattern command is set (S1327), the display special figure 2 fluctuation pattern command setting process (S1315) is terminated, and the variation effect processing (FIG. 56) is completed. See).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1326, if a big hit or a small hit does not occur in the variation effect of the second special symbol being executed (S1326: No), the variation of the second special symbol being executed in the "time reduction state B". Since the big hit or the small hit does not occur in the production, the loss occurs in the state where the "consecutive state" is practically guaranteed, and the fluctuation time is relatively short in the fluctuation time of the loss (No. 1). In one embodiment, a “3 seconds” (or “15 seconds”)) display consecutive villa non-acquisition variation pattern command is set (S1328), and this display special figure 2 variation pattern command setting process (S1315) is terminated. Then, the process returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 56).

In the process of S1325, if it is determined that the gaming state is not the "time reduction state B" (S1325: No), then it is determined whether or not the gaming state is the "normal gaming state B" (S1329). As a result of the determination, if the game state is "normal game state B" (S1329: Yes), the "continuous villa continuation challenge production" is executed in "normal game state B". 2 It is determined whether or not a big hit or a small hit occurs in the variation effect of the special symbol (S1330).

As a result of the determination, if it is determined that a big hit or a small hit occurs in the variable effect of the second special symbol being executed (S1330: Yes), it is executed in the "continuous villa continuation challenge effect" in the "normal game state B". When a big hit or a small hit occurs in the variation effect of the second special symbol in the middle, the "consecutive state" continues, and the game state that shifts after the big hit game ends becomes the "time reduction state A" again. .. Therefore, in order to execute the success pattern of the "renso continuation challenge production", the display continuation success variation pattern command is set (S1331), and the display special figure 2 variation pattern command setting process (S1315) is terminated. , Return to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, as a result of the determination in S1329, if a big hit or a small hit does not occur in the variable effect of the second special symbol being executed (S1329: No), in the "continuous villa continuation challenge effect" in the "normal game state B", Since a big hit or a small hit does not occur in the variable effect of the second special symbol being executed, the "renso" could not be acquired in the variable effect of the second special symbol being executed, so that the game state is "normal game". Maintain "state B" or shift to "normal game state A". Therefore, in order to execute the failure pattern of the "renso continuation challenge effect", the display continuation failure pattern command is set (S1332), and the display special figure 2 variation pattern command setting process (S1315) is terminated. The process returns to the variation effect processing (see FIG. 56).

Each variation pattern command corresponding to the variation effect of the second special symbol set in S1323, S1324, S1327, S1328, S1331, or S1332 (hereinafter, the variation pattern command at the time of triple acquisition for display, the variation at the time of non-acquisition of triple for display). The pattern command, the continuous villa acquisition fluctuation pattern command for display, the continuous villa non-acquisition fluctuation pattern command for display, the continuous success fluctuation pattern command for display, and the continuous failure fluctuation pattern command for display are collectively referred to as "special figure 2 variation for display". The "pattern command") is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output process (see S1102 in FIG. 50) of the main process. .. In the display control device 114, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the second special symbol is performed in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 with the variation pattern indicated by the display special diagram 2 variation pattern command. Then, the display control of the variation effect of the second special symbol is started.

In the determination in the process of S1329, if it is not the "normal game state B" (S1329: No), that is, if it is the "normal game state A", the variation effect of the second special symbol cannot be executed ("" When the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in the "normal game state", it is configured so as not to be substantially selected because it is the "normal game state B").

Returning to FIG. 56, the description will be continued. After the processing of S1315, in the processing of S1316, the stop type of the variation effect of the second special symbol to be executed from now on based on the values of the counters C1 to C3, CK, and CS1 stored in the execution information storage area 223g. Is acquired, and a display special figure 2 stop type command is set in order to display the variation effect of the second special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 based on the stop type (S1316). The variation effect process (S1110) is finished, and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 50).

The special display 2 stop type command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is sent to the display control device 114 by the command output process of the main process (see S1102 of FIG. 50). Will be sent. In the display control device 114, when the variation effect of the second special symbol executed by the display special diagram 2 variation pattern command set by the process of S1317 is confirmed and displayed, the display special diagram 2 stop type command is used. Set the stop symbol corresponding to the indicated stop type.

When it is determined in the process of S1310 that the special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b is not on (that is, off) (S1310: No), at least the special figure 1 stop type command and special figure 1 stop type command and special FIG. 2 Since the stop type command has not been received, the variation effect process (S1110) is terminated and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 50).

As a result, it is possible to execute the variation effect of the special symbol in the main display area Dm of the third symbol display device 81 according to the game state, and it is possible to execute various effects according to the game state. The fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 that can be changed in synchronization with the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls in the small area Ds3 to the right of the sub-display area Ds of the third symbol display device 81. And the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 which can be changed in synchronization with the dynamic display of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls, the execution mode of each special symbol and the reserved balls in the third symbol display device 81. The number is recognizable.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106), which is one of the main processing (see FIG. 50) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106).

In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106), various button effects that urge the player to press the frame button 22 (see FIG. 1) are executed, and the frame button is executed by the player during the various button effects. When 22 is pressed, the development effect corresponding to the various button effects being executed is executed. In particular, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106), during the execution of the "special button effect", it is special according to the elapsed time during the execution of the "special button effect". The display form of the button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) is changed.

In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106), first, it is determined whether or not the "special button effect" is being executed (S1106). This "special button effect" is used when the "reach display" is executed in the variable effect, before the "reach display" is executed, or at the time of pre-reading notice, at the time of the current appearance of the notice character, at the time of the type notice of the "reach display", and " It is performed in one or more of the scenes such as when the development destination of the "reach display" is selected, when the effect reliability is increased or not, when the result is determined by the "reach display", when the character is selected, and so on. In addition, the "special button effect" is used during the opening, round, interval, or ending during the big hit game or the small hit game, when the round promotion effect is executed, when the number of rounds is increased, and when the transition game state is promoted. It is performed in any one or more situations such as time.

If it is determined that the "special button effect" is being executed as a result of the determination in S1401 (S1401: Yes), then the lighting color of the frame button 22 is changed according to the reliability of the jackpot or small hit in the variable effect. The lighting color change process is executed (S1402). In this lighting color change process (S1402), the display color of the frame button 22 changes according to the jackpot or small hit reliability in the variable effect being executed (for example, white → green in ascending order of jackpot or small hit reliability). → Red → Iridescent), but in the "normal state" described later, it is displayed in either white or green, and in the "first change state" described later, it is white, green or It is displayed in any one color of red, and in the "second change state" described later, it is displayed in any one color of white, green, red, or rainbow color. In addition, instead of or at the same time as the lighting color change processing, the size of the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) is changed according to the jackpot or small hit reliability (for example, in ascending order of jackpot or small hit reliability). It may be configured so that it can be medium-> large-> maximum).

After the processing of S1402, it is then determined whether or not the frame button 22 has been pressed during the "special button effect" (S1403). As a result of the determination, if the frame button 22 has not been pressed during the "special button effect", that is, if the frame button 22 has not yet been pressed by the player during the "special button effect" (S1403: No), " In the "special button effect", it is determined whether the display mode of the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) is the "normal state", the "first change state", or the "second change state" (S1404). ).

The pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment is configured such that the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) that appears in the “special button effect” changes with time. Specifically, this "special button effect" is an effect in which the special button symbol 81j is continuously displayed for a predetermined period (for example, "10 seconds") from the start of execution of the "special button effect". From the start of the "special button effect" (that is, "0 seconds") to the elapse of the first valid period (in the first embodiment, up to "5 seconds", hereinafter may be referred to as "valid time 1"). The special button symbol 81j is displayed in the "normal state" which is a display mode imitating the frame button 22 as it is, and is displayed from after the first valid period to the elapse of the second valid period (from "5 seconds" in the first embodiment). Up to "8 seconds". Hereinafter, it may be referred to as "effective time 2"), the special button symbol 81j is displayed in the "first change state" changed from the above "normal state", and the above second valid period. The special button symbol 81j is set after the above-mentioned predetermined period elapses (in the first embodiment, from "8 seconds" to "10 seconds") and when the variable effect being executed is a big hit or a small hit. It is displayed in the "second change state" which is further changed from the above "first change state".

As described above, the "normal state" of the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) is displayed in a display mode that imitates the frame button 22 as it is, and the frame button 22 in the "special button effect" is inside the frame button 22. Since the display color (for example, white or green) set in the lighting color change processing of S1402 is lit by the LED (not shown) built in the above-mentioned special button symbol 81j, the "normal state" is also displayed. The frame button 22 is displayed as if it is lit with the display color set in the lighting color change process of S1402 (see FIG. 62 (a) described later).

The "first change state" of the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) is a display mode in which the one-step display mode is changed from the above "normal state", and the frame button 22 is arranged at the arrangement position (that is, the upper plate). It is displayed in a display mode as if it protrudes upward from the first predetermined amount (for example, 3 cm) (outward direction of the housing of the upper plate 17) from 17) (see FIG. 62 (b) described later). Further, in the "first change state" of the "special button effect", the display color of the frame button 22 has more types than the "normal state" according to the reliability of the big hit or the small hit in the variable effect being executed. , Big hit or small hit It is configured to be able to change to a highly reliable display color (for example, white, green or red).

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured so that its display color (lighting color) can be changed by a built-in LED or the like (not shown), while a mechanism such as a solenoid or a motor is used. It is configured so that it is not physically driven (for example, haunting drive, rotary drive, expansion drive, etc.). On the other hand, in the "first change state" of the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) in the "special button effect", the display color is the same as the lighting color of the frame button 22, and the frame is different from the frame button 22. The button 22 is displayed in a display mode as if the button 22 protrudes upward from the upper plate 17 by a first predetermined amount.

With this configuration, the mechanism for physically projecting the frame button 22 from the upper plate 17 becomes unnecessary, and the number of parts is reduced, while the special button symbol 81j in the "special button effect" (see FIG. 62). By changing to the "first change state" (the same applies to the "second change state"), it is possible to perform an effect as if the frame button 22 was driven to protrude. Therefore, while reducing the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to execute various effects related to the frame button 22 and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the "first change state" of the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) is configured so that it cannot appear until after the first valid period has elapsed in the "special button effect". Further, in the "first change state", there are more types of lighting colors of the frame button 22 than in the "normal state", and any of the display colors including a display color that can be selected only when the jackpot or small hit reliability is high. It is configured to be displayed in the display color of. Further, as described above, the "first change state" of the special button symbol 81j does not appear when the player presses the frame button 22 at least before the lapse of the first valid period in the "special button effect". It is a production. Therefore, in the "special button effect", when the special button symbol 81j is in the "normal state", the player presses the frame button 22 to derive the effect result, or from the "normal state" to the "first change state". Whether the player presses the frame button 22 to derive the effect result after waiting for the change and setting the jackpot or small hit reliability to a state that is easier to detect than the "normal state" in the "first change state". , Can be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the meaning of selecting the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 in the "special button effect".

The "second change state" of the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) is a display mode in which the one-step display mode is changed from the above "first change state", and the frame button 22 is arranged at the arrangement position (that is, that is). It is displayed as if it protrudes upward from the upper plate 17) by a second predetermined amount (for example, 6 cm), which is larger than the first predetermined amount (outward direction of the housing of the upper plate 17) (FIG. 62 (described later)). c) See). Further, in the "second change state" of the "special button effect", the display color of the frame button 22 is changed to the "normal state" and the "first change state" according to the reliability of the big hit or the small hit in the variable effect being executed. It is configured so that it can be changed to a display color (for example, white, green, red, or rainbow color) having more types and higher reliability of big hit or small hit.

The "second change state" of the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) is configured so that it cannot appear until after the second valid period has elapsed in the "special button effect". Further, in the "second change state", the type of lighting color of the frame button 22 is more than the "normal state" and the "first change state", and is selected only when the jackpot or small hit reliability is high. It is configured to be displayed in any display color including the display color to be obtained. Further, as described above, the "second change state" of the special button symbol 81j does not appear when the player presses the frame button 22 at least before the lapse of the second valid period in the "special button effect". It is an effect, and it is an effect that appears only when the variable effect is a big hit or a small hit. Therefore, in the "special button effect", when the special button symbol 81j is in the "normal state" or the "first change state", the player presses the frame button 22 to derive the effect result, or from the "normal state". Wait for the change until the "first change state", then wait for the change from the "first change state" to the "second change state", then become the "second change state" and set the jackpot or small hit reliability to the "normal state". And, after making the state easier to detect than the "first change state", the player can select whether to press the frame button 22 to derive the effect result. With this configuration, it makes sense for the player to select the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed in the "special button effect" (creating a game property of waiting for the frame button 22 to be pressed). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

If, as a result of the determination in S1404, it is determined that the display mode of the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) in the "special button effect" is the "normal state" (S1404: "normal state"), then "special". It is determined whether or not the first valid period (that is, "5 seconds") has elapsed from the start of the "button effect" (S1405). As a result of the determination, if the first valid period has elapsed from the start of the "special button effect" (S1405: Yes), it is displayed that the special button symbol 81j is changed from the "normal state" to the "first change state". The first change command is set to notify the control device 114 (S1406), and the process shifts to S1411. On the other hand, if it is determined that the first valid period has not elapsed from the start of the "special button effect" (S1405: No), the process of S1406 is skipped and the process shifts to S1411.

When the display control device 114 receives the first change command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) from the “normal state” to the “first change state” in the third symbol display device 81. Execute the process to change.

As a result of the determination in S1404, when it is determined that the display mode of the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) in the "special button effect" is the "first change state" (S1404: "first change state"), Next, it is determined whether or not the second valid period (that is, "8 seconds") has elapsed from the start of the "special button effect" (S1407). As a result of the determination, if the second valid period has elapsed from the start of the "special button effect" (S1407: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the variable effect is a big hit or a small hit (S1408). As a result of the determination, if the variation effect is a big hit or a small hit (S1408: Yes), the display control device 114 is notified that the special button symbol 81j is changed from the "first change state" to the "second change state". The second change command is set (S1409), and the process shifts to S1411. In the process of S1407, when it is determined that the second valid period has not elapsed from the start of the "special button effect" (S1407: No), or in the process of S1408, the variable effect is not a big hit or a small hit. (That is, if it is determined to be lost) (S1408: No), the process of S1409 is skipped and the process is shifted to S1411.

When the display control device 114 receives the second change command from the voice lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 changes the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) from the “first change state” to the “second change state” in the third symbol display device 81. Executes the process of changing to.

If, as a result of the determination in S1404, it is determined that the display mode of the special button symbol (see FIG. 62) in the "special button effect" is the "second change state" (S1404: "second change state"), then , It is determined whether or not a predetermined period (that is, "10 seconds") has elapsed from the start of the "special button effect" (S1410). As a result of the determination, if a predetermined period has not elapsed from the start of the "special button effect" (S1410: No), the process shifts to S1411, and the process shifts to the determination process of whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed. , If a predetermined period has passed from the start of the "special button effect" (S1410: Yes), the execution period of the "special button effect" has expired, so the process of S1411 is skipped and the frame button is given to the player. Even though 22 is not pressed, the process shifts to S1412, and the button press process that is executed when the frame button 22 is pressed is executed.

In the process of S1411, it is determined whether or not the frame button 22 is pressed by the player (S1411). As a result of the determination, when the frame button 22 is pressed by the player (S1411: Yes), the button pressing process associated with the pressing of the frame button 22 is performed (S1412), and the process shifts to S1413. On the other hand, in the process of S1411, if it is determined by the player that the frame button 22 is not pressed (S1411: No), the process of S1412 is skipped and the process shifts to S1413.

In the button pressing process of S1412, for example, when the frame button 22 is pressed in the "normal state", "first change state", and "second change state" of the "special button effect", and the "special button effect". When the button validity period (that is, a predetermined period) of "" has elapsed, the same effect result may be displayed, or in the "special button effect", in the "normal state", a big hit or a small hit. It is difficult to produce a production in which the hit reliability is easy to detect, and in the "first change state", a production in which the jackpot or small hit reliability is easier to detect than in the "normal state" can be produced. In the "change state", the jackpot or small hit reliability can be detected more easily than in the "first change state", and the jackpot or small hit reliability can be detected when the button validity period of the "special button effect" has elapsed. It may be configured so that a possible effect does not appear. If the frame button 22 is not pressed during the "special button effect" and the button validity period has elapsed, the frame button 22 is pressed in the "normal state", "first change state", and "second change state". It may be configured so that an effect different from that of the case appears. By configuring in this way, it is possible to configure the effect result to differ depending on the pressing timing of the frame button 22 in the "special button effect", and to enrich the variation of the effect and improve the interest of the game. Can be done.

In the processing of S1413, other button processing is performed (S1413), the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S1106) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 50).

As a result, in the "special button effect", when the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) is in the "normal state" or the "first change state", the player presses the frame button 22 to derive the effect result. , Select whether to wait for the change from the "normal state" to the "first change state" and wait for the frame button 22 to be pressed until the jackpot or small hit reliability is made easier to detect than the "normal state". Playability is created. Further, in the "special button effect", after changing from the "normal state" to the "first change state", the change is further waited from the "first change state" to the "second change state", and then the "second change state" is waited for. After the jackpot or small hit reliability is set to a state that is easier to detect than the "normal state" and the "first change state", the player presses the frame button 22 to derive the effect result. Can be selected. With this configuration, it makes sense for the player to select the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed in the "special button effect" (creating a game property of waiting for the frame button 22 to be pressed). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the "special button effect", the special button symbol 81j (see FIG. 62) is configured to change from the "normal state" to the "first change state" and from the "first change state" to the "second change state". However, in the "special button effect", the "first change state" or the "second change state" may be suddenly displayed. Further, in the "special button effect", it may be configured to change from the "normal state" to the "second change state".

Next, with reference to FIGS. 59 and 60, the number of reserved balls and the elapsed time of the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol in the "timer effect" executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the "time reduction state A" are set. The corresponding display mode will be described. FIG. 59 schematically shows the transition between the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the “timer effect” in the third symbol display device 81 of the “time shortened state A” and the time-dependent change of the “timer effect”. FIG. 59 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is “1” immediately after the “timer effect” is started. b) is a diagram showing a state in which only time has passed from the state of FIG. 59 (a), and FIG. 59 (c) is a diagram of the second special symbol while time has passed from the state of FIG. 59 (a). It is a figure which showed the state which the number of reserved balls became "2", and FIG. 59 (d) is a figure which showed the state which only time has passed from the state of FIG. 59 (c). Further, FIG. 60 schematically shows a transition between the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol in the “timer effect” in the third symbol display device 81 of the “time shortened state A” and the time-dependent change of the “timer effect”. 60 (a) is a diagram showing a state in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has become "3" while time has passed from the state of FIG. 59 (c). 60 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which only time has passed from the state of FIG. 60 (a), and FIG. 60 (c) shows a state in which time has elapsed from the state of FIG. 60 (a). 2 It is a figure which showed the state which the number of reserved balls of a special symbol became "4".

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "time reduction state A", when the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not reached the maximum value (that is, four). In addition, during the execution of the "timer effect", the "striking instruction effect" is executed according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the elapsed time of the "timer effect", and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is suspended. By encouraging the player to store the number of balls, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol can be stored up to the maximum value in the "time reduction state A", and the "seven consecutive acquisition effect" can be executed.

As shown in FIG. 59 (a), at the start of the "time reduction state A", the "timer effect" is started in the third symbol display device 81, and the display of the third symbol display device 81 in the "timer effect". A boy character symbol 81a that encourages the player to play a right-handed game is displayed on the left side of the area, and an arrow symbol 81b that suggests a right-handed game to the player is displayed in the center on the right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. In the arrow symbol 81b, the content of the message emitted by the boy character symbol 81a and corresponding to the above-mentioned "striking instruction effect" is displayed. Further, in the "timer effect", the remaining time display 81c indicating the remaining time of the "timer effect" is displayed at the lower right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and the left side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. At the bottom, a level meter symbol 81d indicating the remaining time of the "timer effect" is displayed. Further, in the "timer effect", the special figure 2 hold number display 81e indicating the number of hold balls of the change effect of the second special symbol is displayed on the upper right side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81.

In the state shown in FIG. 59 (a), a flame effect is displayed around the boy character symbol 81a, which is a "super-strong striking instruction effect (normal)", and "Aim to the right with all your might!" In the arrow symbol 81b! Is displayed, strongly urging the player to play right-handed. Then, the remaining time display 81c is displayed as "19:80", and the level meter symbol 81d is displayed in a display mode reduced by "0.2 seconds" (the white part increases from the left side), and the "timer effect" is displayed. The remaining time of "" is "19.8 seconds". Further, on the special figure 2 hold number display 81e, only the first round symbol among the first round symbol, the second round symbol, the third round symbol, and the fourth round symbol provided in order from the left side is displayed in red. , Indicates to the player that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is one.

Therefore, in FIG. 59 (a), the player is shown that the remaining time of the "timer effect" is "19.8 seconds" and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is only one. This is a state in which the player is strongly urged to perform a right-handed game and accumulate the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol by "super-strong hitting instruction production (normal)".

Next, the state shown in FIG. 59 (b) shows a state in which the "timer effect" has progressed by "5.19 seconds" from the state shown in FIG. 59 (a). In the state shown in FIG. 59 (b), the "super-strong striking instruction effect (normal)" in FIG. 59 (a) is changed to "super-strong striking instruction effect (special)", and the boy character symbol 81a is changed to "super-strong striking instruction effect (special)". "Hurry up!", Even more strongly urging the player to quickly accumulate the number of reserved balls for the second special symbol. Then, the remaining time display 81c is displayed as "14:61", and the level meter symbol 81d is displayed in a display mode reduced by "5.39 seconds" (white part increases from the left side), and "timer effect" is displayed. The remaining time of "" is "14.61 seconds", respectively. Further, on the special figure 2 hold number display 81e, as in FIG. 59 (a), only the first round symbol is displayed in red, indicating to the player that there is one hold ball number of the second special symbol. There is.

Therefore, in FIG. 59 (b), only the time progresses without increasing the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from the state of FIG. 59 (a), and the remaining time of the "timer effect" is "14.61 seconds". Therefore, the player is shown that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is only one, and the right-handed game is performed by the "super-strong hitting instruction production (special)" to hold the second special symbol. It is a state that further strongly urges the player to accumulate the number of balls.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 59 (c), the "timer effect" has progressed for "3.48 seconds" from the state shown in FIG. 59 (a), and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is two. Shows the state. In the state shown in FIG. 59 (c), the "super-strong striking instruction effect (normal)" in FIG. 59 (a) changes to the "strong striking instruction effect (normal)", and the area around the boy character symbol 81a is changed. Although the flame effect has been erased, the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol has not reached the maximum value yet, so the player is strongly urged to accumulate more reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol. ing. Then, the remaining time display 81c is displayed as "16:32", and the level meter symbol 81d is displayed in a display mode reduced by "3.68 seconds" (white part increases from the left side), and "timer effect" is displayed. The remaining time of "" is "16.32 seconds", respectively. Further, on the special figure 2 reserved number display 81e, the first round symbol and the second round symbol are displayed in red, indicating to the player that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is two.

Therefore, in FIG. 59 (c), the time progresses as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases by one from the state of FIG. 59 (a), and the remaining time of the "timer effect" is "16.32 seconds". Therefore, the player is shown the state in which two reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated, and the right-handed game is performed by the "strong hitting instruction effect (normal)" to perform the reserved ball number of the second special symbol. It is a state that strongly urges the player to save more.

Next, the state shown in FIG. 59 (d) shows a state in which the "timer effect" has progressed by "7.77 seconds" from the state shown in FIG. 59 (c). In the state shown in FIG. 59 (d), the "strong hitting instruction effect (normal)" in FIG. 59 (c) is changed to the "strong hitting instruction effect (special)", and the boy character symbol 81a is "hurried! ", And is urging the players to accumulate the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol as soon as possible. Then, the remaining time display 81c is displayed as "8:55", and the level meter symbol 81d is displayed in a display mode reduced by "11.45 seconds" (white part increases from the left side), and "timer effect" is displayed. The remaining time of "" is "8.55 seconds", respectively. Further, in the special figure 2 hold number display 81e, as in FIG. 59 (c), the first round symbol and the second round symbol are displayed in red, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is two. Shows to the person.

Therefore, in FIG. 59 (d), only the time progresses without increasing the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from the state of FIG. 59 (c), and the remaining time of the "timer effect" is "8.55 seconds". Therefore, the player is shown that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is only two, and the right-handed game is performed by the "strong hitting instruction production (special)" to hold the second special symbol. It is a state that further strongly urges the player to accumulate the number.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 60 (a), the "timer effect" has progressed for "3.3 seconds" from the state shown in FIG. 59 (c), and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is three. Shows the state. In the state shown in FIG. 60 (a), the “strong hitting instruction effect (normal)” in FIG. 59 (c) changes to the “medium hitting instruction effect (normal)”, and the flame around the boy character symbol 81a changes. Although the effect has been erased, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has not reached the maximum value yet, so the player is urged to accumulate one more reserved ball of the second special symbol. ing. Then, the remaining time display 81c is displayed as "13:02", and the level meter symbol 81d is displayed in a display mode reduced by "6.98 seconds" (white part increases from the left side), and "timer effect" is displayed. The remaining time of "" is "13.02 seconds", respectively. Further, on the special figure 2 reserved number display 81e, the first round symbol, the second round symbol, and the third round symbol are displayed in red, indicating to the player that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is three. ing.

Therefore, in FIG. 60 (a), the time progresses as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases by one from the state of FIG. 59 (c), and the remaining time of the "timer effect" is "13.02 seconds". Therefore, the player is shown that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is three, and the right-handed game is performed by the "medium hitting instruction effect (normal)" to perform the reserved ball number of the second special symbol. It is in a state of urging the player to save one more.

Next, the state shown in FIG. 60 (b) shows a state in which the "timer effect" has progressed by "9.75 seconds" from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a). In the state shown in FIG. 60 (b), the "middle striking instruction effect (normal)" in FIG. 60 (a) is changed to the "middle striking instruction effect (special)", and the boy character symbol 81a is "hurried! ", Strongly urging the player to accumulate one more reserved ball for the second special symbol. Then, the remaining time display 81c is displayed as "3:27", and the level meter symbol 81d is displayed in a display mode reduced by "16.73 seconds" (white part increases from the left side), and "timer effect" is displayed. The remaining time of "" is "3.27 seconds", respectively. Further, on the special figure 2 reserved number display 81e, the first round symbol, the second round symbol, and the third round symbol are displayed in red, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 3 as in FIG. 60 (a). It shows the player that there are individual.

Therefore, in FIG. 60 (b), only the time progresses without increasing the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol from the state of FIG. 60 (a), and the remaining time of the "timer effect" is "3.27 seconds". Therefore, the player is shown the state in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated three but not up to the maximum value (that is, four), and the right is given by the "middle hitting instruction effect (special)". It is a state in which the player is strongly urged to perform a striking game and accumulate one more reserved ball of the second special symbol.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 60 (c), the "timer effect" has progressed for "6.77 seconds" from the state shown in FIG. 60 (a), and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four (that is,). , Maximum value) is shown. In the state shown in FIG. 60 (c), the "medium striking instruction effect (normal)" in FIG. 60 (a) changes to the "weak striking instruction effect (normal)", and the flame around the boy character symbol 81a changes. The player is in a state where the effect is erased, suggests to the player that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has reached the maximum value, and the player no longer needs to accumulate the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. It is shown in. Then, the remaining time display 81c is displayed as "6:25", and the level meter symbol 81d is displayed in a display mode reduced by "13.75 seconds" (white part increases from the left side), and "timer effect" is displayed. The remaining time of "" is "6.25 seconds", respectively. Further, on the special figure 2 reserved number display 81e, the first round symbol, the second round symbol, the third round symbol and the fourth round symbol are displayed in red, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four. Is shown to the player.

Therefore, in FIG. 60 (c), the time progresses as the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol increases by one from the state of FIG. 60 (a), and the remaining time of the "timer effect" is "6.25 seconds". Therefore, the player is shown that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is four, and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol reaches the maximum value by the "weak hitting instruction effect (normal)". , It is a state indicating to the player that it is no longer necessary to perform a right-handed game.

In this way, in the "timer effect" in the "time reduction state A", the ball is directed to the player according to the remaining time of the "timer effect" and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. By urging the launch, the player can be urged to acquire the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state A", which is the most important as the game specification, and in the "time reduction state A". It is possible to easily impart the set "7 consecutive acquisition effects" to the player with the playability according to the game specifications.

Next, with reference to FIG. 61, the “triple acquisition challenge effect” and the “seven consecutive acquisition effect” executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the “time reduction state A” will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing the transition of the “triple acquisition challenge effect” in the third symbol display device 81 of the “time reduction state A”, and FIG. 61 (a) is a big hit in the “triple acquisition challenge effect”. Alternatively, it is a diagram showing a state when a small hit is won, and FIG. 61 (b) is a diagram showing a state when a big hit and a small hit are not won in the “triple acquisition challenge production”. FIG. 61 (c) is a diagram showing a successful production in the “triple acquisition challenge production” from the state of FIG. 61 (a), and FIG. 61 (d) is reserved from the “triple acquisition challenge production”. It is a figure which showed the success effect of "7 consecutive acquisition effect" based on winning a big hit or a small hit by the dynamic display of all the 2nd special symbols.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "time reduction state A", the time reduction end condition of the "time reduction function" is completed (that is, the dynamic display of the first special symbol is performed seven times, the second. The condition of either one of the dynamic display of the special symbol once, the number of small hits in the dynamic display of the first special symbol 5 times, or the number of small hits in the dynamic display of the second special symbol 1 time is satisfied. ), By winning a big hit or a small hit, it shifts to the "time reduction state B", and it is practically a big hit until the time reduction limit number of times (the number of times of granting the "time reduction function" is continuously 3 times) is reached. Alternatively, it is configured so that the state in which the small hit is guaranteed continues. That is, by winning the small hit (or big hit) in the dynamic display of the second special symbol (or the first special symbol) in the "time reduction state A", the corresponding small hit (or big hit) is included. A jackpot game (or jackpot) based on a total of three small hits (or jackpots) is continuously awarded. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "time reduction state A", a small hit (or a big hit) is generated in the dynamic display during execution before the time reduction end condition is satisfied. A small hit (or a small hit (or) is executed in the dynamic display that is executed before the time saving end condition of the "time reduction state A" is satisfied by executing the "triple acquisition challenge production" that can pre-read the occurrence of three big hit games. It is configured to determine whether or not a jackpot) occurs and to suggest to the player whether or not three jackpot games can be acquired.

In this "triple acquisition challenge production", a production (for example, a battle production) in which the main character symbol 81f and the enemy character symbol 81g confront each other is executed, and a special symbol is executed before the time saving end condition of the "time reduction state A" is satisfied. When a small hit or a big hit is won in the dynamic display of, the success pattern in which the main character symbol 81f wins the confrontation with the enemy character symbol 81g is displayed, while the movement of the special symbol in the "time reduction state A" is displayed. If the time saving end condition is satisfied without winning a small hit or a big hit in the target display, a failure pattern in which the main character symbol 81f is defeated by the enemy character symbol 81g is displayed.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the first second special symbol executed before the time saving end condition of the "time reduction state A" is satisfied, and , If all four reserved 2nd special symbols at that time generate big hits or small hits, the dynamic display of the 4th 2nd special symbols will result in small hits (or big hits). It is possible to shift to the "time reduction state B" and pre-read the occurrence of a total of seven big hits or small hits including two that have not been held yet. As a result, the pre-reading notice for each of the seven consecutive hits is executed, and it is possible to suggest to the player whether or not the seven jackpot games can be acquired.

In the state shown in FIG. 61 (a), in the dynamic display (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol) executed before the end of the time saving condition in the "triple acquisition challenge effect" of the "time reduction state A". By winning a small hit or a big hit, the success pattern of the "triple acquisition challenge production" is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 61A, as a result of the main character symbol 81f and the enemy character symbol 81g confronting each other, the main character symbol 81f has won the enemy character symbol 81g.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 61 (b), in the "triple acquisition challenge effect" of the "time reduction state A", the dynamic display executed before the end of the time saving condition (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol). ), The failure pattern of the "triple acquisition challenge production" is displayed because the small hit and the big hit were not won. In the state shown in FIG. 61B, as a result of the main character symbol 81f and the enemy character symbol 81g confronting each other, the main character symbol 81f is defeated by the enemy character symbol 81g.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 61 (c), three big hit games including a small hit or a big hit in the dynamic display being executed are developed from the success pattern of the “triple acquisition challenge production” in FIG. 61 (a). It shows a state in which the "triple acquisition effect" in which the triple acquisition display 81h suggesting that it can occur is being executed. In FIG. 61 (c), three “V” symbols indicating one big hit game are displayed as the triple acquisition display 81h, suggesting to the player that three big hit games will be generated from now on.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 61 (d), it is developed from the “triple acquisition effect” in FIG. 61 (c), and a small hit or a big hit in the dynamic display being executed and four are held at that time. It is suggested that seven jackpot games can occur, one is a small hit or a big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, and the other is a small hit or a big hit in the dynamic display of two second special symbols that have not been held yet. This indicates a state in which the "7-series acquisition effect" in which the 7-series acquisition display 81i is displayed is being executed. In FIG. 61 (d), seven large and small "V" symbols indicating one big hit game are displayed as the seven consecutive acquisition display 81i, and it is suggested to the player that seven big hit games will be generated from now on.

With this configuration, in the "time reduction state A", a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the special symbol before the time saving end condition is satisfied, and after the big hit game based on the big hit or the small hit. It is possible to shift the game state to the "time reduction state B" and to predict the occurrence of three jackpot games in advance. As a result, by executing the pre-reading notice for each of the three consecutive jackpots, it is possible to make the player recognize the state in which the addition of the game value by the continuous jackpot game is substantially guaranteed, thus creating a new game playability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the "time reduction state A", a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the special symbol before the time saving end condition is satisfied, and all four reserved second special symbols at that time are big hits. Or, when a small hit occurs, the 4th second special symbol is dynamically displayed and becomes a small hit (or a big hit), so that it shifts to the "time reduction state B", and two that have not been held yet. It is possible to pre-read the occurrence of a total of seven big hits or small hits including minutes. As a result, by executing the pre-reading notice for each of the seven consecutive balls, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game value is substantially guaranteed by the continuous jackpot game with the maximum number of reserved balls or more. It is possible to create new playability and improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIG. 62, the “special button effect” executed in the variation effect of the third symbol display device 81, the jackpot game, or the like will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram schematically showing the transition of the “special button effect” in the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 62 (a) is a diagram showing the “normal state” of the “special button effect”. FIG. 62 (b) is a diagram showing a state of change from the “normal state” of FIG. 62 (a) to the “first change state”, and FIG. 62 (c) is a diagram of FIG. 62 (b). It is a figure which showed the state which changed from "the first change state" to "the second change state".

In the state shown in FIG. 62A, the special button symbol 81j appearing in the “special button effect” is displayed in the “normal state”. In this "normal state", the frame button 22 remains as it is from the start of the "special button effect" (that is, "0 seconds") to the elapse of the first valid period (up to "5 seconds" in the first embodiment). It is displayed in the "normal state" which is a simulated display mode. At the upper part of the special button symbol 81j, a pressing suggestion display 81k indicating that the player presses the frame button 22 is displayed. In the "normal state" of the special button symbol 81j, the special button symbol is lit and displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, white or green) by an LED (not shown) or the like built in the frame button 22. The "normal state" of 81j is also displayed as if it is lit in the same display color as the frame button 22.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 62 (b), the special button symbol 81j appearing in the "special button effect" changes from the "normal state" to the "first change state" from the state shown in FIG. 62 (a). Indicates the displayed state. The "first change state" of the special button symbol 81j is a display mode in which the one-step display mode is changed from the above "normal state", and the frame button 22 is located at the first position from the arrangement position (that is, the upper plate 17). It is displayed in a display mode as if it protrudes upward (outside the housing of the upper plate 17) by a fixed amount (for example, 3 cm). Further, in the "first change state", there are more types of display colors of the frame button 22 than in the "normal state", and the jackpot or small hit reliability is increased according to the jackpot or small hit reliability in the variable effect being executed. It is configured to be able to change to a high degree display color (eg, white, green or red).

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 62 (c), the special button symbol 81j appearing in the "special button effect" changes from the "first change state" to the "second change state" from the state shown in FIG. 62 (b). Shows the displayed state. The "second change state" of the special button symbol 81j is a display mode in which the one-step display mode is changed from the above "first change state", and the frame button 22 is the third from the arrangement position (that is, the upper plate 17). It is displayed in a display mode as if it protrudes upward (outward direction of the housing of the upper plate 17) of a second predetermined amount (for example, 6 cm) that is larger than one predetermined amount. Further, in the "second change state" of the "special button effect", the display color of the frame button 22 is changed to the "normal state" and the "first change state" according to the reliability of the big hit or the small hit in the variable effect being executed. It is configured so that it can be changed to a display color (for example, white, green, red, or rainbow color) having more types and higher reliability of big hit or small hit.

With this configuration, in the "special button effect", when the special button symbol 81j is in the "normal state" or the "first change state", the player presses the frame button 22 to derive the effect result. , Select whether or not to wait for the change from the "normal state" to the "first change state" and wait for the frame button 22 to be pressed until the jackpot or small hit reliability is made easier to detect than the "normal state". Playability is created. Further, in the "special button effect", after changing from the "normal state" to the "first change state", the change is further waited from the "first change state" to the "second change state", and then the "second change state" is waited for. After the jackpot or small hit reliability is set to a state that is easier to detect than the "normal state" and the "first change state", the player presses the frame button 22 to derive the effect result. Can be selected. With this configuration, it makes sense for the player to select the timing at which the frame button 22 is pressed in the "special button effect" (creating a game property of waiting for the frame button 22 to be pressed). It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, while reducing the number of parts by eliminating the need for a mechanism for physically projecting the frame button 22 from the upper plate 17, the "first change state" ("second") of the special button symbol 81j in the "special button effect". By changing to (the same applies to the "changed state"), it is possible to perform an effect as if the frame button 22 was driven to project. Therefore, while reducing the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to execute various effects related to the frame button 22 and improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "time reduction state A", a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the special symbol before the time saving end condition is satisfied, and the big hit occurs. Alternatively, the game state after the big hit game based on the small hit can be shifted to the "time reduction state B", and the occurrence of substantially three big hit games can be pre-read and announced. As a result, by executing the pre-reading notice for each of the three consecutive jackpots, it is possible to make the player recognize the state in which the addition of the game value by the continuous jackpot game is substantially guaranteed, thus creating a new game playability. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the "time reduction state A", a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the special symbol before the time saving end condition is satisfied, and all four reserved second special symbols at that time are big hits. Or, when a small hit occurs, the 4th second special symbol is dynamically displayed and becomes a small hit (or a big hit), so that it shifts to the "time reduction state B", and two that have not been held yet. It is possible to pre-read the occurrence of a total of seven big hits or small hits including minutes. As a result, by executing the pre-reading notice for each of the seven consecutive balls, it is possible to make the player recognize that the game value is substantially guaranteed by the continuous jackpot game with the maximum number of reserved balls or more. It is possible to create new playability and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the "timer effect" in the "time reduction state A", the ball is fired to the player according to the remaining time of the "timer effect" and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. By prompting, the player can be prompted to acquire the number of pending dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state A", which is the most important game specification, and is set in the "time reduction state A". It is possible to easily give the player the playability according to the game specifications by providing the "7 consecutive acquisition effect".

Further, while reducing the number of parts by eliminating the need for a mechanism for physically projecting the frame button 22 from the upper plate 17, the special button symbol 81j in the "special button effect" is changed to the "first change state". It is possible to perform an effect as if the frame button 22 was driven to project. Therefore, while reducing the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to execute various effects related to the frame button 22 and improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the "special button effect", when the special button symbol 81j is in the "normal state", the player presses the frame button 22 to derive the effect result, or from the "normal state" to the "first change state". Whether the player presses the frame button 22 to derive the effect result after waiting for the change and setting the jackpot or small hit reliability to a state that is easier to detect than the "normal state" in the "first change state". , Can be selected. With this configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by giving the meaning of selecting the timing at which the player presses the frame button 22 in the "special button effect".

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "timer effect" in the "time reduction state A", the "timer effect" is performed at the timing when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the second reserved ball count command from the main control device 110. It is configured to execute the "striking instruction effect" according to the elapsed time of the second special symbol and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol.

In this case, if the ball does not win in the second starting port 71 and the second reserved ball number command is not output from the main control device 110, the content of the “striking instruction effect” does not change in the voice lamp control device 113. If no ball wins in the second starting port 71, the content of the "striking instruction effect" cannot be changed, and the player is strongly encouraged to play the right-handed game. It may not be possible to increase the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the progress of the "timer effect" are being executed during the execution of the "timer effect" instead of the timing when the second hold number command is received. The time is constantly discriminated, and the content of the "striking instruction effect" is changed according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the elapsed time of the "timer effect".

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same components and processes as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the command determination process (S1111) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the command determination process (S1111) in the second embodiment.

The command determination process (S1111) of the second embodiment is configured so that the hold confirmation process (see FIG. 54) is not performed at the timing when the second hold ball number command is received.

Specifically, when it is determined in the process of S1210 that the second reserved ball count command has been received (S1210: Yes), the second reserved ball count counter of the main controller 110 included in the second reserved ball count command is included. The value of 203b (see FIG. 5) (that is, the number of reserved balls for the fluctuation effect of the second special symbol held in the main control device 110) is extracted, and this is used as the sub-second reserved ball number counter of the voice lamp control device 113. It is stored in 223d (S1211). Then, each value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the small hit type counter CK, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 also included in the second reserved ball number command was updated in S1211. It is stored in the second hold information storage first to fourth areas of the second hold information storage area 223f indicated by the value of the sub second hold ball number counter 223d (S1212). Then, the command determination process (S1111) is terminated without performing the hold confirmation process (see FIG. 54), and the process returns to the main process (see FIG. 50).

Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the variation effect processing (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the variation effect processing (S1110) in the second embodiment.

In the variation effect processing (S1110) in the second embodiment, when the "timer effect" is executed after the setting process of the variation effect related to the first special symbol and the second special symbol is performed, the "timer effect" is performed. The time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319) for changing the "striking instruction effect" according to the execution time is performed.

In the variation effect processing of the second embodiment, when it is determined in the process of S1310 that the variation start flag 223b of the special figure 2 is not turned on (S1310: No), the special figure 1 stop type command for display is executed in the process of S1309. After setting, or after setting the special figure 2 stop type command for display in the processing of S1318, the time saving A variation effect processing for setting the content of the "striking instruction effect" during the execution of the "timer effect" is performed ( S1319), the variation effect processing (S1110) is terminated, and the process returns to the main processing (see FIG. 50).

Here, with reference to FIG. 65, a time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319), which is one process of the variation effect process (S1110) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 in the second embodiment.

Since the time saving A variation effect process (S1319) is performed in the variation effect process (see FIG. 64) that is periodically executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, the “timer effect” is being executed. The "timer effect" is executed according to the elapsed time of the "timer effect" and the number of hold balls of the second special symbol at that time, without triggering the reception of the second reserved ball number command. It becomes possible to do.

In the time reduction A variation effect setting process (S1319), first, it is determined whether or not the game state is the "time reduction state A" (S1341). As a result of the determination, if it is not in the "time reduction state A" (S1341: No), the time reduction A variation effect setting process (S1319) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 64).

On the other hand, in the process of S1341, when the game state is determined to be the "time reduction state A" (S1341: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the "timer instruction effect" in the "timer effect" is being executed. (S1342). As a result of the determination, if the "striking instruction effect" in the "timer effect" is not being executed (S1342: No), the time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319) is terminated and the variation effect process (see FIG. 64). Return to. On the other hand, if it is determined that the "striking instruction effect" in the "timer effect" is being executed (S1342: Yes), then the dynamic display of the second special symbol is suspended during the execution of the "timer effect". In order to execute the "striking instruction effect" that prompts the number of balls, first, whether or not the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is smaller than "2", that is, the movement of the second special symbol at that time. It is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in the target display is less than "2" (0 or 1) (S1343). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is smaller than "2" (S1343: Yes), then, in order to already execute the "super-strong hitting instruction effect". It is determined whether or not the super-strong hitting instruction command of is already set (S1344).

As a result of the determination in S1344, if the super-strong hitting instruction command has already been set (S1344: Yes), the time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 64). .. On the other hand, if the super-strong hitting instruction command has not been set (S1344: No), then it is determined whether or not "5 seconds" or more have passed since the running "timer effect" was started (S1345). ).

As a result of the determination in S1345, if "5 seconds" or more have not elapsed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1345: No), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Among them, a super-strong hitting instruction command (normal) is set to notify the player of the "super-strong hitting instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 59 (a)) that strongly urges the player to launch the ball (S1346). The time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 64).

As a result of the determination in S1345, if "5 seconds" or more have passed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1345: Yes), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Of these, the super-strong hitting method that notifies the player of the "super-strong hitting method instruction production (special)" (see Fig. 59 (b)) that urges the player to shoot the ball more strongly than the "super-strong hitting method instruction production (normal)". An instruction command (special) is set (S1347), the time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 64).

In the process of S1343, if it is determined that the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is not smaller than "2" (S1343: No), then the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is "3". It is determined whether or not the value is smaller than, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol at that time is "2" (2) (S1348). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is smaller than "3" (S1348: Yes), then, in order to already execute the "strong hitting instruction effect". It is determined whether or not the strong hitting instruction command has been set (S1349).

As a result of the determination in S1349, if the strong striking instruction command has already been set (S1349: Yes), the time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, if the strong hitting instruction command has not been set (S1349: No), then it is determined whether or not "10 seconds" or more have passed since the execution "timer effect" was started (S1350). ..

As a result of the determination in S1350, if "10 seconds" or more have not passed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1350: No), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Among them, a strong hitting instruction command (normal) for notifying the player of the "strong hitting instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 59 (c)) that strongly urges the player to launch the ball is set (S1351), and this time reduction A The variation effect setting process (S1319) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 64).

As a result of the determination in S1350, if "10 seconds" or more have passed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1350: Yes), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Of these, the slamming instruction command (see Fig. 59 (d)) that notifies the player of the slamming instruction effect (special) that urges the player to shoot the ball more strongly than the slamming instruction effect (normal). (Special) is set (S1352), the time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 64).

In the process of S1348, when it is determined that the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is not smaller than "3" (S1348: No), then the value of the sub second reserved ball counter 223d is "4". It is determined whether or not the value is smaller than, that is, whether or not the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol at that time is "3" (3) (S1353). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the value of the sub second reserved ball number counter 223d is smaller than "4" (S1353: Yes), then, in order to already execute the "intermediate striking instruction effect". It is determined whether or not the middle hitting instruction command has been set (S1354).

As a result of the determination in S1354, if the intermediate striking method instruction command has already been set (S1354: Yes), the time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 64). On the other hand, if the middle-strike instruction command has not been set (S1354: No), then it is determined whether or not "15 seconds" or more have passed since the running "timer effect" was started (S1355). ..

As a result of the determination in S1355, if "15 seconds" or more have not passed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1355: No), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Among them, a middle hitting instruction command (normal) for notifying the player of the "middle hitting instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 60 (a)) for prompting the player to launch the ball is set (S1356), and this time reduction A variation. The effect setting process (S1319) is finished, and the process returns to the variable effect process (see FIG. 64).

As a result of the determination of S1355, if "15 seconds" or more have passed since the execution of the "timer effect" was started (S1355: Yes), the display control device 114 is given a "striking instruction effect". Among them, the middle-hit instruction command (see FIG. 60 (b)) that notifies the player of the "middle-hit instruction effect (special)" (see FIG. 60 (b)) that more strongly urges the player to launch the ball than the "middle-hit instruction effect (normal)" (Special) is set (S1357), the time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 64).

In the process of S1353, when it is determined that the value of the sub-second reserved ball counter 223d is not smaller than "4" (S1353: No), that is, the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is If the maximum number of reserved balls is 4, then is the weak hitting instruction command set to notify the display control device 114 that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has already been stored up to the maximum value? Whether or not it is determined (S1358). As a result of the determination, if the weak striking instruction command has been set (S1358: Yes), the time saving A variation effect setting process (S1319) is terminated, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 64).

On the other hand, in the process of S1358, when it is determined that the weak hitting instruction command has not been set (S1358: No), the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol has reached the maximum value for the player. The weak striking instruction command (normal) for notifying the "weak striking instruction effect (normal)" (see FIG. 60 (c)) is set (S1359), and then the second special symbol in which four are stored is set. A 7-series effect command setting process is performed to determine whether or not a big hit or a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the 7-series effect to determine whether or not to execute the "7-series acquisition effect" (S1360). The process (S1319) is finished, and the process returns to the variation effect process (see FIG. 64).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the "timer effect" are performed during the execution of the "timer effect", not at the timing when the second hold number command is received. Is always determined, and the content of the "striking instruction effect" is changed according to the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol and the elapsed time of the "timer effect". As a result, the content of the "striking instruction effect" is changed to the elapsed time of the "timer effect" and the second special symbol without triggering the reception of the second reserved ball number command during the execution of the "timer effect". It is possible to change it according to the number of reserved balls, and it is possible to surely prompt the player to execute the right-handed game when the "timer effect" is executed.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can achieve the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a time saving end condition of the "time saving function", the "time saving function" is terminated when all the small hits in the dynamic display of the second special symbol are generated once. It is configured.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, in the "time reduction state B", the small hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is substantially guaranteed from the relationship between the number of time reductions given and the small hit probability. It is in a state. For this reason, the "time reduction state B" is a game in which the player simply shoots the ball in a right-handed game and wins a prize in the second starting port 71 until the player wins the small hit and the big hit game occurs. , The game becomes monotonous, and there is a risk that the player will be awakened.

On the other hand, when the time saving limit function is activated in the "time reduction state B", after the big hit game based on the small hit winning, the game shifts to the "normal game state B" and the pending second special symbol is dynamically displayed. If you do not win the small hit again, you will shift to the "normal game state A" and the "consecutive villa state" will end. Therefore, in the "time reduction state B" where the time saving limit is reached when the next small hit is won, how small is the reserved ball of the second special symbol held after the dynamic display of winning the small hit. It is structured so that whether or not to win a hit (big hit) is important.

Here, in the "time reduction state B" in which the time reduction limit is reached when the next small hit is won, there is a high possibility that the small hit will be won in the hold of a plurality of second special symbols by the hold look-ahead notice. To maintain the "time reduction state B" until it occurs, even if you win a small hit with the dynamic display of the second special symbol, you can play a game so that the ball does not pass to a specific area, so that the time reduction limit function Even if it shifts to "normal game state B" due to the activation of, it shifts to "time reduction state A" again due to the small hit of the second special symbol that is held, and continues the "consecutive villa state". Can be done. However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, if the number of small hits of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B" is performed once, the "time reduction function" is performed regardless of whether or not the pachinko machine has passed through the specific area. Since it ends, the above-mentioned playability has not been created.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the movement of the second special symbol as the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is performed according to the big hit type or the small hit type selected in the "time reduction state B". The number of small hits in the target display is configured to be different.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment or the second embodiment are used for the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. The description will be omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 66, the time saving end condition table 202n in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the time saving end condition table 202n stored in the ROM 202 of the third embodiment. The difference between the time reduction end condition table 202n of the third embodiment and the time reduction end condition table 202n of the first embodiment is selected in the "time reduction state A" or the "time reduction state B" according to the jackpot type or the small hit type. The point is that the number of "special figure 2 small hits" is changed from "1 time" to "3 times", "4 times" or "5 times".

As shown in FIG. 66, in the "time reduction states A and B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or When the small hit type "time reduction J", "time reduction K" or "time reduction H" is executed, "special figure 1 time reduction number" is "100 times", "special figure 2 time reduction number" is "100 times", " The "total time reduction number of special figures 1 and 2" is set to "100 times", the "special figure 1 small hit" is set to "5 times", and the "special figure 2 small hit" is set to "3 times".

Therefore, in the "time reduction state A / B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or the small hit type "time reduction" When "J", "Time saving K" or "Time saving H" is executed, the "Time saving function" given after the jackpot ends is that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times or the second special. Whether the dynamic display of the symbol is executed 100 times, the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total, or in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. The small winning opening unit 73 based on winning the small hit game is operated (opened) 5 times, or the small winning opening unit 73 based on winning the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is 3 The "time saving function" is configured to end when any one of the conditions is satisfied, that is, the operation (opening) is performed. Then, after the "time saving function" is completed, if the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol remains, the game shifts to the "normal game state B" again, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed. If the number of reserved balls does not remain, the game shifts to "normal game state A".

Therefore, in the "time reduction state A / B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or the small hit type "time reduction" The "time reduction state B" based on "J", "time reduction K" or "time reduction H" is a game state in which right-handed games are encouraged, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the first special symbol. Since the small hit probability of the second special symbol is 2715/10000, the second special symbol is executed before the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times. It is configured so that small hits are extremely easy to appear in the dynamic display of. As a result, while the small winning opening unit 73 based on the small hit winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is operating (opening), the ball is passed to a specific area to generate a big hit game, or the second special It is configured so that either one of the time saving end conditions based on the fact that the operation (opening) of the small winning opening unit 73 based on the small hit winning in the dynamic display of the symbol is executed three times is easily satisfied.

Next, in the "time reduction state B" when the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction F", "time reduction G" or "time reduction C", or the small hit type "time reduction L", "time reduction M" or "time reduction I" When is executed, the time saving limit function is activated, so "Special figure 1 time saving number" is "0 times", "Special figure 2 time saving number" is "0 times", "Special figure 1 and special figure 2 total time saving" The "number of times" is set to "0 times", the "special figure 1 small hit" is set to "5 times", and the "special figure 2 small hit" is set to "4 times".

Next, as shown in FIG. 66, in the "time reduction states A and B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot types "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", Alternatively, when the small hit type "time reduction N" or "time reduction O" is executed, "special figure 1 time reduction number" is "100 times", "special figure 2 time reduction number" is "100 times", "special figure 1". -The "total time reduction number of special figures 2" is set to "100 times", the "special figure 1 small hit" is set to "5 times", and the "special figure 2 small hit" is set to "4 times".

Therefore, in the "time reduction state A / B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or the small hit type "time reduction" When "N" or "time saving O" is executed, the "time saving function" given after the jackpot ends is that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. Is executed 100 times, or the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total, or the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. The small winning opening unit 73 is operated (opened) 5 times based on the above, or the small winning opening unit 73 based on winning the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is operated (opened) 4 times. The "time saving function" is configured to end when any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, after the "time saving function" is completed, if the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol remains, the game shifts to the "normal game state B" again, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed. If the number of reserved balls does not remain, the game shifts to "normal game state A".

Therefore, in the "time reduction state A / B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or the small hit type "time reduction" The "time reduction state B" based on "N" or "time reduction O" is a game state in which the right-handed game is encouraged, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is more than the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Since it is executed preferentially and the small hit probability of the second special symbol is 2715/10000, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed before the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times. It is configured so that small hits are extremely easy to appear. As a result, while the small winning opening unit 73 based on the small hit winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is operating (opening), the ball is passed to a specific area to generate a big hit game, or the second special It is configured so that either one of the time saving end conditions based on the fact that the operation (opening) of the small winning opening unit 73 based on the small hit winning in the dynamic display of the symbol is executed four times is easily satisfied.

Next, as shown in FIG. 66, in the "time reduction states A and B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot types "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", Alternatively, when the small hit type "time reduction P" or "time reduction Q" is executed, "special figure 1 time reduction number" is "100 times", "special figure 2 time reduction number" is "100 times", "special figure 1". -The "total time reduction number of special figures 2" is set to "100 times", the "special figure 1 small hit" is set to "5 times", and the "special figure 2 small hit" is set to "5 times".

Therefore, in the "time reduction state A / B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or the small hit type "time reduction" When "P" or "time saving Q" is executed, the "time saving function" given after the jackpot ends is that the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed 100 times or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. Is executed 100 times, or the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are executed 100 times in total, or the small hit game is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. The small winning opening unit 73 is operated (opened) 5 times based on the above, or the small winning opening unit 73 based on winning the small hit game in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is operated (opened) 5 times. The "time saving function" is configured to end when any one of the conditions is satisfied. Then, after the "time saving function" is completed, if the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol remains, the game shifts to the "normal game state B" again, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is displayed. If the number of reserved balls does not remain, the game shifts to "normal game state A".

Therefore, in the "time reduction state A / B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or the small hit type "time reduction" The "time reduction state B" based on "P" or "time reduction Q" is a game state in which the right-handed game is encouraged, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is more than the dynamic display of the first special symbol. Since it is executed preferentially and the small hit probability of the second special symbol is 2715/10000, the dynamic display of the second special symbol is performed before the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed 100 times. It is configured so that small hits are extremely easy to appear. As a result, while the small winning opening unit 73 based on the small hit winning in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is operating (opening), the ball is passed to a specific area to generate a big hit game, or the second special It is configured so that either one of the time saving end conditions based on the fact that the operation (opening) of the small winning opening unit 73 based on the small hit winning in the dynamic display of the symbol is executed five times is easily satisfied.

The small hit types "Time saving J", "Time saving K", "Time saving H", "Time saving N", "Time saving O", "Time saving P" and "Time saving Q" are the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is configured so that the type is displayed so as to be difficult to identify in (variable effect). With this configuration, it is difficult for the player to recognize the small hit type won in the "time reduction state B", and it is difficult for the player to detect the number of small hits under the time saving end condition by "special figure 2 small hit". can do.

In this way, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B", the time saving end condition based on the number of small hits of the second special symbol is made different according to the winning small hit type, so that the second special symbol can be displayed second. If a small hit is won in the dynamic display of a special symbol, there is a risk that the ball will pass through a specific area and a big hit game will be generated immediately, or the time saving end condition will be satisfied depending on the number of small hits, but it is intentionally specified. The "time reduction state B" is continued until a plurality of small hits occur in the dynamic display held during the "time reduction state B" without passing the ball through the region, and the "time reduction state B" is caused by the plurality of consecutive small hits. It is possible to create a playability in which the player selects either to continue the "continuous villa state", to enrich the variation of the game, and to improve the interest of the game.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68, the “V emission judgment effect” executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the “time reduction state B” in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a diagram schematically showing the transition of the “V emission judgment effect” at the time of the final consecutive villa in the “triple confirmation mode” in the third symbol display device 81 of the third embodiment, and is shown in FIG. 67 (a). ) Is a diagram showing a state in which "reach display" appears in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in a state where the hold look-ahead effect is not suggested at the time of the final consecutive villa in the "triple confirmation mode". FIG. 67 (b) is a diagram showing a state in which a small hit is won from the state of FIG. 67 (a) and suggests a right-handed game of whether or not to win a ball in a specific area. 67 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which a small hit is won in a state where a hold look-ahead effect is suggested, and a right-handed game is suggested as to whether or not to win a ball in a specific area. In FIG. 67 (d), from the state of FIG. 67 (b), although the ball was not won in the specific area without performing the right-handed game, the time saving end condition based on the number of small hits was not satisfied and the “time reduction” was shown. It is a figure which showed that "state" continued. Further, FIG. 68 is a diagram schematically showing the transition of the “V emission judgment effect” at the time of the final consecutive villa in the “triple confirmation mode” in the third symbol display device of the third embodiment, and is shown in FIG. 67 ( In the figure showing that the time saving end condition based on the number of small hits was satisfied and the "time shortening state" was completed because the ball was not won in the specific area without performing the right-handed game from the state of b). be.

First, in FIG. 67 (a), the time reduction limit function is activated by the final consecutive villa in the "triple confirmation mode" of the "time reduction state B", that is, the "time reduction function" given this time, and then When a small hit or a big hit is won, or when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the "time saving function" is not given, and the state in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed is shown. In FIG. 67 (a), the “reach display” by the “6” symbol appears in the central portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and extends to the left and right of the upper part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. A triple mode display 81 m indicating that the "time reduction state B" is displayed is displayed.

Further, on the lower right side of the triple mode display 81m, a remaining number display 81n indicating the remaining number of times until the time saving limit number is reached is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), "V × 1" is displayed, and when the next time saving function end condition is satisfied (for example, when the next big hit game occurs, or "Special Figure 2 small hit". When the set number of times is reached), it is suggested that the "time saving function" is not granted.

Further, on the lower left side of the triple mode display 81 m, a special figure 2 hold number display 81o in the triple mode indicating the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol in the "triple confirmation mode" is displayed. .. In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), the special figure 2 hold number display 81o in the triple mode has the first round symbol, the second round symbol, the third round symbol, and the fourth round symbol provided in order from the left side. All are displayed in red, indicating to the player that the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is 4 (that is, the maximum value).

In the state shown in FIG. 67 (a), the special figure 2 hold number display 81o in the triple mode is all displayed with a red circle symbol, and the hold look-ahead notice is not executed.

Next, in FIG. 67 (b), from the state of FIG. 67 (a), the “reach display” progresses, the small hit of the second special symbol is won, and the “V emission judgment effect” is started. ing. In the state of FIG. 67 (b), the player plays a right-handed game and the ball is passed through a specific area in the small winning opening unit 73 to be opened to generate a big hit game, or the player plays a right-handed game. With a right-pointing arrow symbol that suggests to the player whether to continue the "time reduction state B" by not generating the jackpot game without passing the ball through the specific area in the small winning opening unit 73 that is opened without doing it. The message "Right-handed and V prize !?" is displayed.

Next, in FIG. 67 (c), the "reach display" progresses, the small hit of the second special symbol is won, the "V emission judgment effect" is started, and the special mode is set. FIG. 2 In the hold number display 81o, the V display symbol is displayed third from the left, all the others are displayed as red circle symbols, and the hold look-ahead notice by the V display symbol is being executed. That is, it is suggested to the player that a small hit or a big hit may occur in the dynamic display of the third second special symbol that is held.

In this case, in the small hit game that is occurring, the big hit game is generated by passing the ball through a specific area in the small winning opening unit 73 that is opened, and then the time saving limit function is activated and the "normal game state" is activated. Even in the case of shifting to "B", the gaming state can be shifted to "time reduction state B" by being able to win a small hit or a big hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol held. Therefore, in the "time reduction state B", even if the player wins a small hit, the player does not dare to pass the ball to the specific area, and in the triple mode, the special figure 2 hold number display 81o is given a hold look-ahead notice. It is possible to select whether to continue the "time reduction state B" until the V display symbol appears.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, not only the "time reduction state B" but also the "time reduction state A", the "normal game state B", or the second special symbol held during the jackpot game. It is configured to pre-read and determine whether or not a small hit or a big hit occurs in the dynamic display of, and to suggest to the player with a reserved ball number symbol or the like (hereinafter, may be referred to as "V standby effect"). ing. Specifically, for example, in the "time reduction state A", after one ball enters the second starting port 71 and the dynamic display of the second special symbol based on the entry is started, the dynamic display is started. With four balls entering the second starting port 71 during the execution of the display and the number of reserved balls for the dynamic display of the second special symbol being accumulated, a small hit or a small hit or a small hit in the dynamic display during execution. If the player shifts to the "normal game state B" without winning the big hit, the small hit or the big hit is won in the reserved ball number symbol of the dynamic display of the second special symbol that was held in the "normal game state B". "V standby effect" that can display the reliability in one or more stages (for example, normal "white", reliability 10% "green", reliability 50% "red", reliability 100% "V", etc.) Change as the number of reserved balls Executed as a symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest to the player in advance a dynamic display in which a small hit or a big hit is won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game until the dynamic display is executed.

Further, in the "V standby effect", a changeable hold ball symbol (for example, a "?" Symbol) indicating whether or not to change is displayed, and one of the conditions (for example, when the effect change ("reach display" occurs) occurs. At the time of reach development, etc.), at the time result (for example, 10 seconds have passed since the start of fluctuation, etc.), the number of shot balls exceeds a predetermined number (for example, 30 balls are fired from the "?" Symbol display, etc.), or a predetermined winning opening Based on the establishment of a predetermined number of winnings (for example, 10 balls are entered in the second starting opening 71), the changeable reserved ball symbol is changed to the changed reserved ball number symbol. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the production, and when the number of balls to be launched and the number of winnings are changed, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be promoted and the profit of the amusement park can be contributed.

In the "V standby effect", when the time reduction limit is reached in the "time reduction state B", the frequency of the "V standby effect" is less than other times (that is, before the time reduction limit is reached), or the "V standby effect" is performed. It may be configured not to run. This is a situation in which it is substantially confirmed that the game state shifts from the "time reduction state B" to the "normal game state B" when the time reduction limit is reached, and the "normal time reduction state B" is "normal". If a small hit or a big hit in the "game state B" is suggested, a big hit or a small hit in the "normal game state B" can be expected (guaranteed) even though the time is shortened state A. turn into. As a result, even though the game state changes, it becomes possible to recognize the game state beyond the game state that shifts before the game state changes, which is too advantageous for the player. This is because it will be stored.

In addition, when the small winning opening unit 73 based on winning a small hit in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is opened and the specific area is opened, the player is urged to give a right-handed notification. , It is configured to execute a "right-handed instruction effect" that prompts the player to put the ball in a specific area where the ball can be entered. In the situation where the above-mentioned "V standby effect" is being executed, that is, when it is suggested that a small hit or a big hit occurs even in the dynamic display of the second special symbol on hold, the above The content of the "right-handed instruction effect" may be changed from the usual mode to encourage the player to perform the right-handed game more strongly. When the "V standby effect" is executed, at least the release of the specific area based on the small hit in the dynamic display during execution and the release of the specific area based on the small hit in the dynamic display corresponding to the "V standby effect". It is a situation where two or more big hit games can be expected, but if the ball is not entered during the opening of the specific area based on the previous small hit, the game state temporarily shifts to the "normal game state B" and then. , In the subsequent dynamic display, a small hit will be won in the "normal game state B". In the pachinko machine 10, the number of times (1 time or 100 times) of the "time saving function" given according to the gaming state is different, and it is assumed that the subsequent dynamic display has the "time saving function". The game value given to the player differs greatly depending on whether or not it is a small hit. For this reason, while the specific area based on the small hit of the dynamic display is being opened when the "V standby effect" is being executed, the "right-handed instruction effect" is changed more than usual to make the player stronger. By encouraging right-handed games, the game value is appropriately given based on the two jackpot games and the game value is given based on the "time saving function", without causing the player to suffer an unexpected disadvantage. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, if the "V standby effect" is not performed when the time reduction limit is reached, or if the execution frequency is configured to be lower than before the time reduction limit is reached, a small hit or a small hit or a small hit or a small hit or is performed in the held dynamic display. In a situation where a big hit can occur, in the small hit (that is, the previous dynamic display) when the time saving limit is reached, the "V standby effect" itself is not executed or difficult, but the above "right-handed instruction effect" The strong notification may be configured to be executed. With this configuration, it is easy to obtain the game value obtained by performing the "right-handed instruction effect" as an alternative effect of the "V standby effect" when the time saving limit is reached, and the player is appropriately given the game value. Because it can be done, it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, if the "V standby effect" is executed when the time reduction limit is reached, the "right-handed instruction effect" is also executed by strong notification, and the player suffers an unexpected disadvantage when the time reduction limit is reached. It is possible to improve the interest of the game without making it.

Next, in the state shown in FIG. 67 (d), when the ball is not passed to the specific region from the state of FIG. 67 (b), the time saving end condition based on the number of small hits of the second special symbol is not satisfied. It is a state indicating that the "time reduction state B" has continued.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 68, when the ball is not passed from the state of FIG. 67 (b) to the specific region, the time saving end condition based on the number of small hits of the second special symbol is satisfied, so that the “time This is a state indicating that the "shortened state B" has ended and the game has shifted to the "normal game state B". In this case, the player loses one big hit game based on the small hit winning.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, in the dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state B", the number of small hits of the second special symbol is increased according to the winning small hit type. By changing the time saving end condition based on, when a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol, the ball is passed to a specific area to immediately generate a big hit game, or the time saving end by the number of small hits Although there is a risk that the condition will be satisfied, the ball is not intentionally passed to a specific area, and the "time reduction state B" is reached until multiple small hits occur in the dynamic display held during the "time reduction state B". Create a playability in which the player chooses whether to continue the "consecutive villa state" by a plurality of consecutive small hits, enrich the variation of the game, and improve the interest of the game. Can be planned.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment can produce the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and the total number of fluctuations of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 given when the state shifts to the "time reduction state B". The time saving end condition of is set to 100 times.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the number of fluctuations of the first special symbol, the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol, and the number of fluctuations of the second special symbol and the special figures 1 and special figures, which are given when the state shifts to the "time reduction state B". 2. The time saving end condition of the total number of fluctuations is set to 65536 times, which is more than the number of times that can be executed when the pachinko machine 10 is played for one day.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the first to third embodiments are used for the same configurations and processes as the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments. The description will be omitted.

The time saving end condition table 202n in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 69. FIG. 69 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the time saving end condition table 202n stored in the ROM 202 of the fourth embodiment. The difference between the time reduction end condition table 202n of the fourth embodiment and the time reduction end condition table 202n of the first embodiment is selected in the "time reduction state A" or the "time reduction state B" according to the jackpot type or the small hit type. The point is that the number of times of "special figure 1 time reduction number", "special figure 2 time reduction number" and "total time reduction number" is changed to "65536 times" respectively.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the "time reduction states A and B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or When the small hit type "Time saving J", "Time saving K" or "Time saving H" is executed, "Special figure 1 time saving number" is "65536 times", "Special figure 2 time saving number" is "65536 times", " The "total time reduction number of special figures 1 and 2" is set to "65536 times", the "special figure 1 small hit" is set to "5 times", and the "special figure 2 small hit" is set to "1 time".

In the fourth embodiment, the special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, the special drawing 2 time saving counter 203n, and the total time saving counter 203o are each composed of 2 bytes, and the value can be counted from "0" to "65535". It is composed. In the "time reduction state A / B" before the time reduction limit is reached or after the time reduction limit is reached, the jackpot type "time reduction D", "time reduction E", "time reduction A" or "time reduction B", or the small hit type "time reduction J" , "Time reduction K" or "Time reduction H" is executed, the values of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203m, the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203n, and the total time reduction counter 203o are set to "65535", respectively, and the values of the first special symbol are set to "65535". Each time the dynamic display or the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed, the values of the corresponding special figure 1 time reduction counter 203m, special figure 2 time reduction counter 203n, and total time reduction counter 203o are subtracted by 1. It is composed of.

Here, for example, in a game hall with an average business time of 9 o'clock opening time and 23:00 closing time, a player plays a game in the game hall with one pachinko machine 10 from opening to closing. In that case, it is possible to play the game for up to 14 hours. Further, since the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are performed in "3 seconds" at the shortest, the number of times of the dynamic display of the special symbol performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall is , The maximum is 3600 seconds x 14/3 = 16800 rotations. Further, if the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are performed in "1 second" at the shortest, the maximum number of rotations is 50,400.

In addition, if the business hours of the day are from 0:00 to 24:00, it is possible to play the game for a maximum of 24 hours. Further, since the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol are performed in "3 seconds" at the shortest, the number of times of the dynamic display of the special symbol performed by the pachinko machine 10 in the game hall is , The maximum is 3600 seconds x 24/3 = 28800 rotations.

Therefore, the values set in the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203m, the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203n, and the total time reduction counter 203o in the "time reduction state B" can be completely consumed even when the pachinko machine 10 operates for one day in the game hall. Not the number of times. Therefore, when it is desired to enable the "time saving function" until the next big hit or small hit occurs, the special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, the special figure 2 time saving counter 203n and the total time saving counter 203o are set more than the maximum number of operations per day. By setting a large number of values, it is possible to realize the playability according to the game specifications.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to third embodiments can produce the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 70, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is configured to give a hold look-ahead notice when the time reduction limit number of times of the "V emission judgment effect" in the "time reduction state B" is reached.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the "special figure 2 number of small hits", which is one of the time reduction end conditions of the "time saving function", is set to at least twice or more for any big hit type or small hit type. It is configured to be. Then, when the time reduction limit number of times is reached, which is the final consecutive villa time of the "V emission judgment effect" in the "time reduction state B", the small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed. , When the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not reached the maximum value (that is, four), the player can see the balls at the timing when the small winning opening unit 73 and the specific area are opened. Executes a "launch standby instruction effect" that prompts the suspension of launch, and prevents the ball from passing through a specific area based on the small hit winning (hesitation, procrastination). On the other hand, when the time saving limit number of times is reached, which is the final consecutive villa of "V emission judgment production", a small hit is won in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, and the second special symbol When the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display has reached the maximum value, the "right-handed instruction effect" is executed at the timing when the small winning opening unit 73 and the specific area are opened.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the first to fourth embodiments are used for the same configuration and processing as the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. The description will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 70, the “V emission judgment effect” executed by the third symbol display device 81 in the “time reduction state B” in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram schematically showing the transition of the “V emission judgment effect” at the time of the final consecutive villa (when the time saving limit is reached) in the “triple confirmation mode” in the third symbol display device 81 of the fifth embodiment. Yes, FIG. 70A shows the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed in the situation where two reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated at the time of the final consecutive villa in the "triple confirmation mode". It is a figure which showed the state which "reach display" appeared, and FIG. 70 (b) is a "launch standby instruction" so as not to win a small hit from the state of FIG. FIG. 70 (c) is a diagram showing a state in which "directing" is being executed, and FIG. 70 (c) shows a situation in which four reserved balls of the second special symbol are accumulated at the time of the final consecutive villa in the "triple confirmation mode". It is a diagram showing the state in which the "reach display" appears in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed, and FIG. 70 (d) is a small hit from the state of FIG. 70 (c). It is a figure which showed the state which "right-handed instruction effect" is executed so that a ball is won a prize in a specific area.

First, in FIG. 70A, the time saving limit function is activated by the last consecutive villa in the "triple confirmation mode" of the "time saving state B", that is, the "time saving function" given this time, and then When a small hit or a big hit is won, or when the time saving end condition is satisfied, the "time saving function" is not given, and the state in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed is shown. In FIG. 70A, “reach display” by the “6” symbol appears in the central portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and extends to the left and right of the upper part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. A triple mode display 81 m indicating that the "time reduction state B" is displayed is displayed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed at the time of the final consecutive villa in the "triple confirmation mode", at the start of the fluctuation. When the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the game value given when the reach forming symbol appearing in the "reach display" is a small hit or a big hit such as an odd number symbol or a "7" symbol. Is configured to show identification information with a low game value, such as an even-numbered symbol, which is given in the case of a small hit or a big hit, without displaying high identification information. In particular, even when the game value given in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is high, it is configured to display the "reach display" by the identification information having a low game value. There is.

This is a situation in which the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol has not accumulated to the maximum value at the time of the final consecutive villa in the "triple confirmation mode", that is, when the time reduction limit is reached in the "time reduction state B". When the small hit or big hit is won and the time saving limit function is activated, the game state shifts to the "normal game state B", but the small hit or the big hit is won (pulled back) again in the "normal game state B". , It is configured to have a great influence on the number of consecutive villas depending on whether or not the game state is changed to the "time reduction state" again. However, if the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol has not accumulated to the maximum value when the time saving limit of the "time reduction state B" is reached, the pullback probability in the "normal game state B" is the maximum number of reserved balls. It is reduced by the amount that is less than the value (for example, 75% for 3 holds, 50% for 2 holds, 25% for 1 hold, 0% for 0 holds), which is disadvantageous to the player. I will let you. In this case, when the time saving limit is reached in the "time reduction state B", if the identification information having a high game value is displayed at the time of winning the small hit, the player feels that the game value obtained is high. , Even though the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is small, there is a possibility that a right-handed game is performed to encourage the ball to pass through a specific area.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed at the time of the final consecutive villa in the "triple confirmation mode", at the start of the fluctuation. When the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not the maximum value, the game value given when the reach forming symbol appearing in the "reach display" is a small hit or a big hit such as an odd number symbol or a "7" symbol The higher identification information is not displayed, and the identification information with a lower game value (in the fifth embodiment, the loss of "656"), such as an even numbered symbol, which is given in the case of a small hit or a big hit, is displayed. It is configured as follows. As a result, in the small hit when the time reduction limit is reached in the "time reduction state B", in the situation where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not accumulated up to the maximum value, the player can be assigned to the player depending on the type of reach forming symbol or small hit symbol. It is possible to urge the ball not to pass through the specific area, and when the time saving limit is reached and the game shifts to the "normal game state B", the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated up to the maximum value. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of no situation. As a result, it is possible to provide a comfortable game without inflicting a disadvantage on the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, on the lower right side of the triple mode display 81m, a remaining number display 81n indicating the remaining number of times until the time saving limit number is reached is displayed. In the state shown in FIG. 70A, "V × 1" is displayed, and when the next time saving function end condition is satisfied (for example, when the next big hit game occurs, or "Special Figure 2 small hit". When the set number of times is reached), it is suggested that the "time saving function" is not given.

Further, on the lower left side of the triple mode display 81 m, a special figure 2 hold number display 81o in the triple mode indicating the number of reserved balls for the variation effect of the second special symbol in the "triple confirmation mode" is displayed. .. In the state shown in FIG. 70A, the special figure 2 hold number display 81o in the triple mode has the first round symbol, the second round symbol, the third round symbol, and the fourth round symbol provided in order from the left side. Of these, the 1st and 2nd round symbols are displayed in red, while the 3rd and 4th round symbols are displayed in white, and the number of reserved balls of the 2nd special symbol is 2 (that is, the maximum). Shows to the player that there is (less than the value).

Therefore, if a small hit is won by the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed in the situation of FIG. 70 (b) and the ball is inserted while the specific area is opened based on the corresponding selection, the ball is entered. In the "normal game state B" after the jackpot game based on the above, the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is only two.

Next, FIG. 70 (b) shows a state in which "reach display" progresses from the state of FIG. 70 (a), a small hit of the second special symbol is won, and "V emission judgment effect" is started. ing. In the state of FIG. 70 (b), the message "Wait a minute!" And "Please stop firing." It is running. By recognizing this "launch stop instruction effect", the player can recognize that the right-handed game should not be stopped and the ball should not be passed through a specific area.

Further, in FIG. 70 (b), as a small hit winning symbol, "656", which is equivalent to a general reach loss, is displayed small in the lower left side of the display area. As a result, the player recognizes that the situation is not advantageous to him / her, enhances the effect of the "launch stop instruction effect", discourages the player from the right-handed game, and allows the ball to pass to a specific area. It can be stopped.

On the other hand, at the time of the final consecutive villa in the "triple confirmation mode" of the "time reduction state B" in FIG. 70 (c), that is, the time reduction function is activated by the "time reduction function" given this time, and then the next small If a hit or a big hit is won, or if the time saving end condition is satisfied, the "time saving function" is not given, and the state in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed is shown. In FIG. 70 (c), the “reach display” by the “7” symbol appears in the central portion of the display area of the third symbol display device 81, and extends to the left and right of the upper part of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. A triple mode display 81 m indicating that the "time reduction state B" is displayed is displayed.

Here, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, when a small hit occurs in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed at the time of the final consecutive villa in the "triple confirmation mode", at the time of the start of fluctuation. When the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is the maximum value, the reach forming symbol appearing in the "reach display" is given when a small hit or a big hit such as an odd number symbol or a "7" symbol is given. It is configured to reveal identification information with a high game value. In particular, when the game value given in the dynamic display of the second special symbol being executed is high, the "reach display" by the identification information (odd number symbol, "7" symbol, etc.) having a high game value is displayed. It is configured to be issued. As a result, when a small hit or a big hit is won in the "reach display", the player is urged without hesitation to perform a right-handed game while opening the specific area and pass the ball to the specific area. In the subsequent "normal game state B", the lottery of the second special symbol can be enjoyed for the maximum number of reserved balls, and the game can be executed according to the game specifications, which is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest of the game by providing a comfortable game without letting it go.

Next, FIG. 70 (d) shows a state in which "reach display" progresses from the state of FIG. 70 (c), a small hit of the second special symbol is won, and "V emission judgment effect" is started. ing. In the state of FIG. 70 (d), an arrow pattern indicating the right direction instructing the right-handed game is displayed and the message "Right-handed !!" is displayed so as to actively encourage the player to play the right-handed game. "Right-handed instruction effect" by display and voice output is being executed. By recognizing this "right-handed instruction effect", the player can recognize that the right-handed game is performed and the ball is passed through a specific area.

Further, in FIG. 70 (d), as a small hit winning symbol, "777", which suggests that the game value generally given is high, is displayed small in the lower left side of the display area. As a result, the player recognizes that a situation that is advantageous to him / herself may occur, enhances the effect of the "right-handed instruction effect", causes the player to actively perform the right-handed game, and balls to a specific area. Can promote the passage of.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, in the small hit when the time saving limit is reached in the "time reduction state B", the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not accumulated to the maximum value. , "Launch standby instruction effect", reach formation symbol, and small hit symbol can be used to encourage the player not to let the ball pass through a specific area. When the time reduction limit is reached, "normal game state B" In the case of shifting to "", it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is not accumulated up to the maximum value. As a result, it is possible to provide a comfortable game without inflicting a disadvantage on the player and improve the interest of the game. On the other hand, in the small hit when the time reduction limit is reached in the "time reduction state B", in the situation where the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is accumulated up to the maximum value, the "right-handed instruction effect", the reach formation symbol, and the small hit symbol Depending on the type of, it is possible to encourage the player to pass the ball to a specific area, and when the time saving limit is reached and the player shifts to the "normal game state B", the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol is reached. It is possible to promote the passage of the ball to a specific area in the situation where the value is accumulated up to the maximum value.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments can produce the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIG. 71, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, as a configuration of the ordinary electric service 72, the upper side of the second starting port 71 in the front view is closed in the protruding state of the infestation plate 72a, and the ball enters the second starting port 71. It is configured so that the ball can enter the second starting port 71 by opening the upper part of the front view of the second starting port 71 in the recessed state of the indentation plate 72a.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 is normally immersed in the surface of the game board 13, and the normal symbol is variably displayed to win the prize. When this happens, the appearance plate 72a is changed from the immersive state to the protruding state. In addition, when a winner is won in the variable display of the normal symbol, the protrusion period of 1 is changed according to the game state (in the fifth embodiment, the low probability state "0.1 seconds" and the high probability state "3 seconds"). Let me. Then, the second start port 71 is arranged at the point where the upper surface of the infestation plate 72a is rolled, and the second start is performed only when the infestation plate 72a maintains the protruding state for at least a predetermined period (for example, "2 seconds"). It is configured so that the ball can enter the mouth 71.

Hereinafter, the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fifth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the first to fifth embodiments are used for the same configurations and processes as the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fifth embodiments. The description will be omitted.

A sixth embodiment when the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. The difference between the gaming board 13 of the sixth embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the like is that the arrangement of the ordinary electric service 72 and the arrangement of the second starting port 71 are mainly different.

The ordinary electric service 72 of the sixth embodiment is arranged on the lower side (downstream side) of the front view of the small winning opening unit 73 and on the upper side (upstream side) of the front view of the variable winning device 65. Further, a second starting port 71 is arranged on the left side of the ordinary electric service 72 when viewed from the front. The projecting plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 is configured so that the ball can roll on the upper surface thereof in the protruding state, and the ball rolls from the right end (upstream side) to the left end (downstream side) of the projecting plate 72a in the protruding state. The haunting plate 72a is configured so that the time required for movement is about "2 seconds".

The main control device 110 normally keeps the appearance plate 72a of the ordinary electric service 72 in an immersive state, does not collide with the ball flowing down from the small winning opening unit 73 side, and flows down to the variable winning device 65 side downstream of the ball. Let me. Then, when the winner is won by the variable display of the normal symbol, the normal electric service solenoid (not shown) is driven for a predetermined time, and the appearance plate 72a of the normal electric service 72 is moved from the immersive state to the game board 13 for a predetermined time. The ball is driven to a protruding state protruding from the board surface, and the ball rolls on the upper surface from the right end to the left end of the protruding plate 72a while the protruding plate 72a is in the protruding state, so that the ball can flow into the second starting port 71. ing.

In the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the driving time of the normal electric service 72 when the winning is won by the variable display of the normal symbol differs depending on the game state, and the low probability state of the normal symbol (that is, the "normal game state"). ")") "0.1 seconds" x 1 time = total "0.1 seconds", and in the high probability state of a normal symbol (that is, "time reduction state"), "3 seconds" x 3 times = total "9 seconds" , Is set to. Therefore, even if a hit is won by the variable display of the normal symbol in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the protrusion time of the appearance plate 72a is "0.1 seconds" in total, so that the hit is won and the appearance appears. Even if the plate 72a is displaced in the protruding state, the ball cannot be guided to the second starting port 71 (difficultly). On the other hand, when the winning is won by the variable display of the normal symbol in the high probability state of the normal symbol, the protrusion time of 1 of the haunting plate 72a is "3 seconds" which is "2 seconds" or more, and the hit is achieved. It is configured so that the ball can be guided to the second starting port 71 while the winning and appearing plate 72a is displaced in the protruding state. As a result, even if the player wins the game with the variable display of the normal symbol, whether or not the ball can be won in the second starting port 71 depends on the game state, so that the game specifications can be met. It is possible to facilitate the realization of playability.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fifth embodiments can produce the same effect as the effect obtained by the configuration.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment is provided by adding a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another embodiment to the embodiment or exchanging a part or a plurality of parts of the structure of the embodiment with each other. The embodiment may be modified to form the configuration. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification example 1>
In the above embodiment, the probability variation function is provided only for the normal symbol, and the probability variation function is not provided for the special symbol. On the other hand, the special symbol and the normal symbol may be provided with the probability fluctuation function, respectively, or the special symbol may be provided with the probability fluctuation function, while the normal symbol may be configured not to be provided with the probability fluctuation function. It may be configured so that neither the symbol nor the ordinary symbol is provided with the probability fluctuation function. Further, when the special symbol is provided with the probability variation function, the probability variation function may be effectively set (so-called loop type) until the next big hit or small hit occurs, and the special symbol is set a predetermined number of times (for example, 100) after the big hit. The probability fluctuation function may be effectively set (so-called ST type) until it is executed. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification 2>
In the above embodiment, the end condition of the high probability state of the normal symbol is configured to be terminated by the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the winning of the next big hit, or the number of small hits. On the other hand, using a pachinko machine (so-called fall type) in which the high probability state of the normal symbol ends (so-called fall function) when a predetermined lottery result other than the jackpot is derived in the dynamic display of the special symbol. May be good. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

<Modification example 3>
In the above embodiment, the ordinary electric service 72 and the variable winning device 65 are configured to be opened based on the winning of the ordinary symbol or the special symbol. On the other hand, a pachinko machine equipped with a passage port for opening a movable accessory (so-called non-electric accessory) that closes another winning opening when the ball passes may be used.

<Modification example 4>
In the above embodiment, every time one type of number of times (that is, three times) is given to the player as the number of time saving limiters, a gaming state in which the "time saving function" is not given occurs after the next big hit. .. On the other hand, the number of time reduction limiters may be different depending on the type of big hit or the type of small hit that was won when entering the "renso" state. Specifically, for example, when the jackpot A is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the number of time saving limiters is configured to be 5, while the jackpot B in the dynamic display of the first special symbol. If the winner is awarded, the number of time saving limiters is set to 10 times. With this configuration, the number of time-saving limiters when entering the "renso" state can be made different, the variety of games can be enriched, and the interest of the game can be improved.

<Modification 5>
In the above embodiment, when a big hit or a small hit is won, if the time saving limit function is not activated, a gaming state in which the "time saving function" is given is generated after the end of the big hit. On the other hand, when a predetermined symbol other than the big hit or the small hit (for example, the time saving symbol) is derived in the dynamic display of the special symbol, the state transitions to the state where the "time saving function" is given without going through the big hit. It may be configured as follows. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of variations to which the "time saving function" is given and to improve the interest of the game.

<Modification 6>
In the above embodiment, if any of the big hits or small hits is won and the time saving limiter function is not activated, a gaming state in which the "time saving function" is given occurs after the end of the big hit. .. On the other hand, when the number of executions of the dynamic display of the special symbol after the end of the big hit or the end of the small hit is a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 times) without winning the big hit or the small hit, the big hit or the small hit. It may be configured so that the "time saving function" is given (so-called ceiling function) without going through a hit. In this case, the predetermined number of times may be individually counted by the total number of times the dynamic display of the first special symbol is executed and the number of times the total number of times the dynamic display of the second special symbol is executed. The predetermined number of times may be counted by adding up the cumulative number of times of the dynamic display and the total number of times of the dynamic display of the second special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be configured so that the predetermined number of times is different from each other. With this configuration, in the dynamic display of the special symbol after the big hit or the small hit, if the big hit or the small hit is not won for a long period of time, the winning assistance function is activated and the game is further played. It is possible to play a game while not reducing the number of balls held by the player. In addition, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by enriching the variations to which the "time saving function" is given.

<Modification 7>
In the above embodiment, the values of the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203m, the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203n, and the total time reduction counter 203o can be set to the maximum number of times of operation per day or more. On the other hand, the special figure 1 time saving flag, the special figure 2 time saving flag and the total time saving flag are provided, and when each flag is set to on, the "time saving function" is enabled and each flag is set to off. If so, the "time saving function" may be disabled (so-called time saving infinite function). With this configuration, when you want to enable the "time saving function" until the next big hit or small hit occurs, the "time saving function" is maintained in the effective state without counting the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Therefore, the processing load of the main control device 110 can be reduced.

<Modification 8>
In the above embodiment, a small hit is provided for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. On the other hand, a small hit may be provided only on the second special symbol and no small hit may be provided on the first special symbol, or a small hit may be provided only on the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used. It may be configured so that a small hit is not provided, or it may be configured so that a small hit is not provided for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

<Modification example 9>
In the above embodiment, the small hit probability of the first special symbol is low, and the small hit probability of the second special symbol is higher than that of the first special symbol. On the other hand, the small hit probability of the first special symbol may be configured to be higher than the small hit probability of the second special symbol, or the small hit probability of the first special symbol and the small hit probability of the second special symbol. May be configured to be equivalent.

<Modification example 10>
In the above embodiment, the normal electric service 72 that is displaced between the protruding state and the immersive state is used, and the gametability of the present invention is realized by changing the immersion timing and the immersion time of the ordinary electric service 72 in each gaming state. It is configured in. On the other hand, the gameability of the present invention may be realized by using a rotary blade member and changing the operation timing and operation time of the blade member in each gaming state. Specifically, for example, when the blade members are arranged on the left and right sides of the second starting port 71 and the blade members are in the non-operating state (for example, the upright state), the ball collides with the outside of the blade members (non-rolling side). Then, it is configured to flow down to the downstream side as it is. On the other hand, in the operating state in which the blade member is rotated (in a state of tilting 120 degrees to the right from the upright state), the ball collides with the inside of the blade member (rolling side), and the inside of the blade member is on the second starting port 71 side. It is configured to roll toward. With this configuration, the rotation mode of the blade member is easier to recognize whether or not the region in which the blade member itself operates is driven larger than the drive mode due to the appearance of the normal electric service 72. It is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize whether or not the player has won the prize with the variable display.

<Modification 11>
In the above embodiment, the ordinary electric service 72 that is displaced into the protruding state and the immersive state is used, and in the case of the protruding state of the ordinary electric service 72, the ball does not win the second starting port 71 and the ordinary electric service 72 is immersive. It is configured so that a ball can win a prize in the second starting port 71 when the state is reached. On the other hand, when the ordinary electric service 72 is immersed, the ball does not reach or guide the second starting port 71, and the ball reaches the second starting port 71 when the ordinary electric service 72 is in a protruding state. Alternatively, the ordinary electric service 72 may be configured to guide the user. With this configuration, even if the ordinary electric service 72 is driven for a short time (for example, 0.1 seconds), it is possible to make it difficult for the ball to reach the second starting port 71, and the second starting port 71 can be reached. In a gaming state in which the ball is not won (for example, during a big hit game), it is possible to suppress the winning of the second starting port 71.

<Modification example 12>
In the above embodiment, when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "normal game state", the game is configured to shift to the "time reduction state" with a probability of 50%. On the other hand, when a big hit is won in the dynamic display of the first special symbol in the "normal game state", the probability of shifting to the "time reduction state" is higher than 50% (for example, 100%). Alternatively, it may be configured to shift to the "time reduction state" with a probability of less than 50% (for example, 0%).

<Modification example 13>
In the above embodiment, the normal symbol is won at 1/100 in a low probability state, and the normal electric service 72 is configured to be movable. On the other hand, it may be configured so that the winning is not won in the low probability state of the normal symbol, and the winning is won only in the high probability state of the normal symbol (for example, 100% winning). With such a configuration, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from winning the second starting port 71 by moving the normal electric service 72 in a low probability state of the normal symbol. As a result, it is possible to surely realize the playability according to the game specifications.

<Modification 14>
In the above embodiment, when the "time saving function" is enabled, the probability of the normal symbol is increased, the variable display of the normal symbol is shortened, and the drive time of the ordinary electric service 72 is extended. ing. On the other hand, when the "time saving function" is enabled, only one or two functions of increasing the probability of the normal symbol, shortening the variable display of the normal symbol, or prolonging the driving time of the ordinary electric service 72 are performed. It may be configured to be enabled.

<Modification 15>
In the above embodiment, at the end of the jackpot game, the time reduction limit number is added, and the time reduction flag 203j, the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203m, the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203n, and the total time reduction counter 203o are added according to the added time reduction limit number of times. It is configured to set the value of. On the other hand, at the end of the jackpot game, the values of the time reduction flag 203j, the special figure 1 time reduction counter 203m, the special figure 2 time reduction counter 203n, and the total time reduction counter 203o are set first, and then the time reduction limit number is added. , The time saving flag 203j, the special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, the special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, and the total time saving counter 203o are set (for example, cleared, initialized, or turned off) according to the added time saving limit number of times. You may. With this configuration, the processing at the end of the jackpot game can be standardized regardless of the number of time reduction limits, and when developing other models with different game specifications (for example, without the time reduction limit function). Development man-hours can be reduced.

<Modification 16>
In the above embodiment, the opening mode of the small winning opening unit 73 and the specific area based on the small hit of the second special symbol is changed from the opening mode of the small winning opening unit 73 and the specific area based on the small hit of the first special symbol. It is configured to be an open mode (that is, to give a "time saving function") that is advantageous to the person. On the other hand, the opening mode of the small winning opening unit 73 and the specific area based on the small hit of the first special symbol is changed from the opening mode of the small winning opening unit 73 and the specific area based on the small hit of the second special symbol. It may be configured to be an opening mode that is advantageous to the user.

<Modification example 17>
In the above embodiment, the small winning opening unit 73 common to the small hit of the first special symbol and the small hit of the second special symbol is opened. On the other hand, the small hit of the first special symbol and the small hit of the second special symbol have different winning openings (for example, a small winning opening unit for special drawing 1, a small winning opening unit for special drawing 2, or a variable winning device. 65) may be configured to be open. In this case, by providing a specific area only in the predetermined winning opening and not providing a specific area in the other winning openings, the "time saving function" is generated only in the small hit of the special symbol opened by the predetermined winning opening. It becomes possible to realize the playability according to the game specifications.

<Modification 18>
In the above embodiment, the variable winning device 65 of 1 is configured to be opened in the jackpot game. On the other hand, a plurality of winning openings that can be opened in the jackpot game may be provided, and the plurality of winning openings may be opened according to the jackpot type or the small hit type.

<Modification 19>
In the above embodiment, in the game area on the right side of the front view of the game board 13, the through gate 67, the small winning opening unit 73, the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting opening 71), and the variable winning opening are in this order from the upstream side in the flow direction of the ball. It is arranged so as to become the device 65. In particular, the small winning opening unit 73 having a specific area where a big hit game can be generated by passing a ball is arranged on the most upstream side, and the small winning opening unit 73 is opened by opening and closing the other winning devices 72 and 65. It is configured so that the entry of the ball is not obstructed inside. On the other hand, the through gate 67, the small winning opening unit 73, the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting opening 71), and the variable winning device 65 may be arranged in a different order. Specifically, for example, the through gate 67, the small winning opening unit 73, the variable winning device 65, and the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting opening 71) are configured in this order from the upstream side in the flow direction of the ball. Alternatively, the through gate 67, the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting port 71), the small winning opening unit 73, and the variable winning device 65 may be configured, or the through gate 67 and the ordinary electric service 72. (2nd starting port 71), variable winning device 65, small winning opening unit 73, or through gate 67, variable winning device 65, small winning opening unit 73, ordinary electric service 72 ( The second starting port 71) may be configured, or the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting port 71), and the small winning opening unit 73. Alternatively, the through gate 67, the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting port 71), the variable winning device 65, and the small winning opening unit 73 may be configured, or the through gate 67, the ordinary electric power. The combination 72 (second starting port 71), the small winning opening unit 73, and the variable winning device 65 may be configured. Further, the small winning opening unit 73, the through gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting opening 71) may be configured in this order from the upstream side in the flow direction of the ball. The winning opening unit 73, the through gate 67, the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting port 71), and the variable winning device 65 may be configured, or the small winning port unit 73, the ordinary electric function 72 (second starting port 71). The starting port 71), the through gate 67, and the variable winning device 65 may be configured, or the small winning opening unit 73, the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting port 71), the variable winning device 65, and the through gate. It may be configured to be 67, or it may be configured to be a small winning opening unit 73, a variable winning opening device 65, a normal electric service 72 (second starting port 71), and a through gate 67. , The small winning opening unit 73, the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting opening 71) may be configured. Further, the variable winning device 65, the small winning opening unit 73, the through gate 67, and the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting opening 71) may be configured in this order from the upstream side in the flow direction of the ball, or may be variable. The winning device 65, the small winning opening unit 73, the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting opening 71), and the through gate 67 may be configured, or the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the small winning opening unit. 73, ordinary electric service 72 (second starting port 71) may be configured, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, ordinary electric service 72 (second starting port 71), small winning port unit. 73, or a variable winning device 65, a normal electric service 72 (second starting port 71), a through gate 67, and a small winning opening unit 73. , The variable winning device 65, the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting port 71), the small winning opening unit 73, and the through gate 67 may be configured. Further, the normal electric service 72 (second starting port 71), the variable winning device 65, the small winning opening unit 73, and the through gate 67 may be configured in this order from the upstream side in the flow direction of the ball. The electric service 72 (second starting port 71), the variable winning device 65, the through gate 67, and the small winning port unit 73 may be configured, or the normal electric service 72 (second starting port 71), through. The gate 67, the variable winning device 65, and the small winning opening unit 73 may be configured, or the ordinary electric service 72 (second starting port 71), the through gate 67, the small winning opening unit 73, and the variable winning device. It may be configured to be 65, or it may be configured to be a normal electric service 72 (second starting port 71), a small winning opening unit 73, a through gate 67, and a variable winning device 65. , Ordinary electric service 72 (second starting port 71), small winning opening unit 73, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, and so on. In this way, for each game state (“time reduction state”, during big hit game, during small hit game), the winning device that is desired to be won as a game specification and the winning device that is not desired to be won are appropriately selected and arranged. Therefore, it is possible to realize the game according to the game specifications, and it is possible to suppress the winning of the winning device which is not assumed as the game specifications.

<Modification example 20>
In the above embodiment, a so-called time saving limiter function is provided in which a jackpot type in which the "time saving function" does not occur is selected for each predetermined number of times the "time saving function" is given. On the other hand, a so-called probability variation limiter function may be provided in which a jackpot type in which a high probability state of a special symbol does not occur is selected for each predetermined number of jackpots.

<Modification 21>
In the above embodiment, the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is configured to be determined when the dynamic display of the special symbol is stopped. On the other hand, the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" is set at the start of the dynamic display of the special symbol, during the dynamic display of the special symbol (for example, after a predetermined period has passed from the start of the fluctuation), and the start of the small hit winning fluctuation. A time, a determination may be made at the start of a big hit game in the middle of a small hit winning fluctuation (for example, after a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation), and the "time saving function" may be terminated based on the determination result. Further, the time saving end condition of the "time saving function" may be set when the fluctuation confirmation of the dynamic display of the special symbol is established, that is, when the measurement of the confirmation time of the dynamic display is started. Specifically, when the entire dynamic display of the special symbol is composed of the "symbol fluctuation time" and the "fixed time", the time reduction based on the number of times the special symbol is dynamically displayed at the start of the "fixed time" is shortened. It is configured so that the end condition is satisfied. For example, when the "special figure 2 time reduction number of times" is set to 1 in the "time reduction state A" and the total fluctuation time of the "special variation 1" effect mode is "60 seconds", the "design" The "variation time" is set to "35 seconds" and the "fixed time" is set to "25 seconds". Then, the variable display time of the normal symbol is "3 seconds" at the low probability and "0.1 seconds" at the high probability, and the total opening time based on one hit of the normal electric service 72 is low probability. When the time is "0.1 seconds" and the high probability is "10 seconds", at the start of the "fixed time" (that is, at the end of the "symbol fluctuation time"), "1 of the special figure 2 time reduction number" It is configured so that the "time saving function" is terminated by determining that the "time" has been established. With this configuration, until the dynamic display of 1 in the "special variation 1" effect mode is completed (that is, "60 seconds" after the start of the variation), even if the normal symbol is displayed before the "fixed time". Even if the number of reserved balls in the variable display exists at the maximum value (that is, 4) and immediately after the winning in the variable display of the normal symbol immediately before the start of the "fixed time", the running normal electric power Total opening time of the combination 72 "10 seconds" + Hold at low probability Variable display time of the first normal symbol "3 seconds" + Opening time of the ordinary electric role 72 at low probability "0.1 seconds" + Low Hold for probability 2nd normal symbol variable display time "3 seconds" + Open time for normal electric service 72 at low probability "0.1 seconds" + Hold for low probability 3rd normal symbol variable Display time "3 seconds" + Opening time of normal electric service 72 at low probability "0.1 seconds" + Hold at low probability 4th normal symbol variable display time "3 seconds" + Normal at low probability The opening time of the electric service 72 is "0.1 seconds" = "22.4 seconds", and all the variable displays of the normal symbols stored in a time shorter than the "fixed time" can be digested. As a result, at the end of the first dynamic display of the second special symbol in the "time reduction state A", the situation where the variable display of the normal symbol is stored is reduced or lost, and the small hit probability is high as a game specification. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of winning a prize in the second starting port 71 (which has a high game value). With this configuration, in the "time reduction state A", the number of winnings to the second starting port 71, which is set to be advantageous for the player, is dynamically displayed once for the second special symbol being executed + It can be set to only 5 times in total, 4 times of dynamic display of the 2nd special symbol that can be held, and the number of prizes (that is, 6 or more) to the 2nd starting port 71 that exceeds the game specifications is suppressed, and the game It is possible to realize the playability according to the specifications. By adopting the configuration of the ordinary electric service 72 of the modified example 11, it is possible to make it more difficult for the ball to win the second starting port 71 at a low probability of the ordinary symbol.

<Modification 22>
In the above embodiment, one type of variable display time of the normal symbol is provided according to the game state. On the other hand, the variable display time of the normal symbol may be configured to be selected by lottery from a plurality of types of variable display times according to the game state. Specifically, in the "normal game state", the variable display time of the normal symbol is determined by lottery from "1 second", "3 seconds", "5 seconds", "10 seconds" or "30 seconds". do. With this configuration, in the "normal game state" where the right-handed game is not encouraged, the right-handed game is performed, the ball is passed through the through gate 67, and the normal symbol is variably displayed, depending on the derivation timing. Even if the ball is fired at the ordinary electric service 72 that can be opened, the winning of the second starting port 71 can be suppressed by having a plurality of opening timings of the second starting port 71.

<Modification example 23>
In the above embodiment, the "timer effect""striking instruction effect" is configured to change according to the elapsed time from the start of the "timer effect" and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. There is. On the other hand, the "striking instruction effect" of the "timer effect" may be executed so as to change only depending on the elapsed time from the start of the "timer effect".

<Modification 24>
In the above embodiment, the "timer effect""striking instruction effect" is configured to change according to the elapsed time from the start of the "timer effect" and the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol. There is. On the other hand, the "timer effect""striking instruction effect" may be executed so as to change only depending on the number of reserved balls of the second special symbol.

<Modification 25>
In the above embodiment, the transition of the time saving limit number of times (the limit number of times and the time when the limit is reached) is suggested to the player (that is, the remaining number of jackpot games that can even be granted is suggested). Instead of this, it may be configured so as not to suggest the time saving limit number to the player.

<Modification 26>
In the above embodiment, a time saving limiter function is provided, and a gaming state in which the "time saving function" is not given appears according to the number of times the "time saving function" is given at the time of "ream villa". On the other hand, the time since the occurrence of the "ream villa" state is measured, and the staying time in the gaming state and / and the jackpot is determined based on the number of jackpots or the number of times the "time saving function" is given according to the measurement time. It may be configured to increase. Specifically, the timer is started when the player enters the "ream villa" state, and when the timer is less than or equal to a predetermined number of times (for example, one hour), the number of big hits or the number of times the "time saving function" is given is a predetermined number (for example). For example, when it reaches 7 times), it is configured to increase the staying time at the jackpot and / and the jackpot. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value during the "renso" from occurring in a short time.

<Modification 27>
In the above embodiment, a gaming state in which the "time saving function" is not given can occur depending on the number of times the "time saving function" is given in the "continuous villa" state. On the other hand, the cumulative number of times of execution of the dynamic display of the special symbol in the state where the "time saving function" is given in the "renso" state is counted, and the dynamic display of the special symbol is performed according to the cumulative number of times. It may be configured to change (is likely to increase) the fluctuation time of. Specifically, for example, when the cumulative number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed reaches 100 after entering the "renso" state, the fluctuation pattern table of the fluctuation time of the dynamic display up to that point. When the variation pattern table 202f, which has a variation time longer than 202f, is changed to the variation pattern table 202f, and the cumulative execution time of the dynamic display of the special symbol after entering the "renso" state reaches 200 times, it is determined. The variation pattern table 202f is changed to a variation pattern table 202f in which a longer variation time than the variation pattern table 202f used up to is easily selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the excessive addition of game value during the "renso" from occurring in a short time.

<Modification 28>
In the above embodiment, when the "time saving function" is given, the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times in the "time reduction state", 160 times in the "probability fluctuation state" and the like. It is configured to terminate the "time saving function" when it is executed. On the other hand, depending on the number of times the dynamic display of the special symbol is executed, the "time saving function" may not be terminated.

<Modification 29>
In the above embodiment, the variation effect is controlled by the so-called special figure 2 priority variation in which the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation effect of the first special symbol. On the other hand, it may be configured to control the variation effect by the so-called variation in the winning order, which executes the variation effect in the order of winning, or the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the dynamic display of the second special symbol. May be configured to be executable in parallel.

In the above embodiment, in the "time reduction state" of the right-handed game, in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, the effect common to the case where the loss result is derived and the case where the small hit game is derived ( It is configured so that the same fluctuation effect of fluctuation time, etc.) is executed. Instead of this, in the "time reduction state" of the right-handed game, when a loss result with a low derivation probability is derived in the dynamic display of the first special symbol, a small hit game with a high derivation probability is derived. A different effect may be executed, and the game value given to the player may be different based on the execution result.

In the above embodiment, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is changed according to the number of balls for which the dynamic display of the first special symbol is held, and the dynamic display of the second special symbol is held. It is configured so that the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the second special symbol changes according to the number of balls. In other words, the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol affects only the dynamic display of the first special symbol, and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol is the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is configured to affect only. Alternatively, the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of one special symbol may be configured to affect the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the other special symbol. Specifically, the fluctuation time of the dynamic display of the first special symbol is set to the total number of reserved balls of the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol. It is configured to change accordingly. With this configuration, a peculiar fluctuation time can be selected in a state where the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the number of reserved balls in the dynamic display of the second special symbol are mixed. By configuring it, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the probability setting value can be changed in 6 steps of "1" to "6", and the jackpot probability and / or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed, but the probability setting value can be changed. Is not limited to 6 stages, and may be changed to any stage.

In the above embodiment, the case where the jackpot probability is changed by changing the probability setting value has been described, but the hit probability of a normal symbol or the winning probability of a small hit may be changed.

In addition, when it is determined in the startup process that the probability setting value is not within the normal range, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") is set from the range of "1" to "6". It may be forcibly set as a value. If it is determined that the probability set value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during the timer interrupt process), it is better not to forcibly set the probability set value to a specific probability set value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to the sudden change in the jackpot probability during the game.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal, it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the setting change process is forcibly executed. Then, the hall personnel, etc. are encouraged to change the probability setting value, the hall personnel, etc. are urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, or a specific probability within the normal range as the probability setting value. The set value may be forcibly set.

In the above embodiment, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included from the calculation of the RAM determination value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 503 or by turning on the setting change switch. As described above, this may be performed with the setting key 501. Specifically, the setting key 501 can be rotated from the on state to the setting change position provided in the direction opposite to the off side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the setting key 501 is automatically turned on. The setting key 501 is urged to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the on state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode", the probability setting value is determined by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 503. Although the case has been described, it may be possible to perform this by operating a switch provided separately, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the "setting change mode", and is provided so as to project from the main board through the hole provided in the board box 100. Even if the board box 100 is not opened, it may be operated by a person involved in the hall or the like. This also makes it possible to easily determine the probability set value.

In the above embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the "setting change mode" or the "setting confirmation mode" when the power is turned on, the start-up mode is set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Was. On the other hand, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an indispensable condition, and the start-up mode may be set according to the detection mode of the RAM erase switch 503 and the setting key 501. Further, the hall may be configured to be able to select whether or not the opening of the inner frame 12 is a condition for changing the setting or confirming the setting.

In each of the above embodiments, the RAM erase switch 503 is mounted on the main control device 110. On the other hand, the RAM erasing switch 503 may be mounted on the power supply device 115 or the payout control device 111.

In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and the like can be changed by using the setting key 501. On the other hand, the setting key 501 is used to drive the number of prize balls (for example, change from 3 to 5) to be paid out when one prize is won, and the movable accessory that assists the prize in the prize opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), drive width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or member that affects the flow mode of the ball (for example, a stage or crune where the ball can roll) It is possible to change the settings related to the degree of advantage to the player, such as the tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the tilt mode of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). It may be configured.

In each of the above embodiments, the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back surface side of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the lateral direction (left direction or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the diagonal direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. You may.

In the above embodiment, the big hit random values, the small hit random values, and the lost random values are set as continuous values, and whether or not they are big hits or whether or not they are small hits is range-determined (for example, "0" or more). It was configured to be possible (whether or not it was "49" or less), and was configured to reduce the control load of the main control device 110. On the other hand, each random number value to which the game value is given (that is, a jackpot random number value and a small hit random number value) may be arranged so as to be dispersed (dissipated) instead of being arranged continuously. Specifically, for example, in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 updated by "0 to 999", the jackpot random number value is set to "7,341,555,777,831" and the small hit random number value is set to "77,175". , 223, 315, 415, 526, 634, 717, 845 ".

Here, if a value that becomes a jackpot random number value (for example, a jackpot if it is "0 to 50" in the low probability state and the high probability state) exists continuously regardless of the situation of the pachinko machine 10, the value is that. There is a possibility that the value can be predicted from the outside, and there is a high possibility that a jackpot will be illegally assigned. Therefore, by configuring as in the above-described modification, it is possible to make it difficult to predict each random value that gives the game value from the outside, enhance the effect of suppressing fraud, and improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10.

Further, in the above-described modification, the jackpot random number value for the low-probability state and the jackpot random number value for the high-probability state defined (set) in the jackpot random number table 202a are not duplicated. The jackpot random number value may be set. By configuring in this way, the value of the random number that becomes the jackpot can be changed according to the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state or the low probability state). Can be made difficult to predict, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type random number C2 are updated by software processing such as timer interrupt processing (so-called soft random number). On the other hand, the jackpot random number counter C1 or the like may be updated by a random number generation IC whose update cycle is faster than the soft random number (so-called hard random number). With such a configuration, it is difficult to grasp the random number value being updated from the outside, and the security performance can be improved.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is configured to increase evenly as the set value increases. On the other hand, each time the set value increases, the jackpot random number value (or small hit random number value) may be increased unevenly or at a predetermined rate. Specifically, for example, the jackpot random number value is increased by "2" for the set values "1" to "3", while the jackpot random number value is increased to "5" for the set values "4" to "6". Increase in increments. With this configuration, the game value that can be given by the setting difference changes greatly, and it is possible to provide a game with intonation (sharpness) due to the setting difference, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the corresponding combination in the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed for each set value. On the other hand, the jackpot type corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 or the jackpot type counter (not shown) that determines the content of the jackpot is changed for each set value, and the selection ratio of the jackpot type or the jackpot type is changed. It may be configured so that a setting difference occurs due to the change.

In the above embodiment, the random number value that gives the game value (that is, the jackpot random number value) is changed according to the setting change, and the changed amount is compensated from the random number value that does not give the game value (that is, the lost random number value). It was configured like this. On the other hand, when a random number value (for example, a jackpot random number value) that gives a game value is changed due to a setting change, the changed amount is used as a random number value (for example, a small hit random number value) that gives another game value. ) May be supplemented. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a difference in the game value that can be given for each setting, provide a game with intonation (sharpness) for each setting, and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be a sequence of "big hit random number value range", "missing random number value range", and "small hit random number value range". Was. On the other hand, in the jackpot random number table 202a, "the range of the jackpot random number value", "the range of the small hit random number value", "the range of the jackpot random number value (hereinafter referred to as" the range of the re-big hit random number value ")", " Each random number value may be defined (set) so as to be in the sequence of "range of lost random number values". Here, as the "range of the re-big hit random value", the increase in the big hit random value due to the setting change is configured to correspond. With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and as the setting is changed. The range of random numbers that do not change (that is, big hit random values and small hit random values that do not change even if the settings are changed) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the hit / fail judgment control program, the basic hit / fail judgment of the fixed random number value is standardized for all the set values, and the increase in the jackpot random number value due to the setting change is additionally added according to the set value. It is possible to facilitate the design of the control program and reduce the development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be a sequence of "big hit random number value range", "missing random number value range", and "small hit random number value range". Was. On the other hand, each random number value may be defined (set) in descending order of the number of random number values (or in ascending order).

In the above embodiment, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be a sequence of "big hit random number value range", "missing random number value range", and "small hit random number value range". Was. On the other hand, the jackpot random number so that the "big hit random number range" that increases with the setting change is adjacent (adjacent) to the random number value that decreases with the setting change (that is, the "missing random number range"). It may be configured to be specified (set) in the table 202a. Specifically, in the jackpot random number table 202a, each random number value is defined (set) so as to be in the order of "range of small hit random number value", "range of jackpot random number value", and "range of lost random number value". .. With this configuration, the random number value that increases due to the setting difference (that is, the increase in the jackpot random number value) is adjacent to the random number value that decreases due to the setting difference (that is, the lost random number value), and as the setting is changed. The range of the random value that does not change (that is, the small hit random value) can be fixed. As a result, for example, in the control program for determining whether the small hit is correct or not, the determination of the small hit random value is standardized for all the set values, and the increase in the large hit random value due to the setting change is additionally determined according to the set value. It is possible to facilitate the design of the control program and reduce the development man-hours.

In the above embodiment, the jackpot random number value is increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value is compensated from the lost random number value. On the other hand, the jackpot random number value may be increased for each set value, and the increase in the jackpot random number value may be compensated from the small hit random number and the lost random number value. With this configuration, it is possible to compensate for the change in the number of jackpot random numbers due to setting changes from each of the small hit random numbers and the lost random numbers, and the changes in the jackpot random numbers are fixed. It is not necessary to supplement from the predetermined random number value of 1. Therefore, it is not necessary to secure the number of the predetermined random number values from the predetermined random number value of 1 by the change of the jackpot random number value, so that there is no restriction at the time of designing the game specification, and the degree of freedom in designing the game specification is increased. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the ordinary electric service 72 is arranged with respect to the second starting port 71, and the inflow mode of the ball into the second starting port 71 differs depending on the opening / closing mode of the ordinary electric service 72. ing. On the other hand, the ordinary electric service 72 is arranged with respect to the first starting port 64 so that the inflow mode of the ball into the first starting port 64 differs depending on the opening / closing mode of the ordinary electric service 72. May be good.

In the above embodiment, as the arrangement position of the first starting port 64, only the ball fired in the left-handed game can win a prize, and the ball fired in the right-handed game is difficult to win or cannot win a prize. It is arranged. On the other hand, the first starting port 64 may be arranged or the winning auxiliary member may be arranged so that the ball fired in the right-handed game can win the first starting port 64. good. With this configuration, it is possible to store the maximum number of reserved symbols for each of the first special symbol and the second special symbol during the jackpot where the right-handed game is performed, and the reserved ball of the first special symbol after the jackpot ends. It is possible to suppress the event that the small hit game of the second special symbol may appear due to the fact that the number is not stored, and to realize the game playability according to the game specifications.

The display mode and display position of the fourth symbol display area 87 for special figure 1 and the fourth symbol display area 88 for special figure 2 are changed to the first special symbol or the second special symbol in which the main display area Dm is used to vary. It may be configured to be changed accordingly. Specifically, for example, corresponding to the special symbol executed in the main display area Dm, the executed fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are positioned on the upper side or displayed in Arabic numerals or red. The 4th symbol display areas 88 and 87, which are not executed, are displayed on the lower side, displayed in a notation different from the above Arabic numerals (for example, Chinese numerals and Roman numerals), and in a color different from red (for example, Chinese numerals and Roman numerals). For example, it is configured to be displayed in blue). With this configuration, it is difficult to recognize which special symbol is being executed while identifying and displaying the variable effect being executed, and the player is aware of the currently staying gaming state. By making it difficult to configure, it is possible to create a game property in which the game state is estimated, and to improve the interest of the game.

Regarding the alarm sound, it is configured to output the alarm sound when a specific condition is satisfied, instead of outputting the alarm sound when the ball passes through the through gate 67 in the gaming state where the left-handed game is recommended. May be good. Specifically, for example, by configuring in this way, an alarm sound is output only for the act of a malicious player who intentionally tries to obtain more balls than the game specification, and an unfamiliar player. By not outputting an alarm sound for a well-meaning right-handed game due to an operation error or an operation error, it is possible to suppress an illegal game and also suppress a decrease in the player's motivation to play, thereby improving the interest of the game.

The probability of hitting a normal symbol may be set to be about the same in any gaming state. Specifically, for example, in the "normal game state" or "time shortened state" where the jackpot probability of the special symbol is low, the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to 50/100 and the jackpot probability of the special symbol is high "probability fluctuation". In the "state" and "latent probability fluctuation state", the hit probability of the normal symbol is set to be 50/100, 51/100, etc., which is the same as or equal to the hit probability of the normal symbol in the "normal game state" and the like. With this configuration, regarding the opening of the ordinary electric service 72 based on the hit of the ordinary symbol, the variable display time of the ordinary symbol and the opening time of the ordinary electric service 72 are taken into consideration, and the hit probability of the ordinary symbol is not considered. By making it possible to calculate the ball output rate and the like, it is possible to facilitate the design of game specifications in each game state.

The variation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbol selected after the jackpot may be different for each jackpot symbol won by the jackpot. Specifically, for example, in a pachinko machine having a "probability fluctuation state", when the dynamic display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol can be executed at the same time, the "probability fluctuation state" is generated. If one of the 1 symbol, 3 symbol, 5 symbol, and 7 symbol that is the jackpot symbol to be obtained is won, both the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol have a relatively long fluctuation time in the "probability fluctuation state". Is configured to shift to the "both long fluctuation probability fluctuation state" where is easy to select. In addition, when three symbols are won, the first special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively long fluctuation time in the "probability fluctuation state", while the second special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively short fluctuation time. It is configured to shift to "1 long special 2 short fluctuation probability fluctuation state". Furthermore, when winning with 5 symbols, the first special symbol and the second special symbol both shift to the "both short fluctuation probability fluctuation state" in which a relatively short fluctuation time is easily selected in the "probability fluctuation state". Configure to. Further, when the 7 symbols are won, the first special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively short fluctuation time, while the second special symbol is likely to be selected with a relatively long fluctuation time. It is configured to shift to "special 1 short special 2 long fluctuation probability fluctuation state". With this configuration, the special symbols that can be derived first can be different depending on the type of the jackpot symbol in the game state after the jackpot. For example, which special symbol stops first or not. Therefore, the probability that the jackpot will appear first can be different for each game state. Therefore, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

The fluctuation pattern group (variation time) of the special symbol may be configured to be different based on the number of fluctuations of the special symbol. Specifically, for example, in the "latent probability fluctuation state", the fluctuation production of the first to tenth special symbols after the end of the jackpot is configured so that a relatively long fluctuation time can be easily selected, and the eleventh and subsequent times are configured. Regarding the variation effect of the special symbol of, it is configured so that a relatively short variation time can be easily selected. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game and improve the interest of the game while providing the game with sharpness.

A plurality of types of hits for ordinary symbols may be provided. Specifically, for example, the ordinary electric service 72 is opened once, the ordinary electric service 72 is opened three times, and the ordinary electric service 72 is opened three times and for a long time. 3 times long open hit. With such a configuration, it is possible to enrich the variation of the game in the "probability fluctuation state" and the "time reduction state" and improve the interest of the game.

In the above embodiment, the gaming state is advantageous for the player in the order of "normal gaming state" → "time shortening state". On the other hand, the game specifications may be set so that the "time shortened state" is positioned as a game state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the "normal game state". Specifically, for example, the start port of the first special symbol is provided on the upstream side of the start port of the second special symbol to which the ordinary electric service 72 is attached, and the ordinary electric service 72 operates in the "normal game state". Due to the difficulty, it is easier for the player to receive a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, which is more advantageous for the player than the second special symbol. It is configured so that it is easy to receive a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol, which is disadvantageous to the person. With this configuration, it is possible to increase the variety of games and improve the interest of the games.

When the right-handed suggestion display suggesting the right-handed game appears, the display position of the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 may be changed. Specifically, in the "normal game state" in which the left-handed game is encouraged, the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the right small area Ds3 of the sub-display area Ds, while the right-handed game is encouraged. In the "probability fluctuation state" or the like, the right-handed suggestion display is displayed in the right small area Ds3, while the fourth symbol display areas 87 and 88 are displayed in the left small area Ds1. With such a configuration, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the game specifications according to the game state.

In the above embodiment, the main control device 110 transmits a limit number of times command to the voice lamp control device 113 each time a jackpot is won. On the other hand, it may be configured to send a limit number of times command when the power is turned on. Since the voice lamp control device 113 does not have a so-called backup function, once the power is cut off, the limit number of times cannot be recognized until the next jackpot is won and the limit number of times command is transmitted. It ends up. Therefore, by transmitting the limit number of times command when the power is turned on and executing the effect recognizing the limit number of times in the voice lamp control device 113 from the time when the power is turned on, there is no discrepancy in the effect contents and the variation of the effect is enriched. be able to.

In the above embodiment, regarding the dynamic display of a plurality of special symbols that can be executed at the same time, the variation effect of the special symbol encouraged according to the game state is performed in the main display area Dm, and the variation effect of the non-encouragement special symbol is mainly performed. It is configured not to be performed in the display area Dm. On the other hand, regarding the production of a plurality of symbols (for example, a special symbol and a normal symbol) that can be executed at the same time, the priority order of the effects to be executed is determined by the game state, the game specifications, the game value to be given, the execution frequency, and the like. Is provided in advance, and the production according to the priority order is preferentially executed, and for the production with a low priority order, the player has a higher priority than the production such as reducing the scale of the production or not executing the production itself. It may be configured to be difficult to recognize. Specifically, when the variable effect of the first special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the effect related to the variable display of the normal symbol having a lower game value that can be given to the player than the first special symbol is displayed. 3 If the symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226 does not execute or the effect scale is reduced, or if the variation effect of the second special symbol is executed in the main display area Dm, the game is played from the second special symbol. The effect related to the variable display of the ordinary symbol having a low game value that can be given to the person may not be executed by the third symbol display device 81 or the voice output device 226, or the effect scale may be reduced. With this configuration, the player does not feel annoyed by reducing (eliminating) the scale of the low-priority production while preferentially executing the production that the player wants to recognize when performing the game. The production can be executed.

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113, and the voice lamp control device 113 gives a display instruction to the display control device 114. A command may be transmitted directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114. Further, the voice lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and a command for instructing the output of each voice and the lighting of the lamp may be transmitted from the display control device to the voice lamp control device. Further, the voice lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced and the cost increase of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S1111) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, a case where the corresponding fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b are always set to ON when any stop type command is received will be described. However, when each variation pattern command is received and the corresponding stop type command is received, the variation start flags 223a and 223b may be set to ON. As a result, it is possible to suppress the execution of a strange variation effect when one of the stop type commands is received without receiving each variation pattern command.

Further, the fluctuation start flags 223a and 223b may be set to ON at the timing when each fluctuation pattern command is received. In this case, in the variation effect process (S1110) executed by the voice lamp control device 113, the variation pattern extracted by each variation pattern command is displayed by the display control device based on the fact that the variation start flags 223a and 223b are turned on. Each display variation pattern command to be notified to 114 may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114. As a result, without waiting for the voice lamp control device 113 to receive each stop type command, each variation effect is transmitted to the display control device 114 based on the respective display variation pattern commands to the third symbol display device 81. Can be executed. In this case, the voice lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing when each stop type command is received. , May be transmitted to the display control device 114. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop symbol of the variation effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 based on the display stop type command.

In the above embodiment, in the demonstration effect, the third symbol composed of the main symbols not given the numbers "0" to "9" may be stopped and displayed. Further, the main symbol with a number or the third symbol consisting of the main symbol without a number may be stopped and displayed in a semi-transparent state. Further, only the back image may be changed without displaying the third symbol. Further, a character or a back image completely different from the third symbol or the back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above embodiment, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by the third symbol display device 81 on which the variable effect is performed, or a fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81 is provided and the third symbol is provided. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by displaying the fourth symbol on the fourth symbol display device together with the variation effect executed by the display device 81. In this case, the control of the fourth symbol display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the pachinko machine 10 may be provided with an accessory that operates in response to various effects, and the accessory may be operated in a predetermined manner in combination with the variable effect to execute the continuous advance notice effect. Further, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed by outputting the sound for the continuous advance notice effect from the audio output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10 under the control of the voice lamp control device 113, or the lighting unit of the pachinko machine 10 may be executed. The continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the third symbol display device 81 (and the special symbol display device 37) performs the variation effect, the symbol is continuously displayed on the fourth symbol display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined mode. The sound is output from the sound output device 226, or the illumination units 29 to 33 are lit or blinking, so that the player can have a feeling of expectation of a big hit. Further, the player usually keeps an eye on the third symbol display device 81 on which the variation effect is performed and continues the game, but displays the symbols by the fourth symbol display device different from the third symbol display device 81. , The operation of the accessory, the voice output from the voice output device 226, or the lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous advance notice effect is performed, so that the player is given an effect different from the usual one. It can be easily recognized. In addition, continuous notice effect can be easily continuously performed by simple control such as symbol display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of accessories, voice output from the voice output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33. It is possible to make a notice production.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by the voice output from the voice output device 226 or the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33, the continuous notice effect is controlled by the voice lamp control device 113, so that the start winning prize is obtained. The pachinko machine 10 continuously performs the winning / failing determination and the lottery process at the start of the fluctuation in the main control device 110, causes the voice lamp control device 113 to perform the continuous advance notice effect, and causes the display control device 114 to perform the fluctuation effect. When performing the advance notice effect, each control device can share each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from being concentrated on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be suppressed to a low level.

It should be noted that the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the third symbol display device 81, the display of the symbol for the continuous advance notice effect on the fourth symbol display device, the operation of the accessory in a predetermined mode, the sound from the voice output device 226. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by combining at least two or more of the output and the lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 and controlling each of them in conjunction with each other. As a result, a wider variety of continuous notice effects can be executed. Further, a method of executing the continuous notice effect (display by the third symbol display device 81, display by the fourth symbol display device, operation of the accessory, voice output from the voice output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33). , Or a combination thereof), a plurality of continuous advance notice effect modes selected according to the gaming state after the end of the continuous advance notice effect may be prepared.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous advance notice effect different from the variable effect effect may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, or when the continuous advance notice effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbol, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the reception of the continuous advance notice command is determined by the command determination process executed by the MPU of the display control device 114, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance is turned on and the other stop symbol determination flags are turned off. It may be set to. In the command judgment process, after the stop identification command processing, the processing corresponding to the continuous warning command is executed in the other command processing, so the chance eye is stopped instead of the stop symbol set by receiving the display stop identification command. It is set as a symbol. Therefore, the chance eye can be confirmed and displayed when the fluctuation is stopped. Then, in the third symbol display device 81, if the chance eyes are continuously displayed as stop symbols for each variation effect, the player can have a feeling of expectation that a big hit will be finally obtained.

In the above embodiment, when the first start port 64 or the second start port 71 is awarded (starting prize), the main control device 110 adds "1" to the number of reserved balls to be added to the voice lamp control device 113. The case where the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in connection with the start winning prize are included as they are and transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 with respect to the hold ball number command to be notified to is described. The type of the counter included in the ball count command may be a part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Further, when the main control device 110 notifies the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning, the information indicating the value of each of these counters is included in the hold ball number command and notified. Instead, the voice lamp control device 113 may be notified of these values by including information indicating the values of each counter in a command other than the reserved ball count command. As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or another information such as a fluctuation pattern command or a stop symbol command may be voiced. The value of each counter acquired with the start winning may be added to the command for notifying the lamp control device 113. As another command, when the value of each counter acquired in connection with the start winning is notified to the voice lamp control device 113, the value of each counter to be notified is changed to the variable effect corresponding to any number of holdings. Information indicating whether this is the case may be included. As a result, the voice lamp control device 113 is included in the command in any of the look-ahead information first to fourth areas corresponding to the hold count based on the information regarding the hold count included in the command. The value of the counter can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the hold ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a hold ball number command (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, whether it is a jackpot or not, a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, and a loss based on the value of each counter indicated by the command. Part or all of the deviation type, etc. in the case of It may be stored in RAM 223.

In the above embodiment, the winning of the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 and the passage of the through gate 67 are each held up to 4 times, but the maximum number of held balls is 4 times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, for winning a prize in the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port is "4". It may be any number other than. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, but may be different values. In addition, the number of reserved balls for variable display based on the winning of the first starting port 64 or the second starting port 71 is set by a number or a region divided into four in a part of the third symbol display device 81. It may be displayed in a mode (for example, a color or a lighting pattern) different by the number of reserved balls, and a light emitting member such as a lamp is provided separately from the special symbol display device 37, and the number of reserved balls is provided by the light emitting member. May be configured to notify.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a kind of dynamic display, is not limited to the one in which the symbol as the identification information is scrolled in the vertical direction on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and is horizontal. The symbol may be moved and displayed along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the symbol, for example, one or a plurality of characters are displayed together with the symbol or in a wide variety of motion display or change display separately from the symbol. It also includes the effect display. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above embodiments, when the variation effect is executed, the case where all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at a high speed to the extent that the player cannot see them is displayed. Therefore, all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an invisible degree and displayed, or all the symbols Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as a snow noise-like image in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

In slot machines, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by bonuses (features) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the bonus ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main control device instead of the prize ball number table, and has the same function as the bonus ratio management chip or the bonus ratio management chip. In the control device that executes The number of winning combinations may be counted to manage the winning combination ratio and the continuous winning combination ratio.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence composed of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below. In addition, each of the concepts of various inventions shown below adds a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of the concept of another invention to the concept of the invention, or a part or a plurality of the configurations of the concept of the other invention. The concept of the invention may be modified and constructed by exchanging with a part or the like.

<Group A: Notification production of more than the number of reserved balls>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group A have been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information, and
A storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f).
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113).
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that can give a game value to the player In a gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of generating a game).
Pre-derivation storage content suggestion means (for example, hold look-ahead notice) that can suggest the content of the determination result of the predetermined information stored in the storage means to the player before the result of the dynamic display is derived.
It is provided with an unmemorized content suggesting means (for example, "3 consecutive acquisition effect" or "7 consecutive acquisition effect") capable of suggesting the content of the game result that is not yet stored in the storage means to the player. Characteristic gaming machine A0.

According to the game machine A0, an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a determination for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means. Predetermined in the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means by using the means and the determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means. A gaming machine including an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to a player when the derivation result is derived, and determination of the predetermined information stored in the storage means. The content of the result can be suggested to the player before the result of the dynamic display is derived, and the content of the pre-derivation memory content suggestion means that can be suggested to the player and the content of the game result that is not yet stored in the storage means can be suggested to the player. It is equipped with a means for suggesting unmemorized contents. As a result, the content of the determination result can be suggested to the player before the result of the dynamic display is derived by the pre-derivative memory content suggestion means, and the content of the determination result is not yet memorized by the unmemorized content suggestion means. The game result can be suggested to the player. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing in advance the events that may occur in the future, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The "content of the game result" is the game value obtained based on the result of whether or not the dynamic display is correct, the type of the dynamic display, the execution content of the dynamic display, the execution time of the dynamic display, and the result of the dynamic display. , Opened winning opening, game state to be generated, transition mode of game state, type of jackpot, execution content of jackpot, execution time of jackpot, game value obtained based on jackpot, type of small hit, execution of small hit The content, the execution time of the small hit, the game value obtained based on the small hit, and the like are exemplified.

In the game machine A0
The storage means
An executing information storage means (for example, a holding ball execution area 203f) that stores the predetermined information based on the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means.
A pre-execution information storage means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d or a second reserved ball storage area 2203e) for storing the predetermined information before execution by the dynamic display execution means is provided.
The pre-execution information storage means
A predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information can be stored in each of the predetermined pieces.
The unmemorized content suggesting means is
The gaming machine A1 is configured so as to be able to suggest the derivation result of the dynamic display of the predetermined number or more.

According to the gaming machine A1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means is an executing information storage means for storing the predetermined information based on the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and a pre-execution by the dynamic display execution means. The pre-execution information storage means for storing the predetermined information, the pre-execution information storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the predetermined information, and the unmemorized content suggesting means is the predetermined number. It is configured so that the above-mentioned derivation result of the dynamic display can be suggested. Thereby, the unmemorized content suggesting means can suggest to the player the derivation result of the dynamic display by the predetermined number or more of the predetermined information that can be stored in the storage means. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing in advance the events that may occur in the future, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A0 or A1
The result of the dynamic display by the pre-derivation memory content suggesting means and the content of the game result by the unmemorized content suggesting means are summed and suggested to the player (for example, "triple acquisition effect" or The gaming machine A2, which is characterized by having "7 consecutive acquisition effects").

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A0 or A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it includes a total suggestion means for suggesting to the player by summing up the result of the dynamic display by the pre-derivative memory content suggestion means and the content of the game result by the unmemorized content suggestion means. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing in advance the total number of events that can occur in the future, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines A0 to A2
A game state change that can change the game state between a first game state (for example, a "normal game state") and a second game state (for example, a "time reduction state") that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Means (for example, time saving flag 203j) and
An execution number counting means (for example, a special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, a special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, or a total time saving counter 203o) for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state.
In the second game state, the end means for ending the second game state according to the number of executions of the dynamic display counted by the execution number counting means (for example, the time saving flag 203j is turned off).
In the first gaming state, when the predetermined derivation result (for example, the jackpot by the jackpot type "time saving B") is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the gaming state is completed after the end of the advantageous state. A first number-of-times setting means that shifts to the second gaming state by the changing means and sets the first number of times (for example, one time) in the execution number-of-times counting means as an end condition of the second game state by the end means. (For example, S6707 of the jackpot end processing (S6020) by winning the jackpot type "time saving B") and
In the second gaming state, when the predetermined derivation result (for example, a small hit by the small hit type "time saving J") is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, after the end of the advantageous state, the said The game state changing means shifts to the second gaming state, and as a condition for ending the second gaming state by the ending means, the execution number counting means has a second number of times (for example, 100 times) that is larger than the first number of times. (For example, S6707 of the big hit end processing (S6020) by winning the small hit type "time saving J") is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine A3 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A0 to A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game state changing means capable of changing the game state from the first game state to the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state. The execution number counting means for counting the number of executions, the ending means for ending the second game state according to the number of executions of the dynamic display counted by the execution number counting means in the second gaming state, and the first In the gaming state, when the predetermined derivation result is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second gaming state and the end. As the end condition of the second game state by the means, the first number of times setting means for setting the first number of times in the execution number of times counting means and the determination result by the determination means in the second game state are used. When the predetermined derivation result is derived, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and the number of executions is counted as the end condition of the second game state by the end means. The means includes a second number setting means for setting a second number of times greater than the first number, and the dynamic display executing means executes the dynamic display the second number of times in the second gaming state. By the time, it is configured so that the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived. As a result, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display is set to the second number of times as the end condition of the second game state by the second number of times setting means, a predetermined derivation result is obtained by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. Since it is possible to easily derive the above, it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine A3
The gaming machine A4, wherein the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, when shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state again by deriving the predetermined derivation result within the first number of times, which is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a condition for ending the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be maintained until the dynamic display is executed a second time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of how to derive a predetermined derivation result during the first number of times and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine A3 or A4
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine A5, characterized in that the value is larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A3 or A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the gaming machines A3 to A5
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means (for example, a time saving limit) capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine A6 is characterized in that the counter 203k has reached the time saving limit number of times).

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines A3 to A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number-of-occurrence counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number-of-occurrence counting means, and the number-of-times determining means. When it is determined that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times, the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. It has the effect of improving the interests of.

In the game machine A6
The gaming machine A7, wherein the specific number of times is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information, and
A storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f).
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113).
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that can give a game value to the player In a gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of generating a game).
Pre-derivation storage content suggestion means (for example, hold look-ahead notice) that can suggest the content of the determination result of the predetermined information stored in the storage means to the player before the result of the dynamic display is derived.
It is characterized in that it is provided with an unmemorized content suggesting means (for example, "3 consecutive acquisition effect" or "7 consecutive acquisition effect") capable of suggesting the content of the game that is not yet stored in the storage means to the player. The gaming machine AA0.

According to the game machine AA0, an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a determination for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means. Predetermined in the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means by using the means and the determination result by the determination means, and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means. A gaming machine including an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to a player when the derivation result is derived, and determination of the predetermined information stored in the storage means. The content of the result can be suggested to the player before the result of the dynamic display is derived, and the content of the game that is not yet stored in the storage means can be suggested to the player. It is equipped with a means for suggesting unmemorized contents. As a result, the pre-derivative memory content suggestion means can suggest the determination result to the player before the result of the dynamic display is derived, and the unmemorized content suggestion means has not yet been memorized. It is possible to suggest the content of the game to be obtained to the player. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing in advance the events that may occur in the future, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

The "game content" is the result of whether or not the dynamic display is correct, the type of the dynamic display, the execution content of the dynamic display, the execution time of the dynamic display, and the game value obtained based on the result of the dynamic display. Winning opening to be opened, game state to be generated, transition mode of game state, type of jackpot, execution content of jackpot, execution time of jackpot, game value obtained based on jackpot, type of small hit, execution content of small hit , The execution time of the small hit, the game value obtained based on the small hit, and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine AA0
The storage means
An executing information storage means (for example, a holding ball execution area 203f) that stores the predetermined information based on the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means.
A pre-execution information storage means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d or a second reserved ball storage area 2203e) for storing the predetermined information before execution by the dynamic display execution means is provided.
The pre-execution information storage means
A predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information can be stored in each of the predetermined pieces.
The unmemorized content suggesting means is
The gaming machine A1 is configured so as to be able to suggest the derivation result of the dynamic display of the predetermined number or more.

According to the gaming machine AA1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means is an executing information storage means for storing the predetermined information based on the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means in the display means, and a pre-execution by the dynamic display execution means. The pre-execution information storage means for storing the predetermined information, the pre-execution information storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the predetermined information, and the unmemorized content suggesting means is the predetermined number. It is configured so that the above-mentioned derivation result of the dynamic display can be suggested. Thereby, the unmemorized content suggesting means can suggest the content of the game based on the dynamic display by the predetermined number or more of the predetermined information that can be stored in the storage means to the player. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing in advance the events that may occur in the future, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA0 or AA1
A total suggestion means (for example, "triple acquisition effect" or "3 consecutive acquisition effect" or "3 consecutive acquisition effect" or " The gaming machine AA2, which is characterized by having "7 consecutive acquisition effects").

According to the gaming machine AA2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines AA0 or AA1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it includes a total suggestion means for suggesting to the player by adding up the result of the dynamic display by the pre-derivative memory content suggestion means and the content of the game by the unmemorized content suggestion means. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing in advance the total number of events that can occur in the future, so that there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines AA0 to AA2
A game state change that can change the game state between a first game state (for example, a "normal game state") and a second game state (for example, a "time reduction state") that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Means (for example, time saving flag 203j) and
An execution number counting means (for example, a special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, a special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, or a total time saving counter 203o) for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state.
In the second game state, the end means for ending the second game state according to the number of executions of the dynamic display counted by the execution number counting means (for example, the time saving flag 203j is turned off).
In the first gaming state, when the predetermined derivation result (for example, the jackpot by the jackpot type "time saving B") is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the gaming state is completed after the end of the advantageous state. A first number-of-times setting means that shifts to the second gaming state by the changing means and sets the first number of times (for example, one time) in the execution number-of-times counting means as an end condition of the second game state by the end means. (For example, S6707 of the jackpot end processing (S6020) by winning the jackpot type "time saving B") and
In the second gaming state, when the predetermined derivation result (for example, a small hit by the small hit type "time saving J") is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, after the end of the advantageous state, the said The game state changing means shifts to the second gaming state, and as a condition for ending the second gaming state by the ending means, the execution number counting means has a second number of times (for example, 100 times) that is larger than the first number of times. (For example, S6707 of the big hit end processing (S6020) by winning the small hit type "time saving J") is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine AA3 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine AA3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines AA0 to AA2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game state changing means capable of changing the game state from the first game state to the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state. The execution number counting means for counting the number of executions, the ending means for ending the second game state according to the number of executions of the dynamic display counted by the execution number counting means in the second gaming state, and the first In the gaming state, when the predetermined derivation result is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second gaming state and the end. As the end condition of the second game state by the means, the first number of times setting means for setting the first number of times in the execution number of times counting means and the determination result by the determination means in the second game state are used. When the predetermined derivation result is derived, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and the number of executions is counted as the end condition of the second game state by the end means. The means includes a second number setting means for setting a second number of times greater than the first number, and the dynamic display executing means executes the dynamic display the second number of times in the second gaming state. By the time, it is configured so that the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived. As a result, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display is set to the second number of times as the end condition of the second game state by the second number of times setting means, a predetermined derivation result is obtained by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. Since it is possible to easily derive the above, it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine AA3
The gaming machine AA4, wherein the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine AA4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, when shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state again by deriving the predetermined derivation result within the first number of times, which is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a condition for ending the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be maintained until the dynamic display is executed a second time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of how to derive a predetermined derivation result during the first number of times and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine AA3 or AA4
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine AA5, which is characterized by having a value larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine AA5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines AA3 or AA4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the gaming machines AA3 to AA5
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means (for example, a time saving limit) capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine AA6 is characterized in that the counter 203k has reached the time saving limit number of times).

According to the gaming machine AA6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines AA3 to AA5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number-of-occurrence counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number-of-occurrence counting means, and the number-of-times determining means. When it is determined that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times, the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. It has the effect of improving the interests of.

In the gaming machine AA6
The gaming machine AA7, wherein the specific number of times is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine AA7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine AA6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group B: Notification production of more than the number of hours saved>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group B was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) that dynamically displays identification information in a display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the entry into the ball entering means.
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that can give a game value to the player In a gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of generating a game).
A number counting means for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means (for example, special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, special drawing 2 time saving counter 203n or total time saving counter 203o).
A changing means that can be changed into a first state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the ball-entry means and a second state in which a game ball can or is easily entered into the ball-entry means (for example,). Ordinary electric service 72) and
The mode in which the changing means is in the second state is a first gaming state (for example, "normal gaming state") which is the first aspect and a second gaming state (for example, which is a second mode different from the first aspect). , "Time reduction state") and a game state changing means (for example, a time saving flag 203j) capable of changing the game state.
In the second gaming state, on condition that the number-of-counting means counts the first number of times, an ending means capable of ending the second gaming state (for example, the time saving flag 203j is turned off) and
In the second gaming state, the first or more suggestion means (for example, "3 consecutive acquisition effect" or "7 consecutive acquisition effect" that can suggest the content of the game result of the dynamic display of the first or more times to the player. ”), A gaming machine B0 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine B0, the launching means capable of launching the game ball, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched by the launching means, and the display means based on the entry into the ball entering means. A game value can be given to a player when a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means. A gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state, the number counting means for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, and a gaming ball in the ball entering means. A changing means that can be changed into a first state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter, a second state in which the game ball can be entered in the ball entering means or is easy to enter, and the changing means is the second state. In the second gaming state, the gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state between the first gaming state, which is the first aspect, and the second gaming state, which is the second aspect different from the first aspect. On the condition that the number-of-times counting means is counted the first number of times, the ending means capable of ending the second gaming state and the game result of the dynamic display of the first number or more in the second gaming state. It is provided with a means for suggesting the contents of the above first time or more, which can suggest the contents of the above to the player. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player the game result of the first or more dynamic display in the second game state. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing in advance the game result after the first dynamic display, which can be the end condition of the second game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved. , Has the effect.

The "content of the game result" is the game value obtained based on the result of whether or not the dynamic display is correct, the type of the dynamic display, the execution content of the dynamic display, the execution time of the dynamic display, and the result of the dynamic display. , Opened winning opening, game state to be generated, transition mode of game state, type of jackpot, execution content of jackpot, execution time of jackpot, game value obtained based on jackpot, type of small hit, execution of small hit The content, the execution time of the small hit, the game value obtained based on the small hit, and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine B0
The first or more suggestion means
A summing suggestion means (for example,) that suggests to the player by summing up the result of the dynamic display executed the first time and the result of the dynamic display executed after the dynamic display of the first time. A gaming machine B1 characterized by having "3 consecutive acquisition effects" or "7 consecutive acquisition effects").

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first or more suggestion means adds up the result of the dynamic display executed the first time and the result of the dynamic display executed after the first dynamic display. It is equipped with a total suggestion means for suggesting to the player. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing in advance the game result after the first dynamic display, which can be the end condition of the second game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved. , Has the effect.

In the gaming machine B0 or B1
The termination means
In the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be terminated on condition that the number counting means counts the first number of times.
The number-of-times setting means
In the second game state, when the predetermined derivation result is derived, a second number of times larger than the first number of times is set as an end condition of the second game state by the end means.
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine B2 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B0 or B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ending means is configured to be able to end the second gaming state on condition that the number counting means is counted the first time in the second gaming state, and the number setting means is the first. When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the two game states, the second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times, is set as the end condition of the second game state by the end means, and the dynamic display execution means In the second gaming state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. As a result, it is possible to easily derive a predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed a second time, so that it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B2
Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and
A storage means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means is provided.
The storage means
A predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information can be stored in each of the predetermined pieces.
The gaming machine B3, wherein the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the memory is provided with an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means and a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. The means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the predetermined information, and the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of how to derive a predetermined derivation result during the first number of times and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine B3
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine B4, characterized in that the value is larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the gaming machines B0 to B4
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means (for example, a time saving limit) capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine B5 is characterized in that the counter 203k has reached the time saving limit number of times).

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines B0 to B4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number-of-occurrence counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number-of-occurrence counting means, and the number-of-times determining means. When it is determined that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times, the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. It has the effect of improving the interests of.

In the gaming machine B5
The gaming machine B6, wherein the specific number of times is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine B5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) that dynamically displays identification information in a display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the entry into the ball entering means.
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that can give a game value to the player In a gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of generating a game).
A number counting means for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means (for example, special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, special drawing 2 time saving counter 203n or total time saving counter 203o).
A changing means that can be changed into a first state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the ball-entry means and a second state in which a game ball can or is easily entered into the ball-entry means (for example,). Ordinary electric service 72) and
The mode in which the changing means is in the second state is a first gaming state (for example, "normal gaming state") which is the first aspect and a second gaming state (for example, which is a second mode different from the first aspect). , "Time reduction state") and a game state changing means (for example, a time saving flag 203j) capable of changing the game state.
In the second gaming state, on condition that the number-of-counting means counts the first number of times, an ending means capable of ending the second gaming state (for example, the time saving flag 203j is turned off) and
In the second gaming state, the first or more suggestion means (for example, "three consecutive acquisition effect" or "seven consecutive acquisition effect" that can suggest the content of the first or more dynamic display games to the player. ), And a gaming machine BB0.

According to the gaming machine BB0, the launching means capable of launching the game ball, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched by the launching means, and the display means based on the entry into the ball entering means. A game value can be given to a player when a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means. A gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state, the number counting means for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed by the dynamic display executing means, and a gaming ball in the ball entering means. A changing means that can be changed into a first state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter, a second state in which the game ball can be entered in the ball entering means or is easy to enter, and the changing means is the second state. In the second gaming state, the gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state between the first gaming state, which is the first aspect, and the second gaming state, which is the second aspect different from the first aspect. On the condition that the number-of-counting means counts the first number of times, the ending means capable of ending the second gaming state and the dynamic display game of the first number or more in the second gaming state. It is provided with a means for suggesting the content more than once, which can suggest the content to the player. Thereby, in the second game state, the content of the game of the first or more dynamic display can be suggested to the player. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing in advance the content of the game after the first dynamic display, which can be the end condition of the second game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved. It has the effect of being able to do it.

The "game content" is the result of whether or not the dynamic display is correct, the type of the dynamic display, the execution content of the dynamic display, the execution time of the dynamic display, and the game value obtained based on the result of the dynamic display. Winning opening to be opened, game state to be generated, transition mode of game state, type of jackpot, execution content of jackpot, execution time of jackpot, game value obtained based on jackpot, type of small hit, execution content of small hit , The execution time of the small hit, the game value obtained based on the small hit, and the like are exemplified.

In the gaming machine BB0
The first or more suggestion means
A summing suggestion means (for example,) that suggests to the player by summing up the result of the dynamic display executed the first time and the result of the dynamic display executed after the dynamic display of the first time. The gaming machine BB1 characterized by having "3 consecutive acquisition effects" or "7 consecutive acquisition effects").

According to the gaming machine BB1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first or more suggestion means adds up the result of the dynamic display executed the first time and the result of the dynamic display executed after the first dynamic display. It is equipped with a total suggestion means for suggesting to the player. As a result, the player can play the game while recognizing in advance the game result after the first dynamic display, which can be the end condition of the second game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved. , Has the effect.

In the gaming machine BB0 or BB1
The termination means
In the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be terminated on condition that the number counting means counts the first number of times.
The number-of-times setting means
In the second game state, when the predetermined derivation result is derived, a second number of times larger than the first number of times is set as an end condition of the second game state by the end means.
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine BB2 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine BB2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB0 or BB1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ending means is configured to be able to end the second gaming state on condition that the number counting means is counted the first time in the second gaming state, and the number setting means is the first. When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the two game states, the second number of times, which is larger than the first number of times, is set as the end condition of the second game state by the end means, and the dynamic display execution means In the second gaming state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. As a result, it is possible to easily derive a predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed a second time, so that it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. There is an effect.

In any of the gaming machines BB0 to BB2
Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and
A storage means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means is provided.
The storage means
A predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information can be stored in each of the predetermined pieces.
The gaming machine BB3, wherein the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine BB3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines BB0 to BB2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the memory is provided with an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means and a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. The means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the predetermined information, and the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of how to derive a predetermined derivation result during the first number of times and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine BB3
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine BB4 characterized by having a value larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine BB4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines BB0 to BB3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the gaming machines BB0 to BB4
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means (for example, a time saving limit) capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine BB5 is characterized in that the counter 203k has reached the time saving limit number of times).

According to the gaming machine BB5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines BB0 to BB4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number-of-occurrence counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number-of-occurrence counting means, and the number-of-times determining means. When it is determined that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times, the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. It has the effect of improving the interests of.

In the gaming machine BB5
The gaming machine BB6, wherein the specific number of times is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine BB6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine BB5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group C: Hit more and direct>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The inventions of Group C have been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and
A storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f).
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113).
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that can give a game value to the player It is provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of generating a game).
The storage means
In a gaming machine configured to be able to store a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information.
A game state change that can change the game state between a first game state (for example, a "normal game state") and a second game state (for example, a "time reduction state") that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Means (for example, time saving flag 203j) and
In the second gaming state, a storage number determination means (for example, hold confirmation process (S1214)) for determining the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and
By using the determination result of the memory number determination means, the launching means for urging the player to launch the game ball by the launching means and prompt the player to enter the ball (for example, "striking instruction effect"). The gaming machine C0, which is characterized by having and.

According to the game machine C0, when a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a game ball entering the ball entering means, An information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the determination means. When a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display executing means that executes the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means by using the determination result. The storage means is a gaming machine configured to be capable of storing a predetermined number of the predetermined information, respectively, comprising an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player. A gaming state changing means capable of changing a gaming state into a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and the storage means stored in the storage means in the second gaming state. By using the memory number determination means for determining the number of predetermined information and the determination result of the memory number determination means, the game ball is launched by the launching means to prompt the player to enter the ball entry means. It is equipped with launch promotion means. As a result, it is possible to urge the player to store a predetermined number of predetermined pieces of information in the second game state, and to easily generate a state in which a predetermined number of predetermined pieces of information are stored in the second game state. As a result, it becomes easy to give the player a game according to the game specifications in the second game state, and there is an effect that the game entertainment can be improved.

In the gaming machine C0
The storage number determination means
In the second gaming state, a predetermined number determination means (for example, hold confirmation process (S1214)) for determining whether or not the predetermined number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the predetermined number is provided.
The launch promoting means
Until it is determined by the predetermined number determination means that the predetermined number is stored in the storage means, the launching means launches a game ball to encourage the player to enter the ball. The gaming machine C1 is provided with launching promotion effect executing means (for example, S1242 to S1253 of the hold confirmation process (S1214)) to be executed.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage number determining means includes a predetermined number determining means for determining whether or not the predetermined number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means is the predetermined number in the second gaming state, and the firing promoting means includes the firing promoting means. Until it is determined by the predetermined number determination means that the predetermined number is stored in the storage means, the launching means launches a game ball to encourage the player to enter the ball. It is equipped with a launch promotion effect execution means to be executed. As a result, the launch promotion effect is executed until a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the second game state, and the player is urged to store the predetermined number of the predetermined information, and the predetermined number of the predetermined information is stored in the second game state. It is possible to easily generate the state of being caused. As a result, it becomes easy to give the player a game according to the game specifications in the second game state, and there is an effect that the game entertainment can be improved.

In the gaming machine C1
In the second game state, after the predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, the dynamic display of the second special symbol starts in the "time reduction state A"), the specification is specified for a predetermined period (for example, "20 seconds"). A specific effect execution means for executing an effect (for example, "timer effect") is provided.
The launch promotion effect executing means
The gaming machine C2 is characterized in that during the specific effect, the launch promotion effect is executed until it is determined by the storage means that the predetermined number of the predetermined information has been stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second gaming state, the specific effect executing means for executing the specific effect for a predetermined period after the predetermined condition is satisfied is provided, and the launch promotion effect executing means is said to be said during the specific effect. The firing promotion effect is configured to be executed until it is determined by the predetermined number determination means that the predetermined number of the predetermined information has been stored in the storage means. As a result, during the execution of the specific effect in the second game state, the launch promotion effect is executed until a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the storage means, and the launch promotion effect is executed until a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored. It is possible to urge the player to store a predetermined number of predetermined information, and to easily generate a state in which a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the second gaming state. As a result, it becomes easy to give the player a game according to the game specifications in the second game state, and there is an effect that the game entertainment can be improved.

In the gaming machine C2
The launch promotion effect executing means
Elapsed time effect changing means (for example, "super-strong hitting instruction effect (normal)" and "super-strong hitting instruction effect (special)"), which changes the firing promotion effect according to the elapsed time of the specific effect. A gaming machine C3 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the launch promotion effect executing means includes an elapsed time effect changing means that changes the launch promotion effect according to the elapsed time of the specific effect. As a result, the firing promotion effect is changed according to the elapsed time of the specific effect during the execution of the specific effect in the second game state. It is possible to urge the player to store a predetermined number of predetermined pieces of information by strongly prompting the firing, and to easily generate a state in which a predetermined number of predetermined pieces of information are stored in the second game state. As a result, it becomes easy to give the player a game according to the game specifications in the second game state, and there is an effect that the game entertainment can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C3
The launch promotion effect executing means
The storage number effect changing means (for example, "super strong hitting instruction effect (normal)", " The gaming machine C4 is characterized by having "strong hitting instruction effect (normal)" and "medium hitting instruction effect (normal)").

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the firing promotion effect executing means includes a storage number effect changing means that changes the firing promotion effect according to the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means by the storage number determining means. As a result, the firing promotion effect is changed according to the number of stored predetermined information during the execution of the specific effect in the second game state. For example, when the number of stored predetermined information is small, the player is strongly forced to launch the game ball. It is possible to urge the player to store a predetermined number of predetermined pieces of information so as to be prompted, and to easily generate a state in which a predetermined number of predetermined pieces of information are stored in the second game state. As a result, it becomes easy to give the player a game according to the game specifications in the second game state, and there is an effect that the game entertainment can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C2 to C4
The dynamic display execution means
In the second gaming state, the dynamic display is configured to be executable for at least the first period (eg, "60 seconds").
The predetermined period is
The gaming machine C5, which is shorter than the first period.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C2 to C4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be able to execute the dynamic display for at least the first period in the second gaming state, and the predetermined period is configured to be shorter than the first period. NS. As a result, it is possible to execute the specific effect executed for a predetermined period during the execution of the dynamic display executed for the first period in the second game state. Therefore, during the execution of the dynamic display in the second game state, the firing promotion effect is executed until a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the storage means, and the firing promotion effect is executed until a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored. It is possible to urge the player to store a predetermined number of predetermined information, and to easily generate a state in which a predetermined number of predetermined information is stored in the second gaming state. As a result, it becomes easy to give the player a game according to the game specifications in the second game state, and there is an effect that the game entertainment can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C5
An execution number counting means (for example, a special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, a special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, or a total time saving counter 203o) for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state.
In the second game state, the end means for ending the second game state according to the number of executions of the dynamic display counted by the execution number counting means (for example, the time saving flag 203j is turned off).
In the first gaming state, when the first predetermined result (for example, the jackpot by the jackpot type "time saving B") is derived from the predetermined derivation result by using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state After the end, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and the execution number counting means is set to the first number (for example, once) as the end condition of the second game state by the end means. The first number of times setting means (for example, S6707 of the jackpot end processing (S6020) by winning the jackpot type "time saving B") and
In the second gaming state, when the second predetermined result (for example, the small hit by the small hit type "time saving J") is derived from the predetermined derivation result by using the determination result by the determination means, the said After the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and as a condition for ending the second game state by the end means, the second number of times is greater than the first number of times in the execution number counting means. (For example, S6707 of the big hit end processing (S6020) by winning the small hit type "time saving J") for setting the second number of times (for example, 100 times) is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine C6 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game state changing means capable of changing the game state from the first game state to the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state. The execution number counting means for counting the number of executions, the ending means for ending the second game state according to the number of executions of the dynamic display counted by the execution number counting means in the second gaming state, and the first In the gaming state, when the first predetermined result of the predetermined derivation results is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means returns to the second gaming state. At the same time as the transition, as the end condition of the second game state by the end means, the first number setting means for setting the first number in the execution number counting means and the determination result by the determination means in the second game state. When the second predetermined result out of the predetermined derivation results is derived by using the above, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and the end means causes the second. 2 As the end condition of the game state, the execution number counting means includes a second number setting means for setting a second number more than the first number, and the dynamic display execution means is in the second game state. , The predetermined derivation result can be easily derived by the time when the dynamic display is executed the second time. As a result, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display is set to the second number of times as the end condition of the second game state by the second number of times setting means, a predetermined derivation result is obtained by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. Since it is possible to easily derive the above, it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine C6
The gaming machine C7, wherein the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine C7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, when shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state again by deriving the predetermined derivation result within the first number of times, which is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a condition for ending the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be maintained until the dynamic display is executed a second time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of how to derive a predetermined derivation result during the first number of times and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine C6 or C7
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine C8, which is characterized by having a value larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C6 or C7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the gaming machines C0 to C8
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means (for example, a time saving limit) capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine C9 is characterized in that the counter 203k has reached the time saving limit number of times).

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines C0 to C8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number-of-occurrence counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number-of-occurrence counting means, and the number-of-times determining means. When it is determined that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times, the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. It has the effect of improving the interests of.

In the gaming machine C9
The gaming machine C10, wherein the specific number of times is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine C10, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine C9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group D: Number of time reductions less than or equal to the maximum number that can be held, 1st game value when there is a time reduction, 2nd game value when there is no time reduction>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group D has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and
A storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f).
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113).
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that can give a game value to the player It is provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of generating a game).
The storage means
In a gaming machine configured to be able to store a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information.
A game state change that can change the game state between a first game state (for example, a "normal game state") and a second game state (for example, a "time reduction state") that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Means (for example, time saving flag 203j) and
With a second gaming state maintaining means (for example, turning on the time saving flag 203j) capable of maintaining the second gaming state while the dynamic display of the predetermined number or less after the end of the advantageous state is executed. ,
After executing the dynamic display a specific number of times after the end of the advantageous state, the first game state transition means (for example, the time saving flag 203j is turned off) that shifts the gaming state to the first gaming state.
In the first game state, when the predetermined derivation result is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the player can be given the first game value (for example, "time reduction state A"). The first game value means (for example, S6707 of the jackpot end processing (S6020) by winning the jackpot type "time saving B") and
In the second gaming state, when the predetermined derivation result is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the second gaming value (for example, "time reduction" is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming value. The gaming machine D0 is characterized by comprising a second gaming value means (for example, S6707 of the jackpot end processing (S6020) by winning the small hit type "time saving J") capable of imparting "state B"). ..

According to the gaming machine D0, when the launching means capable of launching the game ball, the ball entering means capable of entering the game ball launched by the launching means, and the gaming ball entering the ball entering means, An information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the determination means. When a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means by using the determination result. The storage means is a gaming machine configured to be capable of storing a predetermined number of the predetermined information, respectively, comprising an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player. A gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state to a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and a specific number of times less than or equal to the predetermined number after the end of the advantageous state. While the dynamic display is executed, the second gaming state maintaining means capable of maintaining the second gaming state and the gaming state after executing the dynamic display a specific number of times after the end of the advantageous state are described. When the predetermined derivation result is derived by using the determination result by the determination means in the first gaming state transition means for shifting to the first gaming state and the first gaming state, the first game is given to the player. When the predetermined derivation result is derived by using the determination result by the determination means in the first game value means capable of imparting value and the second game state, the player can obtain the value from the first game value. It is provided with a second game value means capable of imparting an advantageous second game value. As a result, by deriving the predetermined derivation result by the time when the dynamic display is executed a specific number of times less than or equal to the predetermined number of times after the end of the advantageous state, a second game value advantageous to the player can be given, while being advantageous. When a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display after the dynamic display after a specific number of times is executed after the state ends, the first game value, which is lower than the second game value, is given. Therefore, for example, when a predetermined number of predetermined pieces of information are stored in the storage means during the advantageous state, it is possible to create a game property of whether or not to derive a predetermined derivation result within a specific number of times after the advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In the gaming machine D0
When the second game value is given by the second game value means, the advantageous state by the advantageous state means is more likely to occur than when the first game value is given by the first game value means. The gaming machine D1 characterized by.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the second game value is given by the second game value means, the advantageous state by the advantageous state means occurs as compared with the case where the first game value is given by the first game value means. It is configured to be easy. As a result, it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine D0 or D1
The ball entry means
With the first ball entry means (for example, the first starting port 64),
A second ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) different from the first ball entry means is provided.
The gaming machine
A third ball entry means (for example, a specific area) different from the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means is provided.
A second state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the third ball entry means and a second state in which a game ball can or easily enters into the third ball entry means can be changed. 3 means for changing the ball entry (for example, the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and the specific area opening / closing plate 73d) are provided.
The dynamic display execution means
Based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, the first dynamic execution means (for example, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a) capable of executing the first dynamic display in the display means, and
A second dynamic execution means (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b) capable of executing the second dynamic display in the display means based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Prepare,
The third ball entry changing means is
Based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display, the third ball entry means can be easily put into the second state from the lottery result in the first dynamic display (for example, the small hit probability in the first special symbol < The small hit probability in the second special symbol and the opening / closing modes of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and the specific area opening / closing plate 73d based on the small hit in each special symbol).
The advantageous state means
When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic execution means. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the advantageous state can be generated when the third ball-entry changing means is in the second state and the game ball enters the third ball-entry means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D0 or D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball entry means includes a first ball entry means and a second ball entry means different from the first ball entry means, and the gaming machine includes the first ball entry means and the second ball entry means. A first state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the third ball entry means and a third ball entry means different from the means, and a game ball can enter the third ball entry means or A third ball entry changing means that can be changed to a second state in which the ball is easy to enter is provided, and the dynamic display executing means is based on the entry of a game ball into the first ball entry means. Based on the first dynamic execution means capable of executing the first dynamic display in the above and the second dynamic display capable of executing the second dynamic display in the display means based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means. The third ball-entry changing means includes a dynamic execution means, and the third ball-entry changing means uses the third ball-entry means based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display based on the lottery result in the first dynamic display. The advantageous state means is easily configured to be in the second state, and the advantageous state means is the first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic executed by the second dynamic execution means. In the display, when the predetermined derivation result is derived, the third ball entry changing means becomes the second state and the game ball enters the third ball entry means, so that the advantageous state is generated. It is configured to be possible. This has the effect of increasing the variety of situations that generate an advantageous state and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine D2
The second ball entry means
It is possible to change between a third state in which it is difficult or impossible for a game ball to enter the second ball entry means and a fourth state in which the game ball can or easily enters the second ball entry means. A second ball entry changing means (for example, ordinary electric service 72) is provided.
The second ball entry changing means
In the first gaming state, the mode in which the second ball-entry changing means is in the fourth state is the first aspect, and in the second gaming state, the second ball-entry changing means is in the fourth state. However, the gaming machine D3 is characterized in that the gaming ball is configured to be a second aspect in which the gaming ball is easier to enter the second entering means than the first aspect.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second ball entry means has a third state in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball entry means, and a fourth state in which the game ball can enter the second ball entry means. A second ball entry changing means (for example, ordinary electric service 72), which can be changed to a state or is easy to enter, is provided, and the second ball entry changing means changes the second ball entry in the first gaming state. The mode in which the means is in the fourth state is the first mode, and in the second gaming state, the mode in which the second ball entry changing means is in the fourth state is the mode in which the game ball is the second mode from the first aspect. It is configured to be a second aspect in which it is easy to enter the ball into the ball entry means. As a result, the mode of entering the second ball entering means can be changed according to the game state, and the entry of the game ball into the second entering means, which is not assumed as the game specification, can be suppressed. .. As a result, there is an effect that the playability according to the game specifications can be realized and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D3
An execution number counting means (for example, a special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, a special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, or a total time saving counter 203o) for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state.
In the second game state, the end means for ending the second game state according to the number of executions of the dynamic display counted by the execution number counting means (for example, the time saving flag 203j is turned off).
In the first gaming state, when the first predetermined result (for example, the jackpot by the jackpot type "time saving B") is derived from the predetermined derivation result by using the determination result by the determination means, the advantageous state After the end, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and the execution number counting means is set to the first number (for example, once) as the end condition of the second game state by the end means. The first number of times setting means (for example, S6707 of the jackpot end processing (S6020) by winning the jackpot type "time saving B") and
In the second gaming state, when the second predetermined result (for example, the small hit by the small hit type "time saving J") is derived from the predetermined derivation result by using the determination result by the determination means, the said After the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and as a condition for ending the second game state by the end means, the second number of times is greater than the first number of times in the execution number counting means. (For example, S6707 of the big hit end processing (S6020) by winning the small hit type "time saving J") for setting the second number of times (for example, 100 times) is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine D4 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game state changing means capable of changing the game state from the first game state to the second game state that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state, and the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state. The execution number counting means for counting the number of executions, the ending means for ending the second game state according to the number of executions of the dynamic display counted by the execution number counting means in the second gaming state, and the first In the gaming state, when the first predetermined result of the predetermined derivation results is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means returns to the second gaming state. At the same time as the transition, as the end condition of the second game state by the end means, the first number setting means for setting the first number in the execution number counting means and the determination result by the determination means in the second game state. When the second predetermined result out of the predetermined derivation results is derived by using the above, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and the end means causes the second. 2 As the end condition of the game state, the execution number counting means includes a second number setting means for setting a second number more than the first number, and the dynamic display execution means is in the second game state. , The predetermined derivation result can be easily derived by the time when the dynamic display is executed the second time. As a result, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display is set to the second number of times as the end condition of the second game state by the second number of times setting means, a predetermined derivation result is obtained by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. Since it is possible to easily derive the above, it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D4
The gaming machine D5, wherein the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, when shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state again by deriving the predetermined derivation result within the first number of times, which is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a condition for ending the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be maintained until the dynamic display is executed a second time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of how to derive a predetermined derivation result during the first number of times and to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D5
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine D6, characterized in that the value is larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D6
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means (for example, a time saving limit) capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine D7 is characterized in that the counter 203k has reached the time saving limit number of times).

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number-of-occurrence counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number-of-occurrence counting means, and the number-of-times determining means. When it is determined that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times, the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. It has the effect of improving the interests of.

In any of the gaming machines D0 to D7
The gaming machine D8, wherein the specific number of times is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines D0 to D7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group E: Number of time reductions greater than the maximum number of variable times per day>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of group E has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
A dynamic display executing means (for example, a voice lamp control device 113) that dynamically displays identification information in a display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) based on the entry into the ball entering means.
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, at least two or more capable of giving a game value to the player are provided. In a gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of generating an advantageous state of any one of advantageous states (for example, a jackpot game).
A changing means that can be changed into a first state in which a game ball cannot or is difficult to enter into the ball-entry means and a second state in which a game ball can or is easily entered into the ball-entry means (for example,). Ordinary electric service 72) and
The mode in which the changing means is in the second state is the first game state (for example, "normal game state") which is the first mode, and the second mode in which the game ball is easier to enter than the first mode. A gaming state changing means (for example, a time saving flag 203j) capable of changing the gaming state to a second gaming state (for example, a “time reduction state”),
An end condition setting means (for example, S6707 of the jackpot end process (S6020)) for setting one or two or more end conditions of the second game state based on the type of the advantageous state is provided.
The game state changing means
The second gaming state can be maintained until the end condition of 1 is satisfied or the advantageous state occurs.
As the end condition,
One gaming machine installed in the gaming hall is characterized in that a specific condition is provided in which the second gaming state is not terminated even when the dynamic display is executed the maximum number of times that the dynamic display can be executed per day. Game machine E0.

According to the gaming machine E0, the launching means capable of launching the gaming ball, the ball entering means capable of entering the gaming ball launched by the launching means, and the display means based on the entry into the ball entering means. A game value can be given to a player when a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means. A gaming machine comprising at least two or more advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state of any one of the advantageous states, wherein the game ball cannot or is difficult to enter the ball entering means. The first aspect is a changing means capable of changing into one state, a second state in which a game ball can enter or easily enters the ball entering means, and a mode in which the changing means is in the second state. Based on the gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, which is the second aspect in which the gaming ball is easier to enter than the first aspect, and the type of the advantageous state. The gaming state changing means includes an ending condition setting means for setting one or two or more ending conditions of the second gaming state, and the gaming state changing means is said to be the first until the ending condition of 1 is satisfied or an advantageous state occurs. The second gaming state is configured so that the two gaming states can be maintained, and as the end condition, even when the dynamic display is executed the maximum number of times the game can be executed per day in one gaming machine installed in the gaming hall. There is a specific condition that does not end. As a result, when a specific condition is set as the end condition of the second gaming state, the second gaming state is held until at least one gaming machine executes the maximum number of times the dynamic display can be executed per day. It will be possible to maintain. Therefore, in the gaming machine installed in the gaming hall, when a specific condition is set as the ending condition of the second gaming state, even if the dynamic display of the maximum number of executions that can be executed by the gaming machine is executed, the first is The two gaming states can be maintained, and it is possible to substantially prevent the second gaming state from ending until the next advantageous state occurs. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by realizing the playability according to the game specifications.

In the gaming machine E0
The dynamic display execution means
As the minimum fluctuation time of the dynamic display, the dynamic display can be executed in the first time (for example, "3 seconds").
The specific condition is
The gaming machine E1 characterized in that it is equal to or greater than the value obtained by dividing the business hours of the gaming hall by the first hour.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the dynamic display executing means is configured to be able to execute the dynamic display in the first time as the minimum fluctuation time of the dynamic display, and the specific condition sets the business hours of the game hall to the first time. It is greater than or equal to the value divided by. As a result, when a specific condition is set as the end condition of the second gaming state in the gaming machine installed in the gaming hall, the dynamic display of the maximum number of executions that can be executed by the gaming machine is all in the first hour. Even if it is executed, the second gaming state can be maintained, and it is possible to substantially prevent the second gaming state from ending until the next advantageous state occurs. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by realizing the playability according to the game specifications.

In the gaming machine E0
The specific condition is
The gaming machine E2 is a setting means (for example, a time saving infinite flag) that is maintained until the advantageous state occurs in the second gaming state.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific condition is a setting means that is maintained until the advantageous state occurs in the second gaming state. As a result, when a specific condition is set as the end condition of the second gaming state in the gaming machine installed in the gaming hall, the dynamic display of the maximum number of executions that can be executed by the gaming machine is all in the first hour. Even if it is executed, the second gaming state can be maintained, and it is possible to substantially prevent the second gaming state from ending until the next advantageous state occurs. As a result, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved by realizing the playability according to the game specifications. Further, since it is not necessary to count the number of times the dynamic display is executed, there is an effect that the processing load can be reduced.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E2
An execution number counting means (for example, a special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, a special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, or a total time saving counter 203o) for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state.
When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first game state, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and the end condition setting means causes the second game state. As the end condition of, the first number of times (for example, once) is set in the execution number of times counting means (for example, S6707 of the jackpot end process (S6020) by winning the jackpot type “time saving B”). When,
In the second gaming state, when the second predetermined result (for example, the small hit by the small hit type "time saving J") is derived from the predetermined derivation result by using the determination result by the determination means, the said After the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and as the end condition of the second game state by the end condition setting means, the execution number counting means has more than the first number of times. It is provided with a second number of times setting means (for example, S6707 of the big hit end processing (S6020) by winning the small hit type "time saving J") for setting two times (for example, 100 times).
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the execution number counting means for counting the number of executions of the dynamic display in the second game state and the predetermined derivation result are derived in the first game state, the game state is after the end of the advantageous state. The first number-of-times setting means that shifts to the second gaming state by the changing means and sets the first number of times in the execution count counting means as the end condition of the second game state by the end condition setting means, and the first number-of-times setting means. 2 In the gaming state, when the second predetermined result of the predetermined derivation results is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the second gaming state is performed by the game state changing means after the end of the advantageous state. As the end condition of the second game state by the end condition setting means, the execution number counting means is provided with a second number setting means for setting a second number more than the first number. The dynamic display executing means is configured so that the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times in the second gaming state. As a result, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display is set to the second number of times as the end condition of the second game state by the second number of times setting means, a predetermined derivation result is obtained by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. Since it is possible to easily derive the above, it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine E3
An information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information based on the entry of a game ball into the entry means, and
A storage means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f) for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means is provided.
The storage means
A predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information can be stored in each of the predetermined pieces.
The gaming machine E4, wherein the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the memory is provided with an information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entry means, and a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means. The means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the predetermined information, and the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, when shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state again by deriving the predetermined derivation result within the first number of times, which is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a condition for ending the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be maintained until the dynamic display is executed a second time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of how to derive a predetermined derivation result during the first number of times and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine E4
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine E5, characterized in that the value is larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the gaming machines E0 to E5
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means (for example, a time saving limit) capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine E6 is characterized in that the counter 203k has reached the time saving limit number of times).

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines E0 to E5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number-of-occurrence counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number-of-occurrence counting means, and the number-of-times determining means. When it is determined that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times, the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. It has the effect of improving the interests of.

In the gaming machine E6
The gaming machine E7, wherein the specific number of times is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine E7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine E6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group F: 1 type and 2 types with time saving limiter>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group F has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and
A storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f).
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113).
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game) capable of giving a game value to the player is set. In a gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) that can be generated.
The ball entry means
With the first ball entry means (for example, the first starting port 64),
A second ball-entry changing means (for example, ordinary electric service 72) is provided so that the game ball can be changed into a first state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter and a second state in which the game ball can be entered or is easily entered. It is provided with two ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 71).
The gaming machine
A third ball entry changing means (for example, a small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and a specific area opening / closing) that can change the game ball into a third state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter and a fourth state in which the ball can enter or is easy to enter. A third ball entry means (for example, a specific area (small winning opening unit 73)) provided with a plate 73d) is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
Based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, the first dynamic execution means (for example, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a) capable of executing the first dynamic display in the display means, and
A second dynamic execution means (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b) capable of executing the second dynamic display in the display means based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Prepare,
The third ball entry changing means is
Based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display, the third ball entry means can be easily put into the fourth state from the lottery result in the first dynamic display (for example, the small hit probability in the first special symbol < The small hit probability in the second special symbol and the opening / closing modes of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and the specific area opening / closing plate 73d based on the small hit in each special symbol).
The advantageous state means
When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic execution means. When the third ball entry changing means becomes the fourth state and the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the advantageous state can be generated.
The gaming machine
A game state change that can change the game state between a first game state (for example, a "normal game state") and a second game state (for example, a "time reduction state") that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The means (for example, the time saving flag 203j) is provided.
The second ball entry changing means
The second gaming state is more likely to be the second state than the first gaming state.
The gaming machine
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state (for example, the time-saving limit counter 203k has a time-saving limit. The gaming machine F0 is characterized by having (reached the number of times) and.

According to the gaming machine F0, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a ball entering means when the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. An information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the determination means. When a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means by using the determination result. In addition, the gaming machine is provided with an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player, and the ball entry means is a first ball entry means and a game ball cannot enter. Alternatively, the gaming machine includes a second ball-entry means provided with a second ball-entry changing means capable of changing between a first state in which it is difficult to enter and a second state in which the ball can be entered or is easy to enter. It is equipped with a third ball entry means provided with a third ball entry changing means that can change the game ball into a third state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter and a fourth state in which the ball can enter or is easy to enter. The dynamic display executing means includes a first dynamic executing means capable of executing a first dynamic display in the display means based on the entry of a game ball into the first entering means, and the second entering means. The display means includes a second dynamic execution means capable of executing a second dynamic display based on the entry of the game ball into the ball means, and the third entry changing means is the first motion. Based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display, the third ball entry means can be easily put into the fourth state based on the lottery result in the target display, and the advantageous state means is provided by the first dynamic execution means. When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first dynamic display executed or the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic execution means, the third ball entry changing means When the gaming ball enters the third ball entering means in the fourth state, the advantageous state can be generated, and the gaming machine sets the gaming state to the first gaming state and the first gaming state. The second gaming state is provided with a gaming state changing means capable of changing from a gaming state to a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. The gaming machine is configured to easily enter the second state, and the gaming machine determines the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, which counts the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, and the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number of occurrences counting means. It includes a number-of-times determining means and a specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state when it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times. As a result, an advantageous state can be generated when a predetermined derivation result is derived in the first dynamic display or the second dynamic display, and an advantageous state is also generated when a game ball enters the third ball entry means. It can be generated, and there are many variations that can generate an advantageous state. In addition, the mode of entry into the second entry means can be changed according to the game state, and by suppressing the entry of the game ball into the second entry means, which is not assumed as the game specification, the game is played. Achievement of playability according to specifications. Further, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. As a result, there is an effect that new playability can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that "the third ball entry means is easily configured to be in the fourth state" means, for example, that the lottery result in the first dynamic display is in the fourth state with a predetermined probability, while the lottery result in the second dynamic display. Then, when the fourth state is reached with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, or when the lottery result in the first dynamic display is not the fourth state, but the lottery result in the second dynamic display can be the fourth state, the first action is performed. If the lottery result in the target display is in the 4th state with a predetermined probability, while the lottery result in the 2nd dynamic display is always in the 4th state, the period in which the 4th state is reached based on the lottery result in the 1st dynamic display. Is a predetermined period, while the period in which the fourth state is set based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display is a longer period than the predetermined period, or the fourth is based on the lottery result in the first dynamic display. An example is a case where the number of times the state is set is a predetermined number of times, while the period of the fourth state is a predetermined number of times or more based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display.

Further, "the second game state is more likely to be the second state than the first game state" means, for example, that the first game state has a predetermined probability of becoming the second state, while the second game state has a predetermined probability. If the second state is reached with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, or if the first gaming state is not the second state but the second gaming state can be the second state, the first gaming state is the second state with a predetermined probability. On the other hand, if the second state is always in the second game state, the period in which the second state is in the first game state is a predetermined period, while the period in which the second state is in the second game state is a predetermined period or more. Examples include a case where the period is long, or a case where the number of times the second state is reached in the first gaming state is a predetermined number of times, while the number of times the second state is reached in the second gaming state is a predetermined number of times or more. NS.

Further, the "predetermined derivation result" is a jackpot result in which an advantageous state is directly generated by gathering predetermined identification information, a predetermined identification information is gathered, or a predetermined relevance (for example, the same color symbol, a specific output). A small hit result or the like in which the game ball can enter the third ball entry means by the appearance of the identification information having (eyes, etc.) is exemplified.

In the gaming machine F0
The storage means
A predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information can be stored in each of the predetermined pieces.
The gaming machine F1 characterized in that the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the predetermined information, and the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

In the game machine F1
In the first gaming state, when the predetermined derivation result (for example, the jackpot by the jackpot type "time saving B") is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the process shifts to the second gaming state and at the same time. As the end condition of the second game state, the first number of times (for example, one time) is set in the execution number of times counting means. S6020) with S6707),
The first time is
The gaming machine F2, characterized in that the value is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the first game state, when the predetermined derivation result is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the process shifts to the second game state, and as the end condition of the second game state, The execution number counting means includes a first number setting means for setting the first number, and the first number is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, when shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, it is possible to create a game property of whether or not to derive a predetermined derivation result within the first number of times, which is a value smaller than a predetermined number, and to enjoy the game. It has the effect of being able to improve.

In the game machine F1 or F2
In the second gaming state, when the predetermined derivation result (for example, a small hit by the small hit type "time saving J") is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the process shifts to the second gaming state. At the same time, as the end condition of the second game state, the second number of times setting means (for example, the small hit type "time saving J") is set to set the second number of times (for example, 100 times) larger than the first number of times in the execution number of times counting means. S6707) of the jackpot end processing (S6020) by winning the
The second time is
The gaming machine F3, characterized in that the value is larger than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F0 to F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second game state, when the predetermined derivation result is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the process shifts to the second game state, and as the end condition of the second game state, The execution number counting means includes a second number setting means for setting a second number that is larger than the first number, and the second number is a value larger than the predetermined number. As a result, when the state shifts from the second gaming state to the second gaming state again, the second gaming state does not end until the second number of dynamic displays, which is a value larger than the predetermined number, is performed, and the second gaming state is performed. There is an effect that it is possible to create a game property of whether or not to derive a predetermined derivation result, and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine F3
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. As a result, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display is set to the second number of times as the end condition of the second game state by the second number of times setting means, a predetermined derivation result is obtained by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. Since it is possible to easily derive the above, it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F4
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine F5, characterized in that the value is larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines F1 to F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

<Group G: Button effect that changes over time, physical buttons do not change physically>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the G group has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information, and
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and
By using the determination result of the determination means, the effect execution means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113) for executing the predetermined effect (for example, the variation effect of the special symbol) in the effect means (for example, the third symbol display device 81). )When,
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result) is derived in the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game) capable of imparting a game value to the player is provided. In a gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) that can be generated.
An operating means that can be operated by the player (for example, the frame button 22),
In the effect means, an operable effect executing means (for example, frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1106)) for executing an operable effect (for example, "special button effect") for prompting the player to operate the operation means. ,
During the execution of the operable effect, the operation identification information displaying means for displaying the operation identification information (for example, the special button symbol 81j) imitating the operating means, and the operation identification information displaying means.
With the elapsed time measuring means for measuring the elapsed time of the operable effect (for example, S1405 or S1410 of the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S1106)).
The display mode changing means (for example, the normal state, the first change state, or the second change of the special button symbol 81j) that can change the display mode of the operation identification information by using the measurement result of the elapsed time measuring means. State) and
The display mode changing means
The gaming machine G0, characterized in that the operation identification information is changed into special form identification information that imitates a special form that cannot be changed by the operation means.

According to the gaming machine G0, the effect means by using the information acquisition means capable of acquiring the predetermined information, the determination means for determining the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and the determination result of the determination means. When a predetermined derivation result is derived in the effect executing means for executing the predetermined effect and the predetermined effect executed by the effect executing means, an advantageous state capable of giving a game value to the player can be generated. A gaming machine provided with means, an operating means that can be operated by a player, and an operable effect executing means that executes an operable effect that urges the player to operate the operating means in the effect means. An operation identification information display means for displaying operation identification information imitating the operation means, an elapsed time measuring means for measuring the elapsed time of the operable effect, and the elapsed time measurement during the execution of the operable effect. The display mode changing means capable of changing the display mode of the operation identification information by using the measurement result of the means, and the display mode changing means have the operation identification information and a special form in which the operation means cannot be changed. Change to imitated special form identification information. As a result, the operation means can be changed by changing the operation identification information that imitates the operation means into the special form identification information that imitates the special form that the operation means cannot change according to the elapsed time during the execution of the operable effect. It is possible to give the player the impression that the operating means has changed to the special form without changing to the special form. As a result, there is an effect that the manufacturing cost can be reduced without providing a mechanism for changing the operation means to a special form, and the variation of the production can be enriched to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G0
An expectation degree suggesting means (for example, a change in the lighting color of the frame button 22) capable of suggesting the appearance expectation of the predetermined derivation result in the predetermined effect to the player is provided.
The display mode changing means
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that, in the special form identification information, the expected degree of appearance of the predetermined derivation result can be suggested to the player by the expected degree suggesting means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the expected degree suggesting means capable of suggesting the appearance expectation of the predetermined derivation result in the predetermined effect to the player is provided, and the display mode changing means is provided by the expectation suggesting means in the special form identification information. It is configured so that the appearance expectation of the predetermined derivation result can be suggested to the player. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player the expected degree of appearance of the predetermined derivation result while displaying the special form identification information after a predetermined elapsed time has elapsed in the operable effect, so that the operation can be performed immediately in the operable effect. The playability of advancing the predetermined effect by operating the means, and the operation of the operating means are waited until the special form identification information appears in the operable effect, and the special form identification information is displayed to display the predetermined effect in the predetermined effect. It is possible to create a playability of grasping the degree of expectation of appearance of the derivation result. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine G1
The display mode changing means
The gaming machine G2 is characterized in that the operation identification information does not suggest the appearance expectation of the predetermined derivation result by the expectation suggestion means to the player.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the display mode changing means is configured so that the operation identification information does not suggest the appearance expectation of the predetermined derivation result by the expectation suggestion means to the player. As a result, the appearance reliability of the predetermined derivation result, which does not appear in the operation identification information in the operable effect, is configured to be able to appear in the special form identification information, and a predetermined elapsed time is elapsed in the operable effect to make it special. Since it is possible to suggest to the player the expected degree of appearance of the predetermined derivation result while displaying the form identification information, the playability and the operation of advancing the predetermined effect by immediately operating the operation means in the operable effect. Creates playability by waiting for the operation of the operating means until the special form identification information appears in the possible production, and displaying the special form identification information to grasp the expected appearance of the predetermined derivation result in the predetermined production. can do. As a result, there is an effect that the variation of the game can be enriched and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G2
The special form identification information is
The gaming machine G3, characterized in that the form of the operating means is a physically changed mode.

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special form identification information is a physical change mode in which the form of the operating means is physically changed. As a result, it is possible to give the player the impression that the operating means has changed to the special form without physically changing the operating means to the special form. As a result, there is an effect that the manufacturing cost can be reduced without providing a mechanism for changing the operation means to a special form, and the variation of the production can be enriched to improve the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G3
The operable effect executing means is
The development effect execution means for executing the development effect when the operation means is operated during the execution of the operable effect is provided.
The development production execution means
It is characterized in that the same development means is performed when the operation means is operated when the operation identification information appears and when the operation means is operated when the special form identification information appears. Game machine G4.

According to the gaming machine G4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operable effect executing means includes a development effect executing means for executing the development effect when the operation means is operated during the operation operation execution, and the development effect executing means is the operation identification. It is configured to perform the same development means when the operating means is operated when the information appears and when the operating means is operated when the special form identification information appears. This has the effect of reducing the man-hours required to produce the development production, increasing the variety of production, and improving the interest of the game.

In any of the gaming machines G0 to G3
The operable effect executing means is
The development effect execution means for executing the development effect when the operation means is operated during the execution of the operable effect is provided.
The development production execution means
A game characterized in that different development means are performed depending on whether the operation means is operated when the operation identification information appears and when the operation means is operated when the special form identification information appears. Machine G5.

According to the gaming machine G5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines G0 to G3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operable effect executing means includes a development effect executing means for executing the development effect when the operation means is operated during the operation operation execution, and the development effect executing means is the operation identification. It is configured to perform the development means differently depending on whether the operating means is operated when the information appears and when the operating means is operated when the special form identification information appears. This has the effect of increasing the variety of production and improving the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine G4 or G5
The operable effect executing means is
When the operating means is not operated during the execution of the operable effect, the same development effect as when the operating means is operated when the operation identification information appears can be executed. Game machine G6.

According to the gaming machine G6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G4 or G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the operable effect executing means is the same as the development effect when the operating means is not operated during the execution of the operable effect, the same as when the operating means is operated when the operation identification information appears. Is configured to be executable. As a result, even if the operable effect ends as a result of waiting for whether or not the operation identification information changes to the special form information in the operable effect, the operating means is operated when the operation identification information appears. Since the same development effect as in the case can be executed and the player can be surely recognized the development effect, there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine G4 or G5
The operable effect executing means is
When the operating means is not operated during the execution of the operable effect, the development effect different from the case where the operating means is operated when the operation identification information appears can be executed. Game machine G7 to play.

According to the gaming machine G7, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine G4 or G5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the operation means is not operated during the execution of the operable effect, the operable effect executing means performs the development effect different from the case where the operation means is operated when the operation identification information appears. Configured to be executable. This has the effect of increasing the variety of production and improving the interest of the game.

<Group H: Time saving is not given when V does not pass (no big hit game occurs)>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the H group has been made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and
A storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f).
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113).
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit game) capable of giving a game value to the player is set. In a gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) that can be generated.
The ball entry means
With the first ball entry means (for example, the first starting port 64),
A second ball-entry changing means (for example, ordinary electric service 72) is provided so that the game ball can be changed into a first state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter and a second state in which the game ball can be entered or is easily entered. It is provided with two ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 71).
The gaming machine
A third ball entry changing means (for example, a small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and a specific area opening / closing) that can change the game ball into a third state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter and a fourth state in which the ball can enter or is easy to enter. A third ball entry means (for example, a specific area) provided with a plate 73d) is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
Based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, the first dynamic execution means (for example, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a) capable of executing the first dynamic display in the display means, and
A second dynamic execution means (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b) capable of executing the second dynamic display in the display means based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Prepare,
The third ball entry changing means is
Based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display, the third ball entry means can be easily put into the fourth state from the lottery result in the first dynamic display (for example, the small hit probability in the first special symbol < The small hit probability in the second special symbol and the opening / closing modes of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and the specific area opening / closing plate 73d based on the small hit in each special symbol).
The advantageous state means
When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic execution means. In a gaming machine configured so that the advantageous state can be generated when the third ball entry changing means is in the fourth state and the game ball enters the third ball entry means.
The gaming machine
A game state change that can change the game state between a first game state (for example, a "normal game state") and a second game state (for example, a "time reduction state") that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. The means (for example, the time saving flag 203j) is provided.
The second ball entry changing means
The second gaming state is more likely to be the second state than the first gaming state.
The gaming machine
When the third ball entry changing means is in the fourth state, the second game ending means (for example, the second game ending means) that ends the second game state by not allowing the game ball to enter the third ball entering means. The gaming machine H0 is characterized by having a special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q and a "special figure 2 small hit" once to complete the "time reduction function").

According to the gaming machine H0, when a launching means capable of launching a gaming ball, a ball entering means capable of entering a gaming ball launched by the launching means, and a gaming ball entering the ball entering means, An information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the determination means. When a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means by using the determination result. In addition, the gaming machine is provided with an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player, and the ball entry means is a first ball entry means and a game ball cannot enter. Alternatively, the gaming machine includes a second ball-entry means provided with a second ball-entry changing means capable of changing between a first state in which it is difficult to enter and a second state in which the ball can be entered or is easy to enter. It is equipped with a third ball entry means provided with a third ball entry changing means that can change the game ball into a third state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter and a fourth state in which the ball can enter or is easy to enter. The dynamic display executing means includes a first dynamic executing means capable of executing a first dynamic display in the display means based on the entry of a game ball into the first entering means, and the second entering means. The display means includes a second dynamic execution means capable of executing a second dynamic display based on the entry of the game ball into the ball means, and the third entry changing means is the first motion. Based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display, the third ball entry means can be easily put into the fourth state based on the lottery result in the target display, and the advantageous state means is provided by the first dynamic execution means. When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first dynamic display executed or the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic execution means, the third ball entry changing means When the gaming ball enters the third ball entering means in the fourth state, the advantageous state can be generated, and the gaming machine sets the gaming state to the first gaming state and the first gaming state. The second gaming state is provided with a gaming state changing means capable of changing from a gaming state to a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player. The game machine is configured to easily enter the second state, and when the third ball entry changing means is in the fourth state, the gaming machine does not allow the game ball to enter the third ball entry means, so that the second state is likely to occur. The second game that ends the game state It has a means of termination. As a result, even though the game ball can enter the third ball entry means, the game value is not intended as a game specification by intentionally not allowing the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. It is possible to prevent the grant. As a result, there is an effect that the player can play the game according to the game specifications and the interest of the game can be improved.

It should be noted that "the third ball entry means is easily configured to be in the fourth state" means, for example, that the lottery result in the first dynamic display is in the fourth state with a predetermined probability, while the lottery result in the second dynamic display. Then, when the fourth state is reached with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, or when the lottery result in the first dynamic display is not the fourth state, but the lottery result in the second dynamic display can be the fourth state, the first action is performed. If the lottery result in the target display is in the 4th state with a predetermined probability, while the lottery result in the 2nd dynamic display is always in the 4th state, the period in which the 4th state is reached based on the lottery result in the 1st dynamic display. Is a predetermined period, while the period in which the fourth state is set based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display is a longer period than the predetermined period, or the fourth is based on the lottery result in the first dynamic display. An example is a case where the number of times the state is set is a predetermined number of times, while the period of the fourth state is a predetermined number of times or more based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display.

Further, "the second game state is more likely to be the second state than the first game state" means, for example, that the first game state has a predetermined probability of becoming the second state, while the second game state has a predetermined probability. If the second state is reached with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, or if the first gaming state is not the second state but the second gaming state can be the second state, the first gaming state is the second state with a predetermined probability. On the other hand, if the second state is always in the second game state, the period in which the second state is in the first game state is a predetermined period, while the period in which the second state is in the second game state is a predetermined period or more. Examples include a case where the period is long, or a case where the number of times the second state is reached in the first gaming state is a predetermined number of times, while the number of times the second state is reached in the second gaming state is a predetermined number of times or more. NS.

Further, the "predetermined derivation result" is a jackpot result in which an advantageous state is directly generated by gathering predetermined identification information, a predetermined identification information is gathered, or a predetermined relevance (for example, the same color symbol, a specific output). A small hit result or the like in which the game ball can enter the third ball entry means by the appearance of the identification information having (eyes, etc.) is exemplified.

In the gaming machine H0
The advantageous state means
The gaming machine H1 is characterized in that when the third ball-entry changing means is in the fourth state and the gaming ball is not inserted into the third ball-entry means, the advantageous state is not generated.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means does not generate the advantageous state when the third ball entry changing means is in the fourth state and the game ball is not inserted into the third ball entry means. It is composed of. As a result, even though the game ball can enter the third ball entry means, the game value is not intended as a game specification by intentionally not allowing the game ball to enter the third ball entry means. It is possible to prevent the granting and prevent an advantageous state from occurring. As a result, there is an effect that the player can play the game according to the game specifications and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine H0 or H1
An execution number counting means (for example, a special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, a special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, or a total time saving counter 203o) for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state.
In the second game state, the end means for ending the second game state according to the number of executions of the dynamic display counted by the execution number counting means (for example, the time saving flag 203j is turned off).
In the first gaming state, when the predetermined derivation result (for example, the jackpot by the jackpot type "time saving B") is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the gaming state is completed after the end of the advantageous state. A first number-of-times setting means that shifts to the second gaming state by the changing means and sets the first number of times (for example, one time) in the execution number-of-times counting means as an end condition of the second game state by the end means. (For example, S6707 of the jackpot end processing (S6020) by winning the jackpot type "time saving B") and
In the second gaming state, when the predetermined derivation result (for example, a small hit by the small hit type "time saving J") is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, after the end of the advantageous state, the said The game state changing means shifts to the second gaming state, and as a condition for ending the second gaming state by the ending means, the execution number counting means has a second number of times (for example, 100 times) that is larger than the first number of times. (For example, S6707 of the big hit end processing (S6020) by winning the small hit type "time saving J") is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine H2 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine H2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H0 or H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, according to the execution count counting means for counting the number of executions of the dynamic display in the second game state and the number of executions of the dynamic display counted by the execution count counting means in the second game state. When the predetermined derivation result is derived by using the ending means for terminating the second gaming state and the determination result by the determining means in the first gaming state, the gaming state is performed after the end of the advantageous state. The first number of times setting means for setting the first number of times in the execution number counting means and the second game as the end condition of the second game state by the changing means while shifting to the second game state. In the state, when the predetermined derivation result is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second gaming state and the end means. As the end condition of the second game state according to the above, the second number of times setting means for setting the second number of times larger than the first number of times is provided in the execution number of times counting means, and the dynamic display execution means is the second. In the game state, it is configured so that the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived by the time when the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. As a result, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display is set to the second number of times as the end condition of the second game state by the second number of times setting means, a predetermined derivation result is obtained by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. Since it is possible to easily derive the above, it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the game machine H2
The storage means
A predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information can be stored in each of the predetermined pieces.
The gaming machine H3, wherein the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the predetermined information, and the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, when shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state again by deriving the predetermined derivation result within the first number of times, which is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a condition for ending the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be maintained until the dynamic display is executed a second time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of how to derive a predetermined derivation result during the first number of times and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine H3
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine H4, characterized in that the value is larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine H4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the gaming machines H0 to H4
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means (for example, a time saving limit) capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that the counter 203k has reached the time saving limit number of times).

According to the gaming machine H5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines H0 to H4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number-of-occurrence counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number-of-occurrence counting means, and the number-of-times determining means. When it is determined that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times, the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. It has the effect of improving the interests of.

In the gaming machine H5
The gaming machine H6, wherein the specific number of times is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine H6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine H5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group I: V attacker → electric chew → attacker>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Group I was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of gaming.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and
A storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f).
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113).
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display execution means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that can give a game value to the player In a gaming machine provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of generating a game).
The ball entry means
With the first ball entry means (for example, the first starting port 64),
A second ball-entry changing means (for example, ordinary electric service 72) is provided so that the game ball can be changed into a first state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter and a second state in which the game ball can be entered or is easily entered. It is provided with two ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 71).
The gaming machine
A third ball entry changing means (for example, a small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and a specific area opening / closing) that can change the game ball into a third state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter and a fourth state in which the ball can enter or is easy to enter. A third ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening unit 73, a specific area) provided with a plate 73d),
A fourth ball entry changing means that can be changed into a fifth state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter and a sixth state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter during the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. A fourth ball-entry means (for example, a variable winning device 65) provided with (for example, a large winning opening opening / closing plate 65a) is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
Based on the entry of the game ball into the first entry means, the first dynamic execution means (for example, the special figure 1 fluctuation start flag 223a) capable of executing the first dynamic display in the display means, and
A second dynamic execution means (for example, special figure 2 fluctuation start flag 223b) capable of executing the second dynamic display in the display means based on the entry of the game ball into the second ball entry means. Prepare,
The third ball entry changing means is
Based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display, the third ball entry means can be easily put into the fourth state from the lottery result in the first dynamic display (for example, the small hit probability in the first special symbol < The small hit probability in the second special symbol and the opening / closing modes of the small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and the specific area opening / closing plate 73d based on the small hit in each special symbol).
The advantageous state means
When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic execution means. When the third ball entry changing means becomes the fourth state and the game ball enters the third ball entry means, the advantageous state can be generated.
The gaming machine
A gaming machine I0, wherein the third ball-entry means is arranged on the upstream side of the second ball-entry means and the fourth ball-entry means in a game area where a game ball can flow down.

According to the gaming machine I0, when the launching means capable of launching the gaming ball, the ball entering means capable of entering the gaming ball launched by the launching means, and the gaming ball entering the ball entering means, An information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the determination means. When a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means by using the determination result. In addition, the gaming machine is provided with an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player, and the ball entry means is a first ball entry means and a game ball cannot enter. Alternatively, the gaming machine includes a second ball-entry means provided with a second ball-entry changing means capable of changing between a first state in which it is difficult to enter and a second state in which the ball can be entered or is easy to enter. A third ball-entry means provided with a third ball-entry changing means capable of changing between a third state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter and a fourth state in which the ball can be entered or is easy to enter, and a game ball. A fourth ball entry changing means is provided, which can be changed into a fifth state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter, and a sixth state in which the game ball can or is easily entered during the advantageous state by the advantageous state means. The dynamic display executing means can execute the first dynamic display in the display means based on the entry of the game ball into the first ball entering means. The first dynamic execution means and the second dynamic execution means capable of executing the second dynamic display in the display means based on the entry of the game ball into the second entry means are provided. The third ball-entry changing means is configured to easily put the third ball-entry means into the fourth state based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display rather than the lottery result in the first dynamic display, which is advantageous. In the state means, the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first dynamic display executed by the first dynamic execution means or the second dynamic display executed by the second dynamic execution means. In this case, the third ball-entry changing means becomes the fourth state, and the gaming ball enters the third ball-entry means, so that the advantageous state can be generated. In the game area where the game ball can flow down, the third ball entry means is arranged on the upstream side of the second ball entry means and the fourth ball entry means. As a result, when the third ball entry means, which causes an advantageous state when the game ball enters, is arranged on the most upstream side, and the third ball entry means is in a state where the ball can enter, another entry means is provided. Since the ball means is in a ball-entry state, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event in which it becomes difficult for the game ball to enter the third ball-entry means. Therefore, by appropriately arranging the ball-entry means that the player wants to enter and the ball-entry means that he does not want to enter as the game specification for each game state, it is possible to realize the game according to the game specification and as the game specification. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the entry of a ball into an unexpected entry means, realize the playability according to the game specifications, and improve the interest of the game.

It should be noted that "the third ball entry means is easily configured to be in the fourth state" means, for example, that the lottery result in the first dynamic display is in the fourth state with a predetermined probability, while the lottery result in the second dynamic display. Then, when the fourth state is reached with a higher probability than the predetermined probability, or when the lottery result in the first dynamic display is not the fourth state, but the lottery result in the second dynamic display can be the fourth state, the first action is performed. If the lottery result in the target display is in the 4th state with a predetermined probability, while the lottery result in the 2nd dynamic display is always in the 4th state, the period in which the 4th state is reached based on the lottery result in the 1st dynamic display. Is a predetermined period, while the period in which the fourth state is set based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display is a longer period than the predetermined period, or the fourth is based on the lottery result in the first dynamic display. An example is a case where the number of times the state is set is a predetermined number of times, while the period of the fourth state is a predetermined number of times or more based on the lottery result in the second dynamic display.

In the gaming machine I0
A gaming machine I1 characterized in that the second ball-entry means is arranged on the upstream side of the fourth ball-entry means.

According to the gaming machine I1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second ball entry means is arranged on the upstream side of the fourth ball entry means. As a result, when the second ball entry means is in the ball entry state, the fourth ball entry means is in the ball entry state, which makes it difficult for the game ball to enter the second ball entry means. Can be prevented from occurring. Further, for example, in the case of a gaming state in which it is not desired to allow the game ball to enter the fourth ball entry means, the second ball entry means is set to be in a ball-entry state and the entry into the fourth ball entry means is hindered. It is possible to suppress an unexpected entry into the fourth entry means. Therefore, by appropriately arranging the ball-entry means that the player wants to enter and the ball-entry means that he does not want to enter as the game specification for each game state, it is possible to realize the game according to the game specification and as the game specification. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the entry of a ball into an unexpected entry means, realize the playability according to the game specifications, and improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine I0 or I1
An execution number counting means (for example, a special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, a special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, or a total time saving counter 203o) for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state.
When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first game state, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and as the end condition of the second game state, the said The first number of times setting means (for example, S6707 of the jackpot end processing (S6020) by winning the jackpot type "time saving B") for setting the first number of times (for example, once) in the execution count counting means, and
In the second gaming state, when the second predetermined result (for example, the small hit by the small hit type "time saving J") is derived from the predetermined derivation result by using the determination result by the determination means, the said After the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and as a condition for ending the second game state, the execution number counting means has a second number of times (for example, 100) that is larger than the first number of times. A second number of times setting means (for example, S6707 of the big hit end process (S6020) by winning the small hit type "time saving J") is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine I2 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I0 or I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the execution number counting means for counting the number of executions of the dynamic display in the second game state and the predetermined derivation result are derived in the first game state, the game state is after the end of the advantageous state. In the second game state, the first number setting means for setting the first number of times in the execution number counting means and the second game state as the end condition of the second game state while shifting to the second game state by the changing means. When the second predetermined result of the predetermined derivation results is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, after the end of the advantageous state, the game state changing means shifts to the second gaming state and the said As the end condition of the second game state, the execution number counting means includes a second number setting means for setting a second number more than the first number, and the dynamic display execution means is the second game state. In the above, it is configured so that the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived by the time when the dynamic display is executed the second time. As a result, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display is set to the second number of times as the end condition of the second game state by the second number of times setting means, a predetermined derivation result is obtained by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. Since it is possible to easily derive the above, it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and there is an effect that the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine I2
The storage means
A predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information can be stored in each of the predetermined pieces.
The gaming machine I3, wherein the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means is configured to be able to store a predetermined number of the predetermined information, and the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, when shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state again by deriving the predetermined derivation result within the first number of times, which is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a condition for ending the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be maintained until the dynamic display is executed a second time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of how to derive a predetermined derivation result during the first number of times and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine I3
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine I4, characterized in that the value is larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine I4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the gaming machines I0 to I4
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means (for example, a time saving limit) capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine I5 is characterized in that the counter 203k has reached the time saving limit number of times).

According to the gaming machine I5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines I0 to I4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number-of-occurrence counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number-of-occurrence counting means, and the number-of-times determining means. When it is determined that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times, the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. It has the effect of improving the interests of.

In the game machine I5
The gaming machine I6, wherein the specific number of times is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine I6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine I5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group J: Multiple patterns of time saving end conditions based on the number of small hits of special symbols>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the J group was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and
A storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f).
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113).
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that can give a game value to the player It is provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of generating a game).
The storage means
In a gaming machine configured to be able to store a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information.
A game state change that can change the game state between a first game state (for example, a "normal game state") and a second game state (for example, a "time reduction state") that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Means (for example, time saving flag 203j) and
End condition setting means for setting the end condition of the second game state (for example, special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, total time saving counter 203o, special drawing 1 small hit time saving counter 203p, or special drawing 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q)
The ball entry means
With the first ball entry means (for example, the first starting port 64),
A second ball-entry changing means (for example, ordinary electric service 72) is provided so that the game ball can be changed into a first state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter and a second state in which the game ball can be entered or is easily entered. It is provided with two ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 71).
The gaming machine
A third ball entry changing means (for example, a small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and a specific area opening / closing) that can change the game ball into a third state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter and a fourth state in which the ball can enter or is easy to enter. A third ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening unit 73, a specific area) provided with a plate 73d) is provided.
The end condition setting means
A fourth state counting means (for example, special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p or special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q) for counting the number of times of the fourth state in which the third ball entry changing means is in the fourth state.
The gaming machine J0 includes a fourth state number setting means for setting the fourth state number of times to end the second gaming state differently according to the type of the predetermined derivation result.

According to the gaming machine J0, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a ball entering means when the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. An information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the determination means. When a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means by using the determination result. The storage means is a gaming machine configured to be capable of storing a predetermined number of the predetermined information, respectively, comprising an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player. A gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state to a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and an ending condition setting means for setting the ending condition of the second gaming state. The ball-entry means can be changed into a first ball-entry means, a first state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and a second state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter. The gaming machine includes a second ball-entry means provided with two ball-entry changing means, and the gaming machine has a third state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter, and a fourth state in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter. A third ball-entry means provided with a third ball-entry changing means that can be changed, and the end condition setting means is the number of times of the fourth state in which the third ball-entry changing means is in the fourth state. A fourth state counting means for counting the number of states, and a fourth state number setting means for setting the number of times of the fourth state for ending the second gaming state differently according to the type of the predetermined derivation result. There is. As a result, by making the number of times of the fourth state of the third ball entry means for terminating the second advantageous state different according to the type of the predetermined derivation result, for example, the third ball entry means is the fourth in the second gaming state. In the case of a state, the game ball is put into the third ball entry means to generate an advantageous state, or the second game state ends without letting the game ball enter the third ball entry means. It is possible to create a game property such as whether to continue the second game state while there is a risk. As a result, there is an effect that new playability can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J0
Preliminary suggestion means (for example, hold look-ahead notice) that suggests the determination result of the determination means in the predetermined information stored in the storage means to the player before the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. The gaming machine J1 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine J1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is provided with a prior suggestion means that suggests the determination result of the determination means in the predetermined information stored in the storage means to the player before the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. As a result, when the third ball entry means is in the fourth state in the second game state, the game ball is sent to the third ball entry means while checking the determination result before the execution of the dynamic display by the prior suggestion means. The second game state is continued and continued while there is a possibility that the second game state may end without entering the game ball into the third ball entry means to generate an advantageous state by entering the ball. The player can choose whether to maintain the second gaming state until the granting of the advantageous state occurs. As a result, there is an effect that new playability can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine J0 or J1
An execution number counting means (for example, a special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, a special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, or a total time saving counter 203o) for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state.
When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first game state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and the end condition setting means sets the end condition of the second game state. The first number of times setting means (for example, S6707 of the jackpot end processing (S6020) by winning the jackpot type "time saving B") for setting the first number of times (for example, one time) in the execution count counting means, and
In the second gaming state, when the second predetermined result (for example, the small hit by the small hit type "time saving J") is derived from the predetermined derivation result by using the determination result by the determination means, the said The game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and as the end condition of the second game state by the end condition setting means, the second number of times (for example, 100) is larger than the first number of times in the execution number counting means. A second number of times setting means (for example, S6707 of the big hit end process (S6020) by winning the small hit type "time saving J") is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine J2 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine J2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J0 or J1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second game state changing means when the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first game state and the execution number counting means for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state. In the second game state, the first number setting means for setting the first number of times in the execution number counting means as the end condition of the second game state by the end condition setting means while shifting to the game state, and the second game state. When the second predetermined result of the predetermined derivation results is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the game state changing means shifts to the second gaming state, and the end condition setting means causes the above. As the end condition of the second game state, the execution number counting means includes a second number setting means for setting a second number more than the first number, and the dynamic display execution means is the second game state. In the above, it is configured so that the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived by the time when the dynamic display is executed the second time. As a result, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display is set to the second number of times as the end condition of the second game state by the second number of times setting means, a predetermined derivation result is obtained by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. Since it is possible to easily derive the above, it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by making the number of times of the fourth state of the third ball entry means for terminating the second advantageous state different according to the type of the predetermined derivation result, for example, the occurrence of the advantageous state in the second gaming state is substantially guaranteed. When the third ball entry means is in the fourth state in the situation where the ball is entered, the game ball is inserted into the third ball entry means to generate an advantageous state, or the game ball is inserted into the third ball entry means. It is possible to create a game property of whether to continue the second game state while there is a possibility that the second game state may end without making the ball. As a result, there is an effect that new playability can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J2
The gaming machine J3, wherein the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine J3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J0 to J2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, when shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state again by deriving the predetermined derivation result within the first number of times, which is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a condition for ending the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be maintained until the dynamic display is executed a second time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of how to derive a predetermined derivation result during the first number of times and to improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine J3
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine J4, characterized in that the value is larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine J4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the gaming machines J0 to J4
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means (for example, a time saving limit) capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine J5 is characterized in that the counter 203k has reached the time saving limit number of times).

According to the gaming machine J5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines J0 to J4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number-of-occurrence counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number-of-occurrence counting means, and the number-of-times determining means. When it is determined that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times, the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. It has the effect of improving the interests of.

In the gaming machine J5
The gaming machine J6, wherein the specific number of times is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine J6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine J5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

<Group K: Time saving end condition based on the number of small hits of special symbols is set twice or more>
Conventionally, there is a gaming machine that generates a hit state based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and pays a predetermined gaming medium to a player according to the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition during the corresponding or state.

In this gaming machine, at least a predetermined first gaming state (for example, a low probability state of a special symbol, a low probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) and a second gaming state (for example, a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state). , A high-probability state of a special symbol, a high-probability state of a normal symbol, etc.) (For example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2019-093308)).

However, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is necessary to improve the interest of the game and increase the player's motivation to play, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of the J group was made in view of the above-exemplified circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of the game.

A launching means capable of launching a game ball (for example, a ball launching unit 112a) and
An entry means (for example, a second starting port 71) capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and
Information acquisition means (for example, start winning process (S208)) capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means, and
A storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means (for example, a first reserved ball storage area 203d, a second reserved ball storage area 203e, or a reserved ball execution area 203f).
A determination means (for example, MPU201) for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the display means (for example, the third symbol display device 81) executes the dynamic display of the identification information, and the dynamic display execution means (for example, the voice lamp control device 113).
When a predetermined derivation result (for example, a big hit result or a small hit result) is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, an advantageous state (for example, a big hit) that can give a game value to the player It is provided with an advantageous state means (for example, hit processing (S203)) capable of generating a game).
The storage means
In a gaming machine configured to be able to store a predetermined number (for example, 4) of the predetermined information.
A game state change that can change the game state between a first game state (for example, a "normal game state") and a second game state (for example, a "time reduction state") that is more advantageous to the player than the first game state. Means (for example, time saving flag 203j) and
End condition setting means for setting the end condition of the second game state (for example, special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, total time saving counter 203o, special drawing 1 small hit time saving counter 203p, or special drawing 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q)
The ball entry means
With the first ball entry means (for example, the first starting port 64),
A second ball-entry changing means (for example, ordinary electric service 72) is provided so that the game ball can be changed into a first state in which the ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter and a second state in which the game ball can be entered or is easily entered. It is provided with two ball entry means (for example, a second starting port 71).
The gaming machine
A third ball entry changing means (for example, a small winning opening opening / closing plate 73a and a specific area opening / closing) that can change the game ball into a third state in which the ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter and a fourth state in which the ball can enter or is easy to enter. A third ball entry means (for example, a small winning opening unit 73, a specific area) provided with a plate 73d) is provided.
The end condition setting means
A fourth state counting means (for example, special figure 1 small hit time reduction counter 203p or special figure 2 small hit time reduction counter 203q) for counting the number of times of the fourth state in which the third ball entry changing means is in the fourth state.
It is characterized by comprising a fourth state number setting means for setting a value of at least two times or more as the fourth state number of times to end the second game state according to the type of the predetermined derivation result. Game machine K0.

According to the gaming machine K0, a launching means capable of launching a game ball, a ball entering means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launching means, and a ball entering means when the gaming ball enters the ball entering means. An information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information, a storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, a determination means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and the determination means. When a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display executing means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means and the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means by using the determination result. The storage means is a gaming machine configured to be capable of storing a predetermined number of the predetermined information, respectively, comprising an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player. A gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state to a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state, and an ending condition setting means for setting the ending condition of the second gaming state. The ball-entry means can be changed into a first ball-entry means, a first state in which the game ball cannot enter or is difficult to enter, and a second state in which the game ball can enter or is easy to enter. The gaming machine includes a second ball-entry means provided with two ball-entry changing means, and the gaming machine has a third state in which the game ball cannot be entered or is difficult to enter, and a fourth state in which the game ball can be entered or is easy to enter. A third ball-entry means provided with a third ball-entry changing means that can be changed, and the end condition setting means is the number of times of the fourth state in which the third ball-entry changing means is in the fourth state. A fourth state counting means for counting the number of times, and a fourth state number setting means for setting a value of at least two times or more as the fourth state number of times to end the second gaming state according to the type of the predetermined derivation result. , Is equipped. As a result, by setting the number of times of the fourth state of the third ball entry means for terminating the second advantageous state to at least two times or more according to the type of the predetermined derivation result, for example, in the second gaming state, the predetermined information can be obtained. When the third ball entry means becomes the first fourth state in a situation where the number of memories is small, the second game state ends immediately when the game ball cannot be entered into the third ball entry means. It is possible to prevent this from happening. As a result, it is possible to suppress the phenomenon that the second game state ends when the number of stored predetermined information is small, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game without inflicting an unexpected disadvantage on the player. It has the effect of being able to.

In the gaming machine J0
Preliminary suggestion means (for example, hold look-ahead notice) that suggests the determination result of the determination means in the predetermined information stored in the storage means to the player before the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. The gaming machine K1 characterized by being equipped with.

According to the gaming machine K1, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is provided with a prior suggestion means that suggests the determination result of the determination means in the predetermined information stored in the storage means to the player before the execution of the dynamic display by the dynamic display execution means. As a result, when the third ball entry means is in the fourth state in the second game state, the game ball is sent to the third ball entry means while checking the determination result before the execution of the dynamic display by the prior suggestion means. The second game state is continued and continued while there is a possibility that the second game state may end without entering the game ball into the third ball entry means to generate an advantageous state by entering the ball. The player can choose whether to maintain the second gaming state until the granting of the advantageous state occurs. As a result, there is an effect that new playability can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the gaming machine K0 or K1
An execution number counting means (for example, a special figure 1 time saving counter 203m, a special figure 2 time saving counter 203n, or a total time saving counter 203o) for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state.
When the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first game state, the game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and the end condition setting means sets the end condition of the second game state. The first number of times setting means (for example, S6707 of the jackpot end processing (S6020) by winning the jackpot type "time saving B") for setting the first number of times (for example, one time) in the execution count counting means, and
In the second gaming state, when the second predetermined result (for example, the small hit by the small hit type "time saving J") is derived from the predetermined derivation result by using the determination result by the determination means, the said The game state changing means shifts to the second game state, and as the end condition of the second game state by the end condition setting means, the second number of times (for example, 100) is larger than the first number of times in the execution number counting means. A second number of times setting means (for example, S6707 of the big hit end process (S6020) by winning the small hit type "time saving J") is provided.
The dynamic display execution means
The gaming machine K2 is characterized in that, in the second gaming state, it is easy to derive the predetermined derivation result by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times.

According to the gaming machine K2, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K0 or K1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second game state changing means when the predetermined derivation result is derived in the first game state and the execution number counting means for counting the number of times the dynamic display is executed in the second game state. In the second game state, the first number setting means for setting the first number of times in the execution number counting means as the end condition of the second game state by the end condition setting means while shifting to the game state, and the second game state. When the second predetermined result of the predetermined derivation results is derived by using the determination result by the determination means, the game state changing means shifts to the second gaming state, and the end condition setting means causes the above. As the end condition of the second game state, the execution number counting means includes a second number setting means for setting a second number more than the first number, and the dynamic display execution means is the second game state. In the above, it is configured so that the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived by the time when the dynamic display is executed the second time. As a result, when the number of times of execution of the dynamic display is set to the second number of times as the end condition of the second game state by the second number of times setting means, a predetermined derivation result is obtained by the time the dynamic display is executed the second number of times. Since it is possible to easily derive the above, it is possible to give a continuous advantageous state, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, by making the number of times of the fourth state of the third ball entry means for terminating the second advantageous state different according to the type of the predetermined derivation result, for example, the occurrence of the advantageous state in the second gaming state is substantially guaranteed. When the third ball entry means is in the fourth state in the situation where the ball is entered, the game ball is inserted into the third ball entry means to generate an advantageous state, or the game ball is inserted into the third ball entry means. It is possible to create a game property of whether to continue the second game state while there is a possibility that the second game state may end without making the ball. As a result, there is an effect that new playability can be created and the interest of the game can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines K0 to K2
The gaming machine K3, wherein the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine K3, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines K0 to K2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, when shifting from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, the gaming state is shifted to the second gaming state again by deriving the predetermined derivation result within the first number of times, which is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a condition for ending the second gaming state, the second gaming state can be maintained until the dynamic display is executed a second time. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to create a playability of how to derive a predetermined derivation result during the first number of times and to improve the interest of the game.

In the gaming machine K3
The advantageous state means
In the second gaming state, it is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n.
The predetermined number is
The gaming machine K4, characterized in that the value is larger than the n value.

According to the gaming machine K4, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the advantageous state means is configured to derive the predetermined derivation result at 1 / n in the second gaming state, and the predetermined number is a value larger than the n value. As a result, in a predetermined number of dynamic displays that can be stored in the storage means during the second game state, the predetermined derivation result can be easily derived, so that a continuous advantageous state can be given, and the game can be given a continuous advantageous state. It has the effect of improving the interest.

In any of the gaming machines K0 to K4
An occurrence number counting means (for example, a time saving limit counter 203k) for counting the occurrence number of the second gaming state, and
The number of times determination means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the occurrence number counting means (for example, S6705 of the jackpot end processing (S6020)) and
When it is determined by the number-of-times determining means that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times (for example, three times), the specific generating means (for example, a time saving limit) capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state ends. The gaming machine K5 is characterized in that the counter 203k has reached the time saving limit number of times).

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machines K0 to K4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the number-of-occurrence counting means for counting the number of occurrences of the second gaming state, the number-of-times determining means for determining the number of occurrences of the second gaming state counted by the number-of-occurrence counting means, and the number-of-times determining means. When it is determined that the second gaming state has occurred a specific number of times, the specific generating means capable of generating the first gaming state after the end of the advantageous state is provided. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. It has the effect of improving the interests of.

In the gaming machine K5
The gaming machine K6, wherein the specific number of times is smaller than the predetermined number.

According to the gaming machine K6, in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine K5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific number of times is a value smaller than the predetermined number. As a result, it is possible to suppress the continuous occurrence of the second game state to a predetermined number or less, and it is possible to give the player an appropriate game value as a game while suppressing the excessive addition of the game value. Since it can be done, it has the effect of improving the interest of the game.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines A0 to A7, the gaming machines AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F5, G0 to 0. A configuration limited to any one of G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, K0 to K6 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines AA0 to AA7, the gaming machines A0 to A7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F5, G0 to 0. A configuration limited to any one of G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, K0 to K6 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines B0 to B6, the gaming machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F5, G0 to 0 The configuration limited to any one of G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J, and K0 to K66 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines BB0 to BB6, the gaming machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F5, G0 to 0 A configuration limited to any one of G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, K0 to K6 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines C0 to C10, the gaming machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F5, G0 to 0 A configuration limited to any one of G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, K0 to K6 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines D0 to D8, the gaming machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, E0 to E7, F0 to F5, G0 to 0 A configuration limited to any one of G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, K0 to K6 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines E0 to E7, the gaming machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, F0 to F5, G0 to 0 A configuration limited to any one of G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, K0 to K6 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines F0 to F5, the gaming machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, G0 to 0 A configuration limited to any one of G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, K0 to K6 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines G0 to G7, the gaming machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to 0 The configuration limited to any one of F5, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, K0 to K6 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines H0 to H6, the gaming machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to 0 The configuration limited to any one of F5, G0 to G7, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, K0 to K6 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines I0 to I6, the gaming machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to 0 The configuration limited to any one of F5, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, J0 to J6, K0 to K6 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines J0 to J6, the gaming machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to 0 A configuration limited to any one of F5, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, and K0 to K6 may be applied.

For any of the configurations of the gaming machines K0 to K6, the gaming machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to 0 The configuration limited to any one of F5, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F5, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, In any of K0 to K6, the gaming machine X1 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

Pachinko machines A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F5, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, In any of K0 to K6, the gaming machine X2 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

A0 to A7, AA0 to AA7, B0 to B6, BB0 to BB6, C0 to C10, D0 to D8, E0 to E7, F0 to F5, G0 to G7, H0 to H6, I0 to I6, J0 to J6, In any of K0 to K6, the gaming machine X3 is characterized in that the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
22 Frame button (part of operation means)
64 First starting port (part of ball entry means, part of first ball entry means)
65 Variable winning device (part of the 4th ball winning means)
65a Grand prize opening opening / closing plate (part of the 4th ball entry changing means)
71 Second starting port (part of ball entry means, part of second ball entry means)
72 Ordinary electric service (part of change means, part of second ball entry change means)
73 Small winning opening unit (part of the third ball entry means)
73a Small winning opening opening / closing plate (part of the third ball entry changing means)
73d Specific area opening / closing plate (part of the third ball entry changing means)
73f Specific area switch (part of ball entry means, part of third ball entry means)
81 Third symbol display device (part of display means)
81j Special button design (part of operation identification information, part of display mode changing means)
112a Ball launch unit (part of launch means)
113 Voice lamp control device (part of dynamic display execution means)
201 MPU (part of judgment means)
203d 1st reserved ball storage area (part of storage means, part of pre-execution information storage means)
203e Second reserved ball storage area (part of storage means, part of pre-execution information storage means)
203f Hold ball execution area (part of storage means, part of running information storage means)
203j Time saving flag (part of game state changing means, part of ending means)
203k time saving limit counter (part of the means for counting the number of occurrences, part of the means for specifying the number of occurrences)
203m Special figure 1 Time saving counter (part of execution count counting means, part of count counting means, part of end condition setting means)
203n Special Figure 2 Time saving counter (part of execution count counting means, part of count counting means, part of end condition setting means)
203o Total time reduction counter (part of execution count counting means, part of count counting means, part of end condition setting means)
203p Special Figure 1 Small hit time reduction counter (part of the second game ending means, part of the ending condition setting means, part of the fourth state counting means)
203q Special Figure 2 Small hit time reduction counter (part of the second game ending means, part of the ending condition setting means, part of the fourth state counting means)
223a Special Figure 1 Fluctuation start flag (part of dynamic display execution means, part of second dynamic execution means)
223b Special figure 2 Fluctuation start flag (part of dynamic display execution means, part of second dynamic execution means)
Processing per S203 (part of advantageous state means)
S208 Start winning process (part of information acquisition means)
S1106 Frame button input monitoring / effect processing (part of operable effect execution means)
S1214 Hold confirmation processing (part of storage number determination means, part of predetermined number determination means, part of launch promotion effect execution means)
S1405 (part of elapsed time measuring means)
S1410 (part of elapsed time measuring means)
S6705 (part of the number of times determination means)
S6707 (part of the first number setting means, part of the second number setting means, part of the end condition setting means)

Claims (1)

A launching means that can launch a game ball,
An entry means capable of entering a game ball launched by the launch means, and a ball entry means.
An information acquisition means capable of acquiring predetermined information when a game ball enters the ball entry means,
A storage means for storing the predetermined information acquired by the information acquisition means, and a storage means for storing the predetermined information.
A determination means for determining the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and
By using the determination result by the determination means, the dynamic display execution means for executing the dynamic display of the identification information in the display means, and the dynamic display execution means.
When a predetermined derivation result is derived in the dynamic display executed by the dynamic display executing means, an advantageous state means capable of generating an advantageous state capable of imparting a game value to the player is provided.
The storage means
In a gaming machine configured to store a predetermined number of the predetermined information, respectively.
A gaming state changing means capable of changing the gaming state to a first gaming state and a second gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state.
In the second gaming state, a storage number determining means for determining the number of the predetermined information stored in the storage means, and a storage number determining means.
By using the determination result of the memory number determining means, the gaming ball is launched by the launching means, and the launching promoting means for urging the player to enter the ball entering means is provided. A game machine to play.

Images